53i, 55i, 57i,, 57ii CCT
SIP IP PHONE
41-001160-00
Rev 01
Administrator Guide
Release 2.0
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Software License Agreement
Aastra Telecom Inc., hereinafter known as "Seller", grants to Customer a
personal, worldwide, non-transferable, non-sublicenseable and non-exclusive,
restricted use license to use Software in object form solely with the Equipment for
which the Software was intended. This Product may integrate programs, licensed
to Aastra by third party Suppliers, for distribution under the terms of this
agreement. These programs are confidential and proprietary, and are protected as
such by copyright law as unpublished works and by international treaties to the
fullest extent under the applicable law of the jurisdiction of the Customer. In
addition, these confidential and proprietary programs are works conforming to the
requirements of Section 401 of title 17 of the United States Code. Customer shall
not disclose to any third party such confidential and proprietary programs and
information and shall not export licensed Software to any country except in
accordance with United States Export laws and restrictions.
Customer agrees to not reverse engineer, decompile, disassemble or display
Software furnished in object code form. Customer shall not modify, copy,
reproduce, distribute, transcribe, translate or reduce to electronic medium or
machine readable form or language, derive source code without the express
written consent of the Seller and its Suppliers, or disseminate or otherwise
disclose the Software to third parties. All Software furnished hereunder (whether
or not part of firmware), including all copies thereof, are and shall remain the
property of Seller and its Suppliers and are subject to the terms and conditions of
this agreement. All rights reserved.
Customer's use of this software shall be deemed to reflect Customer's agreement
to abide by the terms and conditions contained herein. Removal or modification
of trademarks, copyright notices, logos, etc., or the use of Software on any
Equipment other than that for which it is intended, or any other material breach of
this Agreement, shall automatically terminate this license. If this Agreement is
terminated for breach, Customer shall immediately discontinue use and destroy or
return to Seller all licensed software and other confidential or proprietary
information of Seller. In no event shall Seller or its suppliers or licensors be liable
for any damages whatsoever (including without limitation, damages for loss of
business profits, business interruption, loss of business information, other
pecuniary loss, or consequential damages) arising out of the use of or inability to
use the software, even if Seller has been advised of the possibility of such
damages.
41-001160-00, Rev 01 Release 2.0
iii
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Contents
Preface
About this guide ...............................................................................................................xiii
.
.
.
Audience ...................................................................................................................xiii
.
.
Chapter 1
Overview
.
Firmware Installation Information ...................................................................................1-4
Firmware and Configuration Files ...................................................................................1-7
Configuration File Precedence .................................................................................1-8
.
.
.
.
.
Chapter 2
Configuration Interface Methods
.
About this chapter ...........................................................................................................2-1
IP Phone UI ....................................................................................................................2-2
Options Key ..............................................................................................................2-4
Aastra Web UI ................................................................................................................2-7
Description ...............................................................................................................2-7
.
.
.
.
.
41-001160-00, Rev 01 Release 2.0
v
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
HTTP/HTTPS Support .............................................................................................2-7
Using HTTPS via the Aastra Web UI .......................................................................2-9
Accessing the Aastra Web UI ................................................................................2-10
Operation ...............................................................................................................2-12
Basic Settings ........................................................................................................2-13
Advanced Settings .................................................................................................2-13
.
.
.
.
.
Chapter 3
.
Administrator Level Options ...........................................................................................3-3
IP Phone UI Options ................................................................................................3-3
Aastra Web UI Options ............................................................................................3-4
Basic Preferences (Aastra Web UI) .......................................................................3-10
Line Settings ..........................................................................................................3-20
Configuration Server Settings ................................................................................3-23
Firmware Update Features ....................................................................................3-25
.
.
.
.
.
Chapter 4
Network Configuration of the IP Phones
.
Overview .........................................................................................................................4-3
Basic Network Settings ...................................................................................................4-4
DHCP .......................................................................................................................4-4
Configuring Network Settings Manually ...................................................................4-7
.
.
.
.
Configuring Ethernet Ports 0 and 1 Negotiation .......................................................4-9
.
vi
41-001160-00, Rev 01 Release 2.0
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Configuration Server Protocol ......................................................................................4-13
Advanced Network Settings .........................................................................................4-18
Network Address Translation (NAT) ......................................................................4-18
Configuring Nortel NAT (optional) ..........................................................................4-20
Configuring NAT Address and Port (optional) ........................................................4-22
HTTPS Client/Server Configuration .......................................................................4-24
Virtual LAN (optional) .............................................................................................4-31
Network Time Servers ............................................................................................4-41
.
.
.
.
.
Chapter 5
Operational IP Phone Features
.
Administrator Passwords .........................................................................................5-8
Hard Keys ..............................................................................................................5-18
Softkeys/Programmable Keys/Feature Keys .........................................................5-21
Display DTMF Digits ..............................................................................................5-39
Busy Lamp Field (BLF) ..........................................................................................5-41
BLF Subscription Period ........................................................................................5-48
Directed Call Pickup (BLF or XML Call Interception) .............................................5-50
Do Not Disturb (DND) ............................................................................................5-65
Bridged Line Appearance (BLA) (57i/57i CT/53i only) ...........................................5-67
Park Calls/Pick Up Parked Calls ............................................................................5-73
Last Call Return (lcr) (Sylantro Servers only) .........................................................5-86
.
.
.
.
.
41-001160-00, Rev 01 Release 2.0
vii
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Callers List .............................................................................................................5-96
Directory List ........................................................................................................5-103
SIP Local Dial Plan ..............................................................................................5-137
Incoming/Outgoing Intercom with Auto-Answer ...................................................5-142
Audio Transmit and Receive Gain Adjustments ...................................................5-146
Ring Tones and Tone Sets ...................................................................................5-148
Stuttered Dial Tone ...............................................................................................5-160
Call Waiting Tone .................................................................................................5-162
.
.
.
.
.
Chapter 6
.
SIP Message Sequence for Blind Transfer ..............................................................6-5
Boot Sequence Recovery Mode ..............................................................................6-7
Single Call Restriction (57i CT only) ........................................................................6-9
.
.
.
.
.
Chapter 7
Encryption and the IP Phone
.
About this chapter ...........................................................................................................7-1
Encryption and the IP Phone ..........................................................................................7-2
Configuration File Encryption Method ......................................................................7-2
Procedure to Encrypt/Decrypt Configuration Files ...................................................7-3
.
.
.
.
viii
41-001160-00, Rev 01 Release 2.0
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 8
Firmware Upgrade
.
Upgrading the Firmware .................................................................................................8-2
Manual Firmware and Configuration File Update .....................................................8-4
Automatic Update (auto-resync) ..............................................................................8-6
.
.
.
.
.
Chapter 9
Troubleshooting
.
Troubleshooting Solutions ..............................................................................................9-8
Why does my phone display “Application missing”? ................................................9-8
Why does my phone display the “No Service” message? ........................................9-9
Why is my phone not receiving the TFTP IP address from the DHCP Server? .....9-10
How do I set the IP phone to factory default? ........................................................9-13
.
.
.
.
.
Appendix A
Configuration Parameters
.
About this appendix ....................................................................................................... A-1
Network Settings ..................................................................................................... A-5
Password Settings .................................................................................................. A-8
Configuration Server Settings ............................................................................... A-11
Network Address Translation (NAT) Settings ........................................................ A-18
HTTPS Client and Server Settings ........................................................................ A-20
UPnP Settings ....................................................................................................... A-22
Virtual Local Area Network (VLAN) Settings ......................................................... A-24
.
.
.
.
.
41-001160-00, Rev 01 Release 2.0
ix
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Type of Service (ToS)/DSCP Settings ................................................................... A-27
SIP Local Dial Plan Settings ................................................................................. A-37
SIP Basic, Global Settings .................................................................................... A-40
Advanced SIP Settings ......................................................................................... A-58
Silence Suppression Settings ............................................................................... A-66
Callers List Settings .............................................................................................. A-69
Ring Tone and Tone Set Global Settings .............................................................. A-77
Ring Tone Per-Line Settings ................................................................................. A-78
Stuttered Dial Tone Setting ................................................................................... A-79
Call Waiting Tone Setting ...................................................................................... A-79
Language Settings ................................................................................................ A-86
Language Pack Settings ....................................................................................... A-87
Suppress DTMF Playback Setting ........................................................................ A-96
Display DTMF Digits Setting ................................................................................. A-97
BLF Subscription Period Settings ....................................................................... A-105
Hard Key Parameters ................................................................................................ A-106
.
.
Softkey Settings for 55i, 57i, 57i CT .................................................................... A-110
.
Programmable Key Settings for 53i and 55i ........................................................ A-117
Top Softkey Settings for 57i and 57i CT .............................................................. A-121
.
.
x
41-001160-00, Rev 01 Release 2.0
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Handset Feature Key Settings for the 57i CT ..................................................... A-126
.
and 560M (57i/57i CT) ........................................................................................ A-128
.
.
.
.
.
Locking Softkeys and Programmable Keys ........................................................ A-131
Advanced Operational Parameters ........................................................................... A-134
MAC Address/Line Number ............................................................................... A-134
Update Caller ID Setting. .................................................................................... A-136
Boot Sequence Recovery Mode. ........................................................................ A-136
Single Call Restriction ......................................................................................... A-137
Troubleshooting Parameters ..................................................................................... A-138
Log Settings ........................................................................................................ A-138
Appendix B
.
About this appendix ....................................................................................................... B-1
.
.
.
Appendix C
.
About this appendix .......................................................................................................C-1
IP Phone at the Asterisk IP PBX ...................................................................................C-2
.
.
Appendix D
Sample Configuration Files
.
About this appendix .......................................................................................................D-1
.
Sample Configuration Files ...........................................................................................D-2
.
57i Sample Configuration File .................................................................................D-2
.
57i CT Sample Configuration File .........................................................................D-12
53i Sample Configuration File ...............................................................................D-29
.
.
41-001160-00, Rev 01 Release 2.0
xi
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Appendix E
Sample BLF Softkey Settings
.
.
Sample BLF Softkey Settings ........................................................................................ E-2
.
.
.
Appendix F
.
.
.
Appendix G
Creating an XML Application
.
Creating Custom Softkeys ......................................................................................G-5
Text Screen Object (Text Screens) ..........................................................................G-8
Directory Object (Directory List Screen) (57i only) ................................................G-21
XML Image Objects (55i, 57i/57i CT only) ............................................................G-31
Attributes/Options to Use with XML Objects .........................................................G-41
HTTP Post .............................................................................................................G-45
XML Schema File ..................................................................................................G-48
.
.
.
.
Limited Warranty
.
xii
41-001160-00, Rev 01 Release 2.0
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Preface
About this guide
Introduction
This SIP IP Phone Administrator Guide provides information on the basic
network setup, operation, and maintenance of the IP phones, Models 53i, 55i, 57i,
and 57i Cordless (57i CT). It also includes details on the functioning and
configuration of the IP phones.
Note: Features, characteristics, requirements, and configuration that are
specific to a particular IP phone model are indicated where required in
this guide.
Audience
This guide is for network administrators, system administrators, developers and
partners who need to understand how to operate and maintain the IP phone on a
SIP network. It also provides some user-specific information.
This guide contains information that is at a technical level, more suitable for
system or network administrators. Prior knowledge of IP Telephony concepts is
recommended.
41-001160-00, Rev 01 Release 2.0
xiii
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
IP Phone Administrator Guide
About this guide
Other Documentation
The IP phone documentation consists of:
•
•
<Model-specific> SIP IP Phone Installation Guide – contains installation
and set-up instructions, information on general features and functions, and
basic options list customization. Included with the phone.
Model 53i, 55i, 57i, 57i CT SIP IP Phone Administrator Guide – explains
how to set the phone up on the network, as well as advanced configuration
instructions for the SIP IP phone. This guide contains information that is at a
technical level more suitable for a system or network administrator.
•
<Model-specific> SIP IP Phone User Guides – explains the most commonly
used features and functions for an end user.
This Administrator Guide complements the Aastra product-specific Installation
Guide and the Aastra product-specific User Guide.
xiv
41-001160-00, Rev 01 Release 2.0
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapters and appendixes in this guide
This guide contains the following chapters and appendixes:
For
Go to
An overview of the IP Phone firmware installation information
IP Phone interface methods
Chapter 1
Chapter 2
Chapter 3
Chapter 4
Chapter 5
Chapter 6
Chapter 7
Chapter 8
Chapter 9
Appendix A
Appendix B
Appendix C
Appendix D
Appendix E
Appendix F
Appendix G
Administrator option information
Configuring the IP Phone
Operational information about the IP Phones
Advanced operational information about the IP Phones
Encryption information
Firmware upgrade information
Troubleshooting solutions
Configuration parameters
Configuration server setup
Configuring the IP Phones at the Asterisk PBX
Sample configuration files
Sample BLF softkey settings
Sample multiple proxy server configuration
Creating XML applications
41-001160-00, Rev 01 Release 2.0
xv
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 1
Overview
About this chapter
Introduction
This chapter briefly describes the IP Phone Models, and provides information
about installing the IP phone firmware. It also describes the firmware and
configuration files that the IP phone models use for operation..
Topics
Topic
Page
IP Phone Models
page 1-2
page 1-4
page 1-7
Firmware Installation Information
Firmware and Configuration Files
41-001160-00, Rev 01 Release 2.0
1-1
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
IP Phone Administrator Guide
IP Phone Models
IP Phone Models
Description
The IP Phone Models 53i, 55i, 57i, and 57i CT communicate over an IP network
allowing you to receive and place calls in the same manner as a regular business
telephone.
All phone models support the Session Initiation Protocol (SIP). The 57i CT offers
the base phone along with a cordless extension.
References
For more information about the features and installation requirements, see the
SIP IP Phone Installation Guide for your specific model..
The following illustration shows the types of IP Phone Models.
53i
55i
3-Line LCD Display,
3-Line LCD Display,
6 Programmable Keys
6 Programmable Keys,
6 Softkeys
57i CT
(includes handset)
57i
11-Line LCD Display,
12 Softkeys
12 Softkeys.
15 Feature Keys on Handset
1-2
41-001160-00, Rev 01 Release 2.0
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Overview
IP Phone Models
The following illustration shows IP phone optional accessories for the 55i, 57i,
and 57i CT IP phones.
560EM Expansion Module
for 57i, and 57i CT
536EM Expansion Module
for 55i, 57i, and 57i CT
The 536EM module adds 36 additional softkeys to the IP phone models 55i, 57i,
and 57i CT. The 536EM provides paper labels for each softkey. Up to 3 modules
can be piggy-backed to provide up to 108 additional softkeys for the phone.
The 560EM module adds 60 additional softekeys to the IP phone models 57i and
57i CT (using the 3 function keys on the bottom right of the unit). The 560EM
module provides an LCD display for display softkey labels. Up to 3 modules can
be piggy-backed to provide up to 180 additional softkeys for the phone.
Reference
For more information about installing and using the expansion modules, see your
phone-specific Installation Guide and User Guide.
41-001160-00, Rev 01 Release 2.0
1-3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
IP Phone Administrator Guide
Firmware Installation Information
Firmware Installation Information
Description
The firmware setup and installation for the IP phone can be done using any of the
following:
•
•
Phone keypad menu (Phone UI)
Aastra Web-based user interface (Aastra Web UI)
When the IP phone is initialized for the first time, DHCP is enabled by default.
Depending on the type of configuration server setup you may have, the IP phone
may download a firmware version automatically, or you may need to download it
manually.
Installation Considerations
network:
•
If you are planning on using dynamic IP addresses, make sure a DHCP server
is enabled and running on your network.
•
If you are not planning on using dynamic IP addresses, see Chapter 4, the
section, “Configuring Network Settings Manually” on page 4-7 for manually
setting up an IP address.
To install the IP phone hardware and cabling, refer to the model-specific
SIP IP Phone Installation Guide.
1-4
41-001160-00, Rev 01 Release 2.0
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Overview
Firmware Installation Information
Installation Requirements
The following are general requirements for setting up and using your SIP IP
phone:
•
A SIP-based IP PBX system or network installed and running with a number
created for the new IP phone.
•
•
Adherence to SIP standard RFC 3261.
Access to a configuration server where you can store the firmware image and
configuration files.
•
The IP phone must be configured for a specific type of protocol to use. TFTP
is enabled by default. You can configure the following protocols on the IP
phone:
— TFTP (Trivial File Transfer Protocol)
— FTP (File Transfer Protocol)
— HTTP (Hypertext Transfer Protocol)
— HTTPS (Hypertext Transfer Protocol over Secure Socket Layer)
Note: If you set TFTP, the configuration server must be able to accept
connections anonymously.
•
•
•
A 802.3af Ethernet/Fast Ethernet LAN
Category 5/5e straight through cabling
Power over Ethernet (PoE) inline power injector (optional accessory –
necessary only if your network provides no inline power and if you do not use
the IP Phone’s power adapter).
•
•
Power adapter (included for models 53i, 55i, and 57i, and 57i CT).
Service provider must support 55i SIP IP phone.
41-001160-00, Rev 01 Release 2.0
1-5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
IP Phone Administrator Guide
Firmware Installation Information
Configuration Server Requirement
A basic requirement for setting up the IP phone is to have a configuration server.
The configuration server allows you to:
•
•
•
Store the firmware images that you need to download to your IP phone.
Stores configuration files for the IP phone
Stores the software when performing software upgrades to the IP phone
To set the protocol for your configuration server, see Chapter 4, the section,
“Configuring the Configuration Server Protocol” on page 4-13.
For setting up your configuration server, see Appendix B, “Configuration Server
Setup.”
1-6
41-001160-00, Rev 01 Release 2.0
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Overview
Firmware and Configuration Files
Firmware and Configuration Files
Description
When the IP phone is initialized for the first time, DHCP is enabled by default.
Depending on the type of configuration server setup you may have, the IP phone
may download a firmware version and configuration files automatically, or you
may need to download it manually.
Note: Automatic download is dependant on your configuration server
setup.
The firmware consists of a single file called:
•
<phone model>.st
The configuration files consist of two files called:
•
aastra.cfg
•
<mac>.cfg
The following table provides the firmware for each Aastra IP phone model.
IP Phone
Model
Associated
Firmware
53i
53i.st2
55i
55i.st2
57i
57i.st2
57i CT
57i Cordless.st2
41-001160-00, Rev 01 Release 2.0
1-7
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
IP Phone Administrator Guide
Firmware and Configuration Files
Configuration File Precedence
Aastra IP phones can accept two sources of configuration data:
•
•
The server configuration most recently downloaded/cached from the
configuration server files, aastra.cfg/<mac>.cfg (or the aastra.tuz/<mac>.tuz
encrypted equivalents).
Local configuration changes stored on the phone that were entered using
either the IP phone UI or the Aastra Web UI
In the event of conflicting values set by the different methods, values are applied
in the following sequence:
1. Default values hard-coded in the phone software
2. Values downloaded from the configuration server
3. Values stored locally on the phone
The last values to be applied to the phone configuration are the values that take
effect.
For example, if a parameter’s value is set in the local configuration (via Aastra
Web UI or IP phone UI) and the same value was also set differently in one of the
<mac>.cfg/aastra.cfg files on the configuration server, the local configuration
value is the value that takes effect because that is the last value applied to the
configuration.
Configuration Methods
You can use the following to setup and configure the IP phone:
•
•
•
IP phone UI
Aastra Web UI
Configuration files
Model 53i has 6 softkeys available for programming. Models 55i, 57i, and 57i CT
have 12 softkeys available for programming (programmable up to 20 functions).
1-8
41-001160-00, Rev 01 Release 2.0
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Overview
Firmware and Configuration Files
References
For setting up and configuring the IP phone using either the IP phone UI, the
Aastra Web UI, or the configuration files, see Chapter 4, “Network Configuration
of the IP Phones.”
For information about the softkey and programmable key parameters, see
Appendix A, the section, “Softkey/Programmable Key/Feature Key Parameters”
on page A-108.
Installing the Firmware/Configuration Files
files.
Step Action
1
If DHCP is disabled, manually enter the configuration server’s IP address. For details on setting
DHCP, see Chapter 4, the section “DHCP” on page 4-4.
2
Copy the firmware file <phone model>.st to the root directory of the configuration server. The IP
phone accepts the new firmware file only if it is different from the firmware currently loaded on the IP
phone.
Note: The <phone model> attribute is the IP phone model (i.e., 53i.st, 55i.st)
3
4
Copy the Aastra configuration files (aastra.cfg and <mac>.cfg) to the root directory of the
configuration server.
Note: The <mac> attribute represents the actual MAC address of your phone.
(i.e., 00085D030996.cfg).
Note: Restart tthe IP phone as described in the section, “How to Restart the IP Phone” on page .
41-001160-00, Rev 01 Release 2.0
1-9
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 2
Configuration Interface Methods
About this chapter
Introduction
This chapter describes the methods you can use to configure the IP phones..
Note: Features, characteristics, requirements, and configuration that are
specific to a particular IP phone model are indicated where required in
this guide.
Topics
Topic
Page
IP Phone UI
page 2-2
page 2-7
Aastra Web UI
41-001160-00, Rev 01 Release 2.0
2-1
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
IP Phone Administrator Guide
IP Phone UI
IP Phone UI
The IP Phone User Interface (UI) provides an easy way to access features and
functions for using and configuring the IP phone. You can use the following
hardkeys to perform specific functions and display information to the phone’s
LCD display on all phone models:
IP Phone Hard Key
Goodbye Key
Looks Like This:
Options Key
Hold Key
Redial Key
Volume Control Keys
Line/Call Appearance Keys
(See your model-specific User
Guide for applicable Line/Call
Appearance keys for your phone
model.)
Speakerphone/Headset Key
2-2
41-001160-00, Rev 01 Release 2.0
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Configuration Interface Methods
IP Phone UI
IP Phone Hard Key
Looks Like This:
Mute Key
Navigation Keys
Softkeys/Programmable
Keys
Softkeys and programmable keys
vary for each phone model. See
your model-specific User Guide
for applicable keys. For setting
functions on the softkeys/
programmable keys, see Chapter
5, the section, “Softkeys/
Programmable Keys/Feature
Keys” on page 5-21
access the Directory List and Callers List, and initiate transfers and conference
calls.
Reference
For more information about using the hard keys, see Chapter 5, the section, “Hard
Keys” on page 5-18. For more information about the softkeys/programmable
keys, see Chapter 5, the section, “Softkeys/Programmable Keys/Feature Keys” on
page 5-21.
41-001160-00, Rev 01 Release 2.0
2-3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
IP Phone Administrator Guide
IP Phone UI
Options Key
The Options key allows you to access the "Options List" on the IP phone.
Accessible options in this list are for both user and administrator use. An
administrator must enter a password for administrator options.
Note: An administrator has the option of enabling and disabling the use
of password protection in the IP phone UI. This is configurable using the
configuration files only. For more information about this feature, see
Appendix A, the section “Password Settings” on page A-8.
This document describes the administrator options only. For a description of the
user options in the "Options List", see your model-specific SIP IP Phone User
Guide.
2-4
41-001160-00, Rev 01 Release 2.0
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Configuration Interface Methods
IP Phone UI
The following illustration indicates the location of the Options Key on each phone
model.
Options Key
53i
55i
Options Key
57i CT Handset
57i/57i CT
41-001160-00, Rev 01 Release 2.0
2-5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
IP Phone Administrator Guide
IP Phone UI
Using the Options Key
From the 53i, 55i, or 57i/57i CT:
Step Action
1
2
3
Press
on the phone to enter the Options List.
Use the r and s to scroll through the list of options.
To select an option, press the Show softkey, press 4 , or select the number on the keypad that
corresponds to the option.
4
5
6
Use the Change softkey to change a selected option.
Press the Done softkey at any time to save the changes and exit the current option.
Press the Cancel softkey, press 3 , or press
at any time to exit without saving changes.
From the 57i CT handset:
Step Action
1
2
3
4
Press the  key to enter the Options List when the phone is not in use.
Use the scroll keys  and Ï to scroll the options.
To select and change an option, press the r keys.
Press y when done.
2-6
41-001160-00, Rev 01 Release 2.0
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Configuration Interface Methods
Aastra Web UI
Aastra Web UI
Description
An administrator can setup and configure the IP phone using the Aastra Web UI.
The Aastra Web UI supports Internet Explorer and Gecko engine-based browsers
like Firefox, Mozilla or Netscape.
HTTP/HTTPS Support
The Aastra Web UI supports both Hypertext Transfer Protocol (HTTP) and
Hypertext Transfer Protocol over Secure Socket Layer (HTTPS) client and server
protocols.
HTTP is the set of rules for transferring files (text, graphic images, sound,
video, and other multimedia files) over the Internet. When you open your
Web browser, you are indirectly making use of HTTP. HTTP is an
application protocol that runs on top of the TCP/IP suite of protocols (the
foundation protocols for the Internet).
HTTPS is a Web protocol that encrypts and decrypts user page requests as well as
the pages that are returned by the Web server. HTTPS uses Secure Socket Layer
(SSL) or Transport Layer Security (TLS) as a sublayer under its regular HTTP
application layering. SSL is a commonly-used protocol for managing the
security of a message transmission on the Internet. It uses a 40-bit key size
for the RC4 stream encryption algorithm, which is considered an adequate degree
of encryption for commercial exchange. TLS is a protocol that ensures privacy
between communicating applications and their users on the Internet. When a
server and client communicate, TLS ensures that no third party may eavesdrop or
tamper with any message. TLS is the successor to SSL.
Note: HTTPS uses port 443 instead of HTTP port 80 in its interactions
with the TCP/IP lower layer.
41-001160-00, Rev 01 Release 2.0
2-7
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
IP Phone Administrator Guide
Aastra Web UI
HTTP/HTTPS Client and Server Support
The Aastra IP phones allow for HTTP request processing and associated data
transfers to perform over a secure connection (HTTPS). The IP phones support
the following:
•
Transfer of firmware images, configuration files, script files, and web page
content over a secure connection.
•
•
Web browser phone configuration over a secure connection.
TLS 1.0or SSL 3.0 methods for both client and server
HTTPS Client
When an HTTPS client opens and closes its TCP socket, the SSL software
respectively handshakes upon opening and disconnects upon closing from the
HTTPS server. The main HTTPS client functions are:
•
•
Downloading of configuration files and firmware images.
Downloading of script files based on an “HTTPS://” URL supplied by a
softkey definition.
HTTPS Server
The HTTPS server provides HTTP functionality over secure connections. It
coexists with the HTTP server but has its own set of tasks. The main HTTPS
server functions are:
•
•
Delivery of web page content to a browser client over a secure connection.
Execution of HTTP GET and POST requests received over a secure
connection.
2-8
41-001160-00, Rev 01 Release 2.0
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Configuration Interface Methods
Aastra Web UI
Using HTTPS via the Aastra Web UI
HTTPS is enabled by default on the IP phones. When you open a browser window
and enter an IP address or host name for a phone using HTTP, a server redirection
occurs which automatically converts an HTTP connection to an HTTPS
connection. After the redirection, a “Security Alert” certificate window displays
alerting the user that information exchanged with the phone cannot be viewed or
changed by others. Accepting the certificate then forwards you to the phone’s Web
UI.
Notes:
1. The private key and certificate generate outside the phone and embed
in the phone firmware for use by the HTTPS server during the SSL
handshake.
2. Using the configuration files, the IP phone UI, or the Aastra Web UI,
you can configure the following regarding HTTPS:
- Specify HTTPS security client method to use (TLS 1.0 or SSL 3.0)
- Enable or disable HTTP to HTTPS server redirect function
- HTTPS server blocking of XML HTTP POSTS to the phone
Reference
For more information on configuring the HTTPS protocol, see Chapter 4,
“Network Configuration of the IP Phones”, the sections:
•
•
“Configuring the Configuration Server Protocol” on page 4-13
“HTTPS Client/Server Configuration” on page 4-24
41-001160-00, Rev 01 Release 2.0
2-9
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Accessing the Aastra Web UI
Use the following procedure to access the Aastra Web UI.
Step Action
1 Open your web browser and enter the phone’s IP address or host name into the address field.
If the browser is using HTTP, the following redirect screen displays, followed by the “Security Alert”
window. This process redirects HTTP to use HTTPS for a more secure connection.
2
Click YES to accept the certificate.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Configuration Interface Methods
Aastra Web UI
Step Action
3
At the prompt, enter your username and password and click
.
The Network Status window displays for the IP phone you are accessing.
Note: For an administrator, the default user name is “admin” and the password is “22222”.
For a user, the default user name is “user” and the password field is left blank.
4
You can logout of the Aastra Web UI at any time by clicking LOGOFF.
The following illustration is an example of a Network Status screen for the 55i IP
phone.
IP address or
host name
55i Network
Status Window
Logout button
The following categories display in the side menu of the Aastra Web UI: Status,
Operation, Basic Settings, Advanced Settings.
41-001160-00, Rev 01 Release 2.0
2-11
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
IP Phone Administrator Guide
Aastra Web UI
Status
The Status section displays the network status and the MAC address of the IP
phone. It also displays hardware and firmware information about the IP phone.
The information in the Network Status window is read-only.
Operation
The Operation section provides the following options:
Heading
Description
User Password
Phone Lock
Allows you to change user password.
Allows you to assign an emergency dial plan to the phone,
lock the phone to prevent any changes to the phone and to
prevent use of the phone, and reset the user password.
Programmable Keys
Softkeys and XML
53i - 6 Top programmable keys (up to 6 programmable
functions)
55i - 6 Top programmable hard keys (up to 6 programmable
functions)
55i - 6 Bottom programmable state-based softkeys (up to 20
programmable functions)
57i/57i CT - 6 Top programmable, static softkeys (up to 10
programmable functions; and 6 bottom programmable
state-based softkeys (up to 20 programmable functions)
Handset Keys
Allows you to configure up to 15 softkeys on the handset.
(57i CT only)
Directory
Allows you to copy the Callers List and Directory List from
your IP phone to your PC.
Reset
Allows you to restart the IP phone when required.
2-12
41-001160-00, Rev 01 Release 2.0
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Configuration Interface Methods
Aastra Web UI
Basic Settings
The Basic Settings section provides the following options:
Heading
Description
Preferences
Allows you to set General specifications on the IP phone
such as, local dial plan, dial plan terminator, digit timeout,
park and pickup call settings, and enable/disable suppress
DTMF playback, display DTMF digits, play call waiting tone,
and stuttered dial tone. This section also allows you to set
intercom settings, map conference and redial keys, set ring
tones, set priority alerts, enable directed call pickup, set
time/date settings, and load language packs.
Call Forward
Allows you to set a phone number destination for where you
want calls forwarded.
Advanced Settings
The Advanced Settings section provides the following options:
Heading
Network
Description
Allows you to set basic network settings such as, DHCP, IP
address, DNS, Ethernet Port 0 and Port 1, and advanced
network settings such as, Network Address Translation
(NAT), time servers, and enable/disale HTTPS. The
Network subcategory also allows you to set Type of Service
(ToS)/Differentiated Services Code Point (DSCP), and
VLAN settings.
Global SIP
Allows you to set basic and advanced global SIP settings,
and Real-time Transport Protocol (RTP) settings that apply
to all lines on the IP phone.
Lines 1 through 9
Action URI
Allows you to set SIP authentication settings, SIP network
settings, and RTP settings to use on a specific line.
Allows an administrator to specify a uniform resource
identifier (URI) that triggers a GET when certain events
occur.
Configuration Server
Allows you to set the protocol to use on the configuration
server (TFTP (default), FTP, HTTP, or HTTPS), configure
automatic firmware and configuration file updates, enable/
disable auto-resync, and assign an XML push server list.
41-001160-00, Rev 01 Release 2.0
2-13
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
IP Phone Administrator Guide
Aastra Web UI
Heading
Description
Firmware Update
Allows you to manually perform a firmware update on the IP
phone from the configuration server.
Troubleshooting
Allows you to perform troubleshooting tasks whereby the
results can be forwarded to Aastra Technical Support for
analyzing and troubleshooting
Enabling/Disabling the Aastra Web UI
The Aastra Web UI is enabled by default on the IP phones. A System
Administrator can disable the Aastra Web UI on a single phone or on all phones if
required using the configuration files. Use the following procedure to enable and
disable the Aastra Web UI.
To disable the Aastra Web UI:
Configuration Files
Step Action
1
Using a text-based editing application, open the <mac>.cfg file if you want to disable the Web UI on a
single phone. Open the aastra.cfg file to disable the Web UI on all phones
2
Enter the following parameter:
web interface enabled: 0
Note: A value of zero (0) disables the Web UI on the phone. A value of 1 enables the Web UI.
Save the changes and close the <mac>.cfg or the aastra.cfg file.
3
4
Restart the phone to apply the changes. The Aastra Web UI is disabled for a single IP phone or for all
phones.
2-14
41-001160-00, Rev 01 Release 2.0
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 3
Administrator Options
About this chapter
Introduction
The IP phones provide specific options on the IP Phone UI that allow an
For all models, you can also use the Aastra Web UI and the configuration files to
enter and change values.
Note: Specific options are configurable only via the IP Phone UI, and/or
Aastra Web UI, and/or configuration files. See Chapter 4, “Network
Configuration of the IP Phones” for more information about configuring
each option.
This chapter provides information about the Administrator options.
Topics
Topic
Page
Administrator Level Options
IP Phone UI Options
Aastra Web UI Options
Configuration File Options
Phone Status
page 3-3
page 3-3
page 3-4
page 3-4
page 3-6
page 3-10
page 3-12
page 3-20
Basic Preferences (Aastra Web UI)
Network
Line Settings
41-001160-00, Rev 01 Release 2.0
3-1
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
IP Phone Administrator Guide
About this chapter
Topic
Page
Configuration Server Settings
Firmware Update Features
page 3-23
page 3-25
3-2
41-001160-00, Rev 01 Release 2.0
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Administrator Options
Administrator Level Options
Administrator Level Options
Description
There are specific options available only to an Administrator on the IP phones.
List” using a default password of "22222".
Note: An administrator has the option of enabling and disabling the use
of password protection in the IP phone UI. This is configurable using the
configuration files only. For more information about this feature, see
Appendix A, the section “Password Settings” on page A-8.
For the Aastra Web UI, you can access the Administrator options by entering a
user name and password. The default user name is "admin" and the default
password is "22222".
IP Phone UI Options
The following are administrator options in the "Options List" on the IP phone UI:
•
•
•
Phone Status->Factory Default
Network
SIP Settings
For information about all other user options in the “Options List”, see your
model-specific SIP IP Phone User Guide.
For procedures on configuring the IP phone via the IP phone UI, see Chapter 4,
“Network Configuration of the IP Phones.”
41-001160-00, Rev 01 Release 2.0
3-3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
IP Phone Administrator Guide
Administrator Level Options
Aastra Web UI Options
The following are administrator options in the Aastra Web UI:
•
•
Restore to Factory Defaults
Basic Settings (Local Dial Plan, Dial PlanTerminator, Digit Timeout,
Outgoing Intercom Settings, Key Mapping, Ring Tones, Priority Alert,
Directed Call Pickup)
•
•
•
•
•
•
Network
Global SIP
Line Settings
Configuration Server
Firmware Update
Troubleshooting
For information about all other user options, see your model-specific
SIP IP Phone User Guide.
For procedures on configuring the IP phone via the Aastra Web UI, see Chapter 4,
“Network Configuration of the IP Phones.”
Configuration File Options
A system administrator can enter specific parameters in the configuration files to
configure the IP phones. All parameters in configuration files can only be set by
an administrator.
Reference
For a description of each configuration file parameter, see Appendix A,
“Configuration Parameters.”
3-4
41-001160-00, Rev 01 Release 2.0
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Administrator Options
Administrator Level Options
Using the Configuration Files
When you use the configuration files to configure the IP phones, you must use a
text-based editing application to open the configuration file (aastra.cfg or
<mac>.cfg).
Use the following procedure to add, delete, or change parameters and their
settings in the configuration files.
Note: Apply this procedure wherever this Administrator Guide refers to
configuring parameters using the configuration files.
Configuration files
Step Action
1
Using a text-based editing application, open the configuration file for the phone, for which you want to
configure the directory list (either aastra.cfg, <mac>.cfg or both).
2
Enter the required configuration parameters followed by the applicable value. For example,
directory 1: company_directory
directory 2: my_personal_directory
3
4
Save the changes and close the configuration file.
If the parameter requires the phone to be restarted in order for it to take affect, use the
IP Phone UI or the Aastra Web UI to restart the phone.
41-001160-00, Rev 01 Release 2.0
3-5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
IP Phone Administrator Guide
Administrator Level Options
Phone Status
The Phone Status on the IP Phone displays the network status and firmware
version of the IP phone. This option also allows you to restart the phone, and set
the phone to factory defaults.
You can display phone status and reset the phone using the IP phone UI or the
Aastra Web UI.
Phone Status via IP Phone UI
In the IP phone UI, the Phone Status options are available to the user and the
administrator and do not require a password entry. However, the "Factory
Default" option is for administrator use only.
The following information displays for phone status on the IP phone UI:
Phone Status Screen for 53i Phone
Phone Status
1. Network Port 1
2. Network Port 2
2. Firmware Version
3. Restart Phone
4. Restore Defaults
=Enter
=Next
Phone Status Screen for 55i, 57i, and 57i CT Phones
Phone Status
1. Network Status
2. Firmware Version
3. Restart Phone
4. Factory Default
Show
Done
3-6
41-001160-00, Rev 01 Release 2.0
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Administrator Options
Administrator Level Options
•
•
•
Network Port 1 (53i)
Displays the IP address on Port 1 of the phone.
Network Port 2 (53i)
Displays the IP address on Port 2 of the phone.
Network Status (55i, 57i, and 57i CT)
Displays the network status of the Ethernet ports at the back of the phone. You
can also view the phone’s IP and MAC addresses. These fields are read-only.
•
•
Firmware Version
Displays information about the firmware that is currently installed on the IP
phone.
Restart Phone
This option lets you reboot the phone. A reset may be necessary when:
-
-
-
There is a change in your network, OR
To re-load modified configuration files, OR
If the settings for the IP phone on the IP PBX system have been modified.
•
Restore Defaults (53i) or Factory Default (55i, 57i, 57i CT) (admin only)
This option lets you reset the phone to its factory default settings. There are
two options in setting the factory defaults on the IP phone:
-All Defaults
-Config Default
The "All Defaults" option resets the factory defaults for all of the settings in
the aastra.cfg, <mac>.cfg, and local configuration. Performing this option
results in losing all user-modified settings.
The "Config Default" option resets the settings on the local IP phone
configuration only.
41-001160-00, Rev 01 Release 2.0
3-7
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
IP Phone Administrator Guide
Administrator Level Options
Phone Status via Aastra Web UI
In the Aastra Web UI, the "Network Attributes", "Hardware Information", and
"Firmware Information" options are read only and available for viewing by the
user and administrator. Resetting the IP phone to factory defaults using the Aastra
Web UI (Operation->Reset->Current Settings) is available to the administrator
only.
The following information displays for phone status in the Aastra Web UI at the
location Status->System Information. This information is available to the user
and the administrator as read-only.
•
Network Attributes
Displays the network status of the Ethernet ports at the back of the phone. You
can also view the phone’s IP and MAC addresses. Information in this field
includes Link State, Negotiation, Speed, and Duplex for Port 0 and Port 1.
•
•
Hardware Information
Displays the current IP phone platform and the revision number.
Firmware Information
Displays information about the firmware that is currently installed on the IP
phone. Information in this field includes Firmware Version, Firmware Release
Code, Boot Version, Release Date/Time.
3-8
41-001160-00, Rev 01 Release 2.0
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Administrator Options
Administrator Level Options
•
Factory Default Feature
A user and administrator can restart the phone at Operation->Reset->Phone.
However, only an administrator has access to restoring factory defaults to the
IP phone at Operation->Reset->Current Settings.
There are two options for setting factory defaults using the Aastra Web UI:
-
-
Restore to Factory Defaults
Remove Local Configuration Settings
The "Restore to Factory Defaults" option resets the factory defaults for all of
the settings in the aastra.cfg, <mac>.cfg, and local configuration. Performing
this option results in losing all user-modified settings.
The "Remove Local Configuration Settings" option resets the settings on
the local IP phone configuration only.
Reference
For procedures in setting factory defaults, see Chapter 9, “Troubleshooting.”
41-001160-00, Rev 01 Release 2.0
3-9
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Basic Preferences (Aastra Web UI)
An administrator can configure the following basic preferences using the Aastra
Web UI:
•
General Preferences
— Local Dial Plan
A dial plan that describes the number and pattern of digits that a user dials
to reach a particular telephone number.
— Dial Plan Terminator
A dial plan terminator or timeout. When you configure the IP phone to
use a dial plan terminator (such as the pound symbol (#)) the phone waits
4 or 5 seconds after you pick up the handset or press a key to make a call.
— Digit Timeout
Represents the time, in seconds, to configure the timeout between
consecutive key presses.
— Park Call (users and admin)
The parking of a live call to a specific extension. This feature on the Basic
Preferences screen is available on the 55i, 57i, and 57i CT only.
— Pickup Parked Call (users and admin)
Picking up a parked call at the specified extension. This feature on the
Basic Preferences screen is available on the 55i, 57i, and 57i CT only.
— Suppress DTMF Playback (users and admin)
Enables and disables suppression of DTMF playback when a number is
dialed from the softkeys or programmable keys.
— Display DTMF Digits (users and admin)
Enables and disables the display of DTMF digits on the IP phone display
during a connected state.
— Play Call Waiting Tone (users and admin)
Enable or disables the playing of a call waiting tone when a caller is on an
active call and a new call comes into the phone.
— Stuttered Dial Tone (users and admin)
Enable or disables the playing of a stuttered dial tone when there is a
message waiting on the IP phone.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Administrator Options
Administrator Level Options
•
Incoming/Outgoing Intercom Calls
Specifies whether the IP phone or the server is responsible for notifying the
recipient that an Intercom call is being placed. Also specifies the prefix code
for server-side Intercom calls, and specifies the configuration to use when
making the Intercom call.
Note: Users and administrators can configure incoming Intercom calls
on all phones. Only administrators can configure outgoing Intercom calls
on the 55i, 57i, and 57i CT.
•
•
•
Key Mapping
Allows you to set the Redial and/or Conf keys as speedial keys.
Ring Tones (user and admin)
Allows you to set ring tones and ring tone sets.
Priority Alerting
Enabling/disabling priority alert by setting specific ring tones for types of
calls (Group, External, Internal, Emergency, Priority).
•
Directed Call Pickup
Enabling/disabling of directed call pickup feature and the playing of a ring
tone splash.
•
Time and Date (user and admin)
Allows you to set time and date formats for the IP phone.
•
Language (user and admin)
Allows you to set the language to display on the IP phones and the Aastra
Web UI by loading the applicable language pack.
References
For more information about each of these features, see Chapter 5, “Operational IP
Phone Features.”
41-001160-00, Rev 01 Release 2.0
3-11
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
IP Phone Administrator Guide
Administrator Level Options
Network
The following paragraphs describe the network parameters you can configure on
the IP phone. Network settings are in two categories:
•
•
Basic network settings
Advanced network settings
Note: Specific parameters are configurable using the Aastra Web UI only
and are indicated where applicable.
Basic Network Settings
If Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol (DHCP) is enabled, the IP phone
automatically configures all of the Network settings. If the phone cannot populate
the Network settings, or if DHCP is disabled, you can set the Network options
manually.
•
DHCP
Enables or disables DHCP. When enabled, the phone may populate the
following fields as read-only: IP Address, Subnet Mask, Gateway, Broadcast
Address, Domain Name
Servers (DNS), Trivial File Transfer Protocol (TFTP) Server, and Timer
Servers.
Note: For DHCP to automatically populate the IP address or qualified
domain name for the TFTP server, your DHCP server must support
Option 66. For more information, see Chapter 4, the section, “DHCP” on
page 4-4.
•
•
IP Address
IP address of the IP phone. To assign a static IP address, disable DHCP.
Subnet Mask
Subnet mask defines the IP address range local to the IP phone. To assign a
static subnet mask, disable DHCP.
•
Gateway
The IP address of the network’s gateway or default router IP address. To
assign a static Gateway IP address, disable DHCP.
3-12
41-001160-00, Rev 01 Release 2.0
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Administrator Options
Administrator Level Options
•
•
Primary DNS
Primary Domain Name Service. A service that translates domain names into
IP addresses. To assign static DNS addresses, disable DHCP.
Secondary DNS
Secondary Domain Name Service. A service that translates domain names
into IP addresses. To assign static DNS addresses, disable DHCP.
Note: If a host name is configured on the IP phone, you must also set a
DNS.
•
•
Ethernet Port 0
Sets the negotiation method on Ethernet Port 0. Default is Auto-negotiation.
Ethernet Port 1
Sets the negotiation method on Ethernet Port 1. Default is Auto-negotiation.
Advanced Network Settings
•
NAT IP
Network Address Translator settings are used to map your firewall to an
external NAT device. This is the IP address of the external network device
that enforces NAT. Default is 0.0.0.0.
•
•
•
•
NAT SIP Port
Hard-coded port number of the external network device that enforces NAT
SIP. Default is 51620.
NAT RTP Port
Hard-coded port number of the external network device that enforces NAT
RTP. Default is 51720.
Nortel NAT Traversal Enabled
Enables or disables the phone to operate while connected to a network device
that enforces NAT. Valid values are 0 (No) or 1 (Yes). Default is 0 (No).
Nortel NAT Timer (seconds)
The interval, in seconds, that the phone sends SIP ping requests to the Nortel
proxy. Default is 30.
41-001160-00, Rev 01 Release 2.0
3-13
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
IP Phone Administrator Guide
Administrator Level Options
•
•
NTP Time Servers
Enables or disables the time server. This parameter affects time server1, time
server2, and time server3. Valid values are 0 (enable) and 1 (disable). Default
is 1 (disable).
Time Server 1, 2, and 3
The primary, secondary, and tertiary time server's IP address or qualified
domain name. If the "NTP Time Server" parameter is enabled, and the
primary and secondary time servers are not configured or cannot be accessed,
the value for Time Server 3 is used to request the time.
•
HTTPS Client Method
Defines the security method that the client advertises to the server during the
Secure Socket Layer (SSL) handshake. Valid values are SSL 3.0 and TLS 1.0.
Default is SSL 3.0.
•
•
HTTPS Server - Redirect HTTP to HTTPS
Allows or disallows redirection from the HTTP server to the HTTPS server
HTTPS Server - Block XML HTTP POSTs
Enables or disables the blocking of XML scripts from HTTP POSTs.
Type of Service (ToS), DSCP
Services Code Point (DSCP).
Reference
For more information about ToS and DSCP see Chapter 4, the section, “Type of
Service (ToS), Quality of Service (QoS), and DiffServ QoS” on page 4-32.
VLAN
Network Settings.
Reference
For more information about VLAN, see Chapter 4, the section, “Virtual LAN
(optional)” on page 4-31.
3-14
41-001160-00, Rev 01 Release 2.0
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Administrator Options
Administrator Level Options
SIP Settings
The following paragraphs describe the SIP parameters you can configure on the IP
phone. SIP configuration consists of configuring:
•
•
•
•
Basic SIP Authentication Settings
Basic SIP Network Settings
Advanced SIP settings
RTP Settings
Note: Specific parameters are configurable using the Aastra Web UI only
and are indicated where applicable. If you have a proxy server or have a
SIP registrar present at a different location than the PBX server, the SIP
parameters may need to be changed. The SIP parameters can be set on a
global or per-line basis.
Basic SIP Authentication Settings
•
Screen Name
Name that displays on the idle screen. Valid values are up to 20 alphanumeric
characters. Configurable on a global and per-line basis.
•
Phone Number
(User Name in IP phone UI and configuration files) User name used in the
name field of the SIP URI for the IP phone and for registering the phone at the
registrar. Valid values are up to 20 alphanumeric characters. Configurable on
a global and per-line basis.
•
•
Caller ID
(Display Name in IP phone UI and configuration files). Name used in the
display name field of the "From SIP" header field. Some IP PBX systems use
this as the caller’s ID, and some may overwrite this with the string that is set
at the PBX system. Valid values are up to 20 alphanumeric characters.
Configurable on a global and per-line basis.
Authentication Name
Authorization name used in the username field of the Authorization header
field of the SIP REGISTER request. Valid values are up to 20 alphanumeric
characters. Configurable on a global and per-line basis.
41-001160-00, Rev 01 Release 2.0
3-15
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
IP Phone Administrator Guide
Administrator Level Options
•
•
Password
Password used to register the IP phone with the SIP proxy. Valid values are up
to 20 alphanumeric characters. Passwords are encrypted and display as
asterisks when entering. Configurable on a global and per-line basis.
BLA Number
(not configurable via IP phone UI) Phone number that you assign to BLA
lines that is shared across all phones (global configuration) or shared on a
per-line basis (per-line configuration). For more information about BLA, see
Chapter 5, the section, “Bridged Line Appearance (BLA) (57i/57i CT/53i
only)” on page 5-67.
•
Line Mode
(Sip Mode in configuration files. Not configurable in IP phone UI). The
mode-type that you assign to the IP phone on a global or per-line basis. Valid
values are Generic (0), BroadSoft SCA (1), Nortel (2), or BLA (3). Default is
Generic (0).
Basic SIP Network Settings
•
•
•
Proxy Server
(Proxy IP in the configuration files). IP address of the SIP proxy server. Up to
64 alphanumeric characters. Configurable on a global and per-line basis.
Proxy Port
SIP proxy server’s port number. Default is 0. Configurable on a global and
per-line basis.
Backup Proxy Server
The IP address of the backup SIP proxy server for which the IP phone uses
when the primary SIP proxy is unavailable.
•
•
Backup Proxy Port
The backup proxy’s port number.
Outbound Proxy Server
Address of the outbound proxy server. All SIP messages originating from the
phone are sent to this server. For example, if you have a Session Border
Controller in your network, then you would normally set its address here.
Default is 0.0.0.0. Configurable on a global and per-line basis.
3-16
41-001160-00, Rev 01 Release 2.0
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Administrator Options
Administrator Level Options
•
•
Outbound Proxy Port
The proxy port on the proxy server to which the IP phone sends all SIP
messages. Default is 0. Configurable on a global and per-line basis.
Registrar Server
(Registrar IP in the configuration files). IP address of the SIP registrar. Up to
64 alphanumeric characters. Enables or disables the phone to be registered
with the Registrar. When Register is disabled globally, the phone is still active
and you can dial using username and IP address of the phone. A message "No
Service" displays on the idle screen and the LED is steady ON. If Register is
disabled for a single line, no messages display and LEDs are OFF.
Configurable on a global and per-line basis.
•
•
Registrar Port
SIP registrar’s port number. Default is 0. Configurable on a global and
per-line basis.
Backup Registrar Server
The address of the backup registrar (typically, the backup SIP proxy) for
which the IP phone uses to send REGISTER requests if the primary registrar is
unavailable.
•
•
Backup Registrar Port
The backup registrar's (typically the backup SIP proxy) port number.
Registration Period
(Not configurable via IP Phone UI). The requested registration period, in
seconds, from the registrar. Configurable on a global and per-line basis.
Advanced SIP Settings
In addition to the basic SIP settings, you can also configure the following
advanced SIP parameters. These parameters are not configurable via the IP phone
UI.
•
Explicit MWI Subscription
If the IP phone has a message waiting subscription with the Service Provider,
a Message Waiting Indicator (MWI) (LED or display icon) tells the user there
is a message on the IP Phone. You can enable and disable MWI by setting this
parameter to 0 (disable) or 1 (enable) in the configuration files or by checking
the box for this field in the Aastra Web UI. Default is disabled.
41-001160-00, Rev 01 Release 2.0
3-17
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
IP Phone Administrator Guide
Administrator Level Options
•
•
•
Explicit MWI Subscription Period
The requested duration, in seconds, before the MWI subscription times out.
The phone re-subscribes to MWI before the subscription period ends.
Send MAC Address in REGISTER Message
Adds an "Aastra-Mac:" header to the SIP REGISTER messages sent from the
phone to the call server, where the value is the MAC address of the phone.
Send Line Number in REGISTER Message
Adds an "Aastra-Line:" header to the SIP REGISTER messages sent from the
phone to the call server, where the value is the line number that is being
registered.
•
•
•
Session Timer
The time, in seconds, that the IP phone uses to send periodic re-INVITE
requests to keep a session alive. The proxy uses these re-INVITE requests to
maintain the status' of the connected sessions. See RFC4028 for details.
Default is 0.
Timer 1 and Timer 2
The time, in milliseconds, that applies to an IP phone session. These timers
are SIP transaction layer timers defined in RFC 3261. Timer 1 is an estimate
of the round-trip time (RTT). Timer 2 represents the amount of time a
non-INVITE server transaction takes to respond to a request.
Transaction timer
The amount of time, in
milliseconds that the phone allows the callserver (registrar/proxy) to respond
to SIP messages that it sends. If the phone does not receive a response in the
amount of time designated for this parameter, the phone assumes the message
has timed out. Valid values are 4000 to 64000. Default is 4000.
•
•
•
Transport Protocol
The protocol that the RTP port on the IP phone uses to send out RTP packets.
Valid values are 0 (both), 1 (UDP), or 2 (TCP). Default is 1 (UDP).
Registration Failed Retry Timer
Specifies the time, in seconds, that the phone waits between registration
attempts when a registration is rejected by the registrar.
Registration Timeout Retry Timer
Specifies the length of time, in seconds, that the phone waits until it
re-attempts to register after a REGISTER message times out.
3-18
41-001160-00, Rev 01 Release 2.0
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Administrator Options
Administrator Level Options
•
•
Registration Renewal Timer
The length of time, in seconds, prior to expiration, that the phone renews
registrations.
BLF Subscription Period
Specifies the time period, in seconds, that the BLF feature becomes active
again after a software/firmware upgrade or after a reboot of the IP phone.
RTP Settings
You can configure the following RTP settings:
•
RTP Port
•
Basic Codecs (G.711 u-Law, G.711 a-Law, G.729)
(not configurable via IP phone UI). Enables or disables basic codecs.
Enabling this parameter allows the IP phone to use the basic Codecs when
sending/receiving RTP packets. Valid values are 0 (disabled) and 1 (enabled).
Default is 0 (disabled).
•
•
•
•
Force RFC2833 Out-of-Band DTMF
(not configurable via IP phone UI). Enables or disables out-of-band DTMF.
Enabling this parameter forces the IP phone to use out-of-band DTMF
Customized Codec Preference List
(not configurable via IP phone UI). Specifies a customized Codec preference
list which allows you to use the preferred Codecs for this IP phone. For valid
values, see Appendix A, the section, “RTP, Codec, DTMF Global Settings” on
page A-63.
DTMF Method
(not configurable via IP phone UI). Sets the dual-tone multifrequency
(DTMF) method to use on the IP phone on a global or per-line basis. Valid
values are 0 (RTP), 1 (SIP INFO), or 2 (BOTH). Default is 0 (RTP).
Configurable on a global and per-line basis.
Silence Suppression
Enables or disables the phone to use the negotiated silence suppression
setting.
41-001160-00, Rev 01 Release 2.0
3-19
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
IP Phone Administrator Guide
Administrator Level Options
Line Settings
An administrator can configure multiple lines on the IP phone with the same SIP
network configuration (global) or a different SIP network configuration (per-line).
The following table provides the number of lines available for each IP phone
model.
IP Phone
Model
Available
Lines
53i
9
9
9
57i
57i CT
For more information about configuring lines on the IP phone, see Appendix A,
the section, “SIP Basic, Per-Line Settings” on page A-48 and “DTMF Per-Line
Settings” on page A-65.
3-20
41-001160-00, Rev 01 Release 2.0
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Administrator Options
Administrator Level Options
Softkeys/Programmable Keys
A user or administrator can assign a line to a specific softkey or programmable
key (53i has programmable keys only). The available softkeys also depend on the
IP phone model as shown in the following table.
Additional Softkeys
with Expansion
IP Phone Model
Softkeys
Module
-
Programmable Keys
53i
55i
-
6
6
6
36 to 108*
(Model 536EM)
57i
12
12
36 to 108*
-
(Model 536EM)
60 to 180**
(Model 560EM)
57i CT
36 to 108* on Base
Station
-
(Model 536EM)
60 to 180** on Base
Station
(Model 560EM)
*The 536EM expansion module consists of 36 softkeys. You can have up to 3 expansion modules on an IP
phone totaling 108 softkeys. Valid for 55i, 57i, and 57i CT phones.
**The 560EM expansion module consists of 60 softkeys. You can have up to 3 expansion modules on an IP
phone totaling 180 softkeys. Valid for 57i and 57i CT phones only.
The softkey or programmable key can be set to use a specific function. Available
functions depend on the IP phone model.
41-001160-00, Rev 01 Release 2.0
3-21
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The functions you can configure are:
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
none
line
speeddial
do not disturb
BLF
BLF/List
XML
flash
sprecode
park
pickup
last call return
directory
callers list
intercom
services
empty
For information about configuring softkeys, see Chapter 5, the section, “Softkeys/
Programmable Keys/Feature Keys” on page 5-21.
For more information about softkey functions see Appendix A, the section,
“Softkey/Programmable Key/Feature Key Parameters” on page A-108.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Administrator Options
Administrator Level Options
Configuration Server Settings
The configuration server stores the firmware images, configuration files, and
software when performing software upgrades to the IP phone. An administrator
can configure the following parameters for the configuration server:
•
•
Download Protocol
Protocol to use for downloading new versions of firmware and configuration
files to the IP phone. Valid values are TFTP, FTP, and HTTP. Default is TFTP.
TFTP Server
IP address or qualified domain name of the TFTP server. You can select a
primary or alternate TFTP server and then assign an IP address or qualified
domain name to your selection. Set this option if TFTP is the download
protocol selected.
Note: For DHCP to automatically populate the IP address or domain
name for the TFTP server, your DHCP server must support Option 66.
For more information, see Chapter 4, the section, “DHCP” on page 4-4.
•
FTP Server
IP address or network host name of the FTP server. If required, you can also
assign a user name and password for access to the FTP server. Set this option
if FTP is the download protocol selected. If you enter a network host name,
DNS must also be set.
•
•
HTTP Server
IP address of the HTTP server. You can also assign an HTTP path to the
HTTP server. Set this option if HTTP is the download protocol selected.
HTTPS Server
IP address of the HTTPS server. You can also assign an HTTPS path to the
HTTPS server. Set this option if HTTPS is the download protocol selected.
41-001160-00, Rev 01 Release 2.0
3-23
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
IP Phone Administrator Guide
Administrator Level Options
•
Mode
(not configurable via IP phone UI). Enables and disables the IP phone to be
updated automatically (auto-resync) once a day at a specific time in a 24-hour
period. Updating can be done to the configuration files only, the firmware
only, or both. This feature works with TFTP, FTP, and HTTP servers. The
auto update feature works with both encrypted and plain text configuration
files.
Note: Any changes made using the Aastra Web UI or the IP phone UI are
not overwritten by an auto-resync update. Auto-resync affects the
configuration files only. However, the settings in the Aastra Web UI take
precedence over the IP phone UI and the configuration files.
•
Time (24-hour)
(Not configurable via IP phone UI). Sets the time of day in a 24-hour period
for the IP phone to be automatically updated (auto-resync). This parameter
works with TFTP, FTP, and HTTP servers.
Note: Auto-Resync adds up to 15 minutes random time to the configured
time. For example, if the auto resync time parameter is set to 02:00, the
event takes place any time between 02:00 and 02:15.
•
XML Push Server List
applications to the IP phone.
Reference
For more information about configuring the configuration server, see Chapter 4,
the section, “Configuration Server Protocol” on page 4-13.
3-24
41-001160-00, Rev 01 Release 2.0
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Administrator Options
Administrator Level Options
Firmware Update Features
The IP phone uses a TFTP, FTP, HTTP, or HTTPS server (depending on the
protocol configured on the IP phone) to download configuration files and
firmware.
You can download the firmware stored on the configuration server in one of three
ways:
•
•
Manual firmware update using the Aastra Web UI (TFTP only).
Manual update of firmware and configuration files (by restarting the phone
via the IP phone UI or the Aastra Web UI).
Automatic update of firmware, configuration files, or both at a specific time
in a 24-hour period (via the Aastra Web UI or configuration files)
Reference
For more information about firmware update, see Chapter 8, “Firmware
Upgrade.”
41-001160-00, Rev 01 Release 2.0
3-25
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
IP Phone Administrator Guide
Administrator Level Options
3-26
41-001160-00, Rev 01 Release 2.0
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 4
Network Configuration
of the IP Phones
About this chapter
Introduction
This chapter provides the information required to configure the administrative
options on the IP phones. It includes procedures for configuring via the
configuration files, the IP Phone UI, and the Aastra Web UI where applicable.
Topics
Topic
Page
Overview
page 4-3
page 4-4
page 4-4
page 4-7
page 4-13
page 4-13
page 4-18
page 4-18
page 4-20
page 4-22
page 4-24
Basic Network Settings
DHCP
Configuring Network Settings Manually
Configuration Server Protocol
Configuring the Configuration Server Protocol
Advanced Network Settings
Network Address Translation (NAT)
Configuring Nortel NAT (optional)
Configuring NAT Address and Port (optional)
HTTPS Client/Server Configuration
41-001160-00, Rev 01 Release 2.0
4-1
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
IP Phone Administrator Guide
About this chapter
Topic
Page
Universal Plug and Play (UPnP) (for remote phones)
page 4-28
page 4-31
page 4-32
page 4-41
page 4-43
page 4-56
Virtual LAN (optional)
Type of Service (ToS), Quality of Service (QoS), and DiffServ QoS
Network Time Servers
Session Initiation Protocol (SIP) Settings
Real-time Transport Protocol (RTP) Settings
4-2
41-001160-00, Rev 01 Release 2.0
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Network Configuration of the IP Phones
Overview
Overview
An administrator can configure the IP Phone Network and SIP options from the
options are password protected in both the IP phone UI and the Aastra Web UI.
Note: An administrator has the option of enabling and disabling the use
of password protection in the IP phone UI. This is configurable using the
configuration files only. For more information about this feature, see
Appendix A, the section “Password Settings” on page A-8.
The procedures in this section include configuring from the IP phone UI and the
Aastra Web UI. To configure the IP phones using the configuration files, see
Appendix A, “Configuration Parameters.”
To configure the phone using the IP phone UI, you must enter an administrator
password. To configure the phone using the Aastra Web UI, you must enter an
administrator user name and password.
password is "22222".
References
For configuring the IP phone at the Asterisk IP PBX, see Appendix C,
“Configuring the IP Phone at the Asterisk IP PBX.”
For sample configuration files, see Appendix D, “Sample Configuration Files.”
These sample files include basic parameters required to register the IP phone at
the PBX.
41-001160-00, Rev 01 Release 2.0
4-3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
IP Phone Administrator Guide
Basic Network Settings
Basic Network Settings
This section describes the basic network settings on the IP phone which include
configuring for:
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
DHCP
IP Address (of phone)
Subnet Mask (of phone)
Gateway
Primary DNS
Secondary DNS
Ethernet Port 0
Ethernet Port 1
DHCP
The IP phone is capable of querying a DHCP server, allowing a network
administrator a centralized and automated method of configuring various network
parameters for the phone. If DHCP is enabled, the IP phone requests the following
network information:
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Subnet Mask
Gateway (i.e. router)
Domain Name Server (DNS)
Broadcast Address
Network Time Protocol Server
IP Address
TFTP Server Name
4-4
41-001160-00, Rev 01 Release 2.0
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Network Configuration of the IP Phones
Basic Network Settings
Note: For DHCP to automatically populate the IP address or domain
name for the TFTP server, your DHCP server must support Option 66.
Option 66 is responsible for forwarding the TFTP server IP address or
domain name to the phone automatically. If your DHCP server does not
support Option 66, you must manually enter the IP address or domain
name for the TFTP server into your IP phone configuration.
The network administrator chooses which of these parameters (if any) are
supplied to the IP phone by the DHCP server. The administrator must configure
the phone manually to provide any required network parameters not supplied by
the DHCP server.
Configuring DHCP
or the Aastra Web UI.
Configuration Files
For specific parameters you can set in the configuration files, see Appendix A, the section, “Network
Settings” on page A-5.
IP Phone UI
Step Action
1
2
3
4
5
Press
on the phone to enter the Options List.
Select Network.
Select option DHCP.
Press Change to set "Use DHCP" to "Yes" (enable) or "No" (disable).
Press Done to save the changes.
41-001160-00, Rev 01 Release 2.0
4-5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
IP Phone Administrator Guide
Basic Network Settings
.
Aastra Web UI
Step Action
1
Click on Advanced Settings->Network->Basic Network Settings.
2
3
Enable the "DHCP" field by checking the check box. (Disable this field by unchecking the box).
Click
to save your settings.
4-6
41-001160-00, Rev 01 Release 2.0
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Network Configuration of the IP Phones
Basic Network Settings
Configuring Network Settings Manually
If you disable DHCP on your phone, you need to configure the following network
settings manually:
•
•
•
•
•
IP Address
Subnet Mask
Gateway
Primary DNS
Secondary DNS
UI, or the Aastra Web UI.
Configuration Files
For specific parameters you can set in the configuration files, see Appendix A, the section, “Network
Settings” on page A-5.
IP Phone UI
Step Action
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
Press
on the phone to enter the Options List.
Select Network.
Select IP Address and enter the IP address of the phone.
Select Subnet Mask and enter the subnet mask.
Select Gateway and enter the gateway address.
Select DNS and enter a Primary and/or Secondary DNS server.
Press Done to save the changes.
The IP phone is manually configured.
You can now continue configuring the IP phone if required using the IP Phone UI.
41-001160-00, Rev 01 Release 2.0
4-7
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
IP Phone Administrator Guide
Basic Network Settings
.
Aastra Web UI
Step Action
1
Click on Advanced Settings->Network->Basic Network Settings.
2
3
4
5
Enter an IP address of the phone in the IP Address field.
Enter a subnet mask in the Subnet Mask field.
Enter a gateway address in the Gateway field.
Enter a Primary DNS in the Primary DNS field, and/or a secondary DNS in the Secondary DNS
field.
6
Click
to save your settings.
The IP phone is manually configured.
You can now continue configuring the IP phone if required using the Aastra Web UI.
4-8
41-001160-00, Rev 01 Release 2.0
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Network Configuration of the IP Phones
Basic Network Settings
Configuring Ethernet Ports 0 and 1 Negotiation
Ethernet is the computer networking technology for local area networks (LANs).
You use the Ethernet ports to connect to a LAN using a twisted pair 10BASE-T
cable to transmit 10BASE-T Ethernet.
There are two Ethernet ports on the rear of the IP phones, Ethernet Port 0 and
Ethernet Port 1. Using the Aastra Web UI, you can select the type of transmission
you want these ports to use to communicate over the LAN. The IP phones support
each of the following methods of transmission:
•
•
•
Auto-negotiation
Half-duplex (10Mbps or 100 Mbps)
Full-duplex (10Mbps or 100Mbps)
Auto-negotiation
Auto-negotiation is when two connected devices choose common transmission
parameters. In the auto-negotiation process, the connected devices share their
speed and duplex capabilities and connect at the highest common denominator
(HCD). Auto-negotiation can be used by devices that are capable of different
transmission rates (such as 10Mbit/sec and 100Mbit/sec), different duplex modes
(half duplex and full duplex) and/or different standards at the same speed. You can
set the Ethernet ports on the IP phones to auto-negotiate during transmission.
Half-Duplex (10Mbps or 100Mbps)
Half-duplex data transmission means that data can be transmitted in both
directions on a signal carrier, but not at the same time. For example, on a LAN
using a technology that has half-duplex transmission, one device can send data on
the line and then immediately receive data on the line from the same direction in
which data was just transmitted. Half-duplex transmission implies a bidirectional
line (one that can carry data in both directions). On the IP phones, you can set the
half-duplex transmission to transmit in 10Mbps or in 100Mbps.
41-001160-00, Rev 01 Release 2.0
4-9
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Full-Duplex (10Mbps or 100Mbps)
Full-duplex data transmission means that data can be transmitted in both
directions on a signal carrier at the same time. For example, on a LAN with a
technology that has full-duplex transmission, one device can be sending data on
the line while another device is receiving data. Full-duplex transmission implies a
bidirectional line (one that can move data in both directions). On the IP phones,
you can set the full-duplex transmission to transmit in 10Mbps or in 100Mbps.
Configuring Ethernet Ports 0 and 1
using the configuration files, the IP Phone UI, or the Aastra Web UI.
Configuration Files
For specific parameters you can set in the configuration files, see Appendix A, the section, “Network
Settings” on page A-5.
IP Phone UI
Step
Action
1
2
3
4
Press
on the phone to enter the Options List.
Select Ethernet.
Select Phone (for Ethernet Port 0).
Select a negotiation method to use on port 0 and press Set. Valid values are:
•
•
•
•
•
AutoNegotiation
FullDuplex 10Mbps
FullDuplex 100Mbps
HalfDuplex 10Mbps
HalfDuplex 100Mbps
Default is FullDuplex 10Mbps.
5
Select Passthrough (for Ethernet Port 1).
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Network Configuration of the IP Phones
Basic Network Settings
IP Phone UI
Step
Action
6
Select a negotiation method to use on port 1and press Set. Valid values are:
•
•
•
•
•
AutoNegotiation
FullDuplex 10Mbps
FullDuplex 100Mbps
HalfDuplex 10Mbps
HalfDuplex 100Mbps
Default is AutoNegotiation.
7
8
Press Done or
to finish configuring the configuration server protocol for the IP phone.
Note: The session prompts you to restart the IP phone to apply the configuration settings.
Select Restart.
41-001160-00, Rev 01 Release 2.0
4-11
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
IP Phone Administrator Guide
Basic Network Settings
Aastra Web UI
Step Action
1
Click on Advanced Settings->Network->Basic Network Settings.
2
In the “Ethernet Port 0” field, select a negotiation method to use on port 0. Valid values are:
•
•
•
•
•
Auto Negotiation
Full Duplex, 10Mbps
Full Duplex, 100Mbps
Half Duplex, 10Mbps
Half Duplex, 100Mbps
Default is Full Duplex, 10Mbps.
3
In the “Ethernet Port 1” field, select a negotiation method to use on port 1. Valid values are:
•
•
•
•
•
Auto Negotiation
Full Duplex, 10Mbps
Full Duplex, 100Mbps
Half Duplex, 10Mbps
Half Duplex, 100Mbps
Default is Auto Negotiation.
4
5
Click
to save your settings.
Note: The session prompts you to restart the IP phone to apply the configuration settings.
Select Operation->Reset and click
..
4-12
41-001160-00, Rev 01 Release 2.0
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Network Configuration of the IP Phones
Configuration Server Protocol
Configuration Server Protocol
You can download new versions of firmware and confguration files from the
configuration server to the IP phone using any of the following types of protocols:
protocol. You can configure the type of protocol that the IP phone uses by setting
it in the configuration files, the IP phone UI, or the Aastra Web UI.
Note: For DHCP to automatically populate the IP address or domain
name for the TFTP server, your DHCP server must support Option 66.
For more information, see this chapter, the section, “DHCP” on page 4-4.
Configuring the Configuration Server Protocol
Use the following procedure to configure the configuration server protocol.
Configuration Files
For specific parameters you can set in the configuration files, see Appendix A, the section, “Configuration
Server Settings” on page A-11.
IP Phone UI
Step
Action
1
2
3
4
Press
on the phone to enter the Options List.
Select Network.
Select Download Protocol.
Select "Use TFTP", "Use FTP", "Use HTTP", or “HTTPS”.
The IP phone uses the protocol you select to download new firmware and configuration files from
the configuration server.
5
Press Done to save the changes.
41-001160-00, Rev 01 Release 2.0
4-13
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
IP Phone Administrator Guide
Configuration Server Protocol
IP Phone UI
Step
Action
6
From the Network Settings menu, select TFTP Server, FTP Server, HTTP Server, or HTTPS
(depending on which protocol you configured in Step 4).
7
Enter the IP address of the protocol server (in dotted decimal format).
Use the following table to configure the applicable server.
TFTP
- Select TFTP.
- Select Primary.
- Select Primary TFTP.
- Enter the IP address or qualified domain name of the primary TFTP server.
- Press Done to save the change.
Optional: You can also configure an alternate TFTP server if required. If Alternate TFTP is
enabled, you must also enter an IP address or qualified domain name for the alternate TFTP
server.
FTP
- Select FTP Server.
- Enter the IP address of the FTP server.
- Press Done.
Optional: You can enter a username and password for accessing the FTP server if required:
- Select FTP Username.
- Enter a username for accessing the FTP server.
- Press Done.
- Select FTP Password.
- Enter a password for accessing the FTP server.
- Press Done.
HTTP
- Select HTTP Server
- Enter the IP address of the HTTP server.
- Press Done.
- Select HTTP Path.
- Enter the HTTP sub-directory path name. If the IP phone’s files are located in a sub-directory
beneath the server’s HTTP root directory, the relative path to that sub-directory should be
entered in this field.
- Press Done.
4-14
41-001160-00, Rev 01 Release 2.0
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Network Configuration of the IP Phones
Configuration Server Protocol
IP Phone UI
Step
Action
7
(Cont’d)
HTTPS
- Select HTTP Client.
- Select Download Server.
- Enter the IP address of the HTTPS server.
- Press Done.
- Select Download Path.
- Enter the HTTPS path name. If the IP phone’s configuration files and firmware files are
sub-directory should be entered in this field.
- Press Done.
Note: To configure the HTTPS security method, HTTP to HTTPS redirect, and HTTPS server
blocking for HTTP XML POSTs, see the section, “HTTPS Client/Server Configuration” on
page 4-24.
8
9
Press Done to save the changes.
Press Done to finish configuring the configuration server protocol for the IP phone.
Note: The session prompts you to restart the IP phone to apply the configuration changes.
Select Restart.
10
41-001160-00, Rev 01 Release 2.0
4-15
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
IP Phone Administrator Guide
Configuration Server Protocol
Aastra Web UI
Step Action
1
Click on Advanced Settings->Configuration Server.
4-16
41-001160-00, Rev 01 Release 2.0
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Network Configuration of the IP Phones
Configuration Server Protocol
Aastra Web UI
Step Action
2
Select the protocol from the "Download Protocol" list box.
The IP phone uses the protocol you select to download new firmware and configuration files from the
configuration server. Use the following table to configure the applicable server.
TFTP
- Enter an IP address or qualified domain name in the "TFTP Server" field.
Optional: You can also configure an alternate TFTP server if required. If "Use Alternate
TFTP" is enabled, you must also enter an IP address or qualified domain name for the
alternate server in the "Alternate TFTP" field.
FTP
- Enter an IP address in the "FTP Server" field.
Optional: You can enter a username and password for accessing the FTP server if
required.
- Enter a user name for a user that will access the FTP server in the "FTP User Name" field.
- Enter a password for a user that allows access to the FTP server in the "FTP Password"
field.
HTTP
- Enter an IP address in the "HTTP Server" field.
- Enter a root sub-directory path for the HTTP server in the "HTTP Path" field.
Optional: You can enter a list of users to be authenticated when they access the HTTP
server in the "XML Push Server List(Approved IP Addresses)" field.
HTTPS
- Enter an IP address in the "HTTPS Server" field.
- Enter a root directory path for the HTTPS server in the "HTTP Path" field.
Optional: You can enter a list of users to be authenticated when they access the HTTP
server in the "XML Push Server List(Approved IP Addresses)" field.
3
4
Click
to save your settings.
Note: The session prompts you to restart the IP phone to apply the configuration settings.
Select Operation->Reset and click ..
41-001160-00, Rev 01 Release 2.0
4-17
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
IP Phone Administrator Guide
Advanced Network Settings
Advanced Network Settings
You can set advanced network settings on the IP phone such as, Network Address
Translation (NAT), Nortel NAT, Network Time Protocol (NTP) Time Servers,
Virtual LAN (VLAN), and Quality of Service (QoS), and Universal Plug and Play
(UPnP) using the Aastra Web UI or the configuration files.
Note: The available advanced network parameters via the IP phone UI
are NAT, Nortel NAT, UPnP, VLAN, and QoS only.
Network Address Translation (NAT)
The protocols used by all IP phones do not interoperate completely with Network
Address Translation (NAT). For the Aastra IP phones, specific configuration
parameters allow the phone to operate while connected to a network device that
enforces NAT. The following is a sample network using a NAT proxy and relevant
IP phone configuration parameters.
4-18
41-001160-00, Rev 01 Release 2.0
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Network Configuration of the IP Phones
Advanced Network Settings
Nortel Proxy/Registrar
The phone at IP address 10.10.10.10 is configured to register with the proxy at
63.251.195.10. Because it is a Nortel proxy, the configuration must additionally
include the "sip nortel nat support" and "sip nortel nat timer" settings, telling the
firmware to enhance the protocols with Nortel specific content.
Note: This IP phone uses RTP port 3000 (the default value) since an RTP
port was not explicitly configured.
SBC or ALG proxy/registrar
The phone at IP address 10.10.10.20 is configured to register with the proxy at
63.251.195.20. Because the proxy/registrar has session border control (SBC) or
application layer gateway (ALG) functionality, no additional IP phone
configuration is required.
Other proxy/registrars
The phone at IP address 10.10.10.30 is configured to register with the proxy at
63.251.195.30. Because this proxy/registrar is not a Nortel proxy and has no SBC
or ALG functionality, the configuration must additionally include the "sip nat ip"
and "sip nat port" settings that contain the public ip address of the NAT router and
the port used for call signaling messages. This information is embedded in
protocol messages to allow the proxy/registrar to reach the IP phone on the NAT
router private network.
NAT router configuration
You must configure the NAT router to allow signaling or media packets
containing the various UDP port values to flow between the private and public
networks that are separated by the NAT router. In the sample network, the NAT
router must not filter packets using ports 3000, 5060, 6060, 16420, and 16430.
41-001160-00, Rev 01 Release 2.0
4-19
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
IP Phone Administrator Guide
Advanced Network Settings
Nortel Networks NAT
Nortel Networks provides a proprietary solution to support connectivity to their
proxies from phones placed behind devices (such as routers or firewalls) that use
NAT. Nortel uses the SIP ping request/reply between the Nortel proxy and the
phone in order to keep the connection through the router or firewall active. A SIP
Nortel NAT timer is the interval, in seconds (default is 60), that the phone sends
SIP ping requests to the Nortel proxy.
Configuring Nortel NAT (optional)
Configuration Files
For specific parameters you can set in the configuration files, see Appendix A, the section, “Network
Address Translation (NAT) Settings” on page A-18.
IP Phone UI
Step Action
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
Press
on the phone to enter the Options List.
Select Network Settings.
Select NAT.
Select Nortel.
Select NAT Enabled.
Press Change to set Yes (enable) or No (disable) for NAT on a Nortel network.
Press Done to save the changes.
4-20
41-001160-00, Rev 01 Release 2.0
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Network Configuration of the IP Phones
Advanced Network Settings
.
Aastra Web UI
Step Action
1
Click on Advanced Settings->Network->Advanced Network Settings.
2
3
4
Select Yes (enable) or No (disable) in the "Nortel NAT Traversal Enabled" field to enable or disable
NAT for a Nortel network.
Enter a time, in seconds, in the "Nortel NAT timer" field. Valid values are 0 to 2147483647.
Default is 60.
Click
to save your settings.
Note: The session prompts you to restart the IP phone to apply the configuration settings.
Select Operation->Reset and click ..
5
41-001160-00, Rev 01 Release 2.0
4-21
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
IP Phone Administrator Guide
Advanced Network Settings
Configuring NAT Address and Port (optional)
Configuration Files
For specific parameters you can set in the configuration files, see Appendix A, the section, “Network
Address Translation (NAT) Settings” on page A-18.
IP Phone UI
Step Action
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
Press
on the phone to enter the Options List.
Select Network Settings.
Select NAT.
Select NAT Settings.
Select NAT IP.
Enter a public IP address of your NAT device in dotted-decimal format.
Press Done to save the NAT setting.
Select NAT SIP Port.
Enter the public SIP signalling port number of your NAT device.
Press Done to save the changes.
4-22
41-001160-00, Rev 01 Release 2.0
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Network Configuration of the IP Phones
Advanced Network Settings
.
Aastra Web UI
Step Action
1
Click on Advanced Settings->Network->Advanced Network Settings.
2
3
4
Enter a NAT IP address in the "NAT IP" field.
Enter a NAT port in the "NAT SIP Port" field.
Click
to save your settings.
Note: The session prompts you to restart the IP phone to apply the configuration settings.
Select Operation->Reset and click ..
5
41-001160-00, Rev 01 Release 2.0
4-23
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
IP Phone Administrator Guide
Advanced Network Settings
HTTPS Client/Server Configuration
HTTPS is a Web protocol that encrypts and decrypts user page requests as well as
the pages that are returned by the Web server. HTTPS uses Secure Socket Layer
(SSL) or Transport Layer Security (TLS) as a sublayer under its regular HTTP
application layering. SSL is a commonly-used protocol for managing the
security of a message transmission on the Internet. It uses a 40-bit key size
for the RC4 stream encryption algorithm, which is considered an adequate degree
of encryption for commercial exchange. TLS is a protocol that ensures privacy
between communicating applications and their users on the Internet. When a
server and client communicate, TLS ensures that no third party may eavesdrop or
tamper with any message. TLS is the successor to SSL.
Note: HTTPS uses port 443 instead of HTTP port 80 in its interactions
with the TCP/IP lower layer.
When an HTTPS client opens and closes its TCP socket, the SSL software
respectively handshakes upon opening and disconnects upon closing from the
HTTPS server. The main HTTPS client functions are:
•
•
Downloading of configuration files and firmware images.
Downloading of script files based on an “HTTPS://” URL supplied by a
softkey definition.
The HTTPS server provides HTTP functionality over secure connections. It
coexists with the HTTP server but has its own set of tasks. The main HTTPS
server functions are:
•
•
Delivery of web page content to a browser client over a secure connection.
Execution of HTTP GET and POST requests received over a secure
connection.
Using the configuration files, the IP phone UI, or the Aastra Web UI, you can
configure the following regarding HTTPS:
•
•
•
Specify HTTPS security client method to use (TSLv1 or SSLv3)
Enable or disable HTTP to HTTPS server redirect function
HTTPS server blocking of XML HTTP POSTS to the phone
4-24
41-001160-00, Rev 01 Release 2.0
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Network Configuration of the IP Phones
Advanced Network Settings
Configuring HTTPS Client and Server Settings
Use the following procedures to configure the HTTPS client and server for
the IP phones.
Note: To enable or disable tbe IP phones to use the HTTPS protocol as
the configuration server, see the section, “Configuring the Configuration
Server Protocol” on page 4-13.
Configuration Files
For specific parameters you can set in the configuration files, see Appendix A, the section, “HTTPS Client
and Server Settings” on page A-20.
IP Phone UI
Step Action
1
2
3
4
Press
on the phone to enter the Options List.
Select Network.
Select HTTPS ->Client Method.
Press Change to select a client method to use for HTTPS. Valid values are:
SSL 3.0 (default)
TSL 1.0
5
6
7
8
Press Done to save the changes.
Press Done 3 more times to return to the Options List menu.
Select Phone Status.
Select Restart Phone and press Restart to reboot the phone for the HTTPS settings to take affect.
41-001160-00, Rev 01 Release 2.0
4-25
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
IP Phone Administrator Guide
Advanced Network Settings
.
Aastra Web UI
Step Action
1
Click on Advanced Settings->Network->Advanced Network Settings.
2
Select an HTTPS client method to use from the HTTPS Client Method field. Valid values are:
SSL 3.0 (default)
TSL 1.0
3
4
Enable HTTP to HTTPS redirect by checking the HTTPS Server - Redirect HTTP to HTTPS field
check box. (Disable this field by unchecking the check box). Default is enabled.
Enable the blocking of XML HTTP POSTs by the HTTPS server by checking the HTTPS Server -
Block XML HTTP POSTs field check box. (Disable this field by unchecking the check box). Default is
disabled.
4-26
41-001160-00, Rev 01 Release 2.0
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Network Configuration of the IP Phones
Advanced Network Settings
Aastra Web UI
Step Action
5
Click
to save your settings.
Note: The session prompts you to restart the IP phone to apply the configuration settings.
Select Operation->Reset and click ..
6
41-001160-00, Rev 01 Release 2.0
4-27
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
IP Phone Administrator Guide
Advanced Network Settings
Universal Plug and Play (UPnP) (for remote phones)
UPnP is a standard that uses Internet protocols to enable devices to be plugged
into a network and automatically know about each other. With UPnP, when a user
plugs a device into the network, the device configures itself, acquires a TCP IP
address, and uses a discovery protocol based on the Internet's HTTP or HTTPS
URL to announce its presence on the network to other devices.
This method of device discovery on a network is called “Universal Plug and Play”
or UPnP. If you enable UPnP, and the phone is discovered on the network, port
mappings are set up between the phone and the Internet Gateway Device (IGD).
The phone controls the opening, closing, and polling of ports on the IGD. HTTP
and SIP use a single port each. RTP/RTCP uses a range of ports.
The UPnP manager performs its functions when you set the phone to remote
mode. When you switch the phone back to local mode, the UPnP manager
removes any open port mappings and shuts itself down. If you boot the phone in
remote mode, the UPnP manager initializes after the phone obtains an IP address
and before a SIP registration is sent out. If you want to manually configure your
NAT, you must disable UPnP on the remote mode phone.
Note: Enabling UPnP allows the IP phones to access the Internet even if
a firewall has been set on the IGD. This allows the phone to send and
receive SIP calls and XML pushes without interruption. UPnP does not
work with multiple firewalls.
You can enable UPnP on remote IP phones using the configuration files, the IP
Phone UI, or the Aastra Web UI. Using the configuration files, you can enable
UPnP using the following parameters:
•
•
•
upnp manager
upnp gateway
sip nat rtp port
The “upnp manager” parameter enables or disables UPnP. The “upnp gateway”
parameter is the IP address or qualified domain name of the Internet gateway or
router that stores the port mappings. In the event a phone using UPnP is rebooted,
it will still have the previously set port mappings on the gateway. The “sip nat rtp
port” parameter specifies the RTP port range on the gateway.
4-28
41-001160-00, Rev 01 Release 2.0
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Network Configuration of the IP Phones
Advanced Network Settings
Configuring UPnP (optional)
Use the following procedures to configure UPnP on the IP phones.
Configuration Files
For specific parameters you can set in the configuration files, see Appendix A, the section, “UPnP Settings”
on page A-22.
IP Phone UI
Step Action
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
Press
on the phone to enter the Options List.
Select Network.
Select UPnP.
Press the
or
navigation keys to toggle to “Yes” (enable) or “No” (disable).
Press Set to save the changes.
Press
to exit the UPnP menu.
Select Phone Status.
Select Restart Phone and press Restart to reboot the phone for the UPnP settings to take affect.
41-001160-00, Rev 01 Release 2.0
4-29
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
IP Phone Administrator Guide
Advanced Network Settings
.
Aastra Web UI
Step Action
1
Click on Advanced Settings->Network->Advanced Network Settings.
2
In the UPnP field, place a check in the “Enabled” box to turn ON UPnP.
Note: To manually configure NAT, uncheck (disable) the “Enabled” box.
3
4
In the NAT RTP Port field, specify the beginning of the RTP port range on the gateway.
Default is 51720.
Click
to save your settings.
Note: The session prompts you to restart the IP phone to apply the configuration settings.
Select Operation->Reset and click
5
.
4-30
41-001160-00, Rev 01 Release 2.0
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Network Configuration of the IP Phones
Advanced Network Settings
Virtual LAN (optional)
Virtual Local Area Network (VLAN) is a feature on the IP phone that allows for
multiple logical Ethernet interfaces to send outgoing RTP packets over a single
physical Ethernet as described in IEEE Std 802.3. On the IP phone, you configure
a VLAN ID that associates with the physical Ethernet port.
By configuring specific VLAN parameters, the IP phones have the capability of
adding and removing tags, and processing the ID and priority information
contained within the tag.
Note: All latest VLAN functionality is backwards compatible with IP
Phone Releases 1.3 and 1.3.1.
VLAN on the IP phones is disabled by default. When you enable VLAN, the IP
phone provides defaults for all VLAN parameters. If you choose to change these
parameters, you can configure them using the configuration files, the IP Phone UI,
or the Aastra Web UI.
The following sections describe the VLAN features you can configure on the IP
phones.
41-001160-00, Rev 01 Release 2.0
4-31
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
IP Phone Administrator Guide
Advanced Network Settings
Type of Service (ToS), Quality of Service (QoS), and DiffServ QoS
ToS is an octet as a field in the standard IP header. It is used to classify the traffic
of the different QoSs.
QoS provides service differentiation between IP packets in the network. This
service differentiation is noticeable during periods of network congestion (for
example, in case of contention for resources) and results in different levels of
network performance.
Port 0 is the Ethernet connected to the network. Port 1 is the Ethernet used for
passthrough to a PC.
Differentiated Service (DiffServ) QoS is class-based where some classes of traffic
receive preferential handling over other traffic classes.
The Differentiated Services Code Point (DSCP) value is stored in the first six bits
of the ToS field. Each DSCP specifies a particular per-hop behavior that is
applied to a packet.
The following parameters allow an administrator to configure ToS, QoS, and
DiffServ QoS for VLAN:
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
tagging enabled
tos priority map
priority non-ip
VLAN id
VLAN id port 1
QoS eth port 1 priority
tos sip
tos rtp
tos rtcp
4-32
41-001160-00, Rev 01 Release 2.0
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Network Configuration of the IP Phones
Advanced Network Settings
Notes:
1. In order for the software to successfully maintain connectivity with a
network using VLAN functionality, the IP phone reboots if you modify
the "tagging enabled" (VLAN enable in the Web UI), "VLAN id", or
"VLAN id port 1" parameters.
2. The "QoS eth port 0 priority" and "QoS eth port smp priority"
parameters were applicable to software release 1.3.1 and earlier. They
have no affect in software Release 1.4 and up.
3. When the Port 0 "VLAN id" and the Port 1 "VLAN id port 1"
parameters have the same value, VLAN functionality is compatible with
earlier IP phone software releases.
DSCP Range/VLAN Priority Mapping
DSCP bits in the ToS field of the IP header are set for RTP, RTCP, and SIP packets
using either the default values or the values configured via the "tos sip", "tos rtp",
and "tos rtcp" parameters.
When the VLAN global configuration parameter, "tagging enabled" is set to 1,
VLAN priority for IP packets is mapped to the DSCP value instead of a single
non-IP packets using the "priority non-ip" parameter.
Since the default DSCP settings for SIP, RTP, and RTCP are 24, 32, and 32
respectively, this results in corresponding default VLAN priorities of 3 for SIP, 4
for RTP, and 4 for RTCP (based on the settings in the table “DSCP Range/VLAN
Priority” on page 4-34).
You can change the default parameters by modifying just the DSCP values, just
the VLAN priority values, or by modifying all values.
The following table shows the DSCP range/VLAN piority mapping.
41-001160-00, Rev 01 Release 2.0
4-33
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
IP Phone Administrator Guide
Advanced Network Settings
DSCP Range/VLAN Priority
DSCP
Range
VLAN Priority
0-7
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8-15
16-23
24-31
32-39
40-47
48-55
56-63
The following table identifies the default DSCP of protocols.
Protocol
Name
Default DSCP
Values in the
ToS Field
rtp
rtcp
sip
32
32
24
Configuring Type of Service (ToS)/DSCP (optional)
Use the following procedures to configure ToS/DSCP on the IP phone.
Note: ToS/DSCP is enabled by default. The SIP, RTP, and RTCP
parameters show defaults of 24, 32, and 32, respectively. Use the
following procedures to change these settings if required.
Configuration Files
For specific parameters you can set in the configuration files, see Appendix A, the section, “Type of Service
(ToS)/DSCP Settings” on page A-27.
4-34
41-001160-00, Rev 01 Release 2.0
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Network Configuration of the IP Phones
Advanced Network Settings
IP Phone UI
Step Action
1
2
3
4
Press
on the phone to enter the Options List.
Select Network.
Select Type of Service.
Select SIP, RTP, and/or RTCP and enter a value from 0 to 63.
Note: If you change the ToS/DSCP setting for a Protocol, and VLAN is enabled, you will need to map
the applicable priority to the Protocol setting as shown in the table “DSCP Range/VLAN Priority” on
page 4-34 For more information, see the section “Configuring VLAN (optional)” on page 4-36.
5
6
7
8
Press Done to save the changes.
Press Done 2 more times to return to the Options List menu.
Select Phone Status.
Select Restart Phone and press Restart to reboot the phone for the ToS/DSCP settings to take
affect.
41-001160-00, Rev 01 Release 2.0
4-35
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
IP Phone Administrator Guide
Advanced Network Settings
.
Aastra Web UI
Step Action
1
Click on Advanced Settings->Network->Type of Service,DSCP.
2
Choose a Protocol (SIP, RTP, and/or RTCP), and enter a value from 0 to 63.
Note: If you change the ToS/DSCP setting for a Protocol, and VLAN is enabled, you will need to map
the applicable priority to the Protocol setting as shown in the table “DSCP Range/VLAN Priority” on
page 4-36 For more information, see the section “Configuring VLAN (optional)” on page 4-36.
3
4
Click
to save your settings.
Note: The session prompts you to restart the IP phone to apply the configuration settings.
Select Operation->Reset and click ..
Configuring VLAN (optional)
Use the following procedures to configure VLAN on the IP phone.
Note: VLAN is disabled by default. When you enable VLAN, the IP
phones use the default settings for each VLAN parameter. You can
change the default settings if required using the following procedure.
4-36
41-001160-00, Rev 01 Release 2.0
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Network Configuration of the IP Phones
Advanced Network Settings
Configuration Files
For specific parameters you can set in the configuration files, see Appendix A, the section, “Network
Address Translation (NAT) Settings” on page A-18.
IP Phone UI
Step Action
1
2
3
Press
on the phone to enter the Options List.
Select Network.
Select VLAN.
To globally enable/disable VLAN and set priority for non-IP packets:
4
Select VLAN Enable, and press Change to set VLAN Enable to Yes (or No to disable)
Press Done to save the changes.
5
6
Select Phone.
7
Select Priority.
8
Select Other and enter a non-IP priority value from 0 to 7 for non-IP packets.
Press Done to save the changes.
9
10
Press Done again to return to the VLAN Phone menu.
To set VLAN ID and priority for Port 0:
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
Select VLAN ID and enter a value from 1 to 4094 to specify the VLAN ID of Port 0.
Press Done to save the change.
Select Priority.
Select a VLAN Protocol (SIP, RTP, and/or RTCP).
Enter a VLAN priority value from 0 to 7 for the associated Protocol.
Press Done to save the changes.
Press Done again to return to the VLAN Settings menu.
To set VLAN ID and priority for Port 1 (passthrough port):
18 Select Passthrough.
41-001160-00, Rev 01 Release 2.0
4-37
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
IP Phone Administrator Guide
Advanced Network Settings
IP Phone UI
Step Action
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
Select VLAN ID and enter a value from 1 to 4094 to specify the VLAN ID of Port 1.
Press Done to save the change.
Select Priority.
Select a VLAN priority value from 0 to 7 for Port 1.
Press Done to save the change.
Press Done 3 more times to return to the Options List main menu.
Select Phone Status.
Select Restart Phone and press Restart to reboot the phone for the VLAN features to take affect.
4-38
41-001160-00, Rev 01 Release 2.0
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Network Configuration of the IP Phones
Advanced Network Settings
.
Aastra Web UI
Step Action
1
Click on Advanced Settings->Network->VLAN.
To globally enable/disable VLAN and set priority for non-IP packets:
2
Enable VLAN by checking the VLAN Enable field check box. (Disable this field by unchecking the
check box).
3
With VLAN enabled, select the priority (0 to 7) for non-IP packets in the Priority, Non-IP Packet field.
To set VLAN ID and priority for Port 0:
4
5
For Port 0, enter a VLAN ID value from 1 to 4094 in the VLAN ID field.
Choose a VLAN Protocol (SIP Priority, RTP Priority, and/or RTCP Priority), and select a priority for
the associated Protocol.
To set VLAN ID and priority for Port 1 (passthrough port):
6
7
For Port 1, enter a VLAN ID value from 1 to 4094 in the VLAN ID field.
Select a VLAN priority value from 0 to 7 for Port 1 in the Priority field.
41-001160-00, Rev 01 Release 2.0
4-39
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
IP Phone Administrator Guide
Advanced Network Settings
Aastra Web UI
Step Action
8
Click
to save your changes.
Note: The session prompts you to restart the IP phone to apply the configuration settings.
Select Operation->Reset and click ..
9
4-40
41-001160-00, Rev 01 Release 2.0
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Network Configuration of the IP Phones
Advanced Network Settings
Network Time Servers
Network Time Protocol (NTP) is a protocol that the IP phone uses to synchronize
the phone clock time with a computer (configuration server) in the network.
To use NTP, you must enable it using the configuration files or the Aastra Web UI.
You can specify up to three time servers in your network.
Note: The IP phones support NTP version 1.
Configuring NTP Servers (optional)
Use the following procedure to enable/disable and configure the NTP servers
using the configuration files.
Configuration Files
For specific parameters you can set in the configuration files, see Appendix A, the section, “Time Server
Settings” on page A-28.
Use the following procedure to enable/disable the NTP server using the IP Phone
UI.
IP Phone UI
Step Action
1
2
3
Press
on the phone to enter the Options List.
Select Time and Date.
Select Time Server.
Note: The Timer Server is disabled by default.
Press Enable to enable the Time Server.
Press Done to save the change.
4
5
41-001160-00, Rev 01 Release 2.0
4-41
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
IP Phone Administrator Guide
Advanced Network Settings
Use the following procedure to enable/disable and configure the NTP Servers
using the Aastra Web UI..
Aastra Web UI
Step Action
1
Click on Advanced Settings->Network->Advanced Network Settings.
2
3
(Disable this field by unchecking the box).
Enter an IP address or qualified domain name in the "Time Server 1", "Time Server 2", and/or
"Time Server 3" field(s) to specify the location of the NTP time server.
Note: To enable/disable time serving, set the time/date format, and set the time zone, see “Time
Server Settings” on page A-28. These parameters can be set using the configuration files only.
4
Click
to save your changes.
4-42
41-001160-00, Rev 01 Release 2.0
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Network Configuration of the IP Phones
Advanced Network Settings
Session Initiation Protocol (SIP) Settings
The IP phone uses the information in the Session Initiation Protocol (SIP) settings
to register at the IP PBX.
The IP phone configuration defines network and user account parameters that
apply globally to all SIP lines. Since not all SIP lines are necessarily hosted using
the same IP-PBX/server or user account, additional sets of per-line parameters
can also be defined for network and user account.
You configure and modify these parameters and associated values using the
configuration files, the IP phone UI, or the Aastra Web UI. The Aastra Web UI
and configuration file methods configure global and per-line SIP settings on the IP
phone. The IP phone UI configures global SIP settings only.
The following tables identify the SIP global and per-line, authentication and
network parameters on the IP phones.
SIP Global Parameters
Configuration File Parameters Aastra Web UI Parameters
SIP Global Authentication Parameters
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
sip screen name
sip user name
sip display name
sip auth name
sip password
sip bla number
sip mode
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Screen Name
Phone Number
Caller ID
Authentication Name
Password
BLA Number
Line Mode
sip vmail
SIP Global Network Parameters
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
sip proxy ip
sip proxy port
sip backup proxy ip
sip backup proxy port
sip outbound proxy
sip outbound proxy port
sip registrar ip
Proxy Server
Proxy Port
Backup Proxy Server
Backup Proxy Port
Outbound Proxy Server
Outbound Proxy Port
Registrar Server
sip registrar port
Registrar Port
sip backup registrar ip
sip backup registrar port
sip registration period
Backup Registrar Server
Backup Registrar Port
Registration Period
41-001160-00, Rev 01 Release 2.0
4-43
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
IP Phone Administrator Guide
Advanced Network Settings
SIP Per-Line Parameters
Configuration File Parameters
Aastra Web UI Parameters
SIP Per-Line Authentication Parameters
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
sip lineN screen name
sip lineN user name
sip lineN display name
sip lineN auth name
sip lineN password
sip lineN bla number
sip lineN mode
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Screen Name
Phone Number
Caller ID
Authentication Name
Password
BLA Number
Line Mode
sip lineN vmail
SIP Per-Line Network Parameters
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
sip lineN proxy ip
sip lineN proxy port
Proxy Server
Proxy Port
sip lineN backup proxy ip
sip lineN backup proxy port
sip lineN outbound proxy
sip lineN outbound proxy port
sip lineN registrar ip
sip lineN registrar port
sip lineN backup registrar ip
sip lineN backup registrar port Backup Registrar Port
Backup Proxy Server
Backup Proxy Port
Outbound Proxy Server
Outbound Proxy Port
Registrar Server
Registrar Port
Backup Registrar Server
Note: The "sip vmail" and "sip lineN vmail" parameters are configurable
using the configuration files only. To configure voicemail see Chapter 5,
the section, “Voicemail (55i, 57i, and 57i CT only)” on page 5-113.
Specific sets of SIP parameters are inter-dependent with each other. To prevent
conflicting parameter values from being applied, per-line values always take
precedence over the corresponding set of global values.
For example, if a parameter value is configured for one of the per-line sets, all
parameters from that set are applied and all parameters from the corresponding
global section are ignored, even if some of the parameters within the global set are
not defined in the per-line set.
4-44
41-001160-00, Rev 01 Release 2.0
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Network Configuration of the IP Phones
Advanced Network Settings
SIP Precedence Example
The following example shows the SIP proxy feature and example schema for
storage and parsing of the SIP configuration parameters.
The following SIP configuration is assumed:
# SIP network block
sip proxy ip: 10.30.11.154
sip proxy port: 5060
sip registrar ip: 10.44.122.37
sip registrar port: 4020
sip line3 proxy ip: siparator.vonage.com
sip line3 proxy port: 0
Line3 specifies per-line values for proxy IP address and proxy port, so the phone
uses those parameter values for SIP calls made on that line. However, because
those parameters are part of the SIP network block, the phone does not apply any
of the global SIP network block parameters. So even though the global parameters
configure a SIP registrar, Line3 on the phone ignores all global network block
parameters. Since line3 does not contain a per-line SIP registrar entry, the phone
does not use a registrar for that line.
Note: Global SIP parameters apply to all lines unless overridden by a
per-line configuration.
Per-line settings are configurable for lines 1 through 7
41-001160-00, Rev 01 Release 2.0
4-45
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
IP Phone Administrator Guide
Advanced Network Settings
Backup Proxy/Registrar Support
The IP phones support a backup SIP proxy and backup SIP registrar feature. If
the primary server is unavailable, the phone automatically swtiches to the backup
server allowing the user's phone to remain in service.
How it Works
All SIP registration messages are sent to the primary registrar first. If the server is
unavailable, then a new registration request is sent to the backup registrar. This
also applies to registraion renewal messages, which try the primary server before
the backup.
Similarly, any outgoing calls attempt to use the primary proxy first, then the
backup if necessary. In addition, subscriptions for BLF, BLA, and explicit MWI
can also use the backup proxy when the primary fails. Outgoing calls and the
previously mentioned subscriptions behave the same as registrations, where the
primary proxy is tried before the backup.
You can configure the backup SIP proxy on a global or per-line basis via the
configuration files or the Aastra Web UI.
SIP Server (SRV) Lookup
The SIP SRV Lookup feature allows you to configure the IP phone to perform a
DNS server lookup on a SIP proxy, a SIP registrar, or a SIP outbound proxy.
The IP phone performs an SRV lookup when the IP address of the server is FQDN
and the corresponding port is 0.
For example, if the phone is configured with sip proxy ip of "ana.aastra.com",
and sip proxy port of "0", the SRV lookup may return multilple servers, based on
the priorities if one is selected as primary and others are selected as secondary.
However, if the IP address is an FQDN and the corresponding server port is
non-zero, then the phone performs a DNS "A" Name Query to resolve the FQDN
into dot notation form.
If the IP address is a valid dot notation and the port is zero, then a default port
5060 is used.
4-46
41-001160-00, Rev 01 Release 2.0
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Network Configuration of the IP Phones
Advanced Network Settings
You can configure SRV lookup using the configuration files (aastra.cfg and
<mac>.cfg) only. The parameters to use are:
•
•
sip proxy ip
sip proxy port
Configuring Basic SIP Settings (optonal)
You can configure SIP settings using the configuration files, the IP Phone UI, or
the Aastra Web UI.
Note: To configure the SIP settings per-line, use the configuration files or
the Aastra Web UI.
Configuration Files
For specific parameters you can set in the configuration files, see Appendix A, the section, “SIP Basic,
Global Settings” on page A-40 or “SIP Basic, Per-Line Settings” on page A-48
Note: You can set global configuration only using the IP Phone UI.
41-001160-00, Rev 01 Release 2.0
4-47
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
IP Phone Administrator Guide
Advanced Network Settings
IP Phone UI
Step Action
1
2
3
Press
on the phone to enter the Options List.
Select SIP Settings.
Select Proxy Server (or Proxy IP for 57i/57i CT) and enter an IP address or fully qualified host name
for the SIP proxy server.
4
5
Select Proxy Port and enter a port for accessing the SIP proxy server.
Select Registrar Server (or Registrar IP for 57i/57i CT) and enter an IP address or fully qualified
host name for the SIP registrar server. A global value of 0.0.0.0 disables registration. However, the
phone is still active and you can dial using username@ip address of the phone.
If the Registrar IP address is set to 0.0.0.0 for a per-line basis (i.e, line 1, line 2, etc.), then the
register request is not sent, the "No Service" message does not display, and the message waiting
indicator (MWI) does not come on.
6
7
Select Registrar Port and enter a port number for accessing the SIP registrar server.
Select Register and press Change to set Register to "Yes" (enable) or "No" (disable).
This parameter enables/disables the IP phone to register on the network.
8
9
Select User Name to enter the user name in the name field of the SIP URI for the IP phone, and for
registering the phone at the registrar.
Select Display Name to enter the name used in the display name field of the "From SIP" header
field.
10
11
Select Screen Name to enter the name that displays on the idle screen.
Select Auth Name to enter the authorization name used in the username field of the Authorization
header field of the SIP REGISTER request.
12
13
14
15
Select Password to enter the password used to register the IP phone with the SIP proxy.
Press Done to save the changes.
Select Phone Status.
Select Restart Phone and press Restart to reboot the phone for the VLAN features to take affect.
4-48
41-001160-00, Rev 01 Release 2.0
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Network Configuration of the IP Phones
Advanced Network Settings
.
Aastra Web UI
Step Action
1
For global configuration, click on Advanced Settings->Global SIP->Basic SIP Settings.
41-001160-00, Rev 01 Release 2.0
4-49
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
IP Phone Administrator Guide
Advanced Network Settings
Aastra Web UI
Step Action
Or, for per-line configuration, click on Advanced Settings->Line N (1-9).
To configure SIP authentication settings:
2
3
4
5
In the "Screen Name" field, enter the screen name that displays on the idle screen.
In the "Phone Number" field, enter the phone number of the IP phone.
In the "Caller ID" field, enter the phone number of the IP phone.
In the "Authentication Name" field, enter the name used in the username field of the Authorization
header of the SIP REGISTER request.
6
7
In the "Password" field, enter the password used to register the IP phone with the SIP proxy.
In the "BLA Number" field, enter the Bridge Line Appearance (BLA) number to be shared across all
IP phones.
4-50
41-001160-00, Rev 01 Release 2.0
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Network Configuration of the IP Phones
Advanced Network Settings
Aastra Web UI
Step Action
8
In the "Line Mode" field, select "Generic" for normal mode, "BroadSoft SCA" for a BroadWorks
network, or "Nortel" for a Nortel network.
To configure SIP network settings:
9
In the "Proxy Server" field, enter an IP address or fully qualified host name of the SIP proxy server.
In the "Proxy Port" field, enter a port number for accessing the SIP proxy server.
10
11
In the "Backup Proxy Server" field, enter an IP address or fully qualified host name for the backup
proxy server.
12
13
In the "Backup Proxy Port" field, enter a port number for accessing the backup proxy server.
In the "Outbound Proxy Server" field, enter the SIP outbound proxy server IP address or fully
qualified domain name. This parameter allows all SIP messages originating from a line on the IP
phone, to be sent to an outbound proxy server.
Note: If you configure an outbound proxy and registrar for a specific line, and you also configure a
global outbound proxy and registrar, the IP phone uses the global configuration for all lines except
line 1. Line 1 uses the outbound proxy and registrar that you configured for that line.
14
15
In the "Outbound Proxy Port" field, enter the port on the IP phone that allows SIP messages to be
sent to the outbound proxy server.
In the "Registrar Server" field, enter an IP address or fully qualified host name for the SIP registrar
server. A global value of 0.0.0.0 disables registration. However, the phone is still active and you can
dial using username@ip address of the phone.
If the Registrar IP address is set to 0.0.0.0 for a per-line basis (i.e, line 1, line 2, etc.), then the
register request is not sent, the "No Service" message does not display, and the message waiting
indicator (MWI) does not come on.
16
17
In the "Registrar Port" field, enter the port number associated with the Registrar.
In the "Backup Registrar Server" field, enter an IP address or fully qualified host name for the
backup registrar server. A global value of 0.0.0.0 disables registration. However, the phone is still
active and you can dial using username@ip address of the phone.
If the Backup Registrar IP address is set to 0.0.0.0 for a per-line basis (i.e, line 1, line 2, etc.), then
the register request is not sent, the "No Service" message does not display, and the message waiting
indicator (MWI) does not come on.
18
In the "Backup Registrar Port" field, enter the port number associated with the backup registrar.
41-001160-00, Rev 01 Release 2.0
4-51
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
IP Phone Administrator Guide
Advanced Network Settings
Aastra Web UI
Step Action
19
In the "Registration Period" field, enter the requested registration period, in seconds, from the
registrar.
20
Click
to save your changes.
4-52
41-001160-00, Rev 01 Release 2.0
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Network Configuration of the IP Phones
Advanced Network Settings
Configuring Advanced SIP Settings (optional)
Using the configuration files or the Aastra Web UI, you can set more advanced
Configuration File Parameters
Aastra Web UI Parameters
sip explicit mwi subscription
sip explicit mwi subscription period
sip send mac (see Chapter 6)
sip send line (see Chapter 6)
sip session timer
Explicit MWI Subscription
Explicit MWI Subscription Period
Send MAC Address in REGISTER Message (see Chapter 6)
Send Line Number in REGISTER Message (see Chapter 6)
Session Timer
sip T1 timer
T1 Timer
sip T2 timer
T2 Timer
sip transaction timer
Transaction Timer
sip transport protocol
Transport Protocol
sip registration retry timer
sip registration timeout retry timer
sip registration renewal timer
sip blf subscription period (see Chapter 5)
Registration Failed Retry Timer
Registration Timeout Retry Timer
Registration Renewal Timer
BLF Subscription Period (see Chapter 5)
Note: You configure advanced SIP settings on a global basis only.
Refer to Appendix A,“Advanced SIP Settings” on page A-58 for a description of
each of the above parameters.
Use the following procedures to configure the advanced SIP settings on the IP
phone.
Configuration Files
For specific parameters you can set in the configuration files, see Appendix A, the section, “Advanced SIP
Settings” on page A-58.
41-001160-00, Rev 01 Release 2.0
4-53
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
IP Phone Administrator Guide
Advanced Network Settings
.
Aastra Web UI
Step Action
1
Click on Advanced Settings->Global SIP->Advanced SIP Settings.
2
3
Enable the "Explicit MWI Subscription" field by checking the check box.
(Disable this field by unchecking the check box).
Indicator (MWI) (LED or display icon) tells the user there is a message on the IP Phone.
If you enable the “Explicit MWI Subscription” field, then in the “Explicit MWI Subscription Period”
field, enter the requested duration, in seconds, before the MWI subscription times out. The phone
re-subscribes to MWI before the subscription period ends. Default is 86400.
4
5
For information about enabling/disabling “MAC Address” and “Line Number” in REGISTER
Messages, see Chapter 6, “Advanced IP Phone Operational Features”.
In the "Session Timer" field, enter the time, in seconds, that the IP phone uses to send periodic
re-INVITE requests to keep a session alive. The proxy uses these re-INVITE requests to maintain the
status' of the connected sessions. See RFC4028 for details.
4-54
41-001160-00, Rev 01 Release 2.0
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Network Configuration of the IP Phones
Advanced Network Settings
Aastra Web UI
Step Action
6
In the "Timer 1 and Timer 2" fields, enter a time, in milliseconds, that will apply to an IP phone
session. These timers are SIP transaction layer timers defined in RFC 3261.
Timer 1 is an estimate of the round-trip time (RTT). Default is 500 msec.
Timer 2 represents the amount of time a non-INVITE server transaction takes to respond to a
request. Default is 4 seconds.
7
In the "Transaction Timer" field, enter the amount of time, in milliseconds, that the phone allows the
callserver (registrar/proxy) to respond to SIP messages that it sends.
Valid values are 4000 to 64000. Default is 4000.
Note: If the phone does not receive a response in the amount of time designated for this parameter,
the phone assumes the message has timed out.
8
In the "Transport Protocol" field, select a transport protocol to use when sending SIP Real-time
Transport Protocol (RTP) packets. Valid values are User Datagram Protocol (UDP), Transmission
Control Protocol (TCP), or both.
9
In the " Registration Failed Retry Timer" field, enter the amount of time, in seconds, that the phone
waits between registration attempts when a registration is rejected by the registrar.
Valid values are 30 to 1800. Default is 1800.
10
In the " Registration Timeout Retry Timer" field, enter the amount of time, in seconds, that the
phone waits until it re-attempts to register after a REGISTER message times out.
Valid values are 30 to 214748364. Default is 120.
11
In the " Registration Renewal Timer" field, enter the length of time, in seconds, prior to expiration,
that the phone renews registrations.
For example, if the value is set to 20, then 20 seconds before the registration is due to expire, a new
REGISTER message is sent to the registrar to renew the registration.
Valid values are 0 to 214748364. Default is 15.
12
13
For information about setting the “BLF Subscription Period”, see Chapter 5, the section,
“BLF Subscription Period” on page 5-48.
Click
to save your changes.
41-001160-00, Rev 01 Release 2.0
4-55
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
IP Phone Administrator Guide
Advanced Network Settings
Real-time Transport Protocol (RTP) Settings
Real-time Transport Protocol (RTP) is used as the bearer path for voice packets
sent over the IP network. Information in the RTP header tells the receiver how to
reconstruct the data and describes how the bit streams are packetized (i.e. which
codec is in use). Real-time Transport Control Protocol (RTCP) allows endpoints
to monitor packet delivery, detect and compensate for any packet loss in the
network. Session Initiation Protocol (SIP) and H.323 both use RTP and RTCP for
the media stream, with User Datagram Protocol (UDP) as the transport layer
encapsulation protocol.
Note: If RFC2833 relay of DTMF tones is configured, it is sent on the
same port as the RTP voice packets.
RTP Port
RTP is described in RFC1889. The UDP port used for RTP streams is traditionally
an even-numbered port, and the RTCP control is on the next port up. A phone call
therefore uses one pair of ports for each media stream.
On the Aastra IP phone, the initial port used as the starting point for RTP/RTCP
port allocation can be configured using "RTP Port Base". The default RTP base
port on the IP phones is 3000.
For example, if the RTP base port value is 5000, the first voice patch sends RTP
on port 5000 and RTCP on port 5001. Additional calls would then use ports 5002,
5003, etc.
You can configure the RTP port on a global-basis only, using the configuration
files, the IP Phone UI, or the Aastra Web UI.
Basic Codecs
CODEC is an acronym for COmpress-DECompress. It consists of a set of
instructions that together implement one or more algorithms. In the case of IP
telephony, these algorithms are used to compress the sampled speech data, to
decrease the content's file size and bit-rate (the amount of network bandwidth in
kilobits per second) required to transfer the audio. With smaller file sizes and
lower bit rates, the network equipment can store and stream digital media content
over a network more easily.
4-56
41-001160-00, Rev 01 Release 2.0
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Network Configuration of the IP Phones
Advanced Network Settings
Aastra IP phones support the International Telecommunications Union (ITU)
transmission standards for the following CODECs:
•
Waveform CODECs: G.711 pulse code modulation (PCM) with a-Law or
u-Law companding
•
Parametric CODEC: G.729a conjugate structure - algebraic code excited
linear prediction (CS_ACELP).
All Codecs have a sampling rate of 8,000 samples per second, and operate and
operate in the 300 Hz to 3,700 Hz audio range. The following table lists the
default settings for bit rate, algorithm, packetization time, and silence suppression
for each Codec, based on a minimum packet size.
Default Codec Settings.
Packetizatio
n Time
Silence
CODEC
G.711 a-law
G.711 u-law
G.729a
Bit Rate
64 Kb/s
64 Kb/s
Algorithm
PCM
Suppression
30 ms
30 ms
30 ms
enabled
enabled
enabled
PCM
8
Kb/s
CS-ACELP
You can enable the IP phones to use a default "basic codec" set, which consists of
the set of codecs and packet sizes shown above.
Or you can instead configure a custom set of codecs and attributes instead of using
the defaults.
Note: The basic and custom codec paramters apply to all calls, and are
configured on a global-basis only using the configuration files or the
Aastra Web UI.
41-001160-00, Rev 01 Release 2.0
4-57
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
IP Phone Administrator Guide
Advanced Network Settings
Customized Codec Preference List
You can also configure the IP phones to use preferred Codecs. To do this, you
must enter the payload value (payload), the packetization time in milliseconds
(ptime), and enable or disable silence suppression (silsupp).
Payload is the codec type to be used. This represents the data format carried
within the RTP packets to the end user at the destination. You can enter payload
values for G.711 a-law, G.711 u-law, and G.729a.
Ptime (packetization time) is a measurment of the duration of PCM data within
each RTP packet sent to the destination, and hence defines how much network
bandwidth is used for transfer of the the RTP stream. You enter the ptime values
for the customized Codec list in milliseconds. (See table below).
Silsupp is used to enable or disable silence suppression. Voice Activity Detection
(VAD) on the IP phones is used to determine whether each individual packet
contains useful speech data. Enabling silsupp results in decreased network
bandwidth, by avoiding sending RTP packets for any frame where no voice
energy was detected by the VAD.
You must enter the values for this feature in list form as shown in the following
example:
payload=8;ptime=10;silsupp=on; payload=0;ptime=10;silsupp=off
The valid values for creating a Codec preference list are as follows.
Customized Codec Settings
Attribute
payload
Value
0 for G.711 u-Law
8 for G.711 a-Law
18 for G.729a
ptime (in milliseconds)
silsupp
5, 10, 15, 20.......90
on
off
You can specify a customized Codec preference list on a global-basis using the
configuration files or the Aastra Web UI.
4-58
41-001160-00, Rev 01 Release 2.0
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Network Configuration of the IP Phones
Advanced Network Settings
Out-of-Band DTMF
The IP phones support out-of-band Dual-Tone Multifrequency (DTMF) mode
according to RFC2833. In the Aastra Web UI, you can enable or disable this
feature as required. The "out-of-band DTMF" is enabled by default.
In out-of-band mode, the DTMF audio is automatically clamped (muted) and
DTMF digits are not sent in the RTP packets.
You can configure out-of-band DTMF on a global-basis using the configuration
files or the Aastra Web UI.
DTMF Method
A feature on the IP phone allows you to select the DTMF method that the phone
uses to send DTMF digits from the IP phone via INFO messages. You can set the
DTMF method as Real-Time Transport Protocol (RTP), SIP info, or both.
You can configure the DTMF method on a global or per-line basis using the
configuration files or the Aastra Web UI.
Silence Suppression
In IP telephony, silence on a line (lack of voice) uses up bandwidth when sending
voice over a packet-switched system. Silence suppression is encoding that starts
and stops the times of silence in order to eliminate that wasted bandwidth.
Silence suppression is enabled by default on the IP phones. The phone negotiates
whether or not to use silence suppression. Disabling this feature forces the phone
to ignore any negotiated value.
You can configure this parameter via the configuration files or the Aastra Web UI.
41-001160-00, Rev 01 Release 2.0
4-59
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
IP Phone Administrator Guide
Advanced Network Settings
Configuring RTP Features
Codecs, DTMF, and silence suppression on the IP phone.
Configuration Files
For specific parameters you can set in the configuration files, see Appendix A, the sections:
•
•
•
“RTP, Codec, DTMF Global Settings” on page A-63
“DTMF Per-Line Settings” on page A-65
“Silence Suppression Settings” on page A-66.
IP Phone UI
Step Action
1
2
3
4
5
6
Press
on the phone to enter the Options List.
Select SIP Settings.
Select RTP Port Base to change the RTP port base setting. Default is 3000.
Press Done to save the RTP Port Base setting.
Select Phone Status.
Select Restart Phone and press Restart to restart the IP phone.
4-60
41-001160-00, Rev 01 Release 2.0
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Network Configuration of the IP Phones
Advanced Network Settings
.
Aastra Web UI
Step Action
1
Click on Advanced Settings->Global SIP->RTP Settings.
2
3
Enter an RTP Port Base in the RTP Port field. Default is 3000.
Enable the "Basic Codecs (G.711 u-Law, G.711 a-Law, G.729)" field by checking the check box.
(Disable this field by unchecking the box). Enabling this parameter allows the IP phone to use the
basic Codecs when sending/receiving RTP packets.
4
Enable the "Force RFC2833 Out-of-Band DTMF" field by checking the check box. (Disable this field
by unchecking the box). Enabling this parameter forces the IP phone to use out-of-band DTMF
according to RFC2833.
41-001160-00, Rev 01 Release 2.0
4-61
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
IP Phone Administrator Guide
Advanced Network Settings
Aastra Web UI
Step Action
5
Enter a "Customized Codec Preference List" which all
payload=8;ptime=10;
silsupp=on;
payload=0;ptime=10;
silsupp=off
Valid values are:
Attribute
payload
Value
0 for G.711 u-Law
8 for G.711 a-Law
18 for G.729a
ptime (in milliseconds)
silsupp
5, 10, 15, 20.....90
on
off
6
ISelect a method to use from the DTMF Method list box. Valid values are RTP, SIP Info, Both.
Note: You can also configure the DTMF Method on a per-line basis at Advanced Settings->
Line N (1-9).
7
8
9
Silence suppression is enabled by default. If required, disable the "Silence Suppression" field by
unchecking the check box.
Click
to save your changes.
..
Select Operation->Reset and click
4-62
41-001160-00, Rev 01 Release 2.0
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 5
Operational IP Phone Features
About this chapter
Introduction
The IP phones have specific operational features you can configure to customize
your IP phone. This chapter describes each feature and provides procedures for
configuring your phone to use these features.
Topics
Topic
Page
Operational Features
page 5-3
page 5-6
page 5-8
page 5-9
page 5-14
page 5-18
page 5-21
page 5-35
page 5-37
page 5-39
page 5-41
page 5-48
User Passwords
Administrator Passwords
Locking and Unlocking the Phone
Time and Date
Hard Keys
Softkeys/Programmable Keys/Feature Keys
Locking IP Phone Keys
Suppressing DTMF Playback
Display DTMF Digits
Busy Lamp Field (BLF)
BLF Subscription Period
41-001160-00, Rev 01 Release 2.0
5-1
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
IP Phone Administrator Guide
About this chapter
Topic
Page
Directed Call Pickup (BLF or XML Call Interception)
page 5-50
page 5-65
page 5-67
page 5-73
page 5-86
page 5-90
page 5-96
page 5-101
page 5-103
page 5-113
page 5-116
page 5-137
page 5-142
page 5-146
page 5-148
page 5-153
page 5-160
page 5-162
page 5-164
Do Not Disturb (DND)
Bridged Line Appearance (BLA) (57i/57i CT/53i only)
Park Calls/Pick Up Parked Calls
Last Call Return (lcr) (Sylantro Servers only)
Call Forwarding
Callers List
Missed Calls Indicator
Directory List
Voicemail (55i, 57i, and 57i CT only)
XML Customized Services
SIP Local Dial Plan
Incoming/Outgoing Intercom with Auto-Answer
Audio Transmit and Receive Gain Adjustments
Ring Tones and Tone Sets
Priority Alerting
Stuttered Dial Tone
Call Waiting Tone
Language
5-2
41-001160-00, Rev 01 Release 2.0
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Operational IP Phone Features
Operational Features
Operational Features
Description
The IP phone has the following operational features:
Feature
Description
User Passwords
Allows you to change user passwords on the IP phone.
Administrator Passwords
Allows you to change the administrator passwords on the IP
phone (via configuration files only)
Locking and Unlocking the Phone
Allows you to lock or unlock the phone preventing anyone from
using or configuring the phone. This feature also allows you to
reset a user password, and set an emergency dial plan.
Time and Date
Hard Keys
Allows you to set the time, time format, date, date format,
timezone, and daylight savings time on the IP phone.
Allows you enable or disable the use of the Redial,
Conference (Conf), and Transfer (Xfer) hard keys on the IP
phone. Also allows you to se the Redial and Conf keys as
speeddials.
Softkeys/Programmable Keys
Locking IP Phone Keys
Suppressing DTMF Playback
Display DTMF Digits
Allows you to configure softkeys or programmable keys (the
53i has programmable keys only) with specific settings such
as speeddial, do not disturb, or BLF.
Allows you to lock or unlock programmable keys, softkeys,
hard keys, cordless handset keys, and expansion keys (for
expansion modules).
Allows you to enable or disable the suppression of DTMF
playback when a softkey or programmable key is pressed to
dial a number.
Allows you to enable or disable the display of DTMF digits
(digits being dialed) to the IP phone’s LCD display.
Busy Lamp Field (BLF)
(55i, 57i, 57i CT only)
Softkey setting that allows extensions to be monitored for state
changes.
BLF Subscription Period (57i/57i CT/53i) Allows you to set the time period that the phone resubscribes
the BLF subscription service after a software/firmware
upgrade or after a reboot of the IP phone.
Directed Call Pickup (BLF Call
Interception) (55i, 57i, 57i CT only)
Allows you to enable or disable the use of the Directed Call
Pickup feature.
41-001160-00, Rev 01 Release 2.0
5-3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
IP Phone Administrator Guide
Operational Features
Feature
Description
Do Not Disturb (DND)
Key setting that allows you to set the phone to "do not
disturb".
Bridged Line Appearance (BLA)
(55i, 57i, 57i CT only)
Allows you to assign a phone number to lines that are shared
across all phones (global configuration) or shared on a per-line
basis (per-line configuration)
Park Calls/Pick Up Parked Calls
Allows you to configure the parking of a live call to a specific
extension. You can then pick up the parked call using the call
pickup feature.
Last Call Return (lcr)
(Sylantro Servers only)
Allows you to configure a "last call return" function on a softkey
or programmable key. This feature is for Sylantro servers only.
Call Forwarding
Allows incoming calls on the IP phone to be forwarded to
another destination. You can also enable or disable the ability
to configure the Call Forward feature.
Callers List
Displays a list of callers that have called the IP phone. You can
also enable or disable the Caller List feature.
Missed Calls Indicator
Directory List
Displays the number of missed calls on the IP phone. You can
also enable or disable the Missed Calls Indicator feature.
Displays a list of names and phone numbers in a directory
listing. You can add to this list and edit existing entries. You
can also enable or disable the Directory List feature.
Voicemail (57i/57i CT only)
XML Customized Services
SIP Local Dial Plan
Allows the IP phone to forward incoming calls to a voicemail
service.
Allows you to customize the IP phone UI using XML
applications.
Allows the IP phone to use a specific dial plan and dial plan
terminator settings. Also allows you to set an idle display
name.
Incoming/Outgoing Intercom with
Auto-Answer
Allows you to press the Icom button and enter the number you
want to call to initiate an Intercom call. The call can be
controlled either locally (phone-side) or by the SIP server
(server-side). You can also enable/disable auto-answer and
mute/unmute the microphone.
Audio Transmit and Receive Gain
Adjustments
Allows you to adjust the default audio transmit and receive
gain settings for the handset, headset, and speakerphone.
Ring Tones and Tone Sets
Allows you to set the type of ring tone and ring tone set to use
on the IP phone. Ring tones can be configured on a global or
per-line basis. Ring tone sets are configurable on a
global-basis only.
5-4
41-001160-00, Rev 01 Release 2.0
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Operational IP Phone Features
Operational Features
Feature
Description
Priority Alerting
Allows you to enable or disable priority alert settings. Priority
alerting allows incoming calls to trigger pre-defined ringing or
call waiting alert tones. Also allows you to set Sylantro-only
settings for priority alerting.
Stuttered Dial Tone
Call Waiting Tone
Allows you to enable or disable the playing of a stuttered dial
tone when there is a message waiting on the IP phone.
Allows you to enable or disable the playing of a call waiting
tone when a caller is on an active call and a new call comes
into the phone.
Language
Allows you to set the language to display on the IP phone UI
and the Aastra Web UI. For the 53i, 55i, and 57i , valid
languages are English (default), French, Spanish, German,
and Italian. For the 57i CT, valid languages are English
(default), French, and Spanish.
The following paragraphs describe each of these features.
41-001160-00, Rev 01 Release 2.0
5-5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
IP Phone Administrator Guide
Operational Features
User Passwords
A user or an administrator can change the user passwords on the phone using the
configuration files, the IP phone UI, or the Aastra Web UI. Use the following
procedures to change the user password.
Configuration Files
For specific parameters you can set in the configuration files, see Appendix A, the section, “Password
Settings” on page A-8.
IP Phone UI
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
Press
on the phone to enter the Options List.
Select User Password.
Enter the current user password.
Enter the current user password.
Enter the new user password.
Re-enter the new user password.
Press Enter to save the new password.
A message,"Password Changed" displays on the screen
5-6
41-001160-00, Rev 01 Release 2.0
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Operational IP Phone Features
Operational Features
Aastra Web UI
1
Click on Operation->User Password.
2
3
4
5
In the "Current Password" field, enter the current user password.
In the "New Password" field, enter the new user password.
In the "Password Confirm" field, enter the new user password again.
Click
to save your changes.
41-001160-00, Rev 01 Release 2.0
5-7
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
IP Phone Administrator Guide
Operational Features
Administrator Passwords
An administrator can change the administrator passwords on the phone using the
configuration files only.
An administrator can also assign a password for using the Options key on the IP
phone. You turn this feature on and off by entering the "options password
enabled" parameter followed by a valid value in the configuration files. Valid
values are 0 (false; Options key not password protected), or 1 (true; Options key
password protected). If this parameter is set to 1, a user has to enter a password at
the IP phone UI. If the password is entered correctly, the user is allowed to gain
access to the Options Menu and no more password prompts display for other
password protected screens. If the user fails to enter the correct password in three
attempts, access to the Options Mneu is denied and the IP phoen returns to the idle
screen.
Procedure
Use the following procedure to change the administrator password.
Configuration Files
For specific parameters you can set in the configuration files, see Appendix A, the section, “Password
Settings” on page A-8.
5-8
41-001160-00, Rev 01 Release 2.0
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Operational IP Phone Features
Operational Features
Locking and Unlocking the Phone
A user or administrator can lock a phone to prevent the phone from being used or
configured. You can lock the phone using the IP Phone UI or the Aastra Web UI.
Using the Aastra Web UI, the Operation->Phone Lock path also allows you to
perform the following:
•
Reset a user password. Clicking on the “Reset” button in the “Reset User
Password” field displays a screen that allows you to enter and save a new
user password.
•
Set an emergency dial plan. An emergency dial plan can be 911, 999, 112, 110
or all of the above. The default emergency dial plan is 911|999|112|110.
The following procedures describe locking the phone, setting an emergency dial
plan, and resetting the user password.
Locking/Unlocking a Phone
Use the following procedures to lock an IP phone and prevent it from being used
or configured.
IP Phone UI
Step Action
Lock the phone:
1
2
3
4
Press
on the phone to enter the Options List.
Select Phone Lock and press the
navigation key.
Press
Press
to set the phone to lock.
on the phone.
The following message displays:
“Phone is locked”.
Unlock the phone:
1
2
Press
on the phone to enter the Options List.
Enter the user or administrator password and press
The phone unlocks.
Enter.
41-001160-00, Rev 01 Release 2.0
5-9
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Aastra Web UI
1
Click on Operation->Phone Lock.
Lock the phone:
In the “Lock the Phone?” field, click
2
.
The phone locks dyanamically and displays the following message:
“Phone is locked”.
Unlock the phone:
3
4
Click on Operation->Phone Lock.
In the “Unlock the Phone?” field, click
.
The phone unlocks dyanamically and displays the following message:
“Phone is unlocked”.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Operational IP Phone Features
Operational Features
Resetting a User Password
If a user forgets his password, either the user or an administrator can reset it so a
new password can be entered. The reset user password feature resets the password
to the factory default which is blank (no password).
You can reset a user password using the Aastra Web UI only. Use the following
procedure to reset a user password.
Aastra Web UI
1
Click on Operation->Phone Lock.
2
In the “Reset User Password” field, click
.
The following screen displays:
41-001160-00, Rev 01 Release 2.0
5-11
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
IP Phone Administrator Guide
Operational Features
Aastra Web UI
3
4
5
6
In the “Current Password” field, leave this blank.
In the “New Password” field, enter a new password for the user.
In the “Password Confirm” field, re-etner the new user password.
Click
to save the new user password.
Defining an Emergency Dial Plan
Public telephone networks in countries around the world have a single emergency
telephone number (emergency services number), that allows a caller to contact
local emergency services for assistance when required. The emergency telephone
number may differ from country to country. It is typically a three-digit number so
that it can be easily remembered and dialed quickly. Some countries have a
different emergency number for each of the different emergency services.
You can specify the digits to dial on the IP phone for contacting emergency
services. Once you specify the emergency number(s) on the phone, you can dial
those numbers directly on the dial pad when required and the phone automatically
dials to those emergency services.
Note: Contact your local phone service provider for available emergency
numbers in your area.
The following table describes the default emergency numbers on the IP phones.
Emergency Number
Description
911
999
112
A United States emergency number
A United Kingdom emergency number
An international emergency telephone
number for GSM mobile phone networks.
In all European Union countries it is also the
emergency telephone number for both
mobile and fixed-line telephones.
110
A police and/or fire emergency number in
Asia, Europe, Middle East, and South
America.
5-12
41-001160-00, Rev 01 Release 2.0
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Operational IP Phone Features
Operational Features
You can set the emergency dial plan via the configuration files or the Aastra Web
UI. Use the following procedures to specify the numbers to use on your phone for
dialing emergency services in your area.
Configuration Files
For specific parameters you can set in the configuration files, see Appendix A, the section, “Emergency Dial
Plan Settings” on page A-9.
Aastra Web UI
1
Click on Operation->Phone Lock.
2
3
In the “Emergency Dial Plan” field, enter the 3-digit number used in your local area to contact emer-
gency services. For multiple numbers, enter a “|” between each emergency number.
For example:
911|110.
Default for this field is 911|999|112|110.
Click
to save the emergency dial plan to your phone.
41-001160-00, Rev 01 Release 2.0
5-13
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
IP Phone Administrator Guide
Operational Features
Time and Date
In addition to enabling/disabling the time server, you can also set the time and
date, set the time and date format, set the time zone, and set daylight savings time
on the IP phones. You configure these features using the configuration files, the IP
Phone UI, or the Aastra Web UI. The following table identifies which method of
configuration applies to each feature.
Feature
Method of configuration
Set Time
IP Phone UI
Set Time Format
Configuration Files
IP Phone UI
Aastra Web UI
Set Date
IP Phone UI
Set Date Format
Configuration Files
IP Phone UI
Aastra Web UI
Set Time Zone
IP Phone UI
Configuration Files
Set Daylight Savings Time
IP Phone UI
Configuration Files
Use the following procedures to set a time and date, time and date format, time
zone, and daylight savings time on the IP phones.
Configuration Files
For specific parameters you can set in the configuration files, see Appendix A, the section, “Time and Date
Settings” on page A-30.
IP Phone UI
Step Action
1
Press
on the phone to enter the Options List.
Set Time and Time Format:
5-14
41-001160-00, Rev 01 Release 2.0
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Operational IP Phone Features
Operational Features
IP Phone UI
Step Action
2
3
4
5
6
Select Time and Date.
Select Set Time.
Using the keys on the keypad, enter a time to set on the IP phone.
Press Done to save the time you entered.
Select Time Format.
Valid values are 12hr and 24hr.
Note: The default Time Format is 12hr.
7
8
Press Change to toggle between 24hr and 12hr format.
Press Done to save the Time Format you selected.
Set Date and Date Format:
9
Select Set Date.
10
11
12
13
Using the keys on the keypad, enter a date to set on the IP phone.
Press Done to save the date you entered.
Select Date Format.
Select a date format from the list of options.
Valid values are:
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
WWW MMM DD (default)
DD-MMM-YY
YYYY-MM-DD
DD/MM/YYYY
DD/MM/YY
DD-MM-YY
MM/DD/YY
MMM DD
Note: The default Date Format is WWW MMM DD (Day of Week, Month, Day).
Press Done to save the Date Format.
14
Set Time Zone:
15
16
Select Time Zone.
For 53i:
Press * to display a list of Time Zone options.
41-001160-00, Rev 01 Release 2.0
5-15
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
IP Phone Administrator Guide
Operational Features
IP Phone UI
Step Action
17
Select a Time Zone from the list of options.
For valid values, see Appendix A, the section, “Time and Date Settings” on page A-30.
Note: The default Time Zone is US-Eastern.
Press Done to save the Time Zone you selected.
18
Set Daylight Savings Time:
19
20
Select Daylight Savings.
Select a Daylight Savings time from the list of options.
Valid values are:
•
•
•
•
OFF
30 min summertime
1 hr summertime
automatic
Note: The default for Daylight Savings is Automatic.
21
Press Done to save the Daylight Savings value you selected.
Aastra Web UI
1
Click on Basic Settings->Preferences->Time and Date Setting.
2
In the “Time Format” field, select the time format you want to use on your phone. Valid values are:
•
•
12h (12 hour format) (default)
24h (24 hour format).
Note: The time displays on the phone’s idle screen in the format you select for this field.
41-001160-00, Rev 01 Release 2.0
5-16
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Operational IP Phone Features
Operational Features
Aastra Web UI
3
In the “Date Format” field, select the date format you want to use on your phone. Valid values are:
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
WWW MMM DD (default)
DD-MMM-YY
YYYY-MM-DD
DD/MM/YYYY
DD/MM/YY
DD-MM-YY
MM/DD/YY
MMM DD
Note: The date displays on the phone’s idle screen in the format you select for this field.
Click to save your changes.
4
You must restart your IP phone for the changes to take affect.
5
6
Click on Operation->Reset.
In the "Restart Phone" field click
to restart the IP phone.
41-001160-00, Rev 01 Release 2.0
5-17
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
IP Phone Administrator Guide
Operational Features
Hard Keys
There are hard keys on your phone, such as Hold, Redial, Xfer, and Conf that are
configured by default for specific call-handling features. (See the product-specific
User Guide for more information about these key functions.
Notes:
1.
On the 55i and 57i, the Xfer and Conf keys are hard-coded by
default on keys 5 and 6 to the left of the LCD display
and cannot be reassigned. The Xfer and Conf labels display
when you lift the handset. To disable these keys, see the next
paragraph.
2.
On the 53i, the Xfer and Conf keys are assigned by default to keys
5 and 6, respectively. These keys are programmable keys and can
be reassigned if applicable. To disable these keys, see the
next paragraph.
Enabling/Disabling Redial, Xfer, and Conf Keys
You can enable or disable the Redial, Xfer, and Conf keys as required using the
following parameters in the configuration files:
•
•
•
redial disabled
conference disabled
call transfer disabled
Valid values for this parameter are 0 (enabled) and 1 (disabled).
If this parameter is set to 1, the key is not active and is ignored if pressed by the
user. For "redial disabled" the value of 1 does not save the dialed number to the
"Redial List".
If this parameter is set to 0, the key is active and can be pressed by the user.
This feature is configurable via the configuration files only.
5-18
41-001160-00, Rev 01 Release 2.0
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Operational IP Phone Features
Operational Features
Configuration Files
For specific parameters you can set in the configuration files, see Appendix A, the section, “Hard Key
Parameters” on page A-106..
Mapping Redial and Conf Keys as Speedials
You can map the Redial and Conference keys on the IP phone to use as speeddial
keys. When the Redial or Conference key is pressed, the number configured for
the key automatically speed dials. If no number is configured, the Redial and
Conference keys return to their original functionality.
You can configure this feature using the configuration files or the Aastra Web UI.
Note: If you configure the Redial and Conference keys for speeddialing
on the 57i CT Base Station, the Redial and Conference keys on the
57i CT handset retain their original functionality. The Redial and
Conference keys on the handset are not configured for speeddial.
Use the following procedures to set the Redial and Conf keys as speeddial keys.
Configuration Files
For specific parameters you can set in the configuration files, see Appendix A, the section, “Hard Key
Parameters” on page A-106..
41-001160-00, Rev 01 Release 2.0
5-19
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
IP Phone Administrator Guide
Operational Features
Aastra Web UI
1
Click on Basic Settings->Preferences.
2
3
4
In the Key Mapping section, enter a number in the "Map Redial Key To" field, that the IP phone will
use to speedial when the Redial key is pressed.
Enter a number in the "Map Conf Key To" field, that the IP phone will use to speedial when the Conf
Key is pressed.
Click
to save your changes.
You must restart your IP phone for the changes to take affect.
5
6
Click on Operation->Reset.
In the "Restart Phone" field click
to restart the IP phone.
Using Redial Key for “Last Number Redial”
The IP phones have an enhanced redial user interface that allows a user to
quickly redial the last number that was dialed out from the phone. You can:
•
•
Press the REDIAL button twice to redial the last number dialed.
Press the REDIAL button once, scroll the list of numbers, then press the
REDIAL button again to dial the number that displays on the screen.
The “last number redial” feature for the Redial key is static and is not
configurable.
5-20
41-001160-00, Rev 01 Release 2.0
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Operational IP Phone Features
Operational Features
Softkeys/Programmable Keys/Feature Keys
You can configure the softkeys and programmable keys (53i has programmable
keys only) to perform specific functions on the IP phones.
Note: When entering definitions for softkeys, the “#” sign must be
enclosed in quotes.
Softkeys (55i, 57i, 57i CT)
The 55i IP phone has 6 softkeys you can configure to perform specific functions,
The 57i and 57i CT IP phones have 12 softkeys you can configure. With up to 3
Expansion Modules attached to the phone, you can get an additional 72 softkeys
to configure (not all functions apply to Expansion Module softkeys). The
following table provides the number of softkeys you can configure, and the
number of lines available for each type of phone.
Additional Softkeys
with Expansion
Modules
Handset
Keys
IP Phone
Model
Programmable
Keys
Lines
Softkeys
6
Available
Available
55i
36 to 108*
6
9
9
-
-
(Model 536EM)
57i
12
36 to 108*
-
(Model 536EM)
60 to 180**
(Model 560EM)
57i CT
12
36 to 108* on Base
Station
-
9
15
(Model 536EM)
60 to 180** on Base
Station
(Model 560EM)
*The 536EM expansion module consists of 36 softkeys. You can have up to 3 expansion modules on an IP
phone totaling 108 softkeys. Valid for 55i, 57i, and 57i CT phones.
**The 560EM expansion module consists of 60 softkeys. You can have up to 3 expansion modules on an IP
phone totaling 180 softkeys. Valid for 57i and 57i CT phones only.
41-001160-00, Rev 01 Release 2.0
5-21
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
IP Phone Administrator Guide
Operational Features
Available configuration functions on the softkeys include:
•
•
•
•
Line - Indicates softkey is configured for line use.
Speeddial - Indicates softkey is configured for speeddial use.
on page 5-65.)
•
•
•
•
•
BLF - Indicates softkey is configured for Busy Lamp Field (BLF) use. A user
can dial out on a BLF configured softkey. (For more information on BLF, see
page 5-67.)
BLF\List - - Indicates softkey is configured for BLF list use. A user can dial
out on a BLF\List configured softkey. (For more information on BLF List, see
page 5-67.)
XML - Indicates the softkey is configured to accept an XML application for
accessing customized XML services.You can also use this option to configure
an XML URI softkey. (For more information on XML, see the section XML
Customized Services on page 5-116.)
Flash - Indicates the softkey is set to generate a flash event when it is pressed,
or when a feature key is pressed on the 57i CT handset. The IP phone
generates flash events only when a call is connected and there is an active
RTP stream (for example, when the call is not on hold).
Sprecode - Indicates the softkey is set to automatically activate specific
services offered by the server. For example, if the sprecode value of *82 is
configured, then by pressing the softkey, *82 automatically activates a service
provided by the server. The value you enter for this field is dependent on the
services provided by the server.
•
call. (For more information on park, see the section Park Calls/Pick Up
Parked Calls on page 5-73.)
Pickup - Indicates the softkey is set to be used as a pickup key to pick up a
parked call. (For more information on pickup, see the section Park Calls/Pick
Up Parked Calls on page 5-73.)
5-22
41-001160-00, Rev 01 Release 2.0
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Operational IP Phone Features
Operational Features
•
last call return- Indicates the softkey is set to be used as a “last call return”
key. (For more information on lcr, see the section Last Call Return (lcr)
•
•
Callers List - Indicates the softkey is set for accessing the Callers List. (For
more information on the Callers List, see the section Callers List on page 96.)
Directory- Indicates the softkey is set for accessing the Directory List. (For
more information about the Directory List, see the section Directory List on
page 103.)
•
•
•
Intercom - Indicates the softkey is set to be used as the Intercom key. (For
more information about using the Intercom key, see your model-specific
Aastra IP Phone User’s Guide.)
Services - Indicates the softkey is set to be used as the Services key. (For
more information about using the Services key, see your model-specific
Aastra IP Phone User’s Guide.)
Empty - Indicates the softkey is configured to force a blank entry on the IP
phone display for a specific softkey. The soft keys are added in order (from
softkey1 to softkey20) after any hard-coded keys have been added. If a
particular soft key is not defined, it is ignored.
41-001160-00, Rev 01 Release 2.0
5-23
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
IP Phone Administrator Guide
Operational Features
State-Based Softkeys (55i, 57i, 57i CT only)
Users and administrators can configure a specific state to display when a softkey
is being used. Available states you can configure for each softkey include:
•
•
•
•
•
idle - The phone is not being used.
connected - The current line is in an active call (or the call is on hold)
incoming - The phone is ringing.
outgoing - The user is dialing a number, or the far-end is ringing.
busy - The current line is busy because the line is in use or the line is set as
“Do Not Disturb”.
The following table identifies the applicable default states for each type of
softkey you can configure on the IP phone.
Softkey Type
Default States
None
All states disabled.
Line
idle, connected, incoming, outgoing, busy
idle, connected, incoming, outgoing, busy
idle, connected, incoming, outgoing, busy
idle, connected, incoming, outgoing, busy
idle, connected, incoming, outgoing, busy
idle, connected, incoming, outgoing, busy
idle, connected, incoming, outgoing, busy
idle, connected, incoming, outgoing, busy
idle, connected, incoming, outgoing, busy
idle, connected, incoming, outgoing, busy
idle, connected, incoming, outgoing, busy
idle, connected, incoming, outgoing, busy
All states disabled.
DND
Speeddial
BLF
BLF List
XML
lcr
Directory
Callers List
Intercom
Services
empty
Flash
Sprecode
Park
connected
connected
Pickup
idle, outgoing
5-24
41-001160-00, Rev 01 Release 2.0
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Operational IP Phone Features
Operational Features
You can enable or disable the softkey states using the configuration files or the
Aastra Web UI. In the Aastra Web UI, you disable a state by unchecking the box
for that operational state.
In the configuration files, you use the following parameters to enable and disable
operational states:
• softkeyN states
You can enter multiple values (idle, connected, incoming, outgoing, busy) for
the "softkeyN state" parameter. For example:
softkeyN states: idle connected
You must associate the softkeyN state parameter with a specific softkey. In the
following example, the softkeyN states parameter is associated with softkey 12:
softkey12 type: speeddial
softkey12 label: voicemail
softkey12 value *89
softkey12 states: outgoing
Note: The IP phone idle screen condenses the softkeys. So in the
previous example, softkey 12 will appear in position 1 if no other
softkeys are set. A softkey type of "empty" does not display on the idle
screen at all. (For more information about the softkey type of "empty"
see Appendix A, the section, “Softkey Settings for 55i, 57i, 57i CT” on
page A-110.
41-001160-00, Rev 01 Release 2.0
5-25
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
IP Phone Administrator Guide
Operational Features
Configuration Example
The following example illustrates the use of the "softkeyN states" parameter, and
the "softkeyN type" parameter with a value of empty. For clarity purposes, only
the "softkeyN type" and "softkeyNstates" parameters are shown.
softkey1 type: line
softkey1 states: idle connected
softkey3 type: dnd
softkey3 states: idle
softkey4 type: line
softkey5 type: empty
softkey5 states: connected
softkey6 type: speeddial
softkey6 states: connected
The following table shows how the keys in the example above would display on
the IP Phone UI.
Note: The "empty" key type allows a softkey to be removed quickly by
deleting the softkey information from the configuration file.
Softkey
softkey1
Idle
Key 1
Connected
Key 2
Notes
Line displays for softkey1.
Key 1 in connected state is the Drop key. Idle
and connected display as applicable.
softkey2
softkey3
(not used)
Key 2
(not used)
(not used)
Softkey2 is not displayed.
DND displays for softkey3. Idle displays as
applicable.
softkey4
Key 3
Key 3
Line displays for softkey4. Default state
values (idle, connected, incoming, outgoing)
display as applicable.
softkey5
softkey6
(not used)
(not used)
Key 4 (blank)
Key 5
A blank displays for softkey5. Connected
displays as applicable.
Speeddial displays for softkey6. Connected
displays as applicable.
Softkeys and programmable keys are configurable using the Aastra Web UI or the
configuration files.
5-26
41-001160-00, Rev 01 Release 2.0
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Operational IP Phone Features
Operational Features
Programmable Keys (53i, 55i)
The following table provides the number of softkeys and programmable keys you
can configure, and the number of lines available for each type of phone.
Additional Softkeys
with Expansion
Modules
Handset
Keys
Available
IP Phone
Model
Programmable
Keys
Lines
Available
Softkeys
53i
55i
-
-
6
6
9
9
-
-
6
36 to 108*
(Model 536EM)
*The 536EM expansion module consists of 36 softkeys. You can have up to 3 expansion modules on an IP phone
totaling 108 softkeys.
41-001160-00, Rev 01 Release 2.0
5-27
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
IP Phone Administrator Guide
Operational Features
Configuring Softkeys and Programmable Keys
Use the following procedures to configure the softkeys and programmable keys
Configuration Files
For specific parameters you can set in the configuration files, see Appendix A, the sections,
“Softkey/Programmable Key/Feature Key Parameters” on page A-108.
Aastra Web UI
1
For models with softkeys:
Click on Operation->Softkeys and XML.
5-28
41-001160-00, Rev 01 Release 2.0
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Operational IP Phone Features
Operational Features
Aastra Web UI
For models with programmable keys:
Click on Operation->Programmable Keys.
53i Screen
55i, 57i, 57i CT Screens
41-001160-00, Rev 01 Release 2.0
5-29
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
IP Phone Administrator Guide
Operational Features
Aastra Web UI
2
For softkeys, in the "Type" field, select the type of softkey you want to configure.
For programmable keys, in the “Hard Key” field, select the hard key type you want to configure.
Reference: For available type values on each IP phone model, see Appendix A, the section,
“Softkey/Programmable Key/Feature Key Parameters” on page A-108.
3
4
For softkeys, If applicable, enter a label in the “Label” field.
In the "Value" field, enter a value to associate with the softkey or programmable key. For example, for
a speeddial value, you can enter *1.
5
6
In the "Line" field, select the line for which you want to associate the softkey or programmable key.
The operational states display to the IP phone when a softkey is used. To disable an operational
state, click the "Idle", "Connected", "Incoming", or "Outgoing" fields to uncheck the box.
7
Click
to save your changes.
8
9
Click on Operation->Reset.
In the "Restart Phone" field click
to restart the IP phone.
5-30
41-001160-00, Rev 01 Release 2.0
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Operational IP Phone Features
Operational Features
57i Cordless (CT) Feature Keys
In addition to the softkeys on the 57i CT, this phone also has handset keys you can
configure with specific features. You can use the Aastra Web UI to configure the
handset keys.
Note: You configure the handset keys using the Aastra Web UI
(Operation->Handset Keys) or by pressing the "F" button on the
handset.
You can program up to 15 feature keys on the 57i CT handset with specific
functions using the Aastra Web UI.
The following table identifies the functions available for all 15 handset keys and
the default functions for each key.
Key Function
Line 1
Line 2
Line 3
Line 4
Icom
Description
Default for:
Line 1 key - Selects line one
Line 2 key - Selects line two
Line 3 key - Selects line three
Line 4 key - Selects line four
Handset Key 1
Handset Key 2
Handset Key 3
Handset Key 4
Intercom key – Enter handset list to select handset to call Handset Key 5
Dir
Directory key – Activate directory feature
Callers key – Activate callers feature
Handset Key 6
Callers
Xfer
Handset Key 7
Transfer key - Activate transfer feature
Handset Key 8
Conf
Conference key - Activate conference feature
Public key – Toggle between public & private call mode
No function is selected – this key is empty, no label.
Line 5 key (if available) - Selects line five.
Line 6 key (if available) - Selects line six.
Line 7key (if available) - Selects line seven.
Line 8 key (if available) - Selects line eight
Line 9 key (if available) - Selects line nine
Handset Key 9
Public
None
Handset Key 10
Handset Key 11 and 12
Handset Key 13
Handset Key 14
Handset Key 15
Line 5
Line 6
Line 7
Line 8
Line 9
41-001160-00, Rev 01 Release 2.0
5-31
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
IP Phone Administrator Guide
Operational Features
Feature Key Programming Guidelines
The following are guidelines to use when programming the feature keys on the
handset:
•
All handsets paired with the same Base Station have the same programmed
functions since the web interface applies the functions to all the handsets
paired with that base.
•
A newly registered handset or handset that was out-of-range during the
programming needs to perform an "off-hook and on-hook" sequence in order
for the newly programmed function to be broadcasted to the affected
handsets. Simply press the v key from the idle state to go off-hook. Then,
press the y key to go back on-hook.
•
•
•
Duplicate functions can exist in the feature key as there is no filtering or
duplicate checking done on the handset or the base.
If no line keys are programmed for the feature key, the handset is restricted to
intercom calls only.
If all 12 programmable functions have been programmed to "None", the user
is presented with a List empty message when the feature key is pressed.
List empty
Use web page to
configure
•
•
For security reasons, the user has 180 seconds (3 minutes) to complete the
programming. Otherwise, the phone displays the following error:
** Error **: Session expired, Please reload page.
For security reasons, the user must submit the page from the same browser
that was used to load the page. If the user tries to submit the page from any
other IP address, the following error displays:
** Error ** Session invalid. Different Client IP Addresses. —
Please reload page
5-32
41-001160-00, Rev 01 Release 2.0
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Operational IP Phone Features
Operational Features
Configuring Handset Feature Keys
You can program up to 15 feature keys on the 57i CT IP phone using the
configuration files or the Aastra Web UI. Use the following procedure to program
the feature keys on your 57i CT Base Station and all paired handsets.
Configuration Files
For specific parameters you can set in the configuration files, see Appendix A, the section,
“Handset Feature Key Settings for the 57i CT” on page A-126.
Aastra Web UI
1
2
Open your web browser and enter the phone’s IP address or host name into the address field.
At the prompt, enter your username and password and click
.
Note: For a user, the default user name is “user” and the password field is left blank.
41-001160-00, Rev 01 Release 2.0
5-33
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
IP Phone Administrator Guide
Operational Features
Aastra Web UI
3
Click on Operation->Handset Keys.
4
5
6
Select the handset key you want to program.
Select the function for that handset key from the "Key Function" field.
Click
to save the function you selected to the handset key.
The key programming information is sent to the 57i Base Station and to all the cordless handsets
associated with that Base Station. Any key programmed to "None" does not appear in the handset’s
list.
5-34
41-001160-00, Rev 01 Release 2.0
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Operational IP Phone Features
Operational Features
Locking IP Phone Keys
The IP phones allow you to lock or unlock programmable keys, softkeys, hard
keys, cordless handset keys, and expansion keys (for expansion modules). When
key locking is enabled, the phone uses the server settings and ignores any
previous local configuration. A user cannot override the configuration of a locked
key.
You can lock and unlock keys using the configuration files only. When viewing
the locked key via the Aastra Web UI, the key is grayed out (disabled) and cannot
be changed. Locking is dynamic for XML pushes.
You use the following “locking” parameters to lock the softkeys and
programmable keys on the 53i, 55i, 57i, and 57i CT. The locking parameters
impact existing softkey and programmable key parameters as shown in the table
below.
Locking Parameter
softkeyN locked
Impacted Parameters
Phone Model Affected
softkeyN type
softkeyN label
softkeyN value
softkeyN line
softkeyN states
55i
57i
57i CT
topsoftkeyN locked
prgkeyN locked
topsoftkeyN type
topsoftkeyN label
topsoftkeyN value
topsoftkeyN line
57i
57i CT
prgkeyN type
prgkeyN value
prgkeyN line
53i
55i
featurekeyN locked
featurekeyN type
featurekeyN label
57i CT
expmodX keyN locked
expmodX keyN type
expmodX keyN value
expmodX keyN line
5-series expansion modules
Note: The 53i IP phone prevents users from setting a speed dial key via
the Phone UI on a key that has been locked.
41-001160-00, Rev 01 Release 2.0
5-35
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
IP Phone Administrator Guide
Operational Features
Locking the IP Phone Keys
Use the following procedures to lock the softkeys and programmable keys on the
Configuration Files
For specific parameters you can set in the configuration files, see Appendix A, the section,
“Locking Softkeys and Programmable Keys” on page A-131.
5-36
41-001160-00, Rev 01 Release 2.0
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Operational IP Phone Features
Operational Features
Suppressing DTMF Playback
A feature on the IP phones allows users and administrators to enable or disable the
suppression of DTMF playback when a number is dialed from the softkeys and
programmable keys.
When suppression of DTMF playback is disabled, and you press a softkey or
programmable key, the IP phone dials the stored number and displays each digit
as dialed in the LCD window.
When the suppression of DTMF playback is enabled, the IP phone dials the stored
number and displays the entire number immediately in the LCD window, allowing
the call to be dialed much faster.
DTMF playback suppression is disabled by default. Suppressing DTMF playback
can be configured using the Aastra Web UI and the configuration files.
Configuring Suppression of DTMF Playback
Use the following procedures to configure the suppression of DTMF playback on
Configuration Files
For specific parameters you can set in the configuration files, see Appendix A, the section, “Suppress DTMF
Playback Setting” on page A-96.
41-001160-00, Rev 01 Release 2.0
5-37
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
IP Phone Administrator Guide
Operational Features
Aastra Web UI
1
Click on Basic Settings->Preferences->General.
2
3
Enable the "Suppress DTMF Playback" field by checking the check box.
(Disable this field by unchecking the box). Default is disabled.
Click
to save your settings.
You must restart your IP phone for the changes to take affect.
4
5
Click on Operation->Reset.
In the "Restart Phone" field click
to restart the IP phone and apply the changes.
5-38
41-001160-00, Rev 01 Release 2.0
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Operational IP Phone Features
Operational Features
Display DTMF Digits
A feature on the IP phones allows users and administrators to enable or disable
DTMF (dual-tone multi-frequency) digits to display to the IP phone when using
the keypad to dial, or when dialing from a softkey or programmable key.
DTMF is the signal sent from the phone to the network that you generate when
you press the phone’s touch keys. This is also known as “touchtone” dialing. Each
key you press on your phone generates two tones of specific frequencies. One
tone is generated from a high-frequency group of tones and the other from a low
frequency group.
If you enable the Display DTMF Digits parameter, the digits you are dialing from
the keypad or from a softkey or programmable key display to the IP phone’s LCD
display. This parameter is disabled by default (no digits display when dialing).
You can enable the “Display DTMF Digits” parameter using the configuration
files or the Aastra Web UI.
Configuring Display DTMF Digits
Use the following procedures to configure the suppression of DTMF playback on
Configuration Files
For specific parameters you can set in the configuration files, see Appendix A, the section, “Display DTMF
Digits Setting” on page A-97.
41-001160-00, Rev 01 Release 2.0
5-39
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
IP Phone Administrator Guide
Operational Features
Aastra Web UI
1
Click on Basic Settings->Preferences->General.
2
3
Enable the "Display DTMF Digits" field by checking the check box.
(Disable this field by unchecking the box). Default is disabled.
Click
to save your settings.
You must restart your IP phone for the changes to take affect.
4
5
Click on Operation->Reset.
In the "Restart Phone" field click
to restart the IP phone and apply the changes.
5-40
41-001160-00, Rev 01 Release 2.0
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Operational IP Phone Features
Operational Features
Busy Lamp Field (BLF)
The BLF feature on the IP phones allows a specific extension to be monitored for
state changes. BLF monitors the status (busy or idle) of extensions on the IP
phone.
Note: The BLF setting is applicable to the Asterisk server only.
Example
A Supervisor configures BLFs on his phone for monitoring the status of a
worker’s phone use (busy or idle). When the worker picks up his phone to make a
call, a busy indicator on the Supervisor’s phone shows that the worker’s phone is
in use and busy.
BLF Setting (For use with Asterisk)
On the 55i, 57i, and 57i CT, the busy and idle indicators show on the IP phone
screen display next to the softkey or programmable key configured for BLF
functionality. When the monitored user is idle, an icon with the handset on-hook
shows next to the BLF softkey or programmable key. When the monitored user is
on an active call, a small telephone icon is shown with the handset off-hook.
On the 53i, the LED lights next to each BLF programmable key illuminate steady
to indicate the monitored line is off-hook or unregistered. The LED goes off when
the line is idle.
41-001160-00, Rev 01 Release 2.0
5-41
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
IP Phone Administrator Guide
Operational Features
BLF\List Setting
(For use with the BroadSoft Broadworks Rel 13 or higher platform only)
The BLF\List feature on the IP phones is specifically designed to support the
BroadSoft Broadworks Rel 13 Busy Lamp Field feature. This feature allows the
IP phone to subscribe to a list of monitored users defined through the BroadWorks
web portal.
In addition to monitoring the idle and busy state, the BLF\List feature also
supports the ringing state. When the monitored user is idle, there is a small
telephone icon shown with the handset on-hook. When the monitored user is in
ringing state, there is a small bell icon shown. When the monitored user is on an
active call then a small telephone icon is shown with the handset off-hook.
On the 53i phone, the LED lights next to each BLF programmable key illuminate
steady to indicate the monitored line is off-hook or unregistered. The LED goes
off when the is idle. When the monitored extension is ringing, the LED flashes.
The Broadworks BLF feature is not the same as the Broadworks Shared Call
Appearance (SCA) feature and does not permit call control over the monitored
extension.
Example
A receptionist has a 57i running Broadsoft firmware that subscribes to a list of
extensions from the BroadWorks Application Server. Each monitored extension
in the list shows up individually on the 57i screen next to a softkey button. The
softkey icons on the screen change depending on the state of the extensions.
On the 53i running Broadsoft firmware, the programmable key LEDs illuminate
either flashing, solid, or turn off depending on the state of those extensions.
5-42
41-001160-00, Rev 01 Release 2.0
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Operational IP Phone Features
Operational Features
Asterisk BLF Configuration
You can enable the BLF feature on Asterisk to enable monitoring for specific
extensions. BLF on Asterisk is possible through the “hint” extension parameter.
Add the following in the Asterisk extensions.conf file for each target extension
being monitored.
For example:
exten -> 9995551212,hint,SIP/9995551212
Add the following in the Asterisk sip.conf file for each subscriber if it is not
defined already.
For example:
[9995551212]
Subscribecontext=sip
BroadSoft BLF Configuration
You can enable the BLF feature on BroadSoft BroadWorks Rel 13 or higher
through the BroadWorks Web Portal. Each user must have the Busy Lamp Field
service enabled for their user. The user must add each desired extension to the
“Monitored Users List” on the Busy Lamp Field service page and also enter in a
list name for the monitored users BLF list on the same page.
Changes to the “Monitored Users List” are dynamic and the Aastra IP phones are
automatically updated without requiring a restart.
Reference
For sample BLF configurations, see Appendix E, “Sample BLF Softkey Settings.”
41-001160-00, Rev 01 Release 2.0
5-43
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
IP Phone Administrator Guide
Operational Features
Configuring BLFs
Configuration Files
To set BLF or BLF\List in the configuration files, see Appendix A, the section, “Softkey/Programmable Key/
Feature Key Parameters” on page A-108.
Aastra Web UI
1
On the 53i:
Click on Operation->Programmable Keys.
Note: You can configure up to 4 programmable keys on the 53i. Keys 1 and 2 are reserved for the
“Save” and “Delete” functions, respectively, and cannot be altered.
5-44
41-001160-00, Rev 01 Release 2.0
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Operational IP Phone Features
Operational Features
Aastra Web UI
2
On the 55i:
Click on Operation->Softkeys and XML or on Operation->Programmable Keys.
Softkeys and XML
Programmable Keys
Note: You can configure up to 20 softkeys and up to 6 programmable keys on the 55i.
41-001160-00, Rev 01 Release 2.0
5-45
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
IP Phone Administrator Guide
Operational Features
Aastra Web UI
3
On the 57i/57iCT:
Click on Operation->Softkeys and XML and select the “Bottom Keys” tab or the “Top Keys” tab.
Bottom Keys
Top Keys
Note: You can configure up to 20 bottom softkeys and up to 10 top softkeys on the 57i/57i CT.
5-46
41-001160-00, Rev 01 Release 2.0
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Operational IP Phone Features
Operational Features
Aastra Web UI
4
5
6
Select a softkey or programmable key to configure.
In the "Type" field, select "BLF" (Asterisk), "BLF\List" (BroadSoft BroadWorks).
For the 55i, 57i, and 57i CT softkeys:
In the "Label" field, enter the name of the person who’s extension you are monitoring (if “Type” is
BLF).
Note: If BLF\List type is selected, no label value is required. The BroadWorks BLF List name is
configured in the "BLF List URI" field instead.
7
In the "Value" field, enter a value to associate with the softkey or programmable key.
For example, for BLF, the value is the extension you want to monitor.
For BLF\List, the value is an identifier for the list of numbers you are monitoring.
8
Click
to save your changes.
9
In the "Line" field, select a line number that is actively registered to the appropriate SIP proxy you are
using.
10
In the "BLF List URI" field, enter the name of the BLF list defined on the BroadSoft BroadWorks
Busy Lamp field page for your particular user.
For example, [email protected].
Note: The value of the BLF\List URI parameter must match the list name configured. Otherwise, no
values display on the 57i screen and the feature is disabled.
11
Click
to save your changes.
41-001160-00, Rev 01 Release 2.0
5-47
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
IP Phone Administrator Guide
Operational Features
BLF Subscription Period
On the IP phones, you can set the time period, in seconds, that the IP phone
resubscribes the BLF subscription service after a software/firmware upgrade or
after a reboot of the IP phone.
In the configuration files, you enter the following parameter with a valid value to
set the BLF subscription period:
sip blf subscription period: <value in seconds>
The minimum value for this 120 seconds (2 minutes). The default is 3600 (1
hour).
Setting this parameter to a value lower than 3600 allows the configured BLF
feature to become active more quickly after a software/firmware upgrade or after
a reboot of the IP phone. If you enter a value lower than 120 for this parameter,
the default value (3600) will be used by the IP phone.
You can configure this feature using the configuration files or the Aastra Web UI.
Configuring BLF Subscription Period
Use the following procedures to configure the BLF subscription period on the IP
Configuration Files
To configure the BLF subscription period on the IP phones using the configuration files, see Appendix A, the
section, “BLF Subscription Period Settings” on page A-105.
5-48
41-001160-00, Rev 01 Release 2.0
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Operational IP Phone Features
Operational Features
Aastra Web UI
1
Click on Advanced Settings->Global SIP->Advanced SIP Settings.
2
3
Enter a value, in seconds, from 120 (2 min) to 3600 (1 hour) in the "BLF Subscription Period" field.
Click to save your changes.
You must restart your IP phone for the changes to take affect.
4
5
Click on Operation->Reset.
In the "Restart Phone" field click
to restart the IP phone and apply the changes.
41-001160-00, Rev 01 Release 2.0
5-49
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
IP Phone Administrator Guide
Operational Features
Directed Call Pickup (BLF or XML Call Interception)
Directed call pickup is a feature on the phones that allows a user to intercept a call
on a ringing phone which is part of the same interception group. You can use the
Directed call pickup feature on the phone in two ways:
•
With the existing BLF feature on Asterisk, a user can dial “*76” followed by
the extension to pick up a ringing call on another phone. (For more
information about BLF, see “Busy Lamp Field (BLF)” on page 41
•
Using XML, a user can intercept a call by selecting an extension from a list
and then pressing a “Pickup” softkey/programmable key. To use the Directed
call pickup feature from an XML application, you must list all ringing
extensions using the AastraIPPhoneTextMenu XML object in an XML
script. This allows the user to select the ringing extension from a text menu
without having to dial. The following illustration shows an example of how
this feature displays to the LCD from an XML application.:
Ringing Extensions
201
212
225
234
Pickup
Done
(For more information about using the AastraIPPhoneTextMenu object, see
Appendix G, the section, “Text Menu Object (Menu Screens)” on page G-6.
5-50
41-001160-00, Rev 01 Release 2.0
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Operational IP Phone Features
Operational Features
BLF and XML softkeys/programmable keys monitor the states of an extension.
The extension states can be one of three states: "busy", "ringing" and "idle". If the
monitored extension is in the "ringing" state with an incoming call, and "Directed
call pickup" is enabled, pressing the BLF or XML key can pick up the incoming
call on the monitored extension.
Note: The Asterisk and Epygi Quadro 4x/16x IP PBX servers support
this feature. For details about Asterisk support, contact Aastra Technical
Support.
Playing a Ring Splash
You can also enable or disable the playing of a short "call waiting tone" when
there is an incoming call on the BLF or XML monitored extension. If the host
tone is idle, the tone plays a "ring splash".
You can enable/disable “Directed Call Pickup” and “Play a Ring Splash” using the
configuration files or the Aastra Web UI.
Note: Both the “Directed Call Pickup” feature and the “Playing a Ring
Splash” feature are disabled by default.
41-001160-00, Rev 01 Release 2.0
5-51
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
IP Phone Administrator Guide
Operational Features
Enabling/Disabling Directed Call Pickup
Use the following procedure to enable or disable the Directed Call Pickup feature
Configuration Files
To enable/disable Directed Call Pickup on the IP phone using the configuration files, see Appendix A, the
section, “Directed Call Pickup (BLF or XML Call Interception) Settings” on page A-104.
Aastra Web UI
1
Click on Basic Settings->Preferences->Directed Call Pickup Settings.
2
3
Enable the "Directed Call Pickup" field by checking the check box.
(Disable this field by unchecking the box). Default is disabled.)
Enable the "Play a Ring Splash" field by checking the check box.
(Disable this field by unchecking the box). Default is disabled.)
The IP phone plays a short "call waiting tone" when there is an incoming call on the BLF monitored
extension. If the "Play a Ring Splash" parameter is enabled, and the host tone is idle, the tone plays
a "ring splash".
5-52
41-001160-00, Rev 01 Release 2.0
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Operational IP Phone Features
Operational Features
Aastra Web UI
4
Click
to save your changes.
You must restart your IP phone for the changes to take affect.
5
6
Click on Operation->Reset.
In the "Restart Phone" field click
to restart the IP phone and apply the changes.
Configuring BLF/BLF List for Directed Call Pickup
Use the following procedure to configure BLF/BLF List for Directed Call Pickup
in the configuration files.
Note: You must enable Directed Call Pickup bofore performing these
procedures. See “Enabling/Disabling Directed Call Pickup” on
page 5-52.
Configuration Files
To set BLFor BLF\List in the configuration files for Directed Call Pickup, see Appendix A, the section,
“Softkey/Programmable Key/Feature Key Parameters” on page A-108.
To enable Directed Call Pickup on the IP phone using the configuration files, see Appendix A, the section,
“Directed Call Pickup (BLF or XML Call Interception) Settings” on page A-104.
41-001160-00, Rev 01 Release 2.0
5-53
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
IP Phone Administrator Guide
Operational Features
Use the following procedure to configure BLF or BLF/List for Directed Call
Pickup in the Aastra Web UI.
Aastra Web UI
1
Click on Basic Settings->Preferences->Directed Call Pickup Settings.
2
3
Enable the "Directed Call Pickup" field by checking the check box.
Enable the "Play a Ring Splash" field by checking the check box.
The IP phone plays a short "call waiting tone" when there is an incoming call on the BLF monitored
extension. If the "Play a Ring Splash" parameter is enabled, and the host tone is idle, the tone plays
a "ring splash".
5-54
41-001160-00, Rev 01 Release 2.0
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Operational IP Phone Features
Operational Features
Aastra Web UI
4
On the 53i:
Click on Operation->Programmable Keys.
Note: You can configure up to 4 programmable keys on the 53i. Keys 1 and 2 are reserved for the
“Save” and “Delete” functions, respectively, and cannot be altered.
41-001160-00, Rev 01 Release 2.0
5-55
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
IP Phone Administrator Guide
Operational Features
Aastra Web UI
5
On the 55i:
Click on Operation->Softkeys and XML or on Operation->Programmable Keys.
Softkeys and XML
Programmable Keys
Note: You can configure up to 20 softkeys and up to 6 programmable keys on the 55i.
5-56
41-001160-00, Rev 01 Release 2.0
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Operational IP Phone Features
Operational Features
Aastra Web UI
6
On the 57i/57iCT:
Click on Operation->Softkeys and XML and select the “Bottom Keys” tab or the “Top Keys” tab.
Bottom Keys
Top Keys
Note: You can configure up to 20 bottom softkeys and up to 10 top softkeys on the 57i/57i CT.
41-001160-00, Rev 01 Release 2.0
5-57
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
IP Phone Administrator Guide
Operational Features
Aastra Web UI
7
8
9
Select a softkey or programmable key to configure.
In the "Type" field, select "BLF" (Asterisk), "BLF\List" (BroadSoft BroadWorks).
For the 55i, 57i, and 57i CT softkeys:
In the "Label" field, enter the name of the person who’s extension you are monitoring (if “Type” is
BLF).
Note: If BLF\List type is selected, no label value is required. The BroadWorks BLF List name is
configured in the "BLF List URI" field instead.
10
In the "Value" field, enter a value to associate with the softkey or programmable key.
For example, for BLF, the value is the extension you want to monitor.
For BLF\List, the value is an identifier for the list of numbers you are monitoring.
11
12
13
Click
to save your changes.
In the "Line" field, select a line number that is actively registered to the appropriate SIP proxy you are
using.
In the "BLF List URI" field, enter the name of the BLF list defined on the BroadSoft BroadWorks
Busy Lamp field page for your particular user.
For example, [email protected].
Note: The value of the BLF\List URI parameter must match the list name configured. Otherwise, no
values display on the 57i screen and the feature is disabled.
14
15
Select the line state (idle, connected, incoming, outgoing, busy) that you want to apply to the BLF
softkey or programmable key.
Click
to save your changes.
5-58
41-001160-00, Rev 01 Release 2.0
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Operational IP Phone Features
Operational Features
Configuring XML for Directed Call Pickup
Use the following procedure to configure XML for Directed Call Pickup in the
configuration files.
Notes:
1.
Before implementing this procedure, you must create an XML
application that the phone uses when the XML softkey or programmable
key is pressed. This XML application must be entered as a URI in the
“Value” field of the XML key. For information about creating an XML
script, see Appendix G, the section “Text Menu Object (Menu Screens)”
on page G-6.
2.
You must enable Directed Call Pickup bofore performing these
procedures. See “Enabling/Disabling Directed Call Pickup” on
page 5-52.
Configuration Files
To set XMLin the configuration files for Directed Call Pickup, see Appendix A, the section, “Softkey/
Programmable Key/Feature Key Parameters” on page A-108.
To enable Directed Call Pickup on the IP phone using the configuration files, see Appendix A, the section,
“Directed Call Pickup (BLF or XML Call Interception) Settings” on page A-104.
41-001160-00, Rev 01 Release 2.0
5-59
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
IP Phone Administrator Guide
Operational Features
Use the following procedure to configure XML for Directed Call Pickup in the
Aastra Web UI.
Aastra Web UI
1
Click on Basic Settings->Preferences->Directed Call Pickup Settings.
2
3
Enable the "Directed Call Pickup" field by checking the check box.
Enable the "Play a Ring Splash" field by checking the check box.
The IP phone plays a short "call waiting tone" when there is an incoming call on the BLF monitored
extension. If the "Play a Ring Splash" parameter is enabled, and the host tone is idle, the tone plays
a "ring splash".
5-60
41-001160-00, Rev 01 Release 2.0
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Operational IP Phone Features
Operational Features
Aastra Web UI
4
On the 53i:
Click on Operation->Programmable Keys.
Note: You can configure up to 6 programmable keys on the 53i.
41-001160-00, Rev 01 Release 2.0
5-61
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
IP Phone Administrator Guide
Operational Features
Aastra Web UI
5
On the 55i:
Click on Operation->Softkeys and XML or on Operation->Programmable Keys.
Softkeys and XML
Programmable Keys
Note: You can configure up to 20 softkeys and up to 6 programmable keys on the 55i.
5-62
41-001160-00, Rev 01 Release 2.0
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Operational IP Phone Features
Operational Features
Aastra Web UI
6
On the 57i/57iCT:
Click on Operation->Softkeys and XML and select the “Bottom Keys” tab or the “Top Keys” tab.
Bottom Keys
Top Keys
Note: You can configure up to 20 bottom softkeys and up to 10 top softkeys on the 57i/57i CT.
41-001160-00, Rev 01 Release 2.0
5-63
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
IP Phone Administrator Guide
Operational Features
Aastra Web UI
7
8
9
Select a softkey or programmable key to configure.
In the "Type" field, select "XML”..
For the 55i, 57i, and 57i CT softkeys:
In the "Label" field, enter the name of the person who’s extension you are monitoring.
10
In the "Value" field, enter the URI that the phone uses to display the XML application to the LCD.
For example, http://65.205.71.13/xml/startup/key.php?user=$$SIPREMOTENUMBER$$.
Note: For more information about creating an XML script to use with Directed Call Pickup, see
Appendix G, the section “Text Menu Object (Menu Screens)” on page G-6
11
12
Select the line state (idle, connected, incoming, outgoing, busy) that you want to apply to the XML
softkey or programmable key.
Click
to save your changes.
5-64
41-001160-00, Rev 01 Release 2.0
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Operational IP Phone Features
Operational Features
Do Not Disturb (DND)
The IP phones have a feature you can enable called "Do not Disturb (DND). You
can configure DND on softkeys and programmable keys using the Aastra Web UI
or the configuration files.
If DND is configured on the phone, the softkey or programmable key switches
DND ON and OFF. If the phone shares a line with other phones, only the phone
that has DND configured is affected.
The second line on the screen of the IP phone shows when DND is configured.
When a call comes in on the line, the caller hears a busy signal or recorded
message, depending on the server configuration.
Configuring DND
Configuration Files
For specific softkey and programmable key parameters you can set in the configuration files, see
Appendix A, the section, “Softkey/Programmable Key/Feature Key Parameters” on page A-108.
41-001160-00, Rev 01 Release 2.0
5-65
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
IP Phone Administrator Guide
Operational Features
Aastra Web UI
1
Click on Operation->Programmable Keys.
2
3
Select a hard key to configure.
In the "Type" field, select "do not disturb".
Note: You do not need to set the "Value" for DND. DND is applied to the hard key only.
4
Click
to save your changes.
You must restart your IP phone for the changes to take affect.
5
6
Click on Operation->Reset.
In the "Restart Phone" field click
to restart the IP phone and apply the changes.
5-66
41-001160-00, Rev 01 Release 2.0
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Operational IP Phone Features
Operational Features
Bridged Line Appearance (BLA) (57i/57i CT/53i only)
A SIP bridge line appearance (BLA) on the IP phones allows multiple devices to
share a single directory address (DA).
For example, people working at a technical support department could be located
in different places. If their desktop phones are configured for BLA DA, when
customer calls come in, all the phones with the BLA DA would ring but the call
can only be answered by one of them.
Once the call is answered, the rest of the phones reflect the status of the call. If the
call was put on "hold" by the original recipient, any one from the group can pick
up the call.
Notes:
1. This feature is dependent on the IP telephony system to which the IP
phone is registered and according to draft-anil-sipping-bla-02.txt.
2. Interactive Intelligence and Sylantro servers support the single BLA
group with single line appearance feature only.
You can apply BLA on the IP phones as follows:
•
As a single BLA group - One BLA DA is shared among multiple phones.
Only one phone at a time can pick up an incoming call or initiate an outgoing
call on the BLA DA. All phones reflect the usage of the BLA DA. If the call is
put on "hold", any one from the group can pick up the "held" call.
•
•
As a multiple BLA group - On one single phone, multiple BLA DA can be
associated with different line appearances. Every BLA DA is independent
from each other and follows the same rules as "a single BLA group".
As multiple instances of a BLA DA - A "x-line-id" parameter was defined in
draft-anil-sipping-bla-02.txt to present the incoming call to or place an
outgoing call on the specified line appearance instance. The parameter is
carried in "Alert-Info" header field over the request-URI (INVITE e.g.) or in
the NOTIFY messages to report the status of a dialog.
BLA DA can be configured on a global basis or on a per-line basis on the IP
phones using the Aastra Web UI or the configuration files.
41-001160-00, Rev 01 Release 2.0
5-67
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
IP Phone Administrator Guide
Operational Features
The following table shows the number of lines that can be set to BLA for each
model phone.
Possible # of BLA
Lines
IP Phone Model
57i
57i CT
53i
9
9
9
Configuring BLA
You can configure BLA on a global or per-line basis using the configuration files
or the Aastra Web UI.
Global BLA
You configure BLA on a global basis in the configuration files using the following
parameters:
sip mode
sip user name
sip bla number
You configure BLA on a global basis in the Aastra Web UI using the following
fields at Advanced Settings->Global SIP->Basic SIP Settings:
•
•
•
Line Mode
Phone Number
BLA Number
5-68
41-001160-00, Rev 01 Release 2.0
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Operational IP Phone Features
Operational Features
Per-Line BLA
You configure BLA on a per-line basis in the configuration files using the
following parameters:
sip lineN mode
sip lineN username
sip lineN bla number
You configure BLA on a per-line basis in the Aastra Web UI using the following
fields at Advanced Settings->Line 1 thru Line 9:
•
•
•
Line Mode
Phone Number
BLA Number
Sylantro servers and ININ servers require specific configuration methods for
per-line configurations.
For Sylantro Server
When configuring the BLA feature on a per-ine basis for a Sylantro server, the
value set for the "sip lineN bla number" parameter shall be the same value set for
the "sip lineN user name" parameter for all the phones in the group. For example,
if sip lineN user name is 1010, you would configure BLA on a per-line basis for
the Sylantro server as follows:
sip line 1 mode: 3
sip line1 user name: 1010 (# for all the phones)
sip line1 bla number: 1010
41-001160-00, Rev 01 Release 2.0
5-69
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
IP Phone Administrator Guide
Operational Features
For ININ Server
When configuring the BLA feature on an ININ server, the value set for the sip
lineN bla number parameter shall be the same value set for the sip lineN user
name parameter without the incremented digit added to the phone #. For example,
if the sip lineN user name for the first phone is 10101, and the sip lineN user name
for the second phone is 10102, etc., you would configure BLA on a per-line basis
for the ININ server as follows:
(# for phone 1 with appearance of phone 3)
sip line1 mode: 3
sip line1 user name: 10101 sip line1 bla number: 1010
(# for phone 2 with appearance of phone 3)
sip line1 mode: 3
sip line1 user name: 10102
sip line1 bla number: 1010
(# for phone 3)
sip line1 mode: 3
sip line1 user name: 1010
sip line1 bla number: 1010
Note: The original phone number which has the bridged line appearance
on other phones, will have the "sip lineN user name" parameter the same
as the "sip lineN bla number" (1010 in the above example on Phone 3).
Use the following procedures to configure BLA on the IP phone.
Configuring Global BLA
Configuration Files
For specific global parameters you can set in the configuration files, see Appendix A, the section,
“SIP Basic, Global Settings” on page A-40.
Configuring Per-Line BLA
Configuration Files
For specific per-line parameters you can set in the configuration files, see Appendix A, the section,
“SIP Basic, Per-Line Settings” on page A-48.
5-70
41-001160-00, Rev 01 Release 2.0
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Operational IP Phone Features
Operational Features
Aastra Web UI
1
For global configuration of BLA:
Click on Advanced Settings->Global SIP->Basic SIP Authentication Settings.
41-001160-00, Rev 01 Release 2.0
5-71
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
IP Phone Administrator Guide
Operational Features
Aastra Web UI
For per-line configuration of BLA:
Click on Advanced Settings->Line N (1-9).
In the "Line Mode" field, select the BLA option.
2
3
In the "Phone Number" field, enter the phone number of the IP phone.
For global configuration of BLA:
In the "BLA Number" field, enter the Bridge Line Appearance (BLA) number to be shared across all
IP phones.
For per-line configuration of BLA:
In the "BLA Number" field, enter the Bridge Line Appearance (BLA) number to be shared on a
specific line.
4
Click
to save your changes.
You must restart your IP phone for the changes to take affect.
5
6
Click on Operation->Reset.
In the "Restart Phone" field click
to restart the IP phone and apply the changes.
5-72
41-001160-00, Rev 01 Release 2.0
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Operational IP Phone Features
Operational Features
Using a BLA Line on the IP Phone
If you have either a global or per-line BLA configuration, and you want to share a
call on the line with a BLA group, you need to press the Hold button before
sharing the call with the group.
For example, if line 1 is configured for BLA, and you pick up a call on line 1, you
must press the Hold button to share the call with the BLA group.
If you pick up a call on line 1 configured for BLA, and another call comes in on
line 2, you can pick up line 2 without putting line 1 on hold. The line 1 call will
be on hold automatically; however it is on hold locally only. The line 1 call
cannot be shared with the BLA group.
Note: The Hold button must be pressed for a call on a BLA line to be
shared with the BLA group.
Park Calls/Pick Up Parked Calls
The IP phones (including the 57i CT handset) have a park and pickup call feature
that allows you to park a call and pickup a call when required. There are two ways
a user or adminstrator can configure this feature:
•
•
Using a static configuration
Using a programmable configuration
Note: The IP phones accept both methods of configuration. However, to
avoid redundancy, Aastra Telecom recommends you configure either a
static configuration or a programmable configuration.
The IP phones support the Park/Pickup feature on the Asterisk, BroadWorks,
Sylantro, and ININ PBX servers.
The following paragraphs describe the park and pickup methods of configuration
on the IP phones.
41-001160-00, Rev 01 Release 2.0
5-73
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
IP Phone Administrator Guide
Operational Features
Park/Pickup Static Configuration (57i/57i CT only)
You can configure a static configuration for parking and picking up a call using
the Aastra Web UI at Basic Settings-> Preferences. By entering the appropriate
value in the "Park Call" and "Pickup Parked Call" fields, you tell the phone
where to park a live call and where to pickup the parked call.
On the IP phone UI, the static configuration method displays the following:
•
When a call comes in, and you pickup the handset, the default label of "Park"
displays on the Phone UI.
•
After pressing the "Park" softkey to park the call, the default label of
"Pickup" displays on the phone UI.
Note: On the 57i CT handset, pressing Ï displays the "Park" and
"Pickup" labels.
The values you enter in the Aastra Web UI for the Park/Pickup call feature are
dependant on your type of server. The following table provides the values you
enter for the "Park Call" and "Pickup Parked Call" fields in the Aastra Web UI.
Park/Pickup Call Server Configuration Values
Server
Park Values*
Pickup Values*
Aasterisk
Sylantro
BroadWorks
ININ PBX
70
*98
70
*99
*68
*88
callpark
pickup
*Leave "value" fields blank to disable the park and pickup feature.
5-74
41-001160-00, Rev 01 Release 2.0
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Operational IP Phone Features
Operational Features
Configuring Park /Pickup using Static Configuration
(57i/57i CT only)
Use the following procedure to configure the Park/Pickup call feature using the
static configuration method.
Note: Aastra recommends you configure either the static or the
programmable configuration, but not both.
Aastra Web UI
1
Click on Basic Settings->Preferences->General.
2
Enter a server value in the Park Call field to which incoming live calls will be parked.
Note: For values to enter in this field, see the table “Park/Pickup Call Server Configuration Values”
on page 5-74.
41-001160-00, Rev 01 Release 2.0
5-75
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
IP Phone Administrator Guide
Operational Features
Aastra Web UI
3
4
Enter a server value in the "Pickup Parked Call" field.
Note: For values to enter in this field, see the table “Park/Pickup Call Server Configuration Values”
on page 5-74.
Click
to save your changes.
You must restart your IP phone for the changes to take affect.
5
6
Click on Operation->Reset.
In the "Restart Phone" field click
to restart the IP phone and apply the changes.
Park/Pickup Programmable Configuration
The programmable method of configuration creates park and pickup softkeys or
programmable keys that you can configure on the IP phones
(53i, 55i, 57i, 57i CT).
For the 55i, 57i, and 57i CT you can set a softkey as "Park" or "Pickup" and then:
•
•
•
•
specify a customized label to display on the Phone UI
specify a value
specify which line to use
specify the state of the park and/or pickup keys
For the 53i, you can set a programmable key as "Park" or "Pickup" and then:
•
•
specify a value
specify a line to use
5-76
41-001160-00, Rev 01 Release 2.0
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Operational IP Phone Features
Operational Features
On 57i/57i CT
On the IP phone UI, the Park/Pickup feature displays the following:
•
When a call comes in, and you pickup the handset, the custom label that you
configured for the Park softkey displays on the Phone UI.
•
After the call is parked, the label that you configured for the Pickup softkey
displays on other phones in the network. You can then press the "Pickup"
softkey, followed by the applicable value to pickup the call on another phone
in your network.
•
On the 57i CT, the customized labels apply to the base unit only. On the 57i
CT handset, pressing Ï displays the default labels of "Park" and "Pickup".
Notes:
1. On the 57i CT, the customized labels apply to the base unit only. On
the 57i CT handset, pressing Ï displays the default labels of "Park" and
"Pickup".
2. On the 57i/57i CT, the old softkey labeled "Pickup" has been
renamed to "Answer". This softkey uses the old functionality - when you
pickup the handset, you see a softkey labeled "Answer". You can then
press this key to pick up an incoming call. Do no confuse this feature
with the new Park/Pickup configuration feature.
On 53i
•
When a call comes in, and you pickup the handset, you can press the
applicable "Park" programmable key to park the call.
•
After the call is parked, you can press the "Pickup" programmable key,
followed by the applicable value to pickup the call.
You can configure a Park and Pickup programmable configuration using the
configuration files or the Aastra Web UI.
41-001160-00, Rev 01 Release 2.0
5-77
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
IP Phone Administrator Guide
Operational Features
Programmable Configuration Using Configuration Files
In the configuration files, you configure Park/Pickup using the softkey
parameters. You must specify the"softkeyN value" and "prgkeyN value" as
<server type;server-specific value>. The following examples show Park/Pickup
configurations using specific servers.
Model 57i/480 CT Examples
Server
Asterisk
Park Configuration
softkeyN type: park
Pickup Configuration
softkeyN type: pickup
softkeyN label: parkCall
softkeyN value: asterisk;70
softkeyN line: 1
softkeyN label: pickupCall
softkeyN value: asterisk;70
softkeyN line: 1
softkeyN states: connected*
softkeyN states: idle,outgoing**
Sylantro
softkeyN type: park
softkeyN type: pickup
softkeyN label: parkCall
softkeyN value: sylantro;*98
softkeyN line: 1
softkeyN label: pickupCall
softkeyN value: sylantro;*99
softkeyN line: 1
softkeyN states: connected*
softkeyN states: idle,outgoing**
BroadWorks
ININ PBX
softkeyN type: park
softkeyN type: pickup
softkeyN label: parkCall
softkeyN value: broadworks;*68
softkeyN line: 1
softkeyN label: pickupCall
softkeyN value: broadworks;*88
softkeyN line: 1
softkeyN states: connected*
softkeyN states: idle,outgoing**
softkeyN type: park
softkeyN type: pickup
softkeyN label: parkCall
softkeyN value: inin;callpark
softkeyN line: 1
softkeyN label: pickupCall
softkeyN value: inin;pickup
softkeyN line: 1
softkeyN states: connected*
softkeyN states: idle,outgoing**
*When you configure a softkey as "Park", you must configure the state of the softkey as
"connected".
**When you configure a softkey as "Pickup", you can configure the state of the softkey as "idle,
outgoing", or just "idle", or just "outgoing".
5-78
41-001160-00, Rev 01 Release 2.0
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Operational IP Phone Features
Operational Features
Model 53i Examples
Server
Asterisk
Park Configuration
prgkeyN type: park
prgkeyN value: asterisk;70
prgkeyN line: 1
Pickup Configuration
prgkeyN type: pickup
prgkeyN value: asterisk;70
prgkeyN line: 1
Sylantro
prgkeyN type: park
prgkeyN value: sylantro;*98
prgkeyN line: 1
prgkeyN type: pickup
prgkeyN value: sylantro;*99
prgkeyN line: 1
BroadWorks
ININ PBX
prgkeyN type: park
prgkeyN value: broadworks;*68
prgkeyN line: 1
prgkeyN type: pickup
prgkeyN value: broadworks;*88
prgkeyN line: 1
prgkeyN type: park
prgkeyN value: inin;callpark
prgkeyN line: 1
prgkeyN type: pickup
prgkeyN value: inin;pickup
prgkeyN line: 1
Note: The 53i does not allow for the configuration of labels and states.
programmable configuration method and the configuration files.
Configuration Files
For specific parameters you can set in the configuration files, see Appendix A, the section,
“Softkey Settings for 55i, 57i, 57i CT” on page A-110 and “Programmable Key Settings for 53i and 55i” on
page A-117.
Programmable Configuration Using the Aastra Web UI
On the 57i/57i CT, you configure a Park and/or Pickup key at
Operation->Softkeys and XML. You enter a key label, and value for a specific
line on the phone. The default state of the Park configuration is "connected". The
default state of the Pickup configuration is "idle, outgoing".
The 57i CT handsets use the park/pickup configuration enabled at
Operation->Handset Keys in the Aastra Web UI. If Park or Pickup are enabled
on more than one line on the base unit, the 57i handset uses the first
programmable configuration.
41-001160-00, Rev 01 Release 2.0
5-79
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
IP Phone Administrator Guide
Operational Features
For example, if line 1 and line 6 are configured for park, the 57i CT handset uses
the configuration set for line 1 to park a call.
On the 53i, you configure a Park and/or Pickup key at
Operation->Programmable Keys, and then enter the appropriate value and line..
Note: Applicable values depend on the server in your network (Asterisk,
BroadWorks, Sylantro, ININ PBX. See the table “Park/Pickup Call
Server Configuration Values” on page 5-74.
Use the following procedure to configure the Park/Pickup call feature using the
programmable configuration method and the Aastra Web UI.
Aastra Web UI
For the 57i/57i CT:
1
Click on Operation->Softkeys and XML.
2
3
4
Pick a softkey to configure for Parking a call.
In the "Type" field, select Park.
In the "Label" field, enter a label for the Park softkey.
5-80
41-001160-00, Rev 01 Release 2.0
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Operational IP Phone Features
Operational Features
Aastra Web UI
5
In the "Value" field, enter the approriate value based on the server in your network.
Note: For values to enter in this field, see the table “Park/Pickup Call Server Configuration Values”
on page 5-74.
6
7
In the "Line" field, select a line for which to apply the Park configuration.
The park softkey has a default state of “Connected”.
Leave this state enabled or to disable, uncheck the check box.
8
Pick a softkey to configure for Picking up a call.
9
In the "Type" field, select Pickup.
10
11
In the "Label" field, enter a label for the Pickup softkey.
In the "Value" field, enter the approriate value based on the server in your network.
Note: For values to enter in this field, see the table “Park/Pickup Call Server Configuration Values”
on page 5-74.
12
13
In the "Line" field, select a line for which to apply the Pickup configuration.
The pickup softkey has a default state of “Idle” and “Outgoing”.
Leave these states enabled or to disable, uncheck the check boxes.
14
Click
to save your changes.
You must restart your IP phone for the changes to take affect.
15
16
Click on Operation->Reset.
In the "Restart Phone" field click
to restart the IP phone and apply the changes.
For the 57i CT Handset:
41-001160-00, Rev 01 Release 2.0
5-81
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
IP Phone Administrator Guide
Operational Features
Aastra Web UI
1
Click on Operation->Handset Keys.
2
3
4
5
6
Pick a handset key to configure for parking a call.
In the "Key Function" field, select Park.
Pick another handset key to configure for picking up a call.
In the "Key Function" field, select Pickup.
Click
to save your changes.
You must restart your IP phone for the changes to take affect.
7
8
Click on Operation->Reset.
In the "Restart Phone" field click
to restart the IP phone and apply the changes.
For the 53i:
5-82
41-001160-00, Rev 01 Release 2.0
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Operational IP Phone Features
Operational Features
Aastra Web UI
1
Click on Operation->Programmable Keys.
53i Screen
2
3
4
Pick a hard key to configure for Parking a call.
In the "Hard Key" field, select Park.
In the "Value" field, enter the approriate value based on the server in your network.
Note: For values to enter in this field, see the table “Park/Pickup Call Server Configuration Values”
on page 5-74.
5
For the 53i:
Pick a hard key to configure for Picking up a call.
6
7
8
In the "Hard Key" field, select Pickup.
In the "Value" field, enter the approriate value based on the server in your network.
Note: For values to enter in this field, see the table “Park/Pickup Call Server Configuration Values”
on page 5-74.
9
For the 53i:
In the "Line" field, select a line for which to apply the Pickup configuration.
10
Click
to save your changes.
You must restart your IP phone for the changes to take affect.
41-001160-00, Rev 01 Release 2.0
5-83
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
IP Phone Administrator Guide
Operational Features
Aastra Web UI
11
12
Click on Operation->Reset.
In the "Restart Phone" field click
to restart the IP phone and apply the changes.
5-84
41-001160-00, Rev 01 Release 2.0
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Operational IP Phone Features
Operational Features
Using the Park Call/Pickup Parked Call Feature
Use the following procedures on the IP phones to park a call and pick up a parked
call.
IP Phone UI
Step Action
Parking a Call
1
2
While on a live call, press the "Park" softkey.
Perform the following for your specific server:
For Asterisk Server:
- Server announces the
extension number where the call
has been parked. Once the call is
parked, press the y
key
to complete parking.
For BroadWorks Server:
- After you hear the greeting from
the CallPark server, enter the
extension where you want to
park the call.
For Sylnatro Server:
- Enter the extension number
where you want to park the call,
followed by "#" key.
For ININ Server:
- Enter the extension number
where you want to park the call,
followed by "#" key.
If the call is parked successfully, the response is either a greeting voice confirming that the call was
parked, or a hang up occurs. The parked call party will get music on hold.
3
If the call fails, you can pick up the call (using the next procedure) and press the "Park" softkey again
to retry step 2.
Picking up a Parked Call
4
Pick up the handset on the phone.
41-001160-00, Rev 01 Release 2.0
5-85
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
IP Phone Administrator Guide
Operational Features
IP Phone UI
Step Action
5
6
Enter the extension number where the call was parked.
Press the "Pickup" softkey.
If the call pick up is successful, you are connected with the parked call.
Last Call Return (lcr) (Sylantro Servers only)
Last call return (lcr) allows an administrator or user to configure a "last call
return" function on a softkey or programmable key. This feature is for
Sylantro servers only.
You can configure the “lcr” softkey feature via the configuration files or the
Aastra Web UI.
How it works
If you configure "lcr" on a softkey or programmable key, and a call comes
into your phone, after you are finished with the call and hangup, you can
press the key configured for “lcr” and the phone dials the last call you received.
When you configure an “lcr” softkey, the label “LCR” displays next to that
softkey on the IP phone. When the Sylantro server detects an “lcr” request, it
translates this request and routes the call to the last caller.
Configuring Last Call Return
Configuration Files
For specific last call return (lcr) parameters you can set in the configuration files, see Appendix A, the
section, “Softkey/Programmable Key/Feature Key Parameters” on page A-108.
5-86
41-001160-00, Rev 01 Release 2.0
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Operational IP Phone Features
Operational Features
Aastra Web UI
For the 57i/57i CT:
1
Click on Operation->Softkeys and XML.
2
3
4
5
Pick a softkey to configure for Last Call Return.
In the "Type" field, select lcr.
In the "Line" field, select a line for which to apply the last call return configuration.
The lcr softkey has a default state of “Idle”, “Connected”, “Incoming”, “Outgoing”.
Leave these states enabled or to disable, uncheck the check boxes as required.
6
Click
to save your changes.
You must restart your IP phone for the changes to take affect.
7
8
Click on Operation->Reset.
In the "Restart Phone" field click
to restart the IP phone and apply the changes.
41-001160-00, Rev 01 Release 2.0
5-87
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
IP Phone Administrator Guide
Operational Features
Aastra Web UI
For the 57i CT Handset:
1
Click on Operation->Handset Keys.
2
3
4
Pick a handset key to configure for Last Call Return.
In the "Key Function" field, select lcr.
Click
to save your changes.
You must restart your IP phone for the changes to take affect.
5
6
Click on Operation->Reset.
In the "Restart Phone" field click
to restart the IP phone and apply the changes.
5-88
41-001160-00, Rev 01 Release 2.0
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Operational IP Phone Features
Operational Features
Aastra Web UI
For the 53i
1
Click on Operation->Programmable Keys.
53i Screen
2
3
4
Pick a hard key to configure for Last Call Return.
In the "Type" field, select lcr.
For the 53i:
In the "Line" field, select a line for which to apply the lcr configuration.
5
Click
to save your changes.
You must restart your IP phone for the changes to take affect.
6
7
Click on Operation->Reset.
In the "Restart Phone" field click
to restart the IP phone and apply the changes.
41-001160-00, Rev 01 Release 2.0
5-89
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
IP Phone Administrator Guide
Operational Features
Call Forwarding
The call forwarding feature on the IP phone allows incoming calls to be forwarded
to another destination. The phone sends the SIP message to the SIP proxy, which
then forwards the call to the assigned destination.
Call forwarding is disabled by default. You can configure call forwarding on a
phone-wide basis or on multi-line phones on a per-line basis. If you have
configured call forwarding on an individual line, then the settings for this line are
used; otherwise, the phone-wide call forward settings are used.
You can configure call forwarding on all phones (global settings) or on specific
lines (local settings) of a single phone.
For call forwarding you can set the following:
•
•
•
Call forward mode
Destination number
Number of rings before forwarding the call (from 1 to 9 rings)
The following are the call forward modes you can set:
Call Forward Mode
Off
Description
Disables call forward
All
Phone forwards all incoming calls
immediately to the specified destination.
Busy
Phone forwards incoming calls if the line is
already in use.
No Answer
Busy No Answer
Phone forwards the call if it is not
answered in the specified number of rings
Phone forwards the call if either the line is
already in use or the call is not answered
in the specified number of rings.
Global
(per-lline only)
Phone uses the phone-wide call forward
setting. This is only valid when setting the
mode of individual lines.
5-90
41-001160-00, Rev 01 Release 2.0
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Operational IP Phone Features
Operational Features
The following table shows the IP phone model and the number of lines for which
you can configure call forwarding.
Available Lines for
Call Forwarding
IP Phone Model
53i
9
9
9
9
55i
57i
57i CT
Enabling/Disabling the Ability to Configure Call Forwarding
Using the configuration files, you can enable or disable the ability to configure
Call Forwarding in the Aastra Web UI and the IP Phone UI. You use the following
parameter to enable/disable this feature:
•
call forward disabled
Valid values for this parameter are 0 (disabled) and 1 (enabled). If this parameter
is set to 0, a user and administrator can configure Call Fowarding via the Aastra
Web UI and the IP Phone UI using the "Call Foward" options. If this parameter is
set to 1, all "Call Forward" options are removed from the Aastra Web UI and the
IP Phone UI, preventing the ability to configure Call Fowarding.
Configuration Files
For specific parameters you can set in the configuration files for enabling/disabling Call Forwarding, see
Appendix A, the section, “Call Forward Settings” on page A-69.
41-001160-00, Rev 01 Release 2.0
5-91
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
IP Phone Administrator Guide
Operational Features
Configuration Method for Call Forwarding
The method you use to configure call forwarding depends on the model phone you
are configuring.
You can set the phone-wide call forward settings using the IP phone UI or the
Aastra Web UI. However, you must use the Aastra Web UI to set the per-line call
forward settings. The per-line settings override the settings for global call
forwarding.
You can set global and per-line settings on the 55i, 57i, and 57i CT.
Configuring Call Forwarding
Use the following procedure to configure phone-wide call forwarding.
IP Phone UI
Step Action
For global configuration of call fowarding:
1
For 53i:
Press Ion the phone to enter the Options List.
For 55i/57i/57i CT:
Press
on the phone to enter the Options List.
2
Select Call Foward.
3
For 53i:
In the “Cfwd Number” field, enter the destination number for which you want your incoming calls to
be forwarded.
For 55i/57i/57i CT:
In the “Number” field, enter the destination number for which you want your incoming calls to be
forwarded.
Note: Leaving the number field blank disables call forwarding.
5-92
41-001160-00, Rev 01 Release 2.0
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Operational IP Phone Features
Operational Features
IP Phone UI
Step Action
4
For 53i:
In the “Cfwd Mode” field, enter the mode that you want to set on your phones.
For 55i/57i/57i CT:
In the “Mode” field, enter the mode that you want to set on your phones.
Valid modes are:
•
•
•
•
•
Off
All
Busy
No Answer
Busy No Answer
5
6
In the “No. Rings” field, enter the number of rings you want the phone to ring before the call is
forwarded.
Valid values are 1 to 9.
Note: "No. Rings" field applies to No Answer and Busy No Answer modes only.
For 53i:
Press Set to save the changes.
For 55i/57i/57i CT:
Press Done to save the changes.
41-001160-00, Rev 01 Release 2.0
5-93
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
IP Phone Administrator Guide
Operational Features
Aastra Web UI
1
Click on Basic Settings->Call Forward.
For global configuration of call fowarding:
2
In the "Mode" field, select the mode you want to set on your phone.
Valid modes are:
•
•
•
•
•
Off
All
Busy
No Answer
Busy No Answer
Note: To disable call forwarding in the Aastra Web UI, set the mode to OFF and remove the phone
number in the "Number" field.
3
In the "Number" field, enter the destination number for which you want your calls to be call
forwarded.
5-94
41-001160-00, Rev 01 Release 2.0
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Operational IP Phone Features
Operational Features
Aastra Web UI
4
In the "Number of Rings" field, enter the number of rings you want your phone to ring before the call
is forwarded.
Valid values are 1 to 9.
Note: "Number of Rings" field applies to No Answer and Busy No Answer modes only.
5
Click
to save your changes.
For per-line configuration of call fowarding
6
7
Select a line to configure Call Forwarding on.
In the "Mode" field, select the mode you want to set on your phone.
Valid modes are:
•
•
•
•
•
•
Off
All
Busy
No Answer
Busy No Answer
Global
Notes:
1. To disable call forwarding in the Aastra Web UI, set the mode to OFF and remove the phone
number in the "Number" field.
2. To force a line to use the global settings, set the "Mode" field to Global.
8
9
In the "Forward Number" field, enter the destination number for which you want your calls on this
line to be call forwarded.
In the "Number of Rings" field, select the number of rings you want this line to ring before the call is
forwarded.
Valid values are 1 to 9.
Note: "Number of Rings" field applies to No Answer and Busy No Answer modes only.
10
Click
to save your changes.
41-001160-00, Rev 01 Release 2.0
5-95
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
IP Phone Administrator Guide
Operational Features
Callers List
The IP phones have a "Callers List" feature that store the name, phone number,
and incremental calls, for each call received by the phone.
The following illustraton shows the default location of the Callers List Key on
each type of phone model.
Callers List key is under
Callers List Key
Services menu on 53i
53i
55i
57i/57i CT
You can enable and disable the Callers List feature using the configuration files.
When disabled, the Callers List does not disaply on the IP phone UI and the Caller
List key is ignored when pressed.
When enabled, you can view, scroll, and delete line items in the Callers List from
the IP phone UI. You can also directly dial from a displayed line item in the
Callers List. You can download the Callers List to your PC for viewing using the
Aastra Web UI.
5-96
41-001160-00, Rev 01 Release 2.0
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Operational IP Phone Features
Operational Features
When you download the Callers List, the phone stores the callerlist.csv file to
your computer in comma-separated value (CSV) format.
You can use any spreadsheet application to open the file for viewing. The
following is an example of a Callers List in a spreadsheet application.
The file displays the name, phone number, and the line that the call came in on.
41-001160-00, Rev 01 Release 2.0
5-97
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
IP Phone Administrator Guide
Operational Features
Enabling/Disabling Callers List
You can enable and disable user access to the Callers List on the IP phones using
the following parameter in the configuration files:
•
callers list disabled
Valid values for this parameter are 0 (enabled) and 1 (disabled). If this parameter
is set to 0, the Callers List can be accessed by all users. If this parameter is set to
1, the IP phone does not save any caller information to the Caller List. For 57i and
57i CT phones, the "Caller List" option on the IP phone is removed from the
Services menu, and the Caller List key is ignored if pressed by the user.
Configuration Files
For specific parameters you can set in the configuration files for enabling/disabling the Callers List, see
Appendix A, the section, “Callers List Settings” on page A-69.
Using the Callers List
Use the following procedure to access and use the Callers List.
IP Phone UI
Step Action
For the 55i, 57i, and 57i CT:
1
2
Press the Callers key on the phone.
Use the r and s to scroll through the line items in the Callers List.
Note: To the left of a line item, a b icon displays with the handset ON or OFF the receiver. The ON
receiver indicates the call came in as a missed call. The OFF receiver indicates the call came in and
was answered.
3
To delete all entries in the Callers list, press the 3 Delete softkey at the "Callers List" header.
To delete a line item from the Callers List, select the line item you want to delete and press the 3
Delete softkey.
4
To cancel a delete function, press the r or the s Scroll keys.
5-98
41-001160-00, Rev 01 Release 2.0
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Operational IP Phone Features
Operational Features
IP Phone UI
Step Action
5
6
7
To save a line item to a programmable key for speeddialing, press the 3 Save softkey and enter the
line number at the "Save to?" prompt that is already configured for speeddialing at a softkey.
To dial a displayed entry from the Callers List, pick up the handset, press the d /f handsfree key, or
press a line key.
To exit the Callers List, press the Callers key.
For the 53i:
1
2
3
Press the Services key on the phone to display the Services menu.
From the Services menu, select "Callers List".
Use the r and s to scroll through the line items in the Callers List.
To the left of a line item, a b icon displays with the handset ON or OFF the receiver. The ON
receiver indicates the call came in as a missed call. The OFF receiver indicates the call came in and
was answered.
4
To delete all entries in the Callers list, press the 3 Delete key at the "Callers List" header.
To delete a line item from the Callers List, select the line item you want to delete and press the 3
Delete key.
5
6
To cancel a delete function, press the r or the s Scroll keys.
To save a line item to a programmable key for speeddialing, press the 3 Save key and enter the line
number at the "Save to?" prompt that is already configured for speeddialing at a programmable key.
7
8
To dial a displayed entry from the Callers List, pick up the handset, press the d /f handsfree key, or
press a line key.
To exit the Callers List, press the b key.
41-001160-00, Rev 01 Release 2.0
5-99
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
IP Phone Administrator Guide
Operational Features
Downloading the Callers List
Use the following procedure to download the Callers List using the Aastra Web
UI.
Aastra Web UI
1
Click on Operation->Directory.
2
In the Callers List field, click on
.
A “File Download” message displays.
3
4
Click
.
Enter the location on your computer where you want to download the Callers List and click
.
The callerslist.csv file downloads to your computer.
5
Use a spreadsheet application to open and view the Callers List.
5-100
41-001160-00, Rev 01 Release 2.0
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Operational IP Phone Features
Operational Features
Missed Calls Indicator
The IP phone has a "missed calls" indicator that increments the number of missed
calls to the phone. This feature is accessible from the IP phone UI only.
You can enable and disable the Missed Calls Indicator feature using the
configuration files. When disabled, the Missed Calls Indicator does not increment
as calls come into the IP phone.
When enabled, the number of calls that have not been answered increment on the
phone’s idle screen as "<number> New Calls". As the number of unanswered
calls increment, the phone numbers associated with the calls are stored in the
Callers List. The user can access the Callers List and clear the call from the list.
Once the user accesses the Callers List, the "<number> New Calls" on the idle
screen is cleared.
Enabling/Disabling Missed Calls Indicator
You can enable (turn on) and disable (turn off) the Missed Calls Indicator on the
IP phones using the following parameter in the configuration files:
•
missed calls indicator disabled
Valid values for this parameter are 0 (enabled) and 1 (disabled). If this parameter
is set to 0, the indicator increments as unanswered calls come into the IP phone. If
set to 1, the indicator does not increment the unanswered calls.
Use the following procedures to enable/disable the Missed Calls Indicator on the
IP phones.
Configuration Files
For specific parameters you can set in the configuration files for enabling/disabling the Missed Calls
Indicator, see Appendix A, the section, “Missed Calls Indicator Settings” on page A-70.
41-001160-00, Rev 01 Release 2.0
5-101
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
IP Phone Administrator Guide
Operational Features
Accessing and Clearing Missed Calls
Use the following procedure to access and clear missed calls from the Callers List.
Once you display the Callers List, the "<number> New Calls" indicator clears.
IP Phone UI
Step Action
For the 57i/57i CT:
1
Press x
on the phone to display the Services menu.
or
Press the s key to enter the Callers List directly. (skip to step 3)
2
3
From the Services menu, select "Callers List".
Use the r and s to scroll through the line items in the Callers List to find the line items that have
the b icon with the receiver ON. These are the missed calls to the phone.
4
To clear a line item from the Callers List, select the line item you want to delete and press the Clear
softkey.
The line item is deleted from the Callers List.
For the 53i:
1
2
Press b on the phone to enter the Callers List.
Use the r and s to scroll through the line items in the Callers List to find the line items that have
the b icon with the receiver ON. These are the missed calls to the phone.
3
4
To clear the line item from the Callers List, select the line item you want to clear and press the 3
Delete key.
To cancel a delete function, press the r or the s Scroll keys.
The line item is deleted from the Callers List.
5-102
41-001160-00, Rev 01 Release 2.0
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Operational IP Phone Features
Operational Features
Directory List
The IP phones have a "Directory List" feature that allows you to store frequently
used names and numbers on the phone. You can also dial directly from the
directory entry.
The following illustraton shows the default location of the Directory Key on each
type of phone model.
Directory key is under
Directory Key
Services menu on 53i
53i
55i
57i/57i CT
Directory List Capabilities
In the Directory List a user or administrator can store a maximum of 7 numbers
associated with a unique name. You can apply pre-defined labels to the entry
which include, Office, Home, Cell, and Pager, or create your own labels. Labels
can be up to 14 characters in length.
41-001160-00, Rev 01 Release 2.0
5-103
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
IP Phone Administrator Guide
Operational Features
You can also sort multiple numbers according to preference and perform a
quick-search feature that allows you to enter the first letter that corresponds to a
name in the Directory to find specific line items. The phone displays the first
name with this letter.The quick-search feature in the Directory List works only
when the Directory is first accessed.
Reference
For more detailed information about the Directory Key on your IP phone, and the
Directory List, see your model-specific User Guide.
Administrator/User Functions for Directory List
You can perform the following pertaining to the Directory List:
•
You can enable and disable access to the Directory List using the
configuration files. When disabled, the Directory List does not display on the
IP phone UI and the Directory List softkey is ignored when pressed. This is an
administrator function only.
•
•
If the Directory List is enabled, you can view, add, change, and delete entries
to/from the Directory List using the IP phone UI. You can also directly dial a
number from the Directory List. This is an administrator and user function.
A public and private softkey can be used when at a line item in the Directory
List. The Private key toggles a number in the Directory List to private. The
Public key allows a number in the Directory List to be sent to the handsets. A
57i CT accepts a maximum of 50 entries with the public attribute. This is an
administrator and user function.
•
You can download the Directory List to your PC via the Aastra Web UI. The
phone stores the directorylist.csv file to your PC in comma-separated value
(CSV) format. This is an administrator and user function.
5-104
41-001160-00, Rev 01 Release 2.0
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Operational IP Phone Features
Operational Features
•
You can use any spreadsheet application to open the file for viewing. The
following is an example of a Directory List in a spreadsheet application. This
is an administrator and user function.
The file displays the name, phone number(s), and line number(s) for each
Directory entry.
41-001160-00, Rev 01 Release 2.0
5-105
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
IP Phone Administrator Guide
Operational Features
Enabling/Disabling Directory List
You can enable and disable user access to the Directory List on the IP phones
using the following parameter in the configuration files:
•
directory disabled
Valid values for this parameter are 0 (enabled) and 1 (disabled). If this parameter
is set to 0, the Directory List can be accessed by all users. If this parameter is set
to 1, the Directory List does not display on the IP phone and the Directory key is
disabled. On the 53i, the "Directory" option is also removed from the "Services"
menu.
Use the following procedures to enable/disable the Directory List on the IP
phones.
Configuration Files
For specific parameters you can set in the configuration files for enabling/disabling the Directory List, see
Appendix A, the section, “Directory Settings” on page A-68.
5-106
41-001160-00, Rev 01 Release 2.0
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Operational IP Phone Features
Operational Features
Server to IP Phone Download
You can populate your IP phone Directory List with server directory files. To
activate this feature, you need to add the following parameters to the
configuration files:
•
•
directory 1: company_directory
directory 2 : my_personal_directory’
The IP phone recognizes the following characters in a Directory List:
Character
’#’
Description
Pound character; any characters appearing after
the # on a line are treated as a comment
’,’
Comma character; used to separate the name,
URI number, line, and mode fields within each
directory entry.
’"’
Quotation mark; when pound and comma
characters are found between quotes in a name
field or URI number field, they are treated as
regular characters.
A valid directory entry has a name, a URI number, and optional line number, and
an optional mode attribute, all separated by commas. If a line number is not
present, the entry is assigned to line 1. If a mode attribute (public or private) is not
present, the entry is assigned to "Private".
The following directory entries are considered valid:
# our company's directory
# updated 1 jan 2012
# mode = private, by default
#
joe foo bar, 123456789, 6
# line = 1, by default
# mode = private, by default
#
snidley whiplash, 000111222
# the parser ignores the COMMA # in the name
# mode = private, by default
#
"manny, jr", 093666888, 9
# the parser ignores the POUND # chars in the URI number
# mode = private, by default
#
hello dolly, "12#34#7", 2
41-001160-00, Rev 01 Release 2.0
5-107
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
IP Phone Administrator Guide
Operational Features
Server to IP Phone Download Behavior
The software that reads directory files from the server, loads the file’s contents
into the phone's NVRAM when the phone is booting. Directory entries in the
NVRAM that originate from a server directory file are 'owned' by the server.
During the boot process both directory files are read, combined into a single list,
and any duplicate entries are deleted from the list. Any entries in this list that are
not already in the phone's NVRAM are added to the NVRAM and flagged as
being owned by the server.
Likewise, any entries in the NVRAM that are owned by the server, but are no
longer in one of the server's directory files, are removed from the NVRAM.
Entries made from the IP phone UI are never touched.
Directory List Limitations
The following table indicates the maximum characters for each line and field in
the Directory List.
Directory List Limitations
Maximum length of a line
255 characters
15 characters
45 characters
200 entries
Maximum length of a name
Maximum length of a URI
Maximum number directory entries in the NVRAM
Maximum number directory entries in the NVRAM
with the "public" attribute
(57i CT only)
50 entries
5-108
41-001160-00, Rev 01 Release 2.0
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Operational IP Phone Features
Operational Features
Using the Directory List
Use the following procedures to access and use the Directory List.
IP Phone UI
Step Action
For the 53i:
1
2
3
Press the Services key on the phone to display the Services menu.
From the Services menu, select "Directory List".
Press 3 Directory on the phone to enter the Directory List.
Note: If no key is pressed within 3 seconds, the phone prompts you to press the first letter in the
name of the required directory entry. The phone finds and displays the first name with this letter.
4
5
Use the r and s to scroll through the line items in the Directory List.
To delete all entries in the Directory list, press the 3 Delete key at the "Directory List" header.
To delete a line item from the Directory List, select the line item you want to delete and press
the 3 Delete key.
6
7
To cancel a delete function, press the r or the s Scroll keys.
To add a new entry to the list, press the 3 Save key at the "Directory" header screen and perform
step 6.
or
Press the 3 Save key at a line item and press the 3 Directory key again to perform step 6.
Enter a phone number, name, and line number and press the 3 Save key after each field entry.
8
9
To save an entry to a programmable key for speeddialing , press the 3 Save key and enter the line
number at the "Save to?" prompt that is already configured for speeddialing at a programmable key.
10
11
12
To edit an entry, use the 3 key for each field you are editing. Press the 3 Save key to move to each
field.
To dial a displayed entry from the Directory List, pick up the handset, press the d /f handsfree key,
or press a line key.
To exit the Directory List, press the 3 Directory key again.
For the 55i, 57i, and 57i CT:
1
2
Press the Directory key on the phone to enter the Directory List.
Use the r and s to scroll through the line items in the Directory List.
41-001160-00, Rev 01 Release 2.0
5-109
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
IP Phone Administrator Guide
Operational Features
IP Phone UI
Step Action
3
To delete all entries in the Directory list, press the DeleteList softkey at the "Directory List" header.
To delete a line item from the Directory List, select the line item you want to delete and press the
Delete softkey.
4
5
To cancel a delete function, press the r or the s Scroll keys.
To add a new entry to the list, press the Add New softkey at the "Directory List" header screen and
perform step 7.
or
Press the Add New softkey at a line item and perform step 7.
6
Enter a phone number, name, and line number and press the 3 Save softkey after each field entry.
Note: The 55i, 57i, and 57i CT allows up to 200 directory entries.
7
For the 57i CT:
Press the Public/Private softkeys to toggle between making the new entry public or private.
Note: The entry is set to Private by default. If the entry is made Public, the entry is sent to the
handsets. A 57i CT accepts a maximum of 50 entries with the public attribute.
8
To edit an entry, use the Change softkey.
A screen displays allowing you to edit the name, phone number, and line number, as well as the
public/private setting.
9
To dial a displayed entry from the Directory List, pick up the handset, press the d /f handsfree key,
or press the Dial softkey.
10
To exit the Directory List, press the Quit softkey.
5-110
41-001160-00, Rev 01 Release 2.0
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Operational IP Phone Features
Operational Features
Downloading from the Server to the IP Phone
You can use the configuration files to download the Directory List from the
configuration server to the IP phone..
Note: You must use TFTP to download the Directory List.
Configuration Files
For specific parameters you can set in the configuration files for downloading the Directory List, see
Appendix A, the section, “Directory Settings” on page A-68.
Downloading from the IP Phone to the Server
You can use the Aastra Web UI to download the Directory List from the IP phone
to the configuration server.
Note: You must use TFTP to download the Directory List.
41-001160-00, Rev 01 Release 2.0
5-111
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
IP Phone Administrator Guide
Operational Features
Use the following procedure to configure the download.
Aastra Web UI
1
Click on Operation->Directory.
2
In the Directory List field, click on
.
A “File Download” message displays.
3
4
Click
.
Enter the location on your computer where you want to download the Directory List and click
.
The directorylist.csv file downloads to your computer.
5
Use a spreadsheet application to open and view the Directory List.
5-112
41-001160-00, Rev 01 Release 2.0
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Operational IP Phone Features
Operational Features
Voicemail (55i, 57i, and 57i CT only)
The Voicemail feature on the 55i, 57i and 57i CT IP phones allow you to
configure lines with phone numbers so the phone can dial out to connect to a
voicemail server. You associcate the Voicemail numbers with the phone numbers
configured on each line (1 - 9 lines).
For each assigned Voicemail number, there can be a minimum of 0 or a maximum
of 1 Voicemail access phone number.
The Voicemail list displays a list of phone numbers assigned to the 55i, 57i, and
57i CT that have registered voicemail accounts associated with them.
Note: The Voicemail list does not display the voicemail access number.
The phone displays up to 99 voicemails for an account even if the number of
voicemails exceeds the limit.
Registered account numbers/URIs that exceed the length of the screen, either with
or without the voicemail icon and the message count, are truncated with an ellipse
character at the end of the number/URI string.
The end of the Voicemail list displays the number of new voicemail messages (if
any exist).
Configuring Voicemail (55i, 57i, and 57i CT only)
You configure Voicemail in the configuration files to dial a specific number to
access an existing voicemail account. The user then follows the voicemail
instructions for listening to voicemails.
Note: The phone must have a registered voicemail account from a server
for this feature to be enabled. When no registered voicemail accounts are
registered to the phone, the display shows "List Empty".
To configure the Voicemail feature on the 57i/57i CT, you must enter the
following parameter in the configuration files:
•
sip lineN vmail:
41-001160-00, Rev 01 Release 2.0
5-113
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
IP Phone Administrator Guide
Operational Features
You can enter up to 9 Voicemail numbers associated with each of the 9 lines on the
phone.
For example:
sip line1 vmail: *97
sip line2 vmail: *95
Note: In the above example, the user would dial *97 to access the
voicemail account for line 1, and *95 to access the voicemail account for
line 2.
Use the following procedure to configure voicemail using the configuration files.
Configuration Files
For specific parameters you can set in the configuration files, see Appendix A, the section, “Voicemail
Settings” on page A-67.
5-114
41-001160-00, Rev 01 Release 2.0
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Operational IP Phone Features
Operational Features
Using Voicemail (57i57i CT only)
Use the following procedure to access and use voicemail.
IP Phone UI
Step Action
For the 57i/57i CT:
1
2
3
4
Press x
on the phone to display the Services menu.
From the Services menu, select "Voicemail".
Use the r and s to scroll through the line items in the Voicemail List.
When you have selected a line item, press the d /f handsfree key, 4 Scroll Right key, or press a
line softkey to make an outgoing call using the voicemail access phone number associated with the
line for which the voicemail account is registered.
From a selected item in the Voicemail list, you can also lift the handset (go offhook) to make an
outgoing call using the voicemail access phone number.
41-001160-00, Rev 01 Release 2.0
5-115
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
IP Phone Administrator Guide
Operational Features
XML Customized Services
Extensible Markup Language (XML) is a markup language much like HTML.
HTML was designed to display data and to focus on how data looks. XML was
designed to describe data and to focus on what data is.
The following are characteristics of XML:
•
•
XML tags are not predefined. You must define your own tags.
XML uses a Document Type Definition (DTD) or an XML Schema to
describe the data.
•
•
XML with a DTD or XML Schema is designed to be self-descriptive
XML is a W3C Standard Recommendation
Creating Customized XML Services on the IP Phones
The XML application for the IP phones allows users to create custom services
they can use via the phone’s keyboard and display. These services include things
like weather and traffic reports, contact information, company info, stock quotes,
or custom call scripts.
The IP phone XML application supports the following proprietary objects that
allow for the customization of the IP phone’s display.
XML Object
Description
AastraIPPhoneTextMenu
(for Menu screens)
Creates a numerical list of menu items on
the IP phones.
AastraIPPhoneTextScreen
(for Text screens)
Creates a screen of text that wraps
appropriately.
AastraIPPhoneFormattedTextScreen
(for Text screens)
Creates a formatted screen of text
(specifies text alignment, text size, text
static or scrolling)
AastraIPPhoneInputScreen
(for User Input screens)
Creates screens for which the user can
input text where applicable.
AastraIPPhoneInputScreen Time
and Date Attributes
(for User Input screens)
Allows you to specify US ( (HH:MM:SS am/
pm and MM/DD/YYYY) or International
(HH:MM:SS and DD/MM/YYYY) time/date
formats for an XML user input screen.
5-116
41-001160-00, Rev 01 Release 2.0
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Operational IP Phone Features
Operational Features
XML Object
Description
AastraIPPhoneDirectory
(for Directory List screen)
Creates an online Directory List that a user
can browse in real-time.
AastraIPPhoneStatus
(for Idle screen)
Creates a screen that displays status
messages when applicable.
AastraIPPhoneExecute
(for executing XML commands)
Allows the phone to excecute commands
(such as “reset” or “NoOp”) using XML .
AastraIPPhoneConfiguration
(for pushing a configuration to the phone)
Allows the server to push a configuration to
the phone.(See page 120 for more
information).
AastraIPPhoneImageScreen
(Standard Bitmap Image)
Creates a display with a single bitmap
image according to alignment, height, and
width specifications.
AastraIPPhoneImageMenu
(Menu Image)
Creates a display with a bitmap image as a
menu. Menu selections are linked to keypad
keys (0-9, *, #).
AastraIPPhoneTextMenu (Icon Menu)
(Icon Menu Image)
Creates a display that has a small icon
before each item in the menu.
For a description and implementation of each XML object, see Appendix G,
“Creating an XML Application.”
41-001160-00, Rev 01 Release 2.0
5-117
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
IP Phone Administrator Guide
Operational Features
You can also use the following attributes/options with the XML objects to further
customize your XML applications:
Attribute/Option
Beep
Description/Usage
Valid Values
Enables or disables a BEEP option to yes | no
indicate a status on the phone.
Default = no
Use with:
Note: This value is
XML object (See Appendix G)
Configuration files (See page 119)
Aastra Web UI (See page 119)
case sensitive.
xml status scroll delay (config files)
Allows you to set the time delay, in
1 to 25
Status Scroll Delay (seconds) (Web UI) seconds, between the scrolling of each Default = 5
status message on the phone.
Use with:
Aastra Web UI (See page 120)
Timeout
LockIn
Specifies a timeout value for the LCD
screen display.
0, 30, 45, 60
Default =45
Use with:
XML object (See Appendix G)
Specifies whether or not the
information on the LCD screen stays
displayed when other events occur
(such as pressing buttons on the
keypad).
yes | no
Default = no
Use with:
CancelAction
Specifies a URI that the phone
executes a GET on when the user
presses the default CANCEL key.
Fully qualified URI
For example:
cancelAction=
http://
Use with:
XML object (See Appendix G)
10.50.10.117/
ft.xml
5-118
41-001160-00, Rev 01 Release 2.0
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Operational IP Phone Features
Operational Features
Enabling/Disabling a Beep for Status Message Displays
You can enable or disable a BEEP option using the Status Message object
(AastraIPPhoneStatus), the configuration files, or the Aastra Web UI.
Note: For enabling/disabling a status message beep using the Status
Message object, see Appendix G, “Creating an XML Application.”
When the phone receives a status message, the BEEP notifies the user that the
message is displaying.
You can use the following to enable/disable a status message beep:
•
•
•
AastraIPPhoneStatus object (via XML object; see Appendix G)
xml beep notification (via configuration files)
XML Beep Support (via the Aastra Web UI)
Enabling the beep is an indication to the phone to sound a beep when it receives
an AastraIPPhoneStatus object. If you disable the beep, or no
AastraIPPhoneStatus object appears in the status message, then the default
behavior is no beep is heard when the object arrives to the phone.
The value set in the configuration files and Aastra Web UI override the attribute
you specify for the AastraIPPhoneStatus object.
For example, if the AastraIPPhoneStatus object has the attribute of Beep=”yes”,
and you uncheck (disable) the “XML Beep Support” in the Aastra Web UI, the
phone does not beep when it receives an AastraIPPhoneStatus object.
Setting the BEEP option in the configuration files and the Aastra Web UI applies
to the phone immediately.
41-001160-00, Rev 01 Release 2.0
5-119
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
IP Phone Administrator Guide
Operational Features
Scroll Delay Option for Status Messages
The IP phones support a scroll delay option that allows you to set the time delay,
in seconds, between the scrolling of each status message on the phone. The default
time is 5 seconds for each message to display before scrolling to the next message.
You can configure this option via the configuration files or the Aastra Web UI.
You can use the following to set the scroll delay for status messages:
•
•
xml status scroll delay (via the configuration files)
Status Scroll Delay (seconds) (via the Aastra Web UI)
Changes apply to the phone immediately.
XML Configuration Push from the Server
The IP phones provide an XML feature that allows you to make configuration
changes to the phone that take affect immediately, without having to reboot the
phone. This feature involves creating XML scripts that push the changed
configuration parameter(s) from the server to the IP phones.
You can use the AastraIPPhoneConfiguration object in the XML scripts to
change configuration parameters or configure new parameters. However, since the
IP phone does not save new parameters created in XML scripts to the local.cfg
file, when the phone reboots, it does not save the new parameters on the phone. In
parameters via the user interfaces (Telephone User Interface, Web User Interface,
or configuration files), or reapply the new parameters using the XML scripts after
every boot.
XML scripts on the server. See Appendix G, “Creating an XML Application” for
more information about XML configuration scripts and dynamic configuration
parameters.
For more information about creating XML configuration scripts and for XML
script examples, see Appendix G, “Creating an XML Application”.
5-120
41-001160-00, Rev 01 Release 2.0
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Operational IP Phone Features
Operational Features
Configuring the Phone to use XML
You can configure the phone to request the XML objects you create by
configuring specific parameters via the configuration files or the Aastra Web UI.
Users can access XML applications via softkeys configured on the IP phones.
The phone performs an HTTP GET on the URI configured in the Aastra Web UI
or configuation files.
You configure the following parameters for object requests:
•
•
xml application URI
xml application title
The xml application URI is the application you are loading into the IP phone.
The xml application title is the name of the XML application that displays on the
Services menu in the IP Phone UI (as option #4).
XML Push Requests
In addition to initiating a request to an XML application from a softkey, an HTTP
server can push an XML object to the phone via HTTP Post. When the phone sees
a PUSH request containing an XML object, it tries to authenticate the request. It
does so by checking the IP address or host name of the requesting host against a
list of trusted hosts (or domain names) configured via the Aastra Web UI
called xml application post list). If the request is authenticated, the XML object
is handled by the IP phone accordingly, and displays the information to the screen.
Note: The HTTP Post must contain HTTP packets that have an "xml"
line in the message body. For more information about adding "xml" lines
in HTTP packets, see Appendix G, “Creating an XML Application.”.
41-001160-00, Rev 01 Release 2.0
5-121
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
IP Phone Administrator Guide
Operational Features
Example Configuration of XML application
The following example shows the parameters you enter in the configuration files
to configure an XML application:
xml application URI: http://172.16.96.63/aastra/internet.php
xml application title: Aastra Telecom
xml application post list: 10.50.10.53, dhcp10-53.ana.aastra.com
Configuring for XML on the IP Phone
After creating an XML application, an administrator can configure the IP phone to
use the application using the configuration files or the Aastra Web UI.
Configuration Files
For specific parameters you can set in the configuration files, see Appendix A, the section, “XML Settings”
on page A-71.
5-122
41-001160-00, Rev 01 Release 2.0
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Operational IP Phone Features
Operational Features
Aastra Web UI
For the 57i/57i CT:
1
Click on Operation->Softkeys and XML.
2
3
4
5
6
Select a key from keys 1 through 20.
In the "Type" field, select XML from the list box.
In the "Label" field, enter a label that displays on the IP phone for the softkey. For example, "XML".
In the "Value" field, enter the IP address or qualified domain name of the XML application.
In the "XML Application URI" field, enter the HTTP server path or qualified domain name of the XML
application you want to load to the IP phone. For example, you could enter an XML application called
"http://172.16.96.63/aastra/internet.php" in the applicable field.
7
In the "XML Application Title" field, enter the name of the XML application that you want to display
on the IP phone Services Menu. In the illustration above, the XML Application Title is "Aastra
Telecom".
41-001160-00, Rev 01 Release 2.0
5-123
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
IP Phone Administrator Guide
Operational Features
Aastra Web UI
8
9
Click
to save your changes.
The XML application is applied to the IP phone immediately.
When the XML application is pushed to the phone via an HTTP POST, a host IP address or domain
name server is required.
Click on Advanced Settings->Configuration Server.
10
11
In the "XML Push Server List (Approved IP Addresses)" field, enter the host IP address and/or
domain name server. You can enter multiple IP address and/or domain name servers (separated by
commas). In the example in Step 8, the illustration shows a host IP address of "10.50.10.53,
10.50.10.54" in the applicable field.
Click
to save your changes.
You must restart your IP phone for the changes to take affect.
12
13
Click on Operation->Reset.
In the "Restart Phone" field click
to restart the IP phone and push the HTTP Server List.
Note: No posting is performed if a session times out.
5-124
41-001160-00, Rev 01 Release 2.0
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Operational IP Phone Features
Operational Features
Aastra Web UI
For the 53i
1
Click on Operation->Programmable Keys.
53i Screen
2
3
4
5
For the 53i, select a key from keys 3 through 6.
In the "Hard Key" field, select XML from the list box.
In the "Value" field, enter the IP address or qualified domain name of the XML application.
Click
to save your changes.
The XML application is applied to the IP phone immediately.
When the XML application is pushed to the phone via an HTTP POST, a host IP address or domain
name server is required.
41-001160-00, Rev 01 Release 2.0
5-125
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
IP Phone Administrator Guide
Operational Features
Aastra Web UI
6
Click on Advanced Settings->Configuration Server..
7
8
In the "XML Push Server List (Approved IP Addresses)" field, enter the host IP address and/or
domain name server. You can enter multiple IP address and/or domain name servers (separated by
commas). In the example in Step 6, the illustration shows a host IP address of "10.50.10.53,
10.50.10.54" in the applicable field.
Click
to save your changes.
You must restart your IP phone for the changes to take affect.
9
Click on Operation->Reset.
10
In the "Restart Phone" field click
to restart the IP phone and push the HTTP Server List.
Note: No posting is performed if a session times out.
Using the XML Customized Service
After you create, save, and configure the IP phone with an XML application, the
customized service is ready for you to use.
5-126
41-001160-00, Rev 01 Release 2.0
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Operational IP Phone Features
Operational Features
Use the following procedure to use the XML feature on the IP phone.
IP Phone UI
Step Action
For the 55i/57i/57i CT:
1
2
3
Press the Services key on the phone to display the Services menu.
Select "Custom Features".
Use the r and s to scroll through the line items in a menu-driven and directory "Custom
Features" screen.
Message services display to the screen after selecting the "Custom Features" option.
For user input services, follow the prompts as appropriate.
4
To exit from the "Custom Features" screen, press Exit.
41-001160-00, Rev 01 Release 2.0
5-127
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
IP Phone Administrator Guide
Operational Features
IP Phone UI
Step Action
For the 53i:
1
Press the programmable key configured on the phone for XML..
A "Custom Features" screen displays.
2
3
Use the r and s to scroll through the customized features.
For menu and directory services, select a service to display the information for that customized
service.
Message services display to the screen after pressing the programmable key.
For user input services, follow the prompts as appropriate.
4
To exit from the "Custom Features" screen, press the XML programmable key again.
XML Action URIs
The IP phones have a feature that allows an administrator to specify a uniform
resource identifier (URI) that triggers a GET when certain events occur. The IP
phone events that support this feature are:
•
•
•
•
•
•
Startup
Successful registration
Incoming call
Outgoing call
Offhook
Onhook
5-128
41-001160-00, Rev 01 Release 2.0
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Operational IP Phone Features
Operational Features
The following table identifies the configurable action URI parameters in the
configuration files and the Aastra Web UI. This table also identifies the variables
that apply to specific parameters.
Configuration File Aastra Web UI Parameters at
Applicable Variables
Parameters
Advanced Settings->Action URI
action uri startup
Startup
-
action uri registered
Successful Registration
$$SIPUSERNAME$$
$$SIPAUTHNAME$$
$$PROXYURL$$
action uri incoming
Incoming Call
$$REMOTENUMBER$$
$$DISPLAYNAME$$
$$SIPUSERNAME$$
$$INCOMINGNAME$$
action uri outgoing
Outgoing Call
$$REMOTENUMBER$$
$$SIPUSERNAME$$
action uri offhook
action uri onhook
Offhook
Onhook
-
-
How it works
When a startup, successful registration, incoming call, outgoing call,
offhook, or onhook call event occurs on the phone, the phone checks to see if
the event has an action URI configured. If the phones finds a URI configured, any
variables configured (in the form $$VARIABLENAME$$) are replaced with the
value of the appropriate variable. After all of the variables are bound, the phone
executes a GET on the URI. The Action URI binds all variables and is not
dependant on the state of the phone.
For example, if you enter the following string for the action uri outgoing
parameter:
action uri outgoing: http://10.50.10.140/
outgoing.pl?number=$$REMOTENUMBER$$
and you dial out the number 5551212, the phone executes a GET on:
41-001160-00, Rev 01 Release 2.0
5-129
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
IP Phone Administrator Guide
Operational Features
http://10.50.10.140/outgoing.pl?number=5551212
Note: If the phone can’t find the Action URI you specify, it returns a
“NULL” response. For example,
http://10.50.10.140/outgoing.pl?number=
You can configure this feature via the configuration files or the Aastra Web UI.
Configuring XML Action URIs
Use the following procedures to configure XML Action URIs using the
configuration files or the Aastra Web UI.
Configuration Files
For specific parameters you can set in the configuration files, see Appendix A, the section, “Action URI
Settings” on page A-74.
5-130
41-001160-00, Rev 01 Release 2.0
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Operational IP Phone Features
Operational Features
Aastra Web UI
1
Click on Advanced Settings->Action URI.
2
3
Enter an XML URI for a startup event in the “Startup” field. For example:
http://10.50.10.140/startup
This parameter pecifies the URI for which the phone executes a GET on when a startup event
occurs.
Enter an XML URI for a successful registration in the “Successful Registration” field. For example:
http://10.50.10.14/registered.php?auth name=$$SIPAUTHNAME$$
This parameter pecifies the URI for which the phone executes a GET on when a successful
registration event occurs.
Note: For a successful registration event, you can use the following variables in the URI:
•
•
•
$$SIPUSERNAME$$
$$SIPAUTHNAME$$
$$PROXYURL$$
41-001160-00, Rev 01 Release 2.0
5-131
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
IP Phone Administrator Guide
Operational Features
Aastra Web UI
4
Enter an XML URI for an incoming call event in the “Incoming Call” field. For example:
http://10.50.10.140/incoming.php?number=$$REMOTENUMBER$$
This parameter pecifies the URI for which the phone executes a GET on when an incoming call event
occurs.
Note: For an incoming call event, you can use the following variables in the URI:
•
•
•
•
$$REMOTENUMBER$$
$$DISPLAYNAME$$
$$SIPUSERNAME$$
$$INCOMINGNAME$$
5
Enter an XML URI for an outgoing call event in the “Outgoing Call” field. For example:
http://10.50.10.140/outgoing.php?number=$$REMOTENUMBER$$
This parameter pecifies the URI for which the phone executes a GET on when an outgoing call event
occurs.
Note: For an outgoing call event, you can use the following variables in the URI:
•
•
$$REMOTENUMBER$$
$$SIPUSERNAME$$
6
7
8
Enter an XML URI for an offhook event in the “Offhook” field. For example:
http://10.50.10.140/offhook
This parameter pecifies the URI for which the phone executes a GET on when an offhook event
occurs.
Enter an XML URI for an onhook event in the “Onhook” field. For example:
http://10.50.10.140/onhook
This parameter pecifies the URI for which the phone executes a GET on when an onhook event
occurs.
Click
to save your changes.
These changes take affect immediately.
5-132
41-001160-00, Rev 01 Release 2.0
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Operational IP Phone Features
Operational Features
XML Softkey URI
In addition to specifying variables for the Action URIs, you can also specify
variables in the XML softkey URIs that are bound when the key is pressed. These
variables are the same as those used in the Action URIs.
When an administrator enters an XML softkey URI either via the Aastra Web UI
or the configuration files, they can specify the following variables:
•
•
•
•
•
•
$$SIPUSERNAME$$
$$SIPAUTHNAME$$
$$PROXYURL$$
$$REMOTENUMBER$$
$$DISPLAYNAME$$
$$INCOMINGNAME$$
When the softkey is pressed, if the phone finds a URI configured with variables
(in the form $$VARIABLENAME$$), they are replaced with the value of the
appropriate variable. After all of the variables are bound, the softkey executes a
GET on the URI.
Example
For example, if the administrator specifies an XML softkey with the value:
http://10.50.10.140/script.pl?name=$$SIPUSERNAME$$
This softkey executes a GET on:
http://10.50.10.140/script.pl?name=42512
assuming that the sip username of the specific line is 42512.
You can configure the XML softkey URI variables via the configuration files or
the Aastra Web UI.
41-001160-00, Rev 01 Release 2.0
5-133
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
IP Phone Administrator Guide
Operational Features
Configuring XML Softkey URIs
Use the following procedures to configure XML Softkey URIs using the
configuration files or the Aastra Web UI.
Configuration Files
For specific parameters you can set in the configuration files, see Appendix A, the section,
“Softkey/Programmable Key/Feature Key Parameters” on page A-108.
Aastra Web UI
For the 57i/57i CT:
1
Click on Operation->Softkeys and XML.
2
Select a key from keys 1 through 20.
5-134
41-001160-00, Rev 01 Release 2.0
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Operational IP Phone Features
Operational Features
Aastra Web UI
3
4
In the "Type" field, select XML from the list box.
In the "Label" field, enter a label that displays on the IP phone for the XML softkey. For example,
"aastra".
5
In the "Value" field, enter the URI that the phone performs a GET on when the key is pressed. For
example:
http://10.50.10.140/script.pl?name=$$SIPUSERNAME$$
Note: You can use the following variables in the URI:
•
•
•
•
•
•
$$SIPUSERNAME$$
$$SIPAUTHNAME$$
$$PROXYURL$$
$$REMOTENUMBER$$
$$DISPLAYNAME$$
$$INCOMINGNAME$$
6
Click
to save your changes.
You must restart your IP phone for the changes to take affect.
41-001160-00, Rev 01 Release 2.0
5-135
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
IP Phone Administrator Guide
Operational Features
Aastra Web UI
For the 53i:
1
Click on Operation->Programmable Keys.
53i Screen
2
3
4
On the 53i, select a key from keys 1 through 6.
In the "Type" field, select XML from the list box.
On the 53i, in the "Label" field, enter a label that displays on the IP phone for the XML softkey. For
example, "aastra".
5
In the "Value" field, enter the URI that the phone performs a GET on when the key is pressed. For
example:
http://10.50.10.140/script.pl?name=$$SIPUSERNAME$$
Note: You can use the following variables in the URI:
•
•
•
•
•
•
$$SIPUSERNAME$$
$$SIPAUTHNAME$$
$$PROXYURL$$
$$REMOTENUMBER$$
$$DISPLAYNAME$$
$$INCOMINGNAME$$
6
Click
to save your changes.
You must restart your IP phone for the changes to take affect.
5-136
41-001160-00, Rev 01 Release 2.0
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Operational IP Phone Features
Operational Features
SIP Local Dial Plan
A dial plan describes the number and pattern of digits that a user dials to reach a
particular telephone number. Access codes, area codes, specialized codes, and
combinations of the number of digits dialed are all part of a dial plan. For
instance, the North American Public Switched Telephone Network (PSTN) uses a
10-digit dial plan that includes a 3-digit area code and a 7-digit telephone number.
Most PBXs support variable length dial plans that use 3 to 11 digits. Dial plans
must comply with the telephone networks to which they connect. Only totally
private voice networks that are not linked to the PSTN or to other PBXs can use
any dial plan.
The IP phones have local dial plan capacity. You configure the SIP Local Dial
Plan using the Aastra Web UI or the configuration files.
The IP phone SIP local dial plan available symbols are as follows:
Symbol
Description
0, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9
Digit symbol
X
Match any digit symbol (wildcard)
Other keypad symbol
*, #, .
|
Expression inclusive OR
+
[]
-
0 or more of the preceding digit symbol or [] expression
Symbol inclusive OR
Used only with [], represent a range of acceptable symbols;
For example, [2-8]
41-001160-00, Rev 01 Release 2.0
5-137
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
IP Phone Administrator Guide
Operational Features
Dial Plan Example
An example of a SIP Local Dial Plan is:
[01]XXX|[2-8]XXXX|91XXXXXX
XXXX|X+.|*XX
The dial plan in the above example can accept any 4-digit dial strings that begin
with a '0' or '1', any 5-digit dial strings that begin with a '2' up to '8', any 12-digit
dial strings that begin with '91', any non-empty digit string that ends with a '.' or
any 2-digit code that begins with a '*'.
Prefix Dialing
The IP phones support a prefix dialing feature for outgoing calls.
You can manually dial a number or dial a number from a list. The phone
automatically maps the pre-configured prepended digit in the configuration, to the
outgoing number. When a match is found, the prepended digits are added to the
beginning of the dial string and the call is dialed.
Note: The prepend digits are also added if the dialing times-out on a
partial match.
You can enable this feature by adding a prepend digit(s) to the end of the Local
Dial Plan parameter string in the configuration files or the Aastra Web UI at
Basic Settings->Preferences->General.
For example, if you add a prepend map of “[2-9]XXXXXXXXX,91”, the IP
phone adds the digits “91” to any 10-digit number beginning with any digit from 2
to 9 that is dialed out. Other examples of prepend mappings are:
•
1X+#,9 (Prepends 9 to any digit string beginning with “1” and terminated
with “#”.)
•
•
6XXX,579 (Prepends “579” to any 4-digit string starting with “6”.)
[4-6]XXXXXX,78 (Prepends “78” to any 7-digit string starting with “4”, “5”, or “6”.)
Note: You can configure a local dial plan via the configuration files or
the Aastra Web UI.
5-138
41-001160-00, Rev 01 Release 2.0
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Operational IP Phone Features
Operational Features
Example
If you enter the following dial string for a local dial plan:
sip dial plan: 1+#,9
where “9” is the prepended digit, and you dial the following number:
15551212
the IP phone automatically adds the “9” digit to the beginning of the dialed
number before the number is forwarded as 915551212.
Note: You can configure a local dial plan via the configuration files or
the Aastra Web UI.
SIP Dial Plan Terminator
The IP phone allows the configuration of a dial plan terminator. When you
configure the IP phone to use a dial plan terminator or timeout (such as the pound
symbol (#)) the phone waits 4 or 5 seconds after you pick up the handset or press
a key to make a call.
You can configure the dial plan terminator using Aastra Web UI or the
configuration files.
41-001160-00, Rev 01 Release 2.0
5-139
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
IP Phone Administrator Guide
Operational Features
Configuring the SIP Local Dial Plan
Use the following procedures to configure the SIP Local Dial Plan using the
configuration files or the Aastra Web UI.
Configuration Files
For specific parameters you can set in the configuration files, see Appendix A, the section, “SIP Local Dial
Plan Settings” on page A-37.
Aastra Web UI
1
Click on Basic Settings->Preferences.
2
3
4
In the "Local Dial Plan" field, enter a valid local dial plan (up to 127 alphanumeric characters) for the
IP phone. Default is X+#|XX+*. Enter prepended digits as required.
Enable the "Send Dial Plan Terminator" field by checking the check box. (Disable this field by
unchecking the box). Default is disabled.
In the "Digit Timeout (in seconds)" field, enter a timeout value. This is the length of time the phone
waits before dialing. Default is 4 seconds.
5-140
41-001160-00, Rev 01 Release 2.0
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Operational IP Phone Features
Operational Features
Aastra Web UI
5
Click
to save your changes.
You must restart your IP phone for the changes to take affect.
6
7
Click on Operation->Reset.
In the "Restart Phone" field click
to restart the IP phone and apply the dial plan to the IP
phone.
Optional for all models:
In addition to configuring the dial plan and dial plan terminator above, you can also configure names
that are displayed on the idle screen rather than the user name and phone number, respectively.
8
a
b
c
In the "Idle Display Name 1" field, enter a name that displays on the IP phone when the phone is
idle.
In the "Idle Display Name 2" field, enter another name that displays on the IP phone when the
phone is idle.
Click
to save your changes.
You must restart your IP phone for the changes to take affect.
d
e
Click on Operation->Reset.
In the "Restart Phone" field click
to restart the IP phone.
41-001160-00, Rev 01 Release 2.0
5-141
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
IP Phone Administrator Guide
Operational Features
Incoming/Outgoing Intercom with Auto-Answer
The Intercom feature allows you to press the configured Intercom button on the IP
phone and then enter the number you want to call to initiate an intercom call.
Intercom calls can be controlled either locally (phone-side) or by the SIP server
(server-side).
Note: Auto-answer and intercom are applicable to all IP phone models.
Outgoing intercom settings are applicable to the (55i, 57i, and 57i CT
only.) A user can only set the incoming intercom settings on the IP phone.
An administrator can set both the incoming and outgoing intercom
settings.
Auto-Answer
The auto-answer feature on the IP phone allows you to enable or disable
automatic answering for an Intercom call. If “Auto-Answer” is enabled, the phone
automatically answers an incoming intercom call. If “Play Warning Tone” is also
enabled, the phone plays a tone to alert the user before answering the intercom
call. If “Auto-Answer” is disabled, the phone rejects the incoming intercom call
and sends a busy signal to the caller.
Outgoing Intercom Calls (55i, 57i and 57i CT only)
On outgoing intercom calls, an available unused line is found when the Icom
button is pressed. Since this line has no configuration, the phone applies an
existing configuration ("Outgoing Intercom Settings", Line, default is Line 1) to
this line in preparation for placing the intercom call. For example, an outgoing
intercom call can use the configuration of line 1 but places the actual intercom call
using line 9.
A phone-side Intercom call indicates the phone is responsible for telling the
recipient that an intercom call is being placed, while a server-side intercom call
means the SIP server is responsible for informing the recipient. Server-side calls
require additional configuration of a prefix code. After pressing the Icom button
and entering the number to call, the phone automatically adds the prefix to the
called number and sends the outgoing call via the server.
5-142
41-001160-00, Rev 01 Release 2.0
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Operational IP Phone Features
Operational Features
Incoming Intercom Calls
On incoming intercom calls, you can enable (turn ON) or disable (turn OFF) the
microphone on the IP phone. You can also enable or disable “Auto-Answer” and
“Play Warning Tone” for incoming intercom calls. By default, auto-answer, the
microphone, and playing a warning tone are all enabled for incoming intercom
calls.
Configuring Intercom Calls and Auto-Answer
You can configure the Intercom feature and auto-answer using the configuration
files or the Aastra Web UI.
Note: An administrator can configure the incoming and outgoing
Intercom feature. A user can configure the incoming Intercom feature
only.
Use the following procedures to configure Intercom calls and auto-answer on the
IP phone.
Configuration Files
For specific parameters you can set in the configuration files, see Appendix A, the section, “Intercom and
Auto-Answer Settings” on page A-98.
41-001160-00, Rev 01 Release 2.0
5-143
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
IP Phone Administrator Guide
Operational Features
Aastra Web UI
Outgoing intercom settings (55i, 57i anc 57i CT only):
1
Click on Basic Settings->Preferences->Outgoing Intercom Settings.
2
3
Select an Intercom type for outgoing Intercom calls from the Type list box.
Valid values are Phone-Side, Server-Side, Off. Default is Off.
If Server-Side is selected, enter a prefix to add to the phone number in the "Prefix Code" field.
Note: For Sylantro servers, enter *96.
4
5
If Phone-Side or Server-Side is selected, select a line from the Line list box for which you want the IP
phone to use as its configuration on the Intercom call.
Note: The IP phone uses the configuration from the line you select from this list box. The call itself is
made using the first available line at the time of the call.
Click
to save your changes.
You must restart your IP phone for the changes to take affect.
6
7
Click on Operation->Reset.
In the "Restart Phone" field click
to restart the IP phone.
5-144
41-001160-00, Rev 01 Release 2.0
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Operational IP Phone Features
Operational Features
Aastra Web UI
Incoming intercom settings:
1
Click on Basic Settings->Preferences->Incoming Intercom Settings.
2
The "Auto-Answer" field is enabled by default. The automatic answering feature is turned on for the
IP phone for answering Intercom calls. To disable this field, uncheck the box.\
Note: If the Auto-Answer field is not checked (disabled), the phone rejects the incoming intercom call
and sends a busy signal to the caller.
3
4
5
The "Microphone Mute" field is enabled by default. The microphone is muted on the IP phone for
Intercom calls made by the originating caller. To disable this field, uncheck the box.
The "Play Warning Tone" field is enabled by default. If “Auto-Answer” is enabled, the phone plays a
warning tone when it receives in incoming intercom call. To disable this field, uncheck the box.
Click
to save your changes.
You must restart your IP phone for the changes to take affect.
6
7
Click on Operation->Reset.
In the "Restart Phone" field click
to restart the IP phone.
41-001160-00, Rev 01 Release 2.0
5-145
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
IP Phone Administrator Guide
Operational Features
Audio Transmit and Receive Gain Adjustments
The audio gain properties for the IP phone handset, headset, and speakerphone is
adjusted to reduce side-tone and echo on the local and far-end equipment. You can
adjust these settings from -10 db to +10 db to best suit your comfort level and
deployment environment by using the following parameters in the configuration
files:
•
•
•
•
•
•
headset tx gain
headset sidetone gain
handset tx gain
handset sidetone gain
handsfree tx gain
audio mode
The default setting for these parameters is 0 (zero).
Note: Aastra Telecom recommends you leave the default of 0 (zero) as
the settings for these parameters.
The following table describes each parameter.
Parameter
Description
Headset tx gain
The increased (+db) or decreased (-db) amount of signal transmitted from
the headset microphone to t he far-end party.
Headset sidetone gain
Handset tx gain
The increased (+db) or decreased (-db) amount of sidetone signal from the
headset microphone to the headset speaker.
The increased (+db) or decreased (-db) amount of signal transmitted from
the handset microphone to the far-end party.
Handset sidetone gain
The increased (+db) or decreased (-db) amount of sidetone signal from the
handset microphone to the handset speaker.
(continued)
5-146
41-001160-00, Rev 01 Release 2.0
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Operational IP Phone Features
Operational Features
Parameter
Description
Handsfree tx gain
The increased (+db) or decreased (-db) amount of signal transmitted from
the base microphone to the far-end party.
Audio mode
Allows you to configure how the d/f key (handsfree key) works. Audio
mode has 4 options:
0 (Speaker) - Calls can be made or received using the handset or
handsfree speakerphone and can be switched between the two modes by
pressing the d /fkey. When on speaker, you can return to using the
handset by placing the handset on the cradle and picking it up again.
1 (Headset) - Calls can be made or received using the headset. Calls can
be switched between the headset and handset by pressing the d /fkey.
2 (Speaker/Headset) - Incoming calls are sent to the speakerphone . By
pressing the d /fkey, you can switch between the handsfree
speakerphone, the headset, and the handset.
3 (Headset/Speaker) - Incoming calls are sent to the headset. By pressing
the d /fkey, you can switch between the headset, the handsfree
speakerphone, and the handset.
Configuring Audio Transmit and Receive Gain Adjustments
You can configure the audio transmit and gain adjustments using the configuration
files only.
Use the following procedure to configure this feature.
Configuration Files
For specific parameters you can set in the configuration files, see Appendix A, the section, “Audio Transmit
and Receive Gain Adjustment Settings” on page A-101.
41-001160-00, Rev 01 Release 2.0
5-147
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
IP Phone Administrator Guide
Operational Features
Ring Tones and Tone Sets
You can configure ring tones and ring tone sets on the IP phones.
Ring Tones
There are several distinct ring tones a user or administrator can select from to set
on the IP phones. You can enable/disable these ring tones on a global basis or on a
per-line basis.
The following table identifies the valid settings and default values for eac h type
of configuration method.
Ring Tone Settings Table
Configuration Method
Valid Values
Default Value
Configuration Files
Global:
Global:
0 (Tone1)
1 (Tone 2)
2 (Tone 3)
3 (Tone 4)
4 (Tone 5)
5 (Silent)
0 (tone 1)
Per-Line:
-1 (global)
0 (Tone1)
1 (Tone 2)
2 (Tone 3)
3 (Tone 4)
4 (Tone 5)
5 (Silent)
Per-Line:
-1 (global)
IP Phone UI
Global:
Tone 1
Tone 2
Tone 3
Tone 4
Tone 5
Global:
Tone 1
5-148
41-001160-00, Rev 01 Release 2.0
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Operational IP Phone Features
Operational Features
Configuration Method
Valid Values
Default Value
Aastra Web UI
Global:
Tone 1
Tone 2
Tone 3
Tone 4
Tone 5
Silent
Global:
Tone 1
Per-Line:
Global
Tone 1
Tone 2
Tone 3
Tone 4
Tone 5
Silent
Per-Line:
Global
41-001160-00, Rev 01 Release 2.0
5-149
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
IP Phone Administrator Guide
Operational Features
Ring Tone Sets
In addition to ring tones, you can configure ring tone sets on a global-basis on the
IP phones. Ring tone sets consist of tones customized for a specific country. The
ring tone sets you can configure on the IP phones are:
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
US (Default - also used in Canada)
United Kingdom
Italy
Germany
France
Europe (generic tones)
Australia
When you configure the country's tone set, the country-specific tone is heard on
the phone for the following:
- dial tone
- secondary dial tone
- ring tone
- busy tone
- congestion tones
- call waiting tone
- ring cadence pattern
You configure ring tones and tone sets using the Aastra Web UI, IP Phone UI, or
configuration files. However, when using the IP phone UI, you can set global
configuration only.
5-150
41-001160-00, Rev 01 Release 2.0
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Operational IP Phone Features
Operational Features
Configuring Ring Tones and Tone Sets
Use the following procedures to configure ring tones and tone sets on the IP
phones.
Configuration Files
For specific parameters you can set in the configuration files for ring tones, see Appendix A, the section,
“Ring Tone and Tone Set Global Settings” on page A-77 or “Ring Tone Per-Line Settings” on page A-78.
IP Phone UI
Step Action
For global configuration only:
1
2
3
4
Press
on the phone to enter the Options List.
Select Tones.
Select Set Ring Tone.
Select the type of ring tone (Tone 1 through Tone 5, or Silent).
For 53i:
Press Set.
For 55i/57i/57i CT:
Press Done.
5
6
Select Tone Set.
Select the country for which you want to apply the tone set.
Valid values are Australia, Europe, France, Germany, Italy, UK, and US. Default is US.
For 53i:
Press Set.
For 55i/57i/57i CT:
Press Done.
The ring tone and tone set you select is immediately applied to the IP phone.
41-001160-00, Rev 01 Release 2.0
5-151
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
IP Phone Administrator Guide
Operational Features
Aastra Web UI
1
Click on Basic Settings->Preferences.
For global configuration:
2
3
In the "Ring Tones" section, select a country from the "Tone Set" field.
Select a value from the "Global Ring Tone" field.
For per-line configuration:
4
5
In the "Ring Tone" section, select a line for which you want to set ring tone.
Select a value from the "LineN" field.
Note: See the “Ring Tone Settings Table” on page 5-148 for valid values.
6
Click
to save your changes.
You must restart your IP phone for the changes to take affect.
7
8
Click on Operation->Reset.
In the "Restart Phone" field click
to restart the IP phone.
5-152
41-001160-00, Rev 01 Release 2.0
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Operational IP Phone Features
Operational Features
Priority Alerting
Priority alerting on the IP phones is a feature that allows incoming calls to trigger
pre-defined ringing or call waiting alert tones.
You can enable or disable priority alerting on the IP phone for the Asterisk,
Broadworks, and Sylantro servers using the configuration files and the Aastra
Web UI. Configuration of priority alerting is on a global-basis only.
How Priority Alerting Works
When the IP phone detects an incoming call, the phone firmware inspects the
INVITE request in the IP packet for an "Alert-Info" header.
If it contains an "Alert-Info" header, the firmware strips out the URL and keyword
parameter and maps it to the appropriate Bellcore tone.
If there is no keyword parameter in the "Alert-Info" header, or the INVITE
message contains no "Alert-Info" header, then the IP phone firmware uses the
Bellcore standard ring tone.
Asterisk/Broadworks Servers
The ring tone keywords that can display in the "Alert-Info" header for an Asterisk
and Broadworks server are:
Asterisk/Broadworks Sesrver
Ring Tone Keywords
Bellcore-dr2
Bellcore-dr3
Bellcore-dr4
Bellcore-dr5
When the ring tone keywords appear in an "Alert-Info" header from an Asterisk or
Broadworks server, the IP phone maps the keywords to the default ring tone
patterns.
41-001160-00, Rev 01 Release 2.0
5-153
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
IP Phone Administrator Guide
Operational Features
Sylantro Servers
The ring tone keywords that can display in the "Alert-Info" header for a Sylantro
server are:
Sylantro Sesrver
Ring Tone Keywords
alert-acd (auto call distribution)
alert-community-1
alert-community-2
alert-community-3
alert-community-4
alert-emergency
alert-external
alert-group
alert-internal
alert-priority
When the ring tone keywords appear in an "Alert-Info" header from a Sylantro
server, the keyword is mapped to the ring tone pattern based on the configuration
you set in the Aastra Web UI or the configuration files.
Ring Tone Patterns
In IP Telephony, different ringing patterns have different frequencies and
cadences. Ring cadence is the ringing pattern heard by the called party, before
they pick up the call.
On the IP phones, if you enable priority alerting when using an Asterisk or
Broadworks server, the IP phone uses the following Bellcore-specified tones by
default:
Ring Tone Pattern (Asterisk/Broadworks Servers)
Call Criteria
Bellcore Tones
Bellcore-dr2
Bellcore-dr3
Bellcore-dr4
Bellcore-dr5
internal calls
external calls
calls with contact list
calls with specific time frames
5-154
41-001160-00, Rev 01 Release 2.0
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Operational IP Phone Features
Operational Features
If you enable priority alerting when using a Sylantro server, you can specify the
Bellcore tone to be used for the following configurable criteria:
Ring Tone Pattern (Sylantro Servers)
Call criteria
Bellcore tones for each call criteria
alert-acd (auto call distribution)
alert-community-1
alert-community-2
alert-community-3
alert-community-4
alert-emergency
alert-external
Normal ringing (default)
Bellcore-dr2
Bellcore-dr3
Bellcore-dr4
Bellcore-dr5
Silent
alert-group
alert-internal
alert-priority
41-001160-00, Rev 01 Release 2.0
5-155
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
IP Phone Administrator Guide
Operational Features
The following table identifies the different Bellcore ring tone patterns and
cadences.
Minimum
Duration
(ms)
Nominal
Duration
(ms)
Maximum
Duration
(ms)
Pattern
Bellcore Tone
(Standard)
ID
Pattern
Cadence
1
Ringing
Silent
2s On
4s Off
1800
3600
2000
4000
2200
4400
Bellcore-dr2
2
3
Ringing
Silent
Long
630
315
800
400
1025
525
Ringing
Silent
Long
Long
630
3475
800
4000
1025
4400
Bellcore-dr3
Ringing
Silent
Short
315
145
400
200
525
525
Ringing
Silent
Short
315
145
400
200
525
525
Ringing
Silent
Long
Short
630
2975
800
4000
1025
4400
Bellcore-dr4
Bellcore-dr5
4
Ringing
Silent
200
145
300
200
525
525
Ringing
Silent
Long
Short
800
145
1000
200
1100
525
Ringing
Silent
200
2975
300
4000
525
4400
5
Ringing
450
500
550
Note: If the "Do Not Disturb" (DND) or the "Call Forward" (CFWD)
feature is enabled on the server-side, and the user is still waiting for a call,
the "Bellcore-dr5" is a ring splash tone that reminds the user that these are
enabled.
5-156
41-001160-00, Rev 01 Release 2.0
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Operational IP Phone Features
Operational Features
Call Waiting Tones
Call Waiting is a feature that tells you if a new caller is trying to contact you when
you are already on the phone.
A discreet tone alerts you to the new caller, so you can answer your second
incoming call by putting your first caller on hold.
The IP phones use the following Bellcore-specified call waiting tones.
Minimum
Duration
(ms)
Nominal
Duration
(ms)
Maximum
Duration
(ms)
Bellcore
Call-Waiting Tone
Pattern
ID
Pattern
CallWaitingTone 1
1
2
Tone On
270
300
330
Bellcore-dr2
CallWaitingTone2
Tone On
Tone Off
90
90
100
100
110
110
Bellcore-dr3
CallWaitingTone3
3
4
Tone On
Tone Off
90
90
100
100
110
110
Tone On
Tone Off
Tone On
Tone Off
90
90
90
90
100
100
100
100
110
110
110
110
Bellcore-dr4
CallWaitingTone4
Tone On
Tone Off
270
90
300
100
330
110
For Asterisk and Broadworks servers, call waiting tones are specified by the
default Bellcore tones indicated in the table Ring Tone Pattern (Asterisk/
Broadworks Servers) on page 154.
For Sylantro servers, call waiting tones are specified by the Bellcore tones you
configure in the Aastra Web UI or the configuration files. See the table Ring Tone
Pattern (Sylantro Servers) on page 155.
41-001160-00, Rev 01 Release 2.0
5-157
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
IP Phone Administrator Guide
Operational Features
Configuring Priority Alerting
Use the following procedures to configure priority alerting on the IP phones.
Configuration Files
For specific parameters you can set in the configuration files for priority alerting, see Appendix A, the
section, “Priority Alert Settings” on page A-80.
Aastra Web UI
1
Click on Basic Settings->Preferences.
2
In the "Priority Alerting Settings" section, enable the "Enable Priority Alerting" field by checking the
check box. (Disable this field by unchecking the box).
For Sylantro Servers:
5-158
41-001160-00, Rev 01 Release 2.0
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Operational IP Phone Features
Operational Features
Aastra Web UI
3
Select a ring tone pattern for each of the following fields:
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Group
Internal
External
Emergency
Priority
auto call distribution
community-1
community-2
community-3
community-4
4
Click
to save your changes.
You must restart your IP phone for the changes to take affect.
5
6
Click on Operation->Reset.
In the "Restart Phone" field click
to restart the IP phone.
41-001160-00, Rev 01 Release 2.0
5-159
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
IP Phone Administrator Guide
Operational Features
Stuttered Dial Tone
You can enable or disable the playing of a stuttered dial tone when there is a
message waiting on the IP phone.
You can configure this feature using the configuration files and the Aastra Web
UI.
Configuring Stuttered Dial Tone
Configuration Files
For specific parameters you can set in the configuration files for enabling/disabling stuttered dial tone, see
Appendix A, the section, “Stuttered Dial Tone Setting” on page A-79.
Aastra Web UI
1
Click on Basic Settings->Preferences->General.
2
Stuttered dial tone is enabled by default.
If required, disable the "Stuttered Dial Tone" field by unchecking the check box.
5-160
41-001160-00, Rev 01 Release 2.0
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Operational IP Phone Features
Operational Features
Aastra Web UI
3
Click
to save your changes.
You must restart your IP phone for the changes to take affect.
4
5
Click on Operation->Reset.
In the "Restart Phone" field click
to restart the IP phone.
41-001160-00, Rev 01 Release 2.0
5-161
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
IP Phone Administrator Guide
Operational Features
Call Waiting Tone
You can enable or disable the playing of a call waiting tone when a caller is on an
active call and a new call comes into the phone.
You can configure this feature using the configuration files and the Aastra Web
UI.
Configuring Call Waiting Tone
Configuration Files
For specific parameters you can set in the configuration files for enabling/disabling a call waiting tone, see
Appendix A, the section, “Call Waiting Tone Setting” on page A-79.
Aastra Web UI
1
Click on Basic Settings->Preferences->General.
2
A call waiting tone is enabled by default. If required, disable the "Play Call Waiting Tone" field by
unchecking the check box.
5-162
41-001160-00, Rev 01 Release 2.0
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Operational IP Phone Features
Operational Features
Aastra Web UI
3
Click
to save your changes.
You must restart your IP phone for the changes to take affect.
4
5
Click on Operation->Reset.
In the "Restart Phone" field click
to restart the IP phone.
41-001160-00, Rev 01 Release 2.0
5-163
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
IP Phone Administrator Guide
Operational Features
Language
The IP phones support several different languages. You can have the IP phone UI
and the Aastra Web UI display in a specific language as required. When you set
the language to use, all of the display screens (menus, services, options,
configuration parameters, etc.) display in that language. The IP phones support
the following languages:
•
•
•
•
•
English (default)
French
Spanish
German (not applicable to 57i CT cordless handset)
Italian (not applicable to 57i CT cordless handset)
Loading Language Packs
You make languages available to use on the phone by loading language packs
from the configuration server to the local <mac>.cfg configuration file. You can
use the configuration files or the Aastra Web UI to perform the download. Each
language pack consists of the IP Phone UI and Aastra Web UI translated in a
specific language.
Loading Language Packs via the Configuration File (<mac>.cfg)
Using the configuration files, you specify a language pack to load in the following
format:
lang_<ISO 639>-<ISO 3166>.txt
or
lang_<ISO 639>.txt
where <ISO 639> is the language code specified in Standard ISO 639
(see Appendix A, the section, Language Codes (from Standard ISO 639) on
page A-88) and <ISO 3166> is the country code specified in Standard ISO 3166
(see Country Codes (from Standard ISO 3166) on page A-88).
The <ISO 3166> attribute is optional.
Note: Adding/changing language packs can only be done at bootup of the
IP phone. The default language (English) cannot be changed or removed.
5-164
41-001160-00, Rev 01 Release 2.0
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Operational IP Phone Features
Operational Features
Example
The following is an example of the parameters you would enter in the
<mac>.cfg file to load a French, Italian, German, and Spanish language
pack to the IP phone.
language 1: lang_fr-ca.txt
language 2: lang_it.txt
language 3: lang_de.txt
language 4: lang_es.txt
The above entries in the <mac>.cfg file tells the phone which language
packs to load. When the language pack(s) have loaded, you must then use
the IP phone. You must use the Aastra Web UI to specify the language to
use in the Web UI.
For more information about specifying the language to use, see the section,
“Specifying the Language to Use” on page 5-167.
For more information about language codes and country codes, see
Appendix A, the section, “Language Pack Settings” on page A-87.
41-001160-00, Rev 01 Release 2.0
5-165
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
IP Phone Administrator Guide
Operational Features
Loading Language Packs via the Aastra Web UI
Using the Aastra Web UI, you can specify a language pack to load using the
parameters at Basic Settings->Preferences->Language Settings.
You use the following fields in the Aastra Web UI to specify which langauge
packs to load:
Once the language pack is loaded to the phone, it is available for selection from
either the configuration files, the IP Phone UI or the Aastra Web UI.
5-166
41-001160-00, Rev 01 Release 2.0
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Operational IP Phone Features
Operational Features
Specifying the Language to Use
Once the language pack(s) have loaded, you must then specify which language to
use on the phone. After the phone has booted up, you can specify which
language(s) to use. You can use the configuration files and the IP Phone UI to
specify the language for the IP Phone UI. You can use the Aastra Web UI to
specify the files for the Aastra Web UI.
Configuration Files
For specific parameters you can set in the configuration files, see Appendix A, the section, “Language
Settings” on page A-86 and “Language Pack Settings” on page A-87.
Notes:
1.
If you specify the language to use on the phone via the
configuration files, you must reboot the phone for the changes to take
affect.
2.
All languages may not be available for selection. The available
languages are dependant on the language packs currently loaded to the IP
phone.
41-001160-00, Rev 01 Release 2.0
5-167
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
IP Phone Administrator Guide
Operational Features
IP Phone UI
Step Action
1
2
3
Press
on the phone to enter the Options List.
Select Language.
Select English (English), Francais (French), Espanol (Spanish), Deutsch (German), or Italiano
(Italian).
Notes:
1. Valid values for the 57i CT are English, French, and Spanish only.
2. All languages may not be available for selection. The available languages are dependant on the
language packs currently loaded to the IP phone. English is the default language and cannot be
changed or removed. For more information about loading language packs, see “Loading Language
Packs” on page 5-164.
4
Press
Press
to set the language on the phone.
to exit the Options List.
1
The change is dynamic. The IP phone UI displays all menu items in the language you chose.
5-168
41-001160-00, Rev 01 Release 2.0
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Operational IP Phone Features
Operational Features
Aastra Web UI
1
Click on Basic Settings->Preferences->Language Settings.
Loading the Lanaguage Pack
2
In the “Language N” fields, enter the file name of the language pack you want to use to display a
specific language in the Aastra Web UI. For example, you could enter the following in the
“Language 1”, “Language 2”, “Language 3”, and “Language 4” fields to display the Aastra Web UI in
French, Spanish, German, and Italian:
lang_fr-ca.txt
lang_es.txt
lang_de.txt
lang_it.txt
Note: You must have the language pack(s) already loaded to your phone in order to use them. For
more information about loading language packs, see “Loading Language Packs” on page 5-164.
For more information about language codes and country codes, see Appendix A, the section,
“Language Pack Settings” on page A-87.
3
Click
to save your changes.
You must restart your IP phone for the changes to take affect.
4
5
Click on Operation->Reset.
In the "Restart Phone" field click
to restart the IP phone.
Specifying the Language to Use in the Aastra Web UI
41-001160-00, Rev 01 Release 2.0
5-169
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
IP Phone Administrator Guide
Operational Features
Aastra Web UI
6
7
8
After restarting your phone, log back in using the Aastra Web UI.
Click on Basic Settings->Preferences->Language Settings.
In the “Webpage Language” field, select a language to apply to the Aastra Web UI. The IP phone
supports the following languages:
•
•
•
•
•
English (default)
French
Spanish
German
Italian
Notes:
1. Valid values for the 57i CT are English, French, and Spanish only.
2. All languages may not be available for selection. The available languages are dependant on the
language packs currently loaded to the IP phone. English is the default language and cannot be
changed or removed.
9
Click
to save your changes.
The change is dynamic. The Aastra Web UI displays all screens in the language you chose.
5-170
41-001160-00, Rev 01 Release 2.0
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 6
Advanced IP Phone
Operational Features
About this chapter
Introduction
The IP phones have advanced operational features you can configure using the
configuration files and/or the Aastra Web UI.
This chapter describes each of these features and provides procedures for
configuring each feature.
Topics
Topic
Page
Advanced Operational Features
page 6-2
page 6-3
page 6-5
page 6-6
page 6-7
page 6-8
page 6-9
MAC Address/Line Number in REGISTER Messages
SIP Message Sequence for Blind Transfer
Update Caller ID During a Call
Boot Sequence Recovery Mode
Auto-discovery Using mDNS
Single Call Restriction (57i CT only)
41-001160-00, Rev 01 Release 2.0
6-1
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
IP Phone Administrator Guide
Advanced Operational Features
Advanced Operational Features
This section provides the following information about advanced features of the IP
phones:
Feature
Description
MAC Address/Line Number in REGISTER Allows you to enable or disable the sending of the MAC
Messages
address and line number from the IP phone to the call
server, in a REGISTER message.
SIP Message Sequence for Blind Transfer Allows you to enable or disable the phone to use the Blind
Transfer method available in software prior to release 1.4.
Update Caller ID During a Call
Boot Sequence Recovery Mode
Auto-Discovery Using mDNS
Allows you to enable or disable the updating of the Caller ID
information during a call.
Allows you to enable or disable Web recovery mode and set
the maximum boot count on the IP phone.
The IP phones automatically perform an auto-discovery of all
servers on a network using mDNS. When the IP phone
discovers a TFTP server, it is automatically configured by
that TFTP server.
Single Call Restriction (57i CT only)
Allows you to enable or disable a single call restriction
between the 57i CT base unit and a call server.
6-2
41-001160-00, Rev 01 Release 2.0
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Advanced IP Phone Operational Features
Advanced Operational Features
MAC Address/Line Number in REGISTER Messages
The IP phones can send the MAC address and line number in the REGISTER
packets making it easier for the call server when a user configures the phones via
the Aastra Web UI or the IP Phone UI. The following two configurable headers
send this information to the call server:
Aastra-Mac: <mac address>
Aastra-Line: <line number>
The MAC address is sent in uppercase hex numbers, for example,
00085D03C792. The line number is a number between 1 and 9.
The following parameters allow you to enable/disable the sending of MAC
address and line number to the call server:
•
•
sip send mac
sip send line
These parameters are disabled by default. The parameters are configurable via the
configuration files or the Aastra Web UI.
Configuration Files
For specific parameters you can set in the configuration files for enabling/disabling MAC address and line
number, see Appendix A, the section, “Advanced Operational Parameters” on page A-134.
41-001160-00, Rev 01 Release 2.0
6-3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
IP Phone Administrator Guide
Advanced Operational Features
.
Aastra Web UI
Step Action
1
Click on Advanced Settings->Global SIP->Advanced SIP Setting.
2
3
4
Enable the "Send MAC Address in REGISTER Message" field by checking the check box.
(Disable this field by unchecking the box).
Enable the "Send Line Number in REGISTER Message" field by checking the check box.
(Disable this field by unchecking the box).
Click
to save your settings.
Note: The session prompts you to restart the IP phone to apply the configuration settings.
Select Operation->Reset and click ..
5
6-4
41-001160-00, Rev 01 Release 2.0
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Advanced IP Phone Operational Features
Advanced Operational Features
SIP Message Sequence for Blind Transfer
The SIP message sequence for Blind Transfer avoids the transfer target having
two simultaneous calls. Prior to release 1.4, a CANCEL message was sent to the
transfer target (if it was in a ringing state) after sending a REFER to the transferee
to complete the transfer. In the 1.4 and later releases, the CANCEL is now sent
before the REFER message.
The following parameter allows the system administrator to force the phone to use
the Blind Transfer method available in software versions prior to 1.4:
sip cancel after blind transfer
This parameter is configurable via the configuration files only.
Configuring SIP Message Sequence for Blind Transfer
Configuration Files
For the specific parameter you can set in the configuration files for enabling/disabling the blind transfer
method, see Appendix A, the section, “Blind Transfer Setting.” on page A-135.
41-001160-00, Rev 01 Release 2.0
6-5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
IP Phone Administrator Guide
Advanced Operational Features
Update Caller ID During a Call
It is possible for a proxy or call server to update the Caller ID information that
displays on the phone during a call, by modifying the SIP Contact header in the
200 OK message and/or in a re-INVITE message. The phone displays the
updated name and number information contained within the Contact header.
The following parameter allows the system administrator to enable or disable this
feature:
sip update callerid:
This parameter is configurable via the configuration files only.
Configuring Update Caller ID During a Call
Configuration Files
For the specific parameter you can set in the configuration files for enabling/disabling the update of caller ID
during a call, see Appendix A, the section, “Update Caller ID Setting.” on page A-136.
6-6
41-001160-00, Rev 01 Release 2.0
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Advanced IP Phone Operational Features
Advanced Operational Features
Boot Sequence Recovery Mode
You can force the IP phone into recovery mode by pressing the 1 and # keys
during boot up when the logo displays. This feature is enabled by default on the IP
phone.
You can disable this feature using the following parameter in the configuration
files:
•
force web recovery mode disabled
Valid values for this parameter are 0 (false) and 1 (true). Default is 0 (false).
A boot counter increments after each faulty boot. When the counter reaches a
predetermined value, it forces Web recovery mode. The counter is reset to zero
upon a successful boot.
The predetermined value is set using the following parameter in the configuration
files:
•
max boot count
A zero (0) value disables this feature. The default value is 10.
You can configure the boot sequence recovery mode parameters using the
configuration files only.
Configuring Boot Sequence Recovery Mode
Configuration Files
For the specific parameters you can set in the configuration files for boot sequence recovery mode, see
Appendix A, the section, “Boot Sequence Recovery Mode.” on page A-136.
41-001160-00, Rev 01 Release 2.0
6-7
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
IP Phone Administrator Guide
Advanced Operational Features
Auto-discovery Using mDNS
The IP phones can perform an auto-discovery of all servers on a network using
mDNS. When the IP phone discovers a TFTP server, it is automatically
configured by that TFTP server.
An unconfigured phone (phone right out of the box) added to a network, attempts
to auto-discover a configuration server on the network without any end-user
intervention. When it receives DHCP option 66 (TFTP server), it automatically
gets configured by the TFTP server.
An already configured phone (either previously configured by auto-discovery or
manually configured) added to a network, uses its predefined configuration to
boot up.
Notes:
1. Configuration parameters received via DHCP do not constitute
configuration information, with the exception of a TFTP server.
Therefore, you can plug a phone into a DHCP environment, still use the
auto-discovery process, and still allow the use of the TFTP server
parameter to set the configuration server.
2. DHCP option 66 (TFTP server details) overrides the mDNS phase of
the auto-discovery. Therefore, the DHCP option takes priority and the
remaining process of auto-discovery continues.
3. As the phone performs auto-discovery, all servers in the network
(including the TFTP server), display in the phone window. However, only
the server configured for TFTP automatically configures the phone.
6-8
41-001160-00, Rev 01 Release 2.0
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Advanced IP Phone Operational Features
Advanced Operational Features
Single Call Restriction (57i CT only)
On the 57i CT, an administrator can enable or disable a single call restriction
between the 57i CT base unit and a call server.
When this feature is enabled (set to 1), you can make separate active calls from
the 57i CT base unit and from the cordless handset. If this feature is disabled (set
to 0), only one call can be active at a time either from the base unit or from the
handset. When this feature is disabled, and you make an active call on either the
base unit or the handset, any other attempt to make an active call is put on hold.
Also, when this feature is disabled, more than one call can negotiate complex
audio codecs since only a single call is decoding audio at a time.
You can configure this feature via the configuration files or the Aastra Web UI.
Configuring Single Call Restriction.
Configuration Files
For the specific parameters you can set in the configuration files for single call restriction on the 57i CT, see
Appendix A, the section, “Single Call Restriction” on page A-137.
41-001160-00, Rev 01 Release 2.0
6-9
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
IP Phone Administrator Guide
Advanced Operational Features
Aastra Web UI
Step Action
1
Click on Advanced Settings->Global SIP->RTP Settings.
2
3
Enable the "Two Call Support" field by checking the check box.
(Disable this field by unchecking the box).
Click
to save your settings.
Note: The session prompts you to restart the IP phone to apply the configuration settings.
Select Operation->Reset and click ..
4
6-10
41-001160-00, Rev 01 Release 2.0
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 7
Encryption and the IP Phone
About this chapter
Introduction
This chapter provides information about encryption on the IP phones and provides
methods an administrator can use to store encryped files to a server.
Topics
Topic
Page
Encryption and the IP Phone
page 7-2
page 7-2
page 7-3
Configuration File Encryption Method
Procedure to Encrypt/Decrypt Configuration Files
41-001160-00, Rev 01 Release 2.0
7-1
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
IP Phone Administrator Guide
Encryption and the IP Phone
Encryption and the IP Phone
An encryption feature for the IP phone allows Service Providers the capability of
storing encrypted files on their server to protect against unauthorized access and
tampering of sensitive information (i.e., user accounts, login passwords,
registration information). Service Providers also have the capability of locking a
phone to use a specific server-provided configuration only.
Configuration File Encryption Method
Only a System Administrator can encrypt/decrypt the configurations files for an
IP Phone.
System Administrators use a password distribution scheme to manually
pre-configure or automatically configure the phones to use the encrypted
configuration with a unique key.
From a Microsoft Windows command line, the System Administrator uses an
Aastra-supplied encryption tool called "anacrypt.exe".
Note: Aastra also supplies encryption tools to support Linux platforms
(anacrypt.linux) and Solaris platforms (anacrypt.sunos) if required.
This tool processes the plain text <mac>.cfg and aastra.cfg files and creates
triple-DES encyrpted versions called <mac>.tuz and aastra.tuz. Encryption is
performed using a secret password that is chosen by the administrator.
The encryption tool is also used to create an additional encrypted tag file called
security.tuz, which controls the decryption process on the IP phones. If
security.tuz is present on the TFTP/FTP/HTTP server, the IP phones download it
and use it locally to decrypt the configuration information from the aastra.tuz and
<mac>.tuz files. Because only the encrypted versions of the configuration files
need to be stored on the server, no plain-text configuration or passwords are sent
across the network, thereby ensuring security of the configuration data.
7-2
41-001160-00, Rev 01 Release 2.0
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Encryption and the IP Phone
Encryption and the IP Phone
To make changes to the configuration files, the System Administrator must
decrypt the files, make the changes, and re-encrypt the files. The encrypted files
must then be downloaded to the IP phones again.
Note: If the use of encrypted configuration files is enabled (via
security.tuz or pre-provisioned on the IP phone) the aastra.cfg and
<mac>.cfg files are ignored, and only the encrypted equivalent files
aastra.tuz and <mac>.tuz are read.
Procedure to Encrypt/Decrypt Configuration Files
To encrypt the IP phone configuration files:
1. Open a command line window application (i.e., DOS window).
2. At the prompt, enter anacrypt.exe and press <Return>.
C:\> anacrypt.exe -h
Provides encryption and decryption of the configuration files used for the family
of Aastra IP phones, using 56bit triple-DES and site-specific keys.
Copyright (c) 2005, Aastra Technologies, Ltd.
Copyright (c) 1999, Philip J. Erdelsky
Usage:
anacrypt infile.{cfg|tuz} [-o outfile] [-p password] [-h]
[-v] Display version number
[-h] Display program help text
[-o [device:][path]] Writes output file on specific device or path
[-p password] Password used to generate the cryptographic key
Restrictions:
Infile extension determines operation, .cfg=plaintext to be encrypted,
.tuz=ciphertext to be decrypted. Outfile extension is opposite of input.
Filenames may optionally include any non-wildcard subset of [device:][\path\].
If -p is omitted, user is prompted to interactively enter the password.
Note: 3DES does not validate decryption, incorrect password produces garbage. For
site-specific keyfile security.cfg the plaintext must match password.
41-001160-00, Rev 01 Release 2.0
7-3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
IP Phone Administrator Guide
Encryption and the IP Phone
Examples
The following examples illustrate the use of the anacrypt.exe file.
Example 1
Encrypt aastra.cfg into aastra.tuz using password 1234abcd:
C:\> anacrypt aastra.cfg -p 1234abcd
Example 2
Decrypt aastra.tuz into aastra.cfg prompting user for password:
C:\> anacrypt aastra.tuz
Example 3
Decrypt mac.tuz using password 1234abcd, display plaintext on console:
C:\> anacrypt aastra.tuz -o CON: -p 1234abcd
Example 4
Encrypt a site-specific keyfile prompting user for password and write the
encrypted file directly into the TFTP server root directory:
C:\> anacrypt security.cfg -o d:\tftp\root
Example 5
Encrypt all config files in C:\data using password 1234abcd and write the
encrypted files directly into the TFTP server root directory:
C:\> FOR %a IN (C:\data\*.cfg) DO "anacrypt %a -o
d:\tftp\root -p 1234abcd"
Example 6
Decrypt all config files in the TFTP root directory using password 1234abcd and
write the resulting plaintext into the Windows temporary directory:
C:\> FOR %a IN (d:\tftp\root\*.tuz) DO "anacrypt %a -o
%TEMP% -p 1234abcd"
7-4
41-001160-00, Rev 01 Release 2.0
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Encryption and the IP Phone
Encryption and the IP Phone
Example 7
Use the "-v" variable to display version number.
C:\> anacrypt -v
The encryption tag format supported by this anacrypt is: Tuzo v1.3 rev1
The corresponding IP phone firmware build is: 20051017
41-001160-00, Rev 01 Release 2.0
7-5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 8
Firmware Upgrade
About this chapter
Introduction
This chapter provides information about upgrading the IP phone firmware.
Topics
Topic
Page
Upgrading the Firmware
page 8-2
page 8-2
page 8-4
page 8-6
Manual Firmware Update (TFTP only)
Manual Firmware and Configuration File Update
Automatic Update (auto-resync)
41-001160-00, Rev 01 Release 2.0
8-1
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
IP Phone Administrator Guide
Upgrading the Firmware
Upgrading the Firmware
The IP phone uses a TFTP, FTP, or HTTP server (depending on the protocol
configured on the IP phone) to download configuration files and firmware.
The configuration server should be ready and be able to accept connections. For
information on setting up the configuration server, see Chapter 1, the section,
“Configuration Server Requirement” on page 1-6.
You can download the firmware stored on the configuration server in one of three
ways:
•
•
Manual firmware update using the Aastra Web UI (TFTP only).
Manual update of firmware and configuration files (by restarting the phone
via the IP phone UI or the Aastra Web UI).
•
Automatic update of firmware, configuration files, or both at a specific time
in a 24-hour period (via the configuration files or the Aastra Web UI).
Manual Firmware Update (TFTP only)
Use the following procedure to activate a firmware download using TFTP.
Warning: Do not reset or turn off the phone until the download is
complete.
Note: This procedure allows you to download the <phone model.st> file
from a TFTP server even if your phone is configured to use HTTP or FTP.
8-2
41-001160-00, Rev 01 Release 2.0
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Firmware Upgrade
Upgrading the Firmware
Aastra Web UI
Step Action
1
Click on Advanced Settings->Firmware Update.
2
3
Enter the TFTP server IP address or qualified domain name in the "TFTP Server IP" field.
Enter the firmware file name (<phone model>.st) that you want to download to your IP phone in the
"File Name" field. For example, 53i.st.
This file name must match the actual name of the firmware file residing on your configuration server.
4
Click
.
This starts the upgrade process. If the upgrade is successful the following message displays on the
screen: "Firmware Upgrade Successful".
41-001160-00, Rev 01 Release 2.0
8-3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
IP Phone Administrator Guide
Upgrading the Firmware
Manual Firmware and Configuration File Update
Restarting the phone forces the phone to check for both firmware and
configuration files stored on the configuration server.
Warning: Do not reset or turn off the phone until the download is
complete.
IP Phone UI
Step Action
1
For 53i:
Press Ion the phone to enter the Options List.
For 55i/57i/57i CT:
Press
on the phone to enter the Options List.
2
3
4
Select Phone Status.
Select Restart Phone.
For 53i:
Press # to restart the phone.
For 55i/57i/57i CT:
Press Restart to restart the phone.
The firmware and configuration files download from the configuration server
8-4
41-001160-00, Rev 01 Release 2.0
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Firmware Upgrade
Upgrading the Firmware
Aastra Web UI
Step Action
1
Click on Operation->Reset.
2
3
Click
.
Click OK at the confirmation prompt.
The firmware and configuration files download from the configuration server.
41-001160-00, Rev 01 Release 2.0
8-5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
IP Phone Administrator Guide
Upgrading the Firmware
Automatic Update (auto-resync)
The auto-resync feature on the IP phones allows an administrator to enable the
phone to be updated automatically once a day at a specific time in a 24-hour
period if the files on the server have changed. This feature works with TFTP, FTP,
and HTTP servers. An administrator can enable this feature using the Aastra Web
UI or using the configuration files (aastra.cfg and <mac>.cfg).
Note: The automatic update feature works with both encrypted and plain
text configuration files.
When configuring via the Aastra Web UI, the administrator sets the following
parameters:
Mode Time
The Mode parameter determines the type of update that the IP phone performs:
configuration file only, firmware only, or both.
The Time parameter sets the period of time for which the IP phone is
automatically updated.
When configuring via the configuration files, the following parameters must be
set:
•
•
auto-resync mode
auto-resync time
8-6
41-001160-00, Rev 01 Release 2.0
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Firmware Upgrade
Upgrading the Firmware
Configuring Automatic Update
Use the following procedures to configure automatic update of the IP phone
firmware, configuration files, or both.
Notes:
1. If a user is accessing the Aastra Web UI, they are not informed of an
auto-reboot.
2. Any changes made using the Aastra Web UI or the IP phone UI are
not overwritten by an auto-resync update. Auto-resync affects the
configuration files only. However, the settings in the Aastra Web UI take
precedence over the IP phone UI and the configuration files.
3. If the IP phone is in use (not idle) at the time of the resync check, the
reboot occurs when the phone becomes idle.
4. The resync time is based on the local time of the IP phone.
5. Auto-Resync adds up to 15 minutes random time to the configured
time. For example, if the auto resync time parameter is set to 02:00, the
event takes place any time between 02:00 and 02:15. This prevents
several phones from accessing the server at the exact same time.
Configuration Files
For specific parameters you can set in the configuration files for automatic update, see Appendix A, the
section, “Configuration Server Settings” on page A-11.
41-001160-00, Rev 01 Release 2.0
8-7
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
IP Phone Administrator Guide
Upgrading the Firmware
Aastra Web UI
Step Action
1
Click on Advanced Settings->Configuration Server->Auto-Resync.
2
3
4
Select the auto-resync mode from the Mode field.
Valid values are None, Configuration Files, Firmware, Both. Default is None.
Select the time from the Time (24-hour) field that you want the update to take place.
Valid values are 00:00 to 23:30 (in 30 minute increments).
Click
to save your settings.
These changes are not dynamic.
You must restart your IP phone for the changes to take affect.
5
6
Click on Operation->Reset.
In the "Restart Phone" field click
to restart the IP phone and apply the update.
The update performs automatically at the time you designated.
8-8
41-001160-00, Rev 01 Release 2.0
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Firmware Upgrade
Upgrading the Firmware
Reference
For more information about setting automatic update on the IP phone, see the
"auto resync mode" and "auto resync time" parameters, see Appendix A, the
section, “Configuration Server Settings” on page A-11.
41-001160-00, Rev 01 Release 2.0
8-9
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Troubleshooting
About this chapter
Chapter 9
Troubleshooting
About this chapter
Introduction
This chapter describes tasks that a system administrator can perform on the IP
phones for troubleshooting purposes. It also includes answers to questions you
may have while using the IP phones.
Topics
Topic
Page
Troubleshooting
page 9-2
page 9-8
page 9-8
page 9-9
page 9-9
page 9-10
Why is my phone not receiving the TFTP IP address from the DHCP
Server?
How do I restart the IP phone?
page 9-11
page 9-13
page 9-16
How do I set the IP phone to factory default?
How to reset a user’s password?
41-001160-00, Rev 01 Release 2.0
9-1
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
IP Phone Administrator Guide
Troubleshooting
Troubleshooting
This section describes tasks that a system administrator can perform on the IP
phones for troubleshooting purposes. Using the Aastra Web UI, a system
administrator can:
•
•
•
•
•
Assign an IP address and IP port in which to save log files
Filter the logs according to severity that get reported to log files
Save the current local configuration file to a specified location
Save the current server configuration file to a specified location
Show task and stack status
Aastra Technical Support can then use the information gathered to perform
troubleshooting tasks.
Log Settings
Using the configuration files or the Aastra Web UI, you can specify the location
for which to save files for troubleshooting purposes.
In the configuration files, you use the following parameters to configure log
settings:
•
log ip - The IP address for which to save log files for troubleshooting
purposes.
•
log port - The IP port to use to save log files for troubleshooting purposes.
to this parameter via the Aastra Web UI require a reboot.)
Reference
For more information about the log setting configuration parameters, see
Appendix A, the section, “Troubleshooting Parameters” on page A-138.
9-2
41-001160-00, Rev 01 Release 2.0
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Troubleshooting
Troubleshooting
Module Settings
The Aastra IP phones provide blog module support that allows enhanced severity
filtering of log calls sent as blog output.
The blog, as used on the IP phones, is a an online debugging tool that can be
frequently updated and intended for technical support analyzation. Blogs are
defined by their format: a series of entries posted to a single page in
reverse-chronological order. The blogs are separated into modules which allow
you to log specific information for analyzing.
The blog modules on the IP phone are as follows:
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Line Manager information (LINMGR)
User Interface (UI) related (UI)
Miscellaneous (MISC)
Call control SIP stack (SIP)
Display drivers (DIS)
Delayed storage (DSTORE)
Endpoint module (EPT)
Indicator module (IND)
Keyboard module (KBD)
Network module (NET)
Provisioning module (PROVIS)
Realtime Transport module (RTPT)
Sound module (SND)
Profiler module (PROF)
For the blog module to perform, each module requires a Debug Level value which
is a bit mask of each log level (each log level sets a bit in the number).
41-001160-00, Rev 01 Release 2.0
9-3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
IP Phone Administrator Guide
Troubleshooting
You can set Module debug levels using the configuration files or the Aastra
Web UI.
Note: When setting the debug level values using the Aastra Web UI, you
must convert to decimal when entering the number.
Support Information
You can save the local and/or server configuration files of the IP phone to the
location specified in the "Log Settings" section.
Performing this task allows Aastra Technical Support to view the current
configuration of the IP phone and troubleshoot as necessary.
In the “Support Information” section, you can:
•
•
•
Get local.cfg
Get server.cfg
Show task and Stack Status
Aastra Technical Support uses this support information for troubleshooting the IP
phone when required.
9-4
41-001160-00, Rev 01 Release 2.0
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Troubleshooting
Troubleshooting
Performing Troubleshooting Tasks
Configuration Files
For specific parameters you can set in the configuration files, see Appendix A, the section, “Troubleshooting
Parameters” on page A-138.
41-001160-00, Rev 01 Release 2.0
9-5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
IP Phone Administrator Guide
Troubleshooting
Aastra Web UI
Step Action
1
Click on Advanced Settings->Troubleshooting.
To set log settings:
2
3
In the "Log IP" field, enter the IP address of where you want log files to be stored.
In the "Log Port" field, enter the port number associated with the IP address specified in the "Log IP"
field. This port passes the information from the IP phone to the IP address location.
9-6
41-001160-00, Rev 01 Release 2.0
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Troubleshooting
Troubleshooting
Aastra Web UI
Step Action
4
Click
to save your settings.
5
6
Click on Operation->Reset.
In the "Restart Phone" field click
to restart the IP phone.
To set blog modules:
7
8
Select a module for which you want to have log files created and sent to a blog.
Enter a value (in decimal format) in the “Debug Level” field. For example, 65535.
Note: You must enter the value in decimal format.
9
Click
to save your settings.
10
11
Click on Operation->Reset.
In the "Restart Phone" field click
to restart the IP phone.
To perform support tasks:
12
13
14
To store the local configuration file to the specified location, click on
local.cfg" field.
in the "Get
in the
To store the server configuration file to the specified location, click on
"Get server.cfg" field.
To display task and stack status information to the screen, click on
in the "Show Task
and Stack Status" field.
Note: The local and server configuration file information and the task and stack status information is
Reference
For information that describes solutions to most common problems using the IP
phones, see the next section, “Troubleshooting Solutions” on page 9-8.
41-001160-00, Rev 01 Release 2.0
9-7
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
IP Phone Administrator Guide
Troubleshooting Solutions
Troubleshooting Solutions
Description
This section describes solutions to some most common problems that can occur
while using the IP phones.
Why does my phone display “Application missing”?
If you have experienced networking issues while the phone was downloading the
application from the TFTP server, it is possible that the phone can no longer
retrieve the required firmware file. In the event that the phone is no longer able to
communicate with the TFTP server in its attempt to re-download the firmware and
the phone cannot locate the application locally, the message "Application
missing" displays.
The phone also displays the following: “Recovery web-client at: <IP Address>”.
The IP Address displayed is the IP address of the phone. If the phone is unable to
receive an IP from the DHCP server or has lost its record of its static IP, the phone
auto-assigns itself the default IP 192.168.0.50.
To recover the firmware for your phone in this circumstance, please perform the
following:
1. Launch your web browser on your computer.
Note: Your computer needs to be on the same network as your IP Phone.
2. In the URL, type: “http://<IP Address>” (where IP Address is the IP Address
displayed on the phone). Your browser launches the Aastra IP Phone
Firmware Recovery page.
3. Call Customer Support and request a <phone model>.st file.
4. Copy the file to your TFTP server.
5. Enter the <phone model>.st file that is ready for download.
6. Enter the IP address or qualified domain name of the TFTP server.
7. Press the Download Firmware button.
9-8
41-001160-00, Rev 01 Release 2.0
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Troubleshooting
Troubleshooting Solutions
Please ensure that the TFTP server is running and accessible on the network. If the
firmware file is correctly located on the running TFTP server, the phone will
locate the file and reload the application onto the phone.
Why does my phone display the “No Service” message?
The phone displays the “No Service” message if the SIP settings have not been set
up correctly.
The Registrar server could be set to 0.0.0.0. A global value of 0.0.0.0 disables
registration. However, the phone is still active and you can dial using
username@ip address of the phone. The phone displays "No Service".
If the Registrar IP address is set to 0.0.0.0 for a per-line basis (i.e, line 1, line 2,
etc.), then the register request is not sent, the "No Service" message does not
display, and the message waiting indicator (MWI) does not come on.
Check that the "Registrar Server" IP address in the Aastra Web UI at Advanced
Settings->Global SIP is correct. Check the "sip registrar ip" parameter in the
configuration files is correct.
Why does my phone display "Bad Encrypted Config"?
The IP phone displays "Bad Encrypted Config" because encrypted configuration
files are enabled but the decryption process has failed. Specific cases where
decryption fails are:
Reason:
The site-specific password in security.tuz does not match the password used to
encrypt the <mac>.tuz or aastra.tuz files.
Fix:
Encrypt the .cfg files to .tuz using the correct password, or replace the security.tuz
with the correct encrypted file.
41-001160-00, Rev 01 Release 2.0
9-9
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
IP Phone Administrator Guide
Troubleshooting Solutions
Reason:
Neither of the <mac>.tuz and aastra.tuz files are present on the configuration
server (TFTP/FTP/HTTP).
Fix:
Create the encrypted files using anacrypt.exe and copy them to the configuration
server.
Reason:
The encrypted <mac>.tuz or aastra.tuz file is encrypted using a different version
of anacrypt.exe than the phone firmware.
Fix:
Run "anacrypt.exe -v" and confirm that the correct version is reported, compared
to the phone firmware version.
Why is my phone not receiving the TFTP IP address from the DHCP
Server?
For DHCP to automatically populate the IP address or qualified domain name for
the TFTP server, your DHCP server must support Option 66. Option 66 is
responsible for forwarding the TFTP server IP address or domain name to the
manually enter the IP address or qualified domain name for the TFTP server into
your IP phone configuration.
For procedures on configuring the TFTP server using the IP phone UI and the
Aastra Web UI, see Chapter 4, the section, “Configuring the Configuration Server
Protocol” on page 4-13.
For specific protocol parameters you can set in the configuration files, see
Appendix A, the section, “Configuration Server Settings” on page A-11.
9-10
41-001160-00, Rev 01 Release 2.0
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Troubleshooting
Troubleshooting Solutions
How do I restart the IP phone?
IP Phone UI
Step Action
1
For 53i:
Press Ion the phone to enter the Options List.
For 55i/57i/57i CT:
Press
on the phone to enter the Options List.
2
3
4
Select Phone Status.
Select Restart Phone.
For 53i:
Press #=Confirm to restart the phone.
For 55i/57i/57i CT:
Press Restart to restart the phone.
Note: To cancel without restarting the phone, press Cancel.
Aastra Web UI
Step Action
1
Click on Operation->Reset.
41-001160-00, Rev 01 Release 2.0
9-11
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
IP Phone Administrator Guide
Troubleshooting Solutions
Aastra Web UI
Step Action
2
Click
..
3
Click OK at the confirmation prompt.
9-12
41-001160-00, Rev 01 Release 2.0
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Troubleshooting
Troubleshooting Solutions
How do I set the IP phone to factory default?
IP Phone UI
Step Action
1
For 53i:
Press Ion the phone to enter the Options List.
For 55i/57i/57i CT:
Press
on the phone to enter the Options List.
2
3
Select Phone Status.
For 53i:
Select Restore Defaults.
For 55i/57i/57i CT:
Select Factory Default.
To restore all factory defaults:
4
Select All Defaults.
This option restores all factory defaults, and removes any saved configuration and directory list files.
5
For 53i:
Press #=Confirm.
For 55i/57i/57i CT:
Press Default.
Note: Press Cancel to cancel the operaiton.
Press Restart to restart the phone.
6
To restore the local configuration file factory defaults only:
7
Select Config only to restore all factory defaults to the local configuration file.
This option removes the configuration file that contains saved parameters set from the Aastra Web UI
or the IP phone UI.
8
For 53i:
Press #=Confirm.
For 55i/57i/57i CT:
Press Default.
Note: Press Cancel to cancel the operaiton.
41-001160-00, Rev 01 Release 2.0
9-13
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
IP Phone Administrator Guide
Troubleshooting Solutions
IP Phone UI
Step Action
9
For 53i:
Press #=Confirm.
For 55i/57i/57i CT:
Press Default.
Note: Press Cancel to cancel the operaiton.
10
Press Restart when the phone prompts you to restart the phone.
Aastra Web UI
Step Action
1
Click on Operation->Reset.
To restore all factory defaults:
2
In the "Restore to Factory Defaults" field, click
.
This restores all factory defaults, and removes any saved configuration and directory list files.
Press to restart the phone.
3
9-14
41-001160-00, Rev 01 Release 2.0
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Troubleshooting
Troubleshooting Solutions
Aastra Web UI
Step Action
To restore the local configuration file factory defaults only:
4
In the "Remove Local Configuration Settings" field, click
.
This restores all factory defaults to the local configuration file. It removes the configuration file that
contains saved parameters set from the Aastra Web UI or the IP phone UI..
5
Press
to restart the phone.
41-001160-00, Rev 01 Release 2.0
9-15
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
IP Phone Administrator Guide
Troubleshooting Solutions
How to reset a user’s password?
IP Phone UI
Step Action
1
For 53i:
Press Ion the phone to enter the Options List.
For 55i/57i/57i CT:
Press
on the phone to enter the Options List.
2
3
4
5
6
Select User Password.
Enter the current user password.
Enter the new user password.
Re-enter the new user password.
Press Enter to save the new password.
A message, "Password Changed" displays on the screen.
Aastra Web UI
Step Action
1
Click on Operation->User Password.
2
3
In the "Current Password" field, enter the current user password.
In the "New Password" field, enter the new user password.
9-16
41-001160-00, Rev 01 Release 2.0
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Troubleshooting
Troubleshooting Solutions
Aastra Web UI
Step Action
4
5
In the "Confirm Password" field, enter the new user password again.
Click to save your changes.
41-001160-00, Rev 01 Release 2.0
9-17
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Configuration Parameters
About this appendix
Appendix A
Configuration Parameters
About this appendix
Introduction
This appendix describes the parameters you can set in the configuration files for
the IP phones. The configuration files include <mac.cfg> and config.cfg.
Topic
Page
Setting Parameters in Configuration Files
Operational, Basic, and Advanced Parameters
Network Settings
page A-4
page A-5
page A-5
page A-8
page A-10
page A-11
page A-18
page A-20
page A-22
page A-24
page A-27
page A-28
Password Settings
Aastra Web UI Settings
Configuration Server Settings
Network Address Translation (NAT) Settings
HTTPS Client and Server Settings
UPnP Settings
Virtual Local Area Network (VLAN) Settings
Type of Service (ToS)/DSCP Settings
Time Server Settings
41-001160-00, Rev 01 Release 2.0
A-1
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
IP Phone Administrator Guide
About this appendix
Topic
Page
Time and Date Settings
SIP Local Dial Plan Settings
SIP Basic, Global Settings
page A-30
page A-37
page A-40
page A-48
page A-58
page A-63
page A-65
page A-66
page A-67
page A-68
page A-69
page A-69
page A-70
page A-71
page A-74
page A-77
page A-78
page A-79
page A-79
page A-80
page A-86
page A-96
page A-97
page A-98
page A-101
page A-104
page A-105
page A-106
page A-108
page A-110
page A-117
SIP Basic, Per-Line Settings
Advanced SIP Settings
RTP, Codec, DTMF Global Settings
DTMF Per-Line Settings
Silence Suppression Settings
Voicemail Settings
Directory Settings
Callers List Settings
Call Forward Settings
Missed Calls Indicator Settings
XML Settings
Action URI Settings
Ring Tone and Tone Set Global Settings
Ring Tone Per-Line Settings
Stuttered Dial Tone Setting
Call Waiting Tone Setting
Priority Alert Settings
Language Settings
Suppress DTMF Playback Setting
Display DTMF Digits Setting
Intercom and Auto-Answer Settings
Audio Transmit and Receive Gain Adjustment Settings
Directed Call Pickup (BLF or XML Call Interception) Settings
BLF Subscription Period Settings
Hard Key Parameters
Softkey/Programmable Key/Feature Key Parameters
Softkey Settings for 55i, 57i, 57i CT
Programmable Key Settings for 53i and 55i
A-2
41-001160-00, Rev 01 Release 2.0
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Configuration Parameters
About this appendix
Topic
Page
Top Softkey Settings for 57i and 57i CT
Handset Feature Key Settings for the 57i CT
Expansion Module Key Settings for 536M (53i/55i) and 560M (57i/57i CT)
Locking Softkeys and Programmable Keys
Advanced Operational Parameters
MAC Address/Line Number
page A-121
page A-126
page A-128
page A-131
page A-134
page A-134
page A-135
page A-136
page A-136
page A-137
page A-138
Blind Transfer Setting.
Update Caller ID Setting.
Boot Sequence Recovery Mode.
Single Call Restriction
Troubleshooting Parameters
41-001160-00, Rev 01 Release 2.0
A-3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
IP Phone Administrator Guide
Setting Parameters in Configuration Files
Setting Parameters in Configuration Files
You can set specific configuration parameters in the configuration files for
configuring you IP phone. The aastra.cfg and <mac>.cfg files are stored on the
server. The aastra.cfg file stores global IP phone configuration settings. The
<mac>.cfg file stores configuration settings specific to the IP phone with that
MAC address. When you restart the IP phone, these files are downloaded to the
phone.
If you make changes to the phone configuration, the changes are stored in a local
configuration on the phone (not on the server).
settings in the aastra.cfg file.
Reference
•
•
•
•
•
Hard Key Parameters on page A-106
Softkey/Programmable Key/Feature Key Parameters on page A-108
Advanced Operational Parameters on page A-134
Troubleshooting Parameters on page A-138
A-4
41-001160-00, Rev 01 Release 2.0
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Configuration Parameters
Operational, Basic, and Advanced Parameters
Operational, Basic, and Advanced Parameters
The following sections provide the configuration parameters you can configure on
the IP phone. Each parameter table includes the name of the parameter, a
description, the format, default value, range, and example. The table also provides
the method for which the parameters can be configured (IP phone UI, Aastra Web
UI, or configuration files).
Network Settings
Parameter –
dhcp
IP phone UI
Aastra Web UI
Options->Network Settings
Advanced Settings->Network->
Basic Network Settings
DHCP
Configuration Files
aastra.cfg, <mac>.cfg
(in Web UI)
Description
Enabling DHCP will populate most of the network information. The DHCP
server should serve the network information that the IP phone requires. If
the IP phone is unable to get any required information then it should be
entered manually. Parameters affected: ip. Use "0" to disable DHCP and
"1" to enable DHCP.
Format
Integer
1
Default Value
Range
0 or 1
dhcp: 1
Example
Parameter –
ip
IP phone UI
Aastra Web UI
Options->Network Settings
Advanced Settings->Network->
Basic Network Settings
Ip Address
(in Web UI)
Configuration Files
aastra.cfg, <mac>.cfg
Description
Format
This parameter assigns a static IP address to the IP phone device.
IP address
Default Value
Range
0.0.0.0
Not Applicable
ip: 192.168.0.25
Example
41-001160-00, Rev 01 Release 2.0
A-5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
IP Phone Administrator Guide
Operational, Basic, and Advanced Parameters
Parameter –
subnet mask
IP phone UI
Aastra Web UI
Options->Network Settings
Advanced Settings->Network->
Basic Network Settings
Subnet Mask
(in Web UI)
Configuration Files
aastra.cfg, <mac>.cfg
Description
Format
Subnet mask defines the IP address range local to the IP phone.
IP address
Default Value
Range
255.255.255.0
Not Applicable
Example
subnet mask: 255.255.255.224
Parameter –
default gateway
IP phone UI
Aastra Web UI
Options->Network Settings
Advanced Settings->Network->
Basic Network Settings
Gateway
Configuration Files
aastra.cfg, <mac>.cfg
(in Web UI)
Description
Format
The IP address of the network’s gateway or default router IP address.
IP address
Default Value
Range
1.0.0.1
Not Applicable
default gateway: 192.168.0.1
Example
Parameter –
dns1
IP phone UI
Aastra Web UI
Options->Network Settings
Advanced Settings->Network->
Basic Network Settings
Primary DNS
(in Web UI)
Configuration Files
aastra.cfg, <mac>.cfg
Description
Primary domain name server IP address. For any of the IP address
settings on the IP phone a domain name value can be entered instead of
an IP address. With the help of the domain name servers the domain
names for such parameters can then be resolved to their corresponding
IP addresses.
Format
IP address
Default Value
Range
0.0.0.0
Not Applicable
dns1: 192.168.0.5
Example
A-6
41-001160-00, Rev 01 Release 2.0
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Configuration Parameters
Operational, Basic, and Advanced Parameters
Parameter –
dns2
IP phone UI
Aastra Web UI
Options->Network Settings
Advanced Settings->Network->
Basic Network Settings
Secondary DNS
(in Web UI)
Configuration Files
aastra.cfg, <mac>.cfg
Description
Format
Secondary domain name servers’ IP address.
IP address
Default Value
Range
0.0.0.0
Not Applicable
dns2: 192.168.0.6
Example
Parameter –
Aastra Web UI
Advanced Settings->Network->
ethernet port 0
Basic Network Settings
aastra.cfg, <mac>.cfg
Configuration Files
Ethernet Port 0
(in Web UI)
Description
The send (TX) and receive (RX) method to use on Ethernet port 0 to
transmit and receive data over the LAN.
Format
Alphanumeric characters
auto-negotiate
Default Value
Range
auto-negotiate
full-duplex, 10Mbps
full-duplex, 100Mbps
half-duplex, 10Mbps
half-duplex, 100Mbps
Example
ethernet port 0: full-duplex, 10Mbps
41-001160-00, Rev 01 Release 2.0
A-7
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
IP Phone Administrator Guide
Operational, Basic, and Advanced Parameters
Parameter –
ethernet port 1
Aastra Web UI
Advanced Settings->Network->
Basic Network Settings
aastra.cfg, <mac>.cfg
Configuration Files
Ethernet Port 1
(in Web UI)
Description
The send (TX) and receive (RX) method to use on Ethernet port 1 to
transmit and receive data over the LAN.
Format
Alphanumeric characters
auto-negotiate
Default Value
Range
auto-negotiate
full-duplex, 10Mbps
full-duplex, 100Mbps
half-duplex, 10Mbps
half-duplex, 100Mbps
Example
ethernet port 1: full-duplex, 10Mbps
Password Settings
Parameter –
Configuration Files
aastra.cfg, <mac>.cfg
admin password
Description
Format
Allows you to set a new administrator password for the IP phone.
Integer
Default Value
Range
22222
0 to 4294967295
admin password: 1234567890
Example
Parameter –
user password
IP phone UI
Aastra Web UI
Configuration Files
Options->User Password
Operation->User Password
aastra.cfg, <mac>.cfg
Current Password
(in Web UI)
Description
Format
Allows you to set a new user password for the IP phone.
Integer
Default Value
Range
Default value is an empty string ““ (left blank)
0 to 4294967295
Example
user password: 123
A-8
41-001160-00, Rev 01 Release 2.0
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Configuration Parameters
Operational, Basic, and Advanced Parameters
Emergency Dial Plan Settings
Parameter –
emergency dial plan
Configuration Files
Aastra Web UI
aastra.cfg, <mac>.cfg
Operation->Phone Lock
Description
Allows you to specify an emergency number to use on your IP phone so a
caller can contact emergency services in the local area when required.
The default emergency numbers on the IP phones is 911, 999, 112, and
110.
911 - A United States emergency number.
999 - A United Kingdom emergency number.
112 - An international emergency telephone number for GSM mobile
phone networks. In all European Union countries it is also the
emergency telephone number for both mobile and fixed-line
telephones.
110 - A police and/or fire emergency number in Asia, Europe, Middle
East, and South America.
Note: Contact your local phone service provider for available emergency
numbers in your area.
Format
Integer
Default Value
Range
911|999|112|110
Up to 128 characters
emergency dial plan: 911|999
Example
41-001160-00, Rev 01 Release 2.0
A-9
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
IP Phone Administrator Guide
Operational, Basic, and Advanced Parameters
Parameter –
Configuration Files
aastra.cfg, <mac>.cfg
options password enabled
Description
Enables or disables password protection of the Options key on the IP
phone. If enabled, upon pressing the Options key, a user has to enter a
password at the IP phone UI. If the password is entered correctly, the user
is allowed to gain access to the Options Menu and no more password
prompts display for other password protected screens. If the user fails to
enter the correct password in three attempts, access to the Options Menu
is denied and the IP phone returns to the idle screen.
Note: The password to enter is the administrator password configured for
that phone.
Format
Boolean
0
Default Value
Range
0 (false; not password protected)
1 (true; password protected)
Example
options password enabled: 1
Aastra Web UI Settings
Parameter –
Configuration Files
aastra.cfg, <mac>.cfg
web interface enabled
Description
Enables or disables the Aastra Web UI for a single IP phone when placed
in the <mac>.cfg file.
Enables or disables the Aastra Web UI for all phones when placed in the
aastra.cfg file.
Format
Boolean
Default Value
Range
Not Applicable
0 = Disable
1 = Enable
Example
web interface enabled: 1
A-10
41-001160-00, Rev 01 Release 2.0
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Configuration Parameters
Operational, Basic, and Advanced Parameters
Configuration Server Settings
Parameter –
IP phone UI
Options->Network Settings
download protocol
Aastra Web UI
Configuration Files
Advanced Settings->Configuration Server
aastra.cfg, <mac>.cfg
Download Protocol
(in Web UI)
Description
Format
Protocol to use for downloading new versions of software to the IP phone.
Text
Default Value
Range
TFTP
TFTP
FTP
HTTP
HTTPS
Example
download protocol: HTTPS
Parameter –
tftp server
IP phone UI
Options->Network Settings->TFTP Server->
Primary TFTP
Aastra Web UI
Configuration Files
Advanced Settings->Configuration Server
aastra.cfg, <mac>.cfg
TFTP Server
(in Web UI)
Description
The TFTP server’s IP address or qualified domain name. If DHCP is
enabled and the DHCP server provides the information, this field is
automatically populated. Use this parameter to change the IP address or
domain name of the TFTP server. This will become effective after this
configuration file has been downloaded into the phone.
Format
IP address or qualified domain name
0.0.0.0
Default Value
Range
Not Applicable
Example
tftp server: 192.168.0.130
41-001160-00, Rev 01 Release 2.0
A-11
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
IP Phone Administrator Guide
Operational, Basic, and Advanced Parameters
Parameter –
alternate tftp server
IP phone UI
Options->Network Settings->TFTP Server->
Alernate TFTP
Aastra Web UI
Configuration Files
Advanced Settings->Configuration Server
aastra.cfg, <mac>.cfg
Alternate TFTP
(in Web UI)
Description
The alternate TFTP server’s IP address or qualified domain name. This
will become effective after this configuration file has been downloaded into
the phone.
Format
IP address or qualified domain name
0.0.0.0
Default Value
Range
Not Applicable
Example
alternate tftp server: 192.168.0.132
Parameter –
IP phone UI
Options->Network Settings->TFTP
use alternate tftp
Server->Select TFTP
Aastra Web UI
Advanced Settings->Configuration Server
aastra.cfg, <mac>.cfg
Use Alternate TFTP
Configuration Files
(in Web UI)
Description
Enables or disables the alternate TFTP server. Valid values are "0"
disabled and "1" enabled.
Format
Not Applicable
Default Value
Range
0
0 or 1
Example
use alternate tftp: 1
A-12
41-001160-00, Rev 01 Release 2.0
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Configuration Parameters
Operational, Basic, and Advanced Parameters
Parameter –
ftp server
IP phone UI
Aastra Web UI
Configuration Files
Options->Network Settings->FTP Server
Advanced Settings->Configuration Server
aastra.cfg, <mac>.cfg
FTP Server
(in Web UI)
Description
The FTP server’s IP address or network host name. This will become
effective after this configuration file has been downloaded into the phone.
Optional: You can also assign a username and password for access to the
FTP server. See the following parameters for setting username and
password.
Format
IP address or fully qualified Domain Name
0.0.0.0
Default Value
Range
Not Applicable
Example
ftp server: 192.168.0.131
Parameter –
ftp username
IP phone UI
Aastra Web UI
Configuration Files
Options->Network Settings->FTP Server
Advanced Settings->Configuration Server
aastra.cfg, <mac>.cfg
FTP User Name
(in Web UI)
Description
The username to enter for accessing the FTP server. This will become
effective after this configuration file has been downloaded into the phone.
Format
Text
Default Value
Range
Not Applicable
Up to 63 alphanumeric characters
ftp username: 57iaastra
Example
Parameter –
ftp password
IP phone UI
Aastra Web UI
Configuration Files
Options->Network Settings->FTP Server
Advanced Settings->Configuration Server
aastra.cfg, <mac>.cfg
FTP Password
(in Web UI)
Description
The password to enter for accessing the FTP server. This will become
effective after this configuration file has been downloaded into the phone.
Format
Text
Default Value
Range
Not Applicable
Up to 63 alphanumeric characters
ftp password: 1234fcs
Example
41-001160-00, Rev 01 Release 2.0
A-13
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
IP Phone Administrator Guide
Operational, Basic, and Advanced Parameters
Parameter –
http server
IP phone UI
Aastra Web UI
Configuration Files
Options->Network Settings->HTTP Server
Advanced Settings->Configuration Server
aastra.cfg, <mac>.cfg
HTTP Server
(in Web UI)
Description
The HTTP server’s IP address. This will become effective after this
configuration file has been downloaded into the phone.
Optional: You can also assign an HTTP relative path to the HTTP server.
See the next parameter (http path).
Format
IP address or fully qualified Domain Name
0.0.0.0
Default Value
Range
Not Applicable
Example
http server: 192.168.0.132
Parameter –
http path
IP phone UI
Aastra Web UI
Configuration Files
Options->Network Settings->HTTP Server
Advanced Settings->Configuration Server
aastra.cfg, <mac>.cfg
HTTP Path
(in Web UI)
Description
The HTTP path name to enter.
If the IP phone’s configuration and firmware files are located in a
sub-directory beneath the server’s HTTP root directory, the relative path
to that sub-directory should be entered in this field.
Format
dir/dir/dir
Default Value
Range
Not Applicable
Up to 63 alphanumeric characters
http path: ipphones/57i
Example
A-14
41-001160-00, Rev 01 Release 2.0
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Configuration Parameters
Operational, Basic, and Advanced Parameters
Parameter –
https server
IP phone UI
Options->Network Settings->HTTPS->
HTTPS Client->Download Server
Advanced Settings->Configuration Server
aastra.cfg, <mac>.cfg
Aastra Web UI
Configuration Files
HTTPS Server
(in Web UI)
Description
The HTTPS server’s IP address. This will become effective after this
configuration file has been downloaded into the phone.
Optional: You can also assign an HTTPS relative path to the HTTPS
server. See the next parameter (https path)
Format
IP address or fully qualified Domain Name
0.0.0.0
Default Value
Range
Not Applicable
Example
https server: 192.168.0.143
Parameter –
IP phone UI
Options->Network Settings->HTTPS->HTTPS
https path
Client->
Download Path
HTTPS Path
(in Web UI)
Aastra Web UI
Configuration Files
Advanced Settings->Configuration Server
aastra.cfg, <mac>.cfg
Description
The HTTPS path name to enter.
If the IP phone’s configuration and firmware files are located in a
sub-directory beneath the server’s HTTPS root directory, the relative path
to that sub-directory should be entered in this field.
Format
dir/dir/dir
Default Value
Range
Not Applicable
Up to 63 alphanumeric characters
https path: ipphones/55i
Example
41-001160-00, Rev 01 Release 2.0
A-15
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
IP Phone Administrator Guide
Operational, Basic, and Advanced Parameters
Parameter –
auto resync mode
Aastra Web UI
Advanced Settings->Configuration Server->
Auto-Resync
Configuration Files
aastra.cfg, <mac>.cfg
Mode
(in Web UI)
Description
Enables and disables the phone to be updated automatically once a day
at a specific time in a 24-hour period. This parameter works with TFTP,
FTP, and HTTP servers.
Valid values are:
None (0) - Disable auto-resync
Configuration Files (1) - Updates the configuration files on the IP phone
automatically at the specified time if the files on the server have changed.
Firmware (2) - Updates the firmware on the IP phone automatically at the
specified time if the files on the server have changed.
Both (3) - Updates the configuration files and firmware automatically at
the specified time if the files on the server have changed.
Notes:
1. If a user is accessing the Aastra Web UI, they are not informed of an
auto-reboot.
2. Any changes made using the Aastra Web UI or the IP phone UI are not
overwritten by an auto-resync update. Auto-resync affects the
configuration files only. However, the settings in the Aastra Web UI
take precedence over the IP phone UI and the configuration files.
3. The resync time is based on the local time of theIP phone.
4. If the IP phone is in use (not idle) at the time of the resync check, the
reboot occurs when the phone becomes idle.
5. The automatic update feature works with both encrypted and plain text
configuration files.
Format
Integer
Default Value
Aastra Web UI
None
Configuration Files
0
Range
Aastra Web UI
None
Configuration Files
Firmware
Both
Configuration Files
0 (none)
1 (configuration files only)
2 (firmware only)
3 (configuration files and firmware)
Example
auto resync mode: 1
A-16
41-001160-00, Rev 01 Release 2.0
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Configuration Parameters
Operational, Basic, and Advanced Parameters
Parameter –
auto resync time
Aastra Web UI
Advanced Settings->Configuration Server->
Auto-Resync
Configuration Files
aastra.cfg, <mac>.cfg
Time (24-hour)
(in Web UI)
Description
Sets the time of day in a 24-hour period for the IP phone to be
automatically updated. This parameter works with TFTP, FTP, and HTTP
servers.
Notes:
1. The resync time is based on the local time of the IP phone.
2. The value of 00:00 is 12:00 A.M.
3. When selecting a value for this parameter in the Aastra Web UI, the
values are in 30-minute increments only.
4. When entering a value for this parameter using the configuration files,
the value can be entered using minute values from 00 to 59 (for
example, the auto resync time can be entered as 02:56).
5. Auto-Resync adds up to 15 minutes random time to the configured
time. For example, if the auto resync time parameter is set to 02:00,
the event takes place any time between 02:00 and 02:15.
6. When the language on the phone is set to French or Spanish, you must
enter the time in the format "00h00" (configuration files only).
Format
hh:mm
00h00 (for French and Spanish configuration files)
Default Value
Aastra Web UI
00:00
Configuration Files
00:00
Range
Aastra Web UI
00:00 to 23:30 (in 30 minute increments)
Configuration Files
hh = 00 to 23
mm = 00 to 59
Example
auto resync time: 03:24
41-001160-00, Rev 01 Release 2.0
A-17
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
IP Phone Administrator Guide
Operational, Basic, and Advanced Parameters
Network Address Translation (NAT) Settings
Parameter –
sip nat ip
IP phone UI
Aastra Web UI
Configuration Files
Options->SIP Settings
Advanced Settings->Network
aastra.cfg, <mac>.cfg
NAT IP
(in Web UI)
Description
Format
IP address the network device that enforces NAT.
IP Address
Default Value
Range
0.0.0.0
Not Applicable
sip nat ip: 192.245.2.1
Example
Parameter –
sip nat port
IP phone UI
Aastra Web UI
Configuration Files
Options->SIP Settings
Advanced Settings->Network
aastra.cfg, <mac>.cfg
NAT SIP Port
(in Web UI)
Description
Format
Port number of the network device that enforces NAT.
Integer
Default Value
Range
0
Not Applicable
sip nat port: 51620
Example
Parameter –
sip nortel nat support
IP phone UI
Aastra Web UI
Configuration Files
Options->SIP Settings
Advanced Settings->Network
aastra.cfg, <mac>.cfg
Nortel NAT Traversal
Enabled
(in Web UI)
Description
Enables or disables the phone to operate while connected to a network
device that enforces NAT.
Format
Integer
Default Value
Range
0 (disabled)
0 (disabled)
1 (enabled)
Example
sip nortel nat support: 1
A-18
41-001160-00, Rev 01 Release 2.0
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Configuration Parameters
Operational, Basic, and Advanced Parameters
Parameter –
sip nortel nat timer
Aastra Web UI
Configuration Files
Advanced Settings->Network
aastra.cfg, <mac>.cfg
Nortel NAT Timer
(in Web UI)
Description
The interval, in seconds, that the phone sends SIP ping requests to the
Nortel proxy.
Format
Integer
Default Value
Range
30
0 to 2147483647
sip nortel nat timer: 60
Example
41-001160-00, Rev 01 Release 2.0
A-19
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
IP Phone Administrator Guide
Operational, Basic, and Advanced Parameters
HTTPS Client and Server Settings
Parameter –
https client method
IP Phone UI
Client
Options->Network Settings->HTTPS->HTTPS
Aastra Web UI
Advanced Settings->Network->
Advanced Network Settings
aastra.cfg, <mac>.cfg
HTTPS Client Method
(in Web UI)
Configuration Files
Description
Defines the security method that the client advertises to the server during
the Secure Socket Layer (SSL) handshake. Available options are:
TLS 1.0 - Transport Layer Security version 1 (TLS 1.0) is a protocol that
ensures privacy between communicating applications and their users on
the Internet. TLS is the successor to SSL.
SSL 3.0 - Secure Socket Layer version 3 (SSL 3.0) is a commonly-used
protocol for managing the security of a message transmission on the
Internet.
Format
Alphanumeric characters
SSL 3.0
Default Value
Range
TLS 1.0
SSL 3.0 (default)
Example
https client method: TLS 1.0
Parameter –
https redirect http get
IP Phone UI
Options->Network Settings->HTTPS->
HTTPS Server->Redirect
Aastra Web UI
Configuration Files
Advanced Settings->Network->
Advanced Network Settings
aastra.cfg, <mac>.cfg
HTTPS Server - Redirect
HTTP to HTTPS
(in Web UI)
Description
Allows or disallows redirection from the HTTP server to the HTTPS
server.
Format
Boolean
Default Value
Range
1 (enables redirection)
0 (disables redirection)
1 (enables redirection)
Example
https redirect http get: 0
A-20
41-001160-00, Rev 01 Release 2.0
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Configuration Parameters
Operational, Basic, and Advanced Parameters
Parameter –
https block http post xml
IP Phone UI
Options->Network Settings->HTTPS->
HTTPS Server->XML
Aastra Web UI
Configuration Files
Advanced Settings->Network->
Advanced Network Settings
aastra.cfg, <mac>.cfg
HTTPS Server - Block XML
HTTP POSTs
(in Web UI)
Description
Enables or disables the blocking of XML scripts from HTTP POSTs.
Some client applications use HTTP POSTs to transfer XML scripts. The
phones’s HTTP server accepts these POSTs even if server redirection is
enabled, effectively bypassing the secure connection. When this
parameter is enabled (blocking is enabled), receiption of an HTTP POST
containing an XML parameter header results in the following response:
“403 Forbidden”. This forces the client to direct the POSTs to the HTTPS
server through use of the “https://” URL.
Format
Boolean
Default Value
Range
0 (disables blocking of XML HTTP POSTs)
0 (disables blocking of XML HTTP POSTs)
1 (enables blocking of XML HTTP POSTs)
Example
https block http post xml: 1
41-001160-00, Rev 01 Release 2.0
A-21
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
IP Phone Administrator Guide
Operational, Basic, and Advanced Parameters
UPnP Settings
Parameter –
upnp manager
IP phone UI
Aastra Web UI
Options->Network Settings->UPnP
Advanced Settings->Network->
Advanced Network Settings
aastra.cfg, <mac>.cfg
UPnP
Configuration Files
(in Web UI)
Description
Enables or disables Universal Plug and Play (UpnP) on the IP phone. If
you set this parameter to “0”, you can manually configure NAT on the IP
phone and the UPnP manager will not start.
Format
Boolean
0 (false)
Default Value
Range
0 (false)
1 (true)
Example
upnp manager: 1
Parameter –
Configuration Files
aastra.cfg, <mac>.cfg
upnp gateway
Description
IP address or fully qualified Domain Name of the Internet gateway or
router. This parameter stores the IP address of the gateway or router in
the event that only non-default UPnP gateways get discovered on the
network. The UPnP port mappings are saved to this IP address so even if
the phone reboots, it will still have the correct port mappings.
Format
IP address or fully qualitifed Domain Name
0.0.0.0
Default Value
Range
Not Applicable
Example
upnp gateway: 120.400.003.2
A-22
41-001160-00, Rev 01 Release 2.0
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Configuration Parameters
Operational, Basic, and Advanced Parameters
Parameter –
sip nat rtp port
IP Phone UI
Aastra Web UI
Options->SIP Settings->RTP Port Base
Advanced Settings->Network->
Advanced Network Settings
RTP Port Base
Configuration Files aastra.cfg, <mac>.cfg
(in IP Phone UI)
NAT RTP Port
(in Web UI)
Description
Indicates the port through which the RTP packets are sent. This value
must specify the beginning of the RTP port range on the gateway or
router.
The RTP port is used for sending DTMF tones and for the audio stream.
Your network administrator may close some ports for security reasons.
You may want to use this parameter to send RTP data using a different
port.
Format
Integer
Default Value
Range
51720
Not Applicable
sip nat rtp port: 51730
Example
41-001160-00, Rev 01 Release 2.0
A-23
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
IP Phone Administrator Guide
Operational, Basic, and Advanced Parameters
Virtual Local Area Network (VLAN) Settings
Parameter –
IP phone UI
Options->Network Settings->VLAN->VLAN
tagging enabled
Enable
Aastra Web UI
Configuration Files
Advanced Settings->Network->VLAN->Global
aastra.cfg, <mac>.cfg
VLAN Enable
(in Web UI)
Description
Format
Enables or disables VLAN on the IP phones.
Boolean
0 (false)
Default Value
Range
0 (false)
1 (true)
Example
tagging enabled: 1
Parameter –
IP phone UI
Options->Network
VLAN id
Settings->VLAN->Phone->VLAN ID
Aastra Web UI
Configuration Files
Advanced Settings->Network->VLAN->Port 0
aastra.cfg, <mac>.cfg
VLAN ID
(for Port 0 in
Web UI)
Description
VLAN is a feature on the IP phone that allows for multiple logical Ethernet
interfaces to send outgoing RTP packets over a single physical Ethernet
as described in IEEE Std 802.3. On the IP phone, you configure a VLAN
ID that associates with the physical Ethernet Port 0.
Format
Integer
Default Value
Range
1
1 to 4094
VLAN id: 300
Example
A-24
41-001160-00, Rev 01 Release 2.0
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Configuration Parameters
Operational, Basic, and Advanced Parameters
Parameter –
tos priority map
IP phone UI
Options->Network Settings->VLAN->Phone->
Priority->SIP
Options->Network Settings->VLAN->Phone->
Priority->RTP
SIP Priority
RTP Priority
RTCP Priority
(for Port 0 in
Web UI)
Options->Network Settings->VLAN->Phone->
Priority->RTCP
Aastra Web UI
Configuration Files
Advanced Settings->Network->VLAN->Port 0
aastra.cfg, <mac>.cfg
Description
This parameter is based on the Type of Service (ToS), Differentiated
Services Code Point (DSCP) setting for SIP (tos sip parameter), RTP (tos
rtp parameter) and RTCP (tos rtcp parameter). It is the mapping between
the DSCP value and the VLAN priority value for SIP, RTP, and RTCP
packets.
You enter the tos priority map value as follows:
(DSCP_1,Priority_1)(DSCP_2,Priority_2).....(DSCP_64,Priority_64)
where the DSCP value range is 0-63 and the priority range is 0-7.
Mappings not enclosed in parentheses and separated with a comma, or
with values outside the ranges, are ignored.
Format
Integer
Default Value
3 (based on the default ToS DSCP SIP setting of 24)
4 (based on the default ToS DSCP RTP setting of 32)
4 (based on the default ToS DSCP RTCP setting of 32)
Range
0 to 63 (for DSCP)
0 to 7 (for SIP, RTP, and RTCP priorities)
Example
tos priority map: (24,7)
The following table identifies the default DSCP-to-priority mapping structure.
DSCP
Range
DSCP Priority
0-7
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8-15
16-23
24-31
32-39
40-47
48-55
56-63
41-001160-00, Rev 01 Release 2.0
A-25
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
IP Phone Administrator Guide
Operational, Basic, and Advanced Parameters
Parameter –
priority non-ip
IP phone UI
Options->Network Settings->VLAN->Phone->
Priority->Other
Aastra Web UI
Configuration Files
Advanced Settings->Network->VLAN->Global
aastra.cfg, <mac>.cfg
Priority, Non-IP Packet
(in Web UI)
Description
Format
Specifies the priority value for non-IP packets.
Integer
Default Value
Range
5
0 to 7
Example
priority non-ip: 7
Parameter –
IP phone UI
Options->Network Settings->VLAN->
QoS eth port 1 priority
Passthrough->Priority
Aastra Web UI
Configuration Files
Advanced Settings->Network->VLAN->Port 1
aastra.cfg, <mac>.cfg
Priority
(for Port 1 in
Web UI)
Description
Specifies the priority value used for passing VLAN packets through to a
PC via Port 1.
Format
Integer
Default Value
Range
0
0 to 7
Example
QoS eth port 1 priority: 3
Parameter –
VLAN id port 1
IP phone UI
Options->Network Settings->VLAN->
Passthrough->VLAN ID
Aastra Web UI
Configuration Files
Advanced Settings->Network->VLAN->Port 1
aastra.cfg, <mac>.cfg
VLAN ID
(for Port 1in
Web UI)
Description
Format
Specifies the VLAN ID used to pass packets through to a PC via Port 1.
Integer
Default Value
Range
1
1 to 4094
Example
VLAN id port 1: 3
A-26
41-001160-00, Rev 01 Release 2.0
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Configuration Parameters
Operational, Basic, and Advanced Parameters
Type of Service (ToS)/DSCP Settings
Parameter –
tos sip
IP phone UI
Options->Network Settings->
Type of Service->SIP
Aastra Web UI
Configuration Files
Advanced Settings->Network->
Type of Service,DSCP
aastra.cfg, <mac>.cfg
Description
Format
The Differentiated Services Code Point (DSCP) for SIP packets.
Integer
24
Default Value
Range
0 to 63
tos sip: 3
Example
Parameter –
IP phone UI
Options->Network Settings->Type of
tos rtp
Service->RTP
Aastra Web UI
Advanced Settings->Network->
Type of Service,DSCP
Configuration Files
aastra.cfg, <mac>.cfg
Description
Format
The Differentiated Services Code Point (DSCP) for RTP packets.
Integer
32
Default Value
Range
0 to 63
tos rtp: 2
Example
Parameter –
IP phone UI
Options->Network Settings->Type of
tos rtcp
Service->RTCP
Aastra Web UI
Advanced Settings->Network->
Type of Service,DSCP
Configuration Files
aastra.cfg, <mac>.cfg
Description
Format
The Differentiated Services Code Point (DSCP) for RTCP packets.
Integer
32
Default Value
Range
0 to 63
tos rtcp: 3
Example
41-001160-00, Rev 01 Release 2.0
A-27
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
IP Phone Administrator Guide
Operational, Basic, and Advanced Parameters
Time Server Settings
Parameter –
time server disabled
Aastra Web UI
Advanced Settings->Network->
Advanced Network Settings
aastra.cfg, <mac>.cfg
Configuration Files
NTP Time Servers
(in Web UI)
Description
Enables or disables the time server. This parameter affects the time
server1, time server2, and time server3 parameters. Setting this
parameter to 0 allows the use of the configured Time Server(s). Setting
this parameter to 1 prevents the use of the configured Time Server(s).
Format
Integer
Default Value
Range
0 (disabled)
0 (disabled)
1 (enabled)
Example
time server disabled: 0
Parameter –
time server1
Aastra Web UI
Advanced Settings->Network->
Advanced Network Settings
aastra.cfg, <mac>.cfg
Configuration Files
Time Server 1
(in Web UI)
Description
The primary time server's IP address or qualified domain name. If the
time server is enabled, the value for time server1 will be used to request
the time from.
Format
IP address or qualified domain name
0.0.0.0
Default Value
Range
Not Applicable
Example
time server1: 192.168.0.5
A-28
41-001160-00, Rev 01 Release 2.0
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Configuration Parameters
Operational, Basic, and Advanced Parameters
Parameter –
time server2
Aastra Web UI
Advanced Settings->Network->
Advanced Network Settings
Configuration Files aastra.cfg, <mac>.cfg
Time Server 2
(in Web UI)
Description
The secondary time server's IP address or qualified domain name. If the
time server is enabled, and the primary time server is not configured or
cannot be accessed the value for time server2 will be used to request
the time from.
Format
IP address or qualified domain name
0.0.0.0
Default Value
Range
Not Applicable
Example
time server2: 192.168.0.5
Parameter –
time server3
Aastra Web UI
Advanced Settings->Network->
Advanced Network Settings
Configuration Files aastra.cfg, <mac>.cfg
Time Server 3
(in Web UI)
Description
The tertiary time server's IP address or qualified domain name. If the
time server is enabled, and the primary and secondary time servers are
not configured or cannot be accessed the value for time server3 will be
used to request the time from.
Format
IP address or qualified domain name
0.0.0.0
Default Value
Range
Not Applicable
Example
time server3: 192.168.0.5
41-001160-00, Rev 01 Release 2.0
A-29
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
IP Phone Administrator Guide
Operational, Basic, and Advanced Parameters
Time and Date Settings
Parameter –
IP phone UI
Options->Time and Date->Time Format
time format
Configuration Files aastra.cfg, <mac>.cfg
Time Format
(in Phone UI)
Description
This parameter changes the time to 12 hour or 24 hour format. Use “0”
for the 12 hour format and “1” for the 24 hour format.
Format
Integer
0
Default Value
Range
0 (12 hr format))
1 (24 hr format)
Example
time format: 0
Parameter –
IP phone UI
Options->Time and Date->Date Format
date format
Configuration Files aastra.cfg, <mac>.cfg
Date Format
(in Phone UI)
Description
Format
This parameter allows the user to change the date to various formats.
Integer
0
Default Value
Range
0 (WWW MMM DD) (default)
1 (DD-MMM-YY)
2 (YYYY-MM-DD)
3 (DD/MM/YYYY)
4 (DD/MM/YY)
5 (DD-MM-YY)
6 (MM/DD/YY)
7 (MMM DD)
Example
date format: 7
A-30
41-001160-00, Rev 01 Release 2.0
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Configuration Parameters
Operational, Basic, and Advanced Parameters
Parameter –
IP phone UI
Options->Time and Date->Daylight Savings
dst config
Configuration Files aastra.cfg, <mac>.cfg
Daylight Savings
(in Phone UI)
Description
Format
Enables/disables the use of daylight savings time.
Integer
3
Default Value
Range
0 - OFF
1 - 30 min summertime
2 - 1 hr summertime
3 - automatic
Example
dst config: 0
Parameter –
IP phone UI
Options->Time and Date->Time Zone
time zone name
Configuration Files aastra.cfg, <mac>.cfg
Time Zone
(in Phone UI)
Description
Format
Assigns a time zone name to the time server.
Text
Default Value
Range
US-Eastern
See “Time Zone Name/Time Zone Code Table” below.
time zone name: US-Central
Example
Parameter –
IP phone UI
Options->Time and Date->Time Zone
time zone code
Configuration Files aastra.cfg, <mac>.cfg
Time Zone
(in Phone UI)
Description
Format
Assigns a time zone code to the time server.
Text
Default Value
Range
EST
See “Time Zone Name/Time Zone Code Table” below.
time zone code: CST
Example
41-001160-00, Rev 01 Release 2.0
A-31
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
IP Phone Administrator Guide
Operational, Basic, and Advanced Parameters
Time Zone Name/Time Zone Code Table
Time Zone Name
Time Zone Code
AD-Andorra
AG-Antigua
AI-Anguilla
CET
AST
AST
CET
AST
ART
BST
CET
LHS
EST
EST
EST
CST
EST
EST
CST
CST
WST
AST
AL-Tirane
AN-Curacao
AR-Buenos Aires
AS-Pago Pago
AT-Vienna
AU-Lord Howe
AU-Tasmania
AU-Melbourne
AU-Sydney
AU-Broken Hill
AU-Brisbane
AU-Lindeman
AU-Adelaide
AU-Darwin
AU-Perth
AW-Aruba
BA-Sarajevo
BB-Barbados
BE-Brussels
BG-Sofia
BM-Bermuda
BO-La Paz
BR-Noronha
BR-Belem
BR-Fortaleza
BR-Recife
BR-Araguaina
BR-Maceio
BR-Sao Paulo
BR-Cuiaba
BR-Porto Velho
BR-Boa Vista
BR-Manaus
BR-Eirunepe
BR-Rio Branco
BS-Nassau
BY-Minsk
EET
AST
CET
EET
AST
BOT
FNT
BRT
BRT
BRT
BRS
BRT
BRS
AMS
AMT
AMT
AMT
ACT
ACT
EST
EET
CST
BZ-Belize
A-32
41-001160-00, Rev 01 Release 2.0
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Configuration Parameters
Operational, Basic, and Advanced Parameters
Time Zone Name
Time Zone Code
CA-Newfoundland
CA-Atlantic
CA-Eastern
CA-Saskatchewan
CA-Central
CA-Mountain
CA-Pacific
CA-Yukon
NST
AST
EST
EST
CST
MST
PST
PST
CET
CKS
CLS
EAS
CST
COS
CST
CST
EES
CET
CH-Zurich
CK-Rarotonga
CL-Santiago
CL-Easter
CN-China
CO-Bogota
CR-Costa Rica
CU-Havana
CY-Nicosia
CZ-Prague
DE-Berlin
CET
CET
AST
AST
DK-Copenhagen
DM-Dominica
DO-Santo Domingo
EE-Tallinn
ES-Madrid
ES-Canary
EET
CET
WET
FI-Helsinki
FJ-Fiji
FK-Stanley
FO-Faeroe
FR-Paris
EET
NZT
FKS
WET
CET
GB-London
GB-Belfast
GMT
GMT
AST
GFT
CET
AST
EET
GST
CST
CST
GYT
GD-Grenada
GF-Cayenne
GI-Gibraltar
GP-Guadeloupe
GR-Athens
GS-South Georgia
GT-Guatemala
GU-Guam
GY-Guyana
41-001160-00, Rev 01 Release 2.0
A-33
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
IP Phone Administrator Guide
Operational, Basic, and Advanced Parameters
Time Zone Name
Time Zone Code
HK-Hong Kong
HN-Tegucigalpa
HR-Zagreb
HT-Port-au-Prince
HU-Budapest
HKS
CST
CET
EST
CET
IE-Dublin
IS-Reykjavik
IT-Rome
GMT
GMT
CET
JM-Jamaica
JP-Tokyo
EST
JST
KY-Cayman
EST
LC-St Lucia
LI-Vaduz
LT-Vilnius
LU-Luxembourg
LV-Riga
AST
CET
EET
CET
EET
MC-Monaco
MD-Chisinau
MK-Skopje
MQ-Martinique
MS-Montserrat
MT-Malta
MX-Mexico City
MX-Cancun
MX-Merida
MX-Monterrey
MX-Mazatlan
MX-Chihuahua
MX-Hermosillo
MX-Tijuana
CET
EET
CET
AST
AST
CET
CST
CST
CST
CST
MST
MST
MST
PST
NI-Managua
NL-Amsterdam
NO-Oslo
NR-Nauru
NU-Niue
CST
CET
CET
NRT
NUT
NZS
CHA
NZ-Auckland
NZ-Chatham
A-34
41-001160-00, Rev 01 Release 2.0
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Configuration Parameters
Operational, Basic, and Advanced Parameters
Time Zone Name
Time Zone Code
PA-Panama
PE-Lima
PL-Warsaw
PR-Puerto Rico
PT-Lisbon
PT-Madeira
PT-Azores
PY-Asuncion
EST
PES
CET
AST
WET
WET
AZO
PYS
RO-Bucharest
RU-Kaliningrad
RU-Moscow
RU-Samara
RU-Yekaterinburg
RU-Omsk
RU-Novosibirsk
RU-Krasnoyarsk
RU-Irkutsk
EET
EET
MSK
SAM
YEK
OMS
NOV
KRA
IRK
RU-Yakutsk
YAK
VLA
SAK
MAG
PET
ANA
RU-Vladivostok
RU-Sakhalin
RU-Magadan
RU-Kamchatka
RU-Anadyr
SE-Stockholm
SG-Singapore
SI-Ljubljana
SK-Bratislava
SM-San Marino
SR-Paramaribo
SV-El Salvador
CET
SGT
CET
CET
CET
SRT
CST
TR-Istanbul
TT-Port of Spain
TW-Taipei
EET
AST
CST
UA-Kiev
EET
EST
CST
MST
PST
AKS
HAS
HST
UYS
US-Eastern
US-Central
US-Mountain
US-Pacific
US-Alaska
US-Aleutian
US-Hawaii
UY-Montevideo
41-001160-00, Rev 01 Release 2.0
A-35
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
IP Phone Administrator Guide
Operational, Basic, and Advanced Parameters
Time Zone Name
Time Zone Code
VA-Vatican
CET
CET
YU-Belgrade
A-36
41-001160-00, Rev 01 Release 2.0
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Configuration Parameters
Operational, Basic, and Advanced Parameters
SIP Local Dial Plan Settings
)
Parameter –
displayName1
Aastra Web UI
Configuration Files
Basic Settings->Preferences
aastra.cfg, <mac>.cfg
Idle Display Name 1
(in Web UI)
Description
The name displayed on the idle screen rather than the user name and
phone number.
Format
Alphanumeric characters
Not Applicable
Default Value
Range
For 55i/57i/57i CT:
Up to 21 characters (width of LCD)
For 53i:
Up to 16 characters (width of LCD)
Example
displayName1: SIPphone1
Parameter –
displayName2
Aastra Web UI
Configuration Files
Basic Settings->Preferences
aastra.cfg, <mac>.cfg
Idle Display Name 2
(in Web UI)
Description
The name displayed on the idle screen rather than the user name and
phone number.
Format
Alphanumeric characters
Not Applicable
Default Value
Range
For 55i/57i/57i CT:
Up to 21 characters (width of LCD)
For 53i:
Up to 16 characters (width of LCD)
Example
displayName2: SIPphone2
41-001160-00, Rev 01 Release 2.0
A-37
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
IP Phone Administrator Guide
Operational, Basic, and Advanced Parameters
Parameter –
sip dial plan
Aastra Web UI
Configuration Files
Basic Settings->Preferences
aastra.cfg, <mac>.cfg
Local Dial Plan
(in Web UI)
Description
A dial plan describes the number and pattern of digits that a user dials to
reach a particular telephone number. The SIP local dial plan is as follows:
SymbolDescription
0, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9
Digit symbol
X
*, #, .
Match any digit symbol (wildcard)
Other keypad symbol
|
Expression inclusive OR
+
0 or more of the preceding digit symbol
or [] expression
[]
-
Symbol inclusive OR
Used only with [], represent a range of
acceptable symbols; For example, [2-8]
In the configuration files, enter the sip dial
plan value using quotes.
“,” (open/close quotes)
Note: You can configure prefix dialing by adding a prepend digit to the
dial string. For example, if you add a prepend map of
“[2-9]XXXXXXXXX,91”, the IP phone adds the digits “91” to any 10-digit
number beginning with any digit from 2 to 9 that is dialed out. Other
examples of prepend mappings are:
•
•
•
1X+#,9 (
6XXX,579 (Prepends “579” to any 4-digit string starting with “6”.)
[4-6]XXXXXX,78 (Prepends “78” to any 7-digit string starting with “4”,
“5”, or “6”.
Format
Alphanumeric characters
X+#|XX+*
Default Value
Range
Up to 127 alphanumeric characters
sip dial plan: "X+#|XXX+*"
Example
A-38
41-001160-00, Rev 01 Release 2.0
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Configuration Parameters
Operational, Basic, and Advanced Parameters
Parameter –
sip dial plan terminator
Aastra Web UI
Configuration Files
Basic Settings->Preferences
aastra.cfg, <mac>.cfg
Send Dial Plan Terminator
(in Web UI)
Description
The IP phone allows the configuration of a dial plan terminator. When
you configure the IP phone to use a dial plan terminator or timeout (such
as the pound symbol (#)) the phone waits 4 or 5 seconds after you pick
up the handset or press a key to make a call.
Format
Boolean
0
Default Value
Range
"0" - Disable
"1" - Enabled
Example
sip dial plan terminator: 1
Parameter –
sip digit timeout
Aastra Web UI
Configuration Files
Basic Settings->Preferences
aastra.cfg, <mac>.cfg
Digit Timeout
(in Web UI)
Description
Represents the time, in seconds, to configure the timeout between
consecutive key presses.
Format
Integer
Default Value
Range
4
Not Applicable
sip digit timeout: 6
Example
41-001160-00, Rev 01 Release 2.0
A-39
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
IP Phone Administrator Guide
Operational, Basic, and Advanced Parameters
SIP Basic, Global Settings
SIP Global Authentication Settings
Parameter –
sip screen name
IP Phone UI
Aastra Web UI
Options->SIP Settings
Advanced Settings->Global SIP->
Basic SIP Settings
Screen Name
Configuration Files aastra.cfg, <mac>.cfg
(in Web UI)
Description
Used to display text on the screen of the phone. You may want to set
this parameter to display the phone user's name.
Format
Text
Default Value
Range
Not Applicable
Up to 20 alphanumeric characters
sip screen name: Joe Smith
Example
Parameter –
IP Phone UI
Options->SIP Settings
sip user name
Aastra Web UI
Advanced Settings->Global SIP->
Basic SIP Settings
Phone Number
Configuration Files aastra.cfg, <mac>.cfg
(in Web UI)
Description
Used in the name field of the SIP URI for the IP phone and for registering
the IP phone at the registrar.
Format
Text
Default Value
Range
Not Applicable
Up to 20 alphanumeric characters
sip user name: 1010
Example
A-40
41-001160-00, Rev 01 Release 2.0
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Configuration Parameters
Operational, Basic, and Advanced Parameters
Parameter –
IP Phone UI
Options->SIP Settings
sip display name
Aastra Web UI
Advanced Settings->Global SIP->
Basic SIP Settings
Caller ID
Configuration Files aastra.cfg, <mac>.cfg
(in Web UI)
Description
Used in the display name field of the From SIP header field. Some IP
PBX systems use this as the caller’s ID and some may overwrite this
with the string that is set at the PBX system.
Format
Text
Default Value
Range
Not Applicable
Up to 20 alphanumeric characters
sip display name: Joe Smith
Example
Parameter –
IP Phone UI
Options->SIP Settings
sip auth name
Aastra Web UI
Advanced Settings->Global SIP->
Basic SIP Settings
Authentication Name
Configuration Files aastra.cfg, <mac>.cfg
(in Web UI)
Description
Used in the username field of the Authorization header field of the SIP
REGISTER request.
Format
Text
Default Value
Range
Not Applicable
Up to 20 alphanumeric characters
sip auth name: 5553456
Example
Parameter –
IP Phone UI
Options->SIP Settings
sip password
Aastra Web UI
Advanced Settings->Global SIP->
Basic SIP Settings
Password
Configuration Files aastra.cfg, <mac>.cfg
(in Web UI)
Description
Format
The password that will be used to register at the registrar.
Text
Default Value
Range
Not Applicable
Up to 20 alphanumeric characters
sip password: 12345
Example
41-001160-00, Rev 01 Release 2.0
A-41
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
IP Phone Administrator Guide
Operational, Basic, and Advanced Parameters
Parameter –
sip bla number
Aastra Web UI
Advanced Settings->Global SIP->
Basic SIP Settings
Configuration Files aastra.cfg, <mac>.cfg
BLA Number
(in Web UI)
Description
Allows you to assign a phone number that is shared across all IP
phones.
Format
Integer
Default Value
Range
Not Applicable
Not Applicable
sip bla number: 1010
Example
Parameter –
sip mode
Aastra Web UI
Advanced Settings->Global SIP->
Basic SIP Settings
Configuration Files aastra.cfg, <mac>.cfg
Line mode
(in Web UI)
Description
Allows you to configure the mode of the line. Applicable values are:
•
•
Generic - Normal line
BroadSoft SCA - Shared Call/Line Appearances (SCA) line for
BroadWorks network (call activity can go to more than one phone)
Nortel - Conference line for Nortel Networks (private - all call activity
goes to one phone)
•
•
BLA - Bridged Line Appearance (BLA) line.
Format
Integer
0
Default Value
Range
Valid values are:
0 - Generic
1 - BroadSoft SCA
2 - Nortel
3 - BLA
Example
sip mode: 2
A-42
41-001160-00, Rev 01 Release 2.0
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Configuration Parameters
Operational, Basic, and Advanced Parameters
SIP Global Network Settings.
Parameter –
sip proxy ip
IP Phone UI
Aastra Web UI
Options->SIP Settings
Advanced Settings->Global SIP->
Basic SIP Settings
Proxy Server
Configuration Files
aastra.cfg, <mac>.cfg
(in Web UI)
Description
The IP address of the SIP proxy server for which the IP phone uses to
send all SIP requests.
A SIP proxy is a server that initiates and forwards requests generated by
the IP phone to the targeted user.
Format
IP address or fully qualified Domain Name
0.0.0.0
Default Value
Range
Not applicable
Example
sip proxy ip: 192.168.0.101
Parameter –
sip proxy port
IP Phone UI
Aastra Web UI
Options->SIP Settings
Advanced Settings->Global SIP->
Basic SIP Settings
Proxy Port
Configuration Files
aastra.cfg, <mac>.cfg
(in Web UI)
Description
Format
The proxy server's port number.
Integer
Default Value
Range
0
Not Applicable
Example
sip proxy port: 5060
41-001160-00, Rev 01 Release 2.0
A-43
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
IP Phone Administrator Guide
Operational, Basic, and Advanced Parameters
Parameter –
sip backup proxy ip
Aastra Web UI
Advanced Settings->Global SIP->
Basic SIP Network Settings
aastra.cfg, <mac>.cfg
Configuration Files
Backup Proxy Server
(in Web UI)
Description
The IP address of the backup SIP proxy server for which the IP phone
uses when the primary SIP proxy is unavailable.
Format
IP address or fully qualified Domain Name
0.0.0.0
Default Value
Range
Not Applicable
Example
sip backup proxy ip: 192.168.0.102
Parameter –
sip backup proxy port
Aastra Web UI
Advanced Settings->Global SIP->
Basic SIP Network Settings
aastra.cfg, <mac>.cfg
Configuration Files
Backup Proxy Port
(in Web UI)
Description
Format
The backup proxy’s port number.
Integer
Default Value
Range
0
Not Applicable
Example
sip backup proxy port: 5060
Parameter –
sip outbound proxy
Aastra Web UI
Advanced Settings->Global SIP->
Advanced SIP Settings
Configuration Files aastra.cfg, <mac>.cfg
outbound proxy server
(in Web UI)
Description
This is the address of the outbound proxy server. All SIP messages
originating from the phone are sent to this server. For example, if you
have a Session Border Controller in your network, then you would
normally set its address here.
Format
IP Address or fully qualified Domain Name
0.0.0.0
Default Value
Range
Not Applicable
Example
sip outbound proxy: 10.42.23.13
A-44
41-001160-00, Rev 01 Release 2.0
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Configuration Parameters
Operational, Basic, and Advanced Parameters
Parameter –
sip outbound proxy port
Aastra Web UI
Advanced Settings->Global SIP->
Advanced SIP Settings
Configuration Files aastra.cfg, <mac>.cfg
outbound proxy port
(in Web UI)
Description
The proxy port on the proxy server to which the IP phone sends all SIP
messages.
Format
Integer
Default Value
Range
0
Not Applicable
Example
sip outbound proxy port: 5060
Parameter –
sip registrar ip
IP Phone UI
Aastra Web UI
Options->SIP Settings
Advanced Settings->Global SIP->
Basic SIP Settings
Registrar Server
Configuration Files
aastra.cfg, <mac>.cfg
(in Web UI)
Description
The address of the registrar for which the IP phone uses to send
REGISTER requests.
A SIP registrar is a server that maintains the location information of the
IP phone.
A global value of 0.0.0.0 disables registration. However, the phone is still
active and you can dial using username@ip address of the phone.
If the Registrar IP address is set to 0.0.0.0 for a per-line basis (i.e, line 1,
line 2, etc.), then the register request is not sent, the "No Service"
message does not display, and the message waiting indicator (MWI)
does not come on.
Format
IP address or fully qualified Domain Name
0.0.0.0
Default Value
Range
Not Applicable
Example
sip registrar ip: 192.168.0.101
41-001160-00, Rev 01 Release 2.0
A-45
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
IP Phone Administrator Guide
Operational, Basic, and Advanced Parameters
Parameter –
sip registrar port
IP Phone UI
Aastra Web UI
Options->SIP Settings
Advanced Settings->Global SIP->
Basic SIP Settings
Registrar Port
(in Web UI)
Configuration Files
aastra.cfg, <mac>.cfg
Description
Format
The registrar's port number.
Integer
Default Value
Range
0
Not Applicable
Example
sip registrar port: 5060
Parameter –
Aastra Web UI
Advanced Settings->Global SIP->
sip backup registrar ip
Basic SIP Network Settings
aastra.cfg, <mac>.cfg
Configuration Files
Backup Registrar Server
(in Web UI)
Description
The address of the backup registrar (typically, the backup SIP proxy) for
which the IP phone uses to send REGISTER requests if the primary
registrar is unavailable.
A global value of 0.0.0.0 disables backup registration. However, the
phone is still active and you can dial using username@ip address of the
phone.
If the backup registrar IP address is set to 0.0.0.0 for a per-line basis (i.e,
line 1, line 2, etc.), then the backup register request is not sent, the "No
Service" message does not display, and the message waiting indicator
(MWI) does not come on.
Format
IP address or fully qualified Domain Name
0.0.0.0
Default Value
Range
Not Applicable
Example
sip backup registrar ip: 192.168.0.102
A-46
41-001160-00, Rev 01 Release 2.0
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Configuration Parameters
Operational, Basic, and Advanced Parameters
Parameter –
sip backup registrar port
Aastra Web UI
Advanced Settings->Global SIP->
Basic SIP Network Settings
aastra.cfg, <mac>.cfg
Configuration Files
Backup Registrar Port
(in Web UI)
Description
Format
The backup registrar's (typically the backup SIP proxy) port number.
Integer
Default Value
Range
0
Not Applicable
Example
sip backup registrar port: 5060
Parameter –
sip registration period
Aastra Web UI
Advanced Settings->Global SIP->
Basic SIP Network Settings
aastra.cfg, <mac>.cfg
Configuration Files
Registration Period
(in Web UI)
Description
Format
The requested registration period, in seconds, from the registrar.
Integer
Default Value
Range
0
0 to 2147483647
Example
sip registration period: 3600
41-001160-00, Rev 01 Release 2.0
A-47
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
IP Phone Administrator Guide
Operational, Basic, and Advanced Parameters
SIP Basic, Per-Line Settings
The following parameters are SIP per-line settings. The value of "N" is 1 - 9 for
53i, 55i, 57i, and 57i CT.
SIP Per-Line Authentication Settings
Parameter –
Aastra Web UI
Advanced Settings->Line 1 thru 9
sip lineN screen name
Configuration Files aastra.cfg, <mac>.cfg
Screen Name
(in Web UI)
Description
Used to display text on the screen of the phone. You may want to set
this parameter to display the phone user's name.
Format
Text
Default Value
Range
Not Applicable
Up to 20 alphanumeric characters
sip line1 screen name: Joe Smith
Example
Parameter –
Aastra Web UI
Advanced Settings->Line 1 thru 9
sip lineN user name
Configuration Files aastra.cfg, <mac>.cfg
Phone Number
(in Web UI)
Description
Used in the name field of the SIP URI for the IP phone and for registering
the IP phone at the registrar.
When configuring per-line BLA on an ININ server, the username must be
incremented as shown in the example for the "sip lineN bla number"
parameter on page A-51.
Format
Text
Default Value
Range
Not Applicable
Up to 20 alphanumeric characters
sip line1 user name: 1010
Example
A-48
41-001160-00, Rev 01 Release 2.0
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Configuration Parameters
Operational, Basic, and Advanced Parameters
Parameter –
Aastra Web UI
Advanced Settings->Line 1 thru 9
sip lineN display name
Configuration Files aastra.cfg, <mac>.cfg
Caller ID
(in Web UI)
Description
Used in the display name field of the From SIP header field. Some IP
PBX systems use this as the caller’s ID and some may overwrite this
with the string that is set at the PBX system.
Format
Text
Default Value
Range
Not Applicable
Up to 20 alphanumeric characters
sip line1 display name: Joe Smith
Example
Parameter –
Aastra Web UI
Advanced Settings->Line 1 thru 9
sip lineN auth name
Configuration Files aastra.cfg, <mac>.cfg
Authentication Name
(in Web UI)
Description
Used in the username field of the Authorization header field of the SIP
REGISTER request.
Format
Text
Default Value
Range
Not Applicable
Up to 20 alphanumeric characters
sip line1 auth name: 5553456
Example
41-001160-00, Rev 01 Release 2.0
A-49
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
IP Phone Administrator Guide
Operational, Basic, and Advanced Parameters
Parameter –
Aastra Web UI
Advanced Settings->Line 1 thru 9
sip lineN password
Configuration Files aastra.cfg, <mac>.cfg
Password
(in Web UI)
Description
Format
The password that will be used to register at the registrar.
Text
Default Value
Range
Not Applicable
Up to 20 alphanumeric characters
sip line1 password: 12345
Example
A-50
41-001160-00, Rev 01 Release 2.0
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Configuration Parameters
Operational, Basic, and Advanced Parameters
Parameter –
sip lineN bla number
Aastra Web UI
Configuration Files
Advanced Settings->Line 1 thru 9
aastra.cfg, <mac>.cfg
BLA Number
(in Web UI)
Description
Allows you to assign a phone number that is shared on specific lines on
the IP phone.
For Sylantro Server:
When configuring the BLA feature on a Sylantro server, the value set for
the sip lineN bla number parameter shall be the same value set for the
sip lineN user name parameter for all the phones in the group. For
example, if sip lineN user name is 1010, you would configure BLA on a
per-line basis for the Sylantro server as follows:
sip line1 user name: 1010(# for all the phones)
sip line1 bla number: 1010
For ININ Server:
When configuring the BLA feature on an ININ server, the value set for the
sip lineN bla number parameter shall be the same value set for the sip
lineN user name parameter without the incremented digit added to the
phone #. For example, if the sip lineN user name for the first phone is
10101, and the sip lineN user name for the second phone is 10102, etc.
you would configure BLA on a per-line basis for the ININ server as
follows:
sip line1 user name: 10101(# for phone 1 with)
sip line1 bla number: 1010appearance of phone 3)
sip line1 user name: 10102(# for phone 2 with)
sip line1 bla number: 1010appearance of phone 3)
sip line1 user name: 1010(# for phone 3)
sip line1 bla number: 1010
Note: The original phone number which has the bridged line appearance
on other phones, will have the "sip lineN user name" parameter the same
as the "sip lineN bla number" (1010 in the above example on Phone 3).
Format
Integer
Default Value
Range
Not Applicable
Not Applicable
Example
Sylantro Server:
sip line1 bla number: 1010
ININ Server:
sip line 1 bla number: 1010
41-001160-00, Rev 01 Release 2.0
A-51
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
IP Phone Administrator Guide
Operational, Basic, and Advanced Parameters
Parameter –
sip lineN mode
Aastra Web UI
Configuration Files
Advanced Settings->Line 1 thru 9
aastra.cfg, <mac>.cfg
Line Mode
(in Web UI)
Description
Allows you to configure the mode of the line. Applicable values are:
•
•
Generic - Normal line
BroadSoft SCA - Shared Call/Line Appearances (SCA) line for
BroadWorks network (call activity can go to more than one phone)
Nortel - Conference line for Nortel Networks (private - all call activity
goes to one phone)
•
•
•
BLA - Bridged Line Appearance (BLA) line.
If the softkeys on the 57i/57i CT or the programmable keys on the 53i
are set as line keys, and you configure that line key for BLA, the key
is configured to use BLA.
Format
Integer
0
Default Value
Range
Valid values are:
0 - Generic
1 - BroadSoft SCA
2 - Nortel
3 - BLA
Example
sip line1 mode: 2
A-52
41-001160-00, Rev 01 Release 2.0
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Configuration Parameters
Operational, Basic, and Advanced Parameters
SIP Per-Line Network Settings.
Parameter –
sip lineN proxy ip
Aastra Web UI
Configuration Files
Advanced Settings->Line 1 thru 9
aastra.cfg, <mac>.cfg
Proxy Server
(in Web UI)
Description
The IP address of the SIP proxy server for which the IP phone uses to
send all SIP requests.
A SIP proxy is a server that initiates and forwards requests generated by
the IP phone to the targeted user.
Format
IP address or fully qualified Domain Name
0.0.0.0
Default Value
Range
Not applicable
Example
sip line1 proxy ip: 192.168.0.101
Parameter –
sip lineN proxy port
Aastra Web UI
Configuration Files
Advanced Settings->Line 1 thru 9
aastra.cfg, <mac>.cfg
Proxy Port
(in Web UI)
Description
Format
The proxy server's port number
Integer
Default Value
Range
0
Not Applicable
Example
sip line1 proxy port: 5060
41-001160-00, Rev 01 Release 2.0
A-53
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
IP Phone Administrator Guide
Operational, Basic, and Advanced Parameters
Parameter –
sip linex backup proxy ip
Aastra Web UI
Configuration Files
Advanced Settings->Line 1 thru 9
aastra.cfg, <mac>.cfg
Backup Proxy Server
(in Web UI)
Description
The IP address of the backup SIP proxy server for which the IP phone
uses when the primary SIP proxy is unavailable.
Format
IP address or fully qualified Domain Name
0.0.0.0
Default Value
Range
Not Applicable
Example
sip line1 backup proxy ip: 192.168.0.102
Parameter –
sip linex backup proxy port
Aastra Web UI
Configuration Files
Advanced Settings->Line 1 thru 9
aastra.cfg, <mac>.cfg
Backup Proxy Port
(in Web UI)
Description
Format
The backup proxy’s port number.
Integer
Default Value
Range
0
Not Applicable
Example
sip line1 backup proxy port: 5060
Parameter –
sip lineN outbound proxy
Aastra Web UI
Configuration Files
Advanced Settings->Line 1 thru 9
aastra.cfg, <mac>.cfg
Outbound Proxy Server
(in Web UI)
Description
This is the address of the outbound proxy server. All SIP messages
originating from the phone are sent to this server. For example, if you
have a Session Border Controller in your network, then you would
normally set its address here.
Format
IP Address or fully qualified Domain Name
0.0.0.0
Default Value
Range
Not Applicable
Example
sip outbound proxy: 10.42.23.13
A-54
41-001160-00, Rev 01 Release 2.0
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Configuration Parameters
Operational, Basic, and Advanced Parameters
Parameter –
sip lineN outbound proxy port
Aastra Web UI
Configuration Files
Advanced Settings->Line 1 thru 9
aastra.cfg, <mac>.cfg
Outbound Proxy Port
(in Web UI)
Description
The proxy port on the proxy server to which the IP phone sends all SIP
messages.
Format
Integer
Default Value
Range
0
Not Applicable
Example
sip outbound proxy port: 5060
Parameter –
sip lineN registrar ip
Aastra Web UI
Configuration Files
Advanced Settings->Line 1 thru 9
aastra.cfg, <mac>.cfg
Registrar Server
(in Web UI)
Description
The address of the registrar for which the IP phone uses to send
REGISTER requests.
A SIP registrar is a server that maintains the location information of the
IP phone.
A global value of 0.0.0.0 disables registration. However, the phone is still
active and you can dial using username@ip address of the phone.
If the Registrar IP address is set to 0.0.0.0 for a per-line basis (i.e, line 1,
line 2, etc.), then the register request is not sent, the "No Service"
message does not display, and the message waiting indicator (MWI)
does not come on.
Format
IP address or fully qualified Domain Name
0.0.0.0
Default Value
Range
Not Applicable
Example
sip line1 registrar ip: 192.168.0.101
41-001160-00, Rev 01 Release 2.0
A-55
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
IP Phone Administrator Guide
Operational, Basic, and Advanced Parameters
Parameter –
sip lineN registrar port
Aastra Web UI
Configuration Files
Advanced Settings->Line 1 thru 9
aastra.cfg, <mac>.cfg
Registrar Port
(in Web UI)
Description
Format
The registrar's port number
Integer
Default Value
Range
0
Not Applicable
Example
sip line1 registrar port: 5060
Parameter –
Aastra Web UI
Advanced Settings->LineN->
sip linex backup registrar ip
Basic SIP Network Settings
aastra.cfg, <mac>.cfg
Configuration Files
Backup Registrar Server
(in Web UI)
Description
The address of the backup registrar (typically, the backup SIP proxy) for
which the IP phone uses to send REGISTER requests if the primary
registrar is unavailable.
A global value of 0.0.0.0 disables backup registration. However, the
phone is still active and you can dial using username@ip address of the
phone.
If the backup registrar IP address is set to 0.0.0.0 for a per-line basis (i.e,
line 1, line 2, etc.), then the backup register request is not sent, the "No
Service" message does not display, and the message waiting indicator
(MWI) does not come on.
Format
IP address or fully qualified Domain Name
0.0.0.0
Default Value
Range
Not Applicable
Example
sip line1 backup registrar ip: 192.168.0.102
A-56
41-001160-00, Rev 01 Release 2.0
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Configuration Parameters
Operational, Basic, and Advanced Parameters
Parameter –
sip linex backup registrar port
Aastra Web UI
Advanced Settings->LineN->
Basic SIP Network Settings
aastra.cfg, <mac>.cfg
Configuration Files
Backup Registrar Port
(in Web UI)
Description
Format
The backup registrar's (typically the backup SIP proxy) port number.
Integer
Default Value
Range
0
Not Applicable
Example
sip line1 backup registrar port: 5060
Parameter –
sip lineN registration period
Aastra Web UI
Configuration Files
Advanced Settings->Line 1 thru 9
aastra.cfg, <mac>.cfg
Registration Period
(in Web UI)
Description
Format
The requested registration period, in seconds, from the registrar.
Integer
Default Value
Range
0
0 to 2147483647
Example
sip line1 registration period: 3600
41-001160-00, Rev 01 Release 2.0
A-57
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
IP Phone Administrator Guide
Operational, Basic, and Advanced Parameters
Advanced SIP Settings
Parameter –
sip explicit mwi subscription
Aastra Web UI
Advanced Settings->Global SIP->
Advanced SIP Settings
Configuration Files aastra.cfg, <mac>.cfg
Explicit MWI Subscription
(in Web UI)
Description
If the IP phone has a message waiting subscription with the Service
Provider, a Message Waiting Indicator (MWI) (LED or display icon) tells
the user there is a message on the IP Phone. You can enable and
disable MWI by setting this parameter to the following:
"0" to disable
"1" to enable
Format
Boolean
0
Default Value
Range
0 (disable)
1 (enable)
Example
sip explicit mwi subscription: 1
Parameter –
sip explicit mwi subscription
period
Aastra Web UI
Advanced Settings->Global SIP->
Advanced SIP Settings
Configuration Files aastra.cfg, <mac>.cfg
Explicit MWI Timeout
(in Web UI)
Description
The requested duration, in seconds, before the MWI subscription times
out. The phone re-subscribes to MWI before the subscription period
ends.
Format
Integer
Default Value
Range
86400
30 - 214748364
sip explicit mwi timeout: 30
Example
A-58
41-001160-00, Rev 01 Release 2.0
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Configuration Parameters
Operational, Basic, and Advanced Parameters
Parameter –
sip session timer
Aastra Web UI
Advanced Settings->Global SIP->
Advanced SIP Settings
Configuration Files aastra.cfg, <mac>.cfg
Session Timer
(in Web UI)
Description
The time, in seconds, that the IP phone uses to send periodic
re-INVITE requests to keep a session alive. The proxy uses these
re-INVITE requests to maintain the status' of the connected sessions.
See RFC4028 for details.
Format
Integer
Default Value
Range
0
Not Applicable
Example
sip session timer: 30
Parameter –
sip T1 timer
Aastra Web UI
Advanced Settings->Global SIP->
Advanced SIP Settings
Configuration Files aastra.cfg, <mac>.cfg
T1 Timer
(in Web UI)
Description
This timer is a SIP transaction layer timer defined in RFC 3261.
Timer 1 is an estimate, in milliseconds, of the round-trip time (RTT).
Format
Integer
Default Value
Range
500
Not Applicable
sip T1 timer: 600
Example
41-001160-00, Rev 01 Release 2.0
A-59
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
IP Phone Administrator Guide
Operational, Basic, and Advanced Parameters
Parameter –
sip T2 timer
Aastra Web UI
Advanced Settings->Global SIP->
Advanced SIP Settings
Configuration Files aastra.cfg, <mac>.cfg
T2 Timer
(in Web UI)
Description
This timer is a SIP transaction layer timer defined in RFC 3261.
Timer 2 represents the amount of time, in milliseconds, a non-INVITE
server transaction takes to respond to a request.
Format
Integer
Default Value
Range
0
Not Applicable
sip T2 timer: 8
Example
Parameter –
sip transaction timer
Aastra Web UI
Advanced Settings->Global SIP->
Advanced SIP Settings
Configuration Files aastra.cfg, <mac>.cfg
Transaction Timer
(in Web UI)
Description
The amount of time, in milliseconds that the phone allows the callserver
(registrar/proxy) to respond to SIP messages that it sends. If the phone
does not receive a response in the amount of time desginated for this
parameter, the phone assumes the message has timed out.
Format
Integer
Default Value
Range
4000
4000 to 64000
sip transaction timer: 6000
Example
A-60
41-001160-00, Rev 01 Release 2.0
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Configuration Parameters
Operational, Basic, and Advanced Parameters
Parameter –
sip transport protocol
Aastra Web UI
Advanced Settings->Global SIP->
Advanced SIP Settings
Configuration Files aastra.cfg, <mac>.cfg
Transport Protocol
(in Web UI)
Description
The protocol that the RTP port on the IP phone uses to send out RTP
packets.
Format
Boolean
1 (UDP)
Default Value
Range
Valid values are:
0 - Both
1 - UDP
2 - TCP
Example
sip transport protocol: 2
Parameter –
sip registration retry timer
Aastra Web UI
Advanced Settings->Global SIP->
Advanced SIP Settings
Configuration Files aastra.cfg, <mac>.cfg
Registration Failed Retry
Timer
(in Web UI)
Description
Specifies the time, in seconds, that the phone waits between registration
attempts when a registration is rejected by the registrar.
Format
Integer
Default Value
Range
1800 (30 minutes)
30 to 1800
Example
sip registration retry timer: 30
41-001160-00, Rev 01 Release 2.0
A-61
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
IP Phone Administrator Guide
Operational, Basic, and Advanced Parameters
Parameter –
sip registration timeout retry
timer
Aastra Web UI
Advanced Settings->Global SIP->
Advanced SIP Settings
Configuration Files aastra.cfg, <mac>.cfg
Registration Timeout Retry
Timer
(in Web UI)
Description
Specifies the length of time, in seconds, that the phone waits until it
re-attempts to register after a REGISTER message times out.
If this parameter is set lower than 30 seconds, the phone uses a
minimum timer of 30 seconds.
Format
Integer
Default Value
Range
120
30 to 214748364
Example
sip registration timeout retry timer: 150
Parameter –
sip registration renewal timer
Aastra Web UI
Advanced Settings->Global SIP->
Advanced SIP Settings
Configuration Files aastra.cfg, <mac>.cfg
Registration Renewal Timer
(in Web UI)
Description
The length of time, in seconds, prior to expiration, that the phone renews
registrations.
For example, if the value is set to 20, then 20 seconds before the
registration is due to expire, a new REGISTER message is sent to the
registrar to renew the registration.
Format
Integer
Default Value
Range
15
0 to 214748364
The value set for this parameter should be between 0 and the value set
for the registration period.
Example
sip registration renewal timer: 10
A-62
41-001160-00, Rev 01 Release 2.0
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Configuration Parameters
Operational, Basic, and Advanced Parameters
RTP, Codec, DTMF Global Settings
Parameter –
Aastra Web UI
Advanced Settings->Global SIP->RTP Settings
sip use basic codecs
Configuration Files aastra.cfg, <mac>.cfg
Basic Codecs
(in Web UI)
Description
Enables or disables basic codecs. Enabling this parameter allows the IP
phone to use the basic Codecs when sending/receiving RTP packets.
Format
Boolean
0
Default Value
Range
0 - Disable
1 - Enable
Example
sip use basic codecs: 1
41-001160-00, Rev 01 Release 2.0
A-63
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
IP Phone Administrator Guide
Operational, Basic, and Advanced Parameters
Parameter –
Aastra Web UI
Advanced Settings->Global SIP->RTP Settings
sip out-of-band dtmf
Configuration Files aastra.cfg, <mac>.cfg
Force RFC2833 Out-of-Band
DTMF
(in Web UI)
Description
Enables or disables out-of-band DTMF. Enabling this parameter forces
the IP phone to use out-of-band DTMF according to RFC2833.
Format
Boolean
1
Default Value
Range
0 - Disable
1 - Enable
Example
sip out-of-band dtmf: 0
Parameter –
Aastra Web UI
Advanced Settings->Global SIP->RTP Settings
sip customized codec
Configuration Files aastra.cfg, <mac>.cfg
Customized Codec Preference
List
(in Web UI)
Description
Specifies a customized Codec preference list which allows you to use
the preferred Codecs for this IP phone.
Format
Comma-separated list of semicolon-separated values
Not Applicable
Default Value
Range
Valid values for the syntax are:
payload
0 for G.711 m-Law
8 for G.711 a-Law
18 for G.729a
ptime (in milliseconds)
5, 10, 15, 20........90
on, off
silsupp
Example
sip customized codec:
payload=8;ptime=10;silsupp=on,payload=0;ptime=10;
silsupp=off
A-64
41-001160-00, Rev 01 Release 2.0
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Configuration Parameters
Operational, Basic, and Advanced Parameters
Parameter –
Aastra Web UI
Advanced Settings->Global SIP->RTP Settings
sip dtmf method
Configuration Files aastra.cfg, <mac>.cfg
DTMF Method
(in Web UI)
Description
Sets the Dual-tone multifrequency (DTMF) method to use on the IP
phone.
Format
Boolean
0 (RTP)
Default Value
Range
0 (RTP)
1 (SIP INFO)
2 (BOTH)
Example
sip dtmf method: 1
DTMF Per-Line Settings
Parameter –
Aastra Web UI
Advanced Settings->Global SIP->RTP Settings
sip lineN dtmf method
Configuration Files aastra.cfg, <mac>.cfg
DTMF Method
(in Web UI)
Description
Sets the Dual-tone multifrequency (DTMF) method to use on the IP
phone for a specific line.
Format
Integer
Default Value
Range
0 (RTP)
0 (RTP)
1 (SIP INFO)
2 (BOTH)
Example
sip line1 dtmf method: 1
41-001160-00, Rev 01 Release 2.0
A-65
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
IP Phone Administrator Guide
Operational, Basic, and Advanced Parameters
Silence Suppression Settings
Parameter –
Aastra Web UI
Advanced Settings->Global SIP->RTP Settings
sip silence suppression
Configuration Files aastra.cfg, <mac>.cfg
Silence Suppression
(in Web UI)
Description
Silence suppression is enabled by default on the IP phones. The phone
negotiates whether or not to use silence suppression. Disabling this
feature forces the phone to ignore any negotiated value.
Format
Boolean
Default Value
Range
1 (enabled)
0 (disabled)
1 (enabled)
Example
sip silence suppression: 0
A-66
41-001160-00, Rev 01 Release 2.0
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Configuration Parameters
Operational, Basic, and Advanced Parameters
Voicemail Settings
Parameter –
Configuration Files aastra.cfg, <mac>.cfg
sip lineN vmail
Note: The value of "N" is 1 - 9
for 53i, 55i, 57i, 57i CT.
Description
Use this parameter in the <mac>.cfg file to configure the phone to dial a
specific number to access an existing voicemail account on a Service
Provider’s server. The user then follows the voicemail instructions for
listening to voicemails.
Note: The phone must have a registered voicemail account from a
server for this feature to be enabled.
When no registered voicemail accounts are registered to the phone, the
display shows "List Empty".
The phone displays up to 99 voicemails for an account even if the
number of voicemails exceeds the limit.
Registered account numbers/URIs that exceed the length of the screen,
either with or without the voicemail icon and the message count, are
truncated with an ellipse character at the end of the number/URI string.
Format
Integer
Default Value
Range
Not Applicable
0 to 99
Example
sip line1 vmail: *97
Note: In the above example, the user would dial *97 to access the
voicemail account.
41-001160-00, Rev 01 Release 2.0
A-67
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
IP Phone Administrator Guide
Operational, Basic, and Advanced Parameters
Directory Settings
Parameter –
directory 1
Aastra Web UI
Configuration Files
Operation->Directory
aastra.cfg, <mac>.cfg
Directory List
(in Web UI)
Description
The name of a directory list that you can download from the configuration
server.
Format
Alphanumeric characters
Not Applicable
Default Value
Range
Not Applicable
Example
directory 1: companylist.csv
Parameter –
directory 2
Aastra Web UI
Configuration Files
Operation->Directory
aastra.cfg, <mac>.cfg
Directory List
(in Web UI)
Description
The name of a directory list that you can download from the configuration
server.
Format
Alphanumeric characters
Not Applicable
Default Value
Range
Not Applicable
Example
directory 2: personallist.csv
Parameter –
Configuration Files
aastra.cfg, <mac>.cfg
directory disabled
Description
Enables or disables the Directory on the IP phone.
If this parameter is set to 0, users can access the Directory List via the IP
phone UI. If this parameter is set to 1, the Directory List does not display
on the IP phone and the Directory key is disabled. On the 57i and 57i CT
the "Directory" option is also removed from the "Services" menu.
Format
Boolean
Default Value
Range
0 (false)
0 (false), 1 (true)
directory disabled: 1
Example
A-68
41-001160-00, Rev 01 Release 2.0
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Configuration Parameters
Operational, Basic, and Advanced Parameters
Callers List Settings
Parameter –
Configuration Files
aastra.cfg, <mac>.cfg
callers list disabled
Description
Enables or disables the Callers List.
If this parameter is set to 0, the Callers List can be accessed by all users.
If this parameter is set to 1, the IP phone does not save any caller
information to the Caller List. For 57i and 57i CT phones, the "Caller List"
option on the IP phone is removed from the Services menu, and the Caller
List key is ignored if pressed by the user
Format
Boolean
Default Value
Range
0 (false)
0 (false), 1 (true)
callers list disabled: 1
Example
Call Forward Settings
Parameter –
Configuration Files
aastra.cfg, <mac>.cfg
call forward disabled
Description
Enables or disables the ability to configure Call Forwarding. If this
parameter is set to 0, a user and administrator can configure Call
Forwarding via the Aastra Web UI and the IP Phone UI using the "Call
Forward" options. If this parameter is set to 1, all "Call Forward" options
are removed from the Aastra Web UI and the IP Phone UI, preventing the
ability to configure Call Forwarding.
Format
Boolean
Default Value
Range
0 (false)
0 (false), 1 (true)
callers list disabled: 1
Example
41-001160-00, Rev 01 Release 2.0
A-69
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
IP Phone Administrator Guide
Operational, Basic, and Advanced Parameters
Missed Calls Indicator Settings
Parameter –
Configuration Files
aastra.cfg, <mac>.cfg
missed calls indicator
disabled
Description
Enables or disables the Missed Calls Indicator. If the "missed calls
indicator disabled" parame.ter is set to 0, the indicator increments as
unanswered calls come into the IP phone. If the "missed calls indicator
disabled" parameter is set to 1, the indicator is disabled and will NOT
increment as unanswered calls come into the IP phone.
Format
Boolean
Default Value
Range
0 (false)
0 (false), 1 (true)
missed calls indicator disabled: 1
Example
A-70
41-001160-00, Rev 01 Release 2.0
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Configuration Parameters
Operational, Basic, and Advanced Parameters
XML Settings
Parameter –
xml application URI
Aastra Web UI
Configuration Files
Operation->Softkeys and XML->Services
aastra.cfg, <mac>.cfg
XML Application URI
(in Web UI)
Description
Format
This is the XML application you are loading into the IP phone configuration.
HTTP server path or fully qualified Domain Name
Not Applicable
Default Value
Range
Not Applicable
Example
xml application URI: http://172.16.96.63/aastra/internet.php
Parameter –
xml application title
Aastra Web UI
Configuration Files
Operation->Softkeys and XML->Services
aastra.cfg, <mac>.cfg
XML Application Title
(in Web UI)
Description
This parameter allows you to rename the XML application in the IP phone
UI (Services->4. Custom Feature). By default, when you load an XML
application to the IP phone, the XML application title is called "Custom
Feature". The "xml application title" parameter allows you to change that
title.
For example, if you are loading a traffic report XML application, you could
change this parameter title to "Traffic Reports", and that title will display in
the IP phone UI as Services->4. Traffic Reports.
Format
Alphanumeric characters
Not Applicable
Default Value
Range
Not Applicable
Example
xml application title: Traffic Reports
41-001160-00, Rev 01 Release 2.0
A-71
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
IP Phone Administrator Guide
Operational, Basic, and Advanced Parameters
Parameter –
xml application post list
Aastra Web UI
Configuration Files
Advanced Settings->Configuration Server
aastra.cfg, <mac>.cfg
XML Push Server List
(Approved IP Addresses)
(in Web UI)
Description
Format
The HTTP server that is pushing XML applications to the IP phone.
IP address in dotted decimal format and/or Domain name address
Not Applicable
Default Value
Range
Not Applicable
Example
xml application post list: 10.50.10.53,
dhcp10-53.ana.aastra.com
Parameter –
Aastra Web UI
Basic Settings->Preferences
xml beep notification
Configuration Files aastra.cfg, <mac>.cfg
XML Beep Support
(in Web UI)
Description
Enables or disables a BEEP notification on the phone when a status
message object (AastraIPPhoneStatus) containing a “beep” attribute
arrives to the phone.
Changes to this parameter are applied immediately.
Format
Boolean
1 (ON)
Default Value
Range
0 (OFF)No beep is audible even if the beep attribute is present in
the XML object.
1 (ON)The phone beeps when an XML object with the “beep”
attribute arrives to the phone.
Example
xml beep notification: 0
A-72
41-001160-00, Rev 01 Release 2.0
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Configuration Parameters
Operational, Basic, and Advanced Parameters
Parameter –
Aastra Web UI
Basic Settings->Preferences
xml status scroll delay
Configuration Files aastra.cfg, <mac>.cfg
Status Scroll Delay (seconds)
(in Web UI)
Description
Specifies the length of time, in seconds, that each XML status
message displays on the phone.
Note: Changes to this parameter are applied immediately.
Format
Integer
Default Value
Range
5
1 to 25
Example
xml status scroll delay: 3
41-001160-00, Rev 01 Release 2.0
A-73
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
IP Phone Administrator Guide
Operational, Basic, and Advanced Parameters
Action URI Settings
Parameter –
action uri startup
Aastra Web UI
Configuration Files
Advanced Settings->Action URI
aastra.cfg, <mac>.cfg
Startup
(in Web UI)
Description
Specifies the URI for which the phone executes a GET on when a startup
event occurs.
Format
Fully qualified URI
Default Value
Range
Not Applicable
Up to 128 ASCII characters
action uri startup: http://10.50.10.140/startup
Example
Parameter –
action uri registered
Aastra Web UI
Configuration Files
Advanced Settings->Action URI
aastra.cfg, <mac>.cfg
Successful Registration
(in Web UI)
Description
Specifies the URI for which the phone executes a GET on when a
successful registration event occurs. This parameter can use the
following variables:
$$SIPUSERNAME$$
$$SIPAUTHNAME$$
$$PROXYURL$$
Format
Fully qualified URI
Not Applicable
Default Value
Range
Up to 128 ASCII characters
Example
action uri registered: http://10.50.10.14/registered.php?auth
name=$$SIPAUTHNAME$$
A-74
41-001160-00, Rev 01 Release 2.0
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Configuration Parameters
Operational, Basic, and Advanced Parameters
Parameter –
action uri incoming
Aastra Web UI
Configuration Files
Advanced Settings->Action URI
aastra.cfg, <mac>.cfg
Incoming Call
(in Web UI)
Description
Specifies the URI for which the phone executes a GET on when an
incoming call event occurs. This parameter can use the following
variables:
$$REMOTENUMBER$$
$$DISPLAYNAME$$
$$SIPUSERNAME$$
$$INCOMINGNAME$$
Format
Fully qualified URI
Not Applicable
Default Value
Range
Up to 128 ASCII characters
Example
action uri incoming: http://10.50.10.140/
incoming.php?number=$$REMOTENUMBER$$
Parameter –
action uri outgoing
Aastra Web UI
Configuration Files
Advanced Settings->Action URI
aastra.cfg, <mac>.cfg
Outgoing Call
(in Web UI)
Description
Specifies the URI for which the phone executes a GET on when an
outgoing call event occurs. This parameter can use the following
variables:
$$REMOTENUMBER$$
$$SIPUSERNAME$$
Format
Fully qualified URI
Not Applicable
Default Value
Range
Up to 128 ASCII characters
Example
action uri outgoing: http://10.50.10.140/
outgoing.php?number=$$REMOTENUMBER$$
41-001160-00, Rev 01 Release 2.0
A-75
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
IP Phone Administrator Guide
Operational, Basic, and Advanced Parameters
Parameter –
action uri offhook
Aastra Web UI
Configuration Files
Advanced Settings->Action URI
aastra.cfg, <mac>.cfg
Offhook
(in Web UI)
Description
Specifies the URI for which the phone executes a GET on when an
offhook event occurs.
Format
Fully qualified URI
Default Value
Range
Not Applicable
Up to 128 ASCII characters
action uri offhook: http://10.50.10.140/offhook
Example
Parameter –
action uri onhook
Aastra Web UI
Configuration Files
Advanced Settings->Action URI
aastra.cfg, <mac>.cfg
Onhook
(in Web UI)
Description
Specifies the URI for which the phone executes a GET on when an
onhook event occurs.
Format
Fully qualified URI
Default Value
Range
Not Applicable
Up to 128 ASCII characters
action uri onhook: http://10.50.10.140/onhook
Example
A-76
41-001160-00, Rev 01 Release 2.0
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Configuration Parameters
Operational, Basic, and Advanced Parameters
Ring Tone and Tone Set Global Settings
Parameter –
Aastra Web UI:
IP Phone UI
Configuration Files
Basic Settings->Preferences->Ring Tones
Options->Tones->Set Ring Tone
aastra.cfg, <mac>.cfg
ring tone
Global Ring Tone
(in Web UI)
Description
Globally sets the type of ring tone on the IP phone. Ring tone can be set
to one of six distinct rings.
Format
Integer
Default Value
Aastra Web UI :
IP Phone UI:
Tone 1
Tone 1
Configuration Files: 0 (Tone 1)
Range
Aastra Web UI & IP Phone UI
Tone 1
Tone 2
Tone 3
Tone 4
Tone 5
Silent
Configuration Files
0 (Tone 1)
1 (Tone 2)
2 (Tone 3)
3 (Tone 4)
4 (Tone 5)
5 (Silent)
Example
ring tone: 3
Parameter –
Aastra Web UI:
IP Phone UI
Configuration Files
Basic Settings->Preferences->Ring Tones
Options->Tones->Tone Set
aastra.cfg, <mac>.cfg
tone set
Tone Set
(in Web UI)
Description
Format
Globally sets a tone set for a specific country.
Text
US
Default Value
Range
Australia
Europe (generic tones)
France
Germany
Italy
UK
US (also used in Canada)
Example
tone set: Germany
41-001160-00, Rev 01 Release 2.0
A-77
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
IP Phone Administrator Guide
Operational, Basic, and Advanced Parameters
Ring Tone Per-Line Settings
Parameter –
lineN ring tone
Aastra Web UI:
Configuration Files
Basic Settings->Preferences->Ring Tones
aastra.cfg, <mac>.cfg
Line N
(in Web UI)
Description
Sets the type of ring tone on the IP phone on a per-line basis. Ring tone
can be set to one of six distinct rings.
Format
Integer
Default Value
Aastra Web UI :Global
Configuration Files:-1 (Global)
Range
Aastra Web UI
Global
Tone 1
Tone 2
Tone 3
Tone 4
Tone 5
Silent
Configuration Files
-1 (Global)
0 (Tone 1)
1 (Tone 2)
2 (Tone 3)
3 (Tone 4)
4 (Tone 5)
5 (Silent)
Example
line1 ring tone 3
A-78
41-001160-00, Rev 01 Release 2.0
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Configuration Parameters
Operational, Basic, and Advanced Parameters
Stuttered Dial Tone Setting
Parameter –
stutter disabled
Aastra Web UI:
Configuration Files
Basic Settings->Preferences->General
aastra.cfg, <mac>.cfg
Stuttered Dial Tone
(in Web UI)
Description
Enable or disables the playing of a stuttered dial tone when there is a
message waiting on the IP phone.
Format
Boolean
0 (false)
Default Value
Range
0 (false)
1 (true)
Example
stuttered disabled: 1
Call Waiting Tone Setting
Parameter –
call waiting tone
Aastra Web UI:
Configuration Files
Basic Settings->Preferences->General
aastra.cfg, <mac>.cfg
Play Call Waiting Tone
(in Web UI)
Description
Enable or disables the playing of a call waiting tone when a caller is on an
active call and a new call comes into the phone.
Format
Boolean
Default Value
Range
1 (enabled)
0 (disable)
1 (enabled)
Example
call waiting tone: 0
41-001160-00, Rev 01 Release 2.0
A-79
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
IP Phone Administrator Guide
Operational, Basic, and Advanced Parameters
Priority Alert Settings
Parameter –
prioity alerting enabled
Aastra Web UI:
Basic Settings->Preferences->
Priority Alerting Settings
aastra.cfg, <mac>.cfg
Configuration Files
Enable Priority Alerting
(in Web UI)
Description
Enables and disables distinctive ringing on the IP phone for incoming
calls and call-waiting calls.
Format
Boolean
1 (true)
Default Value
Range
0 (false)
1 (true)
Example
priority alerting enabled: 0
For Sylantro Server only
Parameter –
Aastra Web UI:
Basic Settings->Preferences->
Priority Alerting Settings
aastra.cfg, <mac>.cfg
alert auto call distribution
Configuration Files
auto call distribution
(in Web UI)
Description
When an "alert-acd" keyword appears in the header of the INVITE
request, the configured Bellcore ring tone is applied to the IP phone.
Format
Integer
Default Value
Range
0
Normal ringing
0
1
2
3
4
5
Normal ringing (default)
Bellcore-dr2
Bellcore-dr3
Bellcore-dr4
Bellcore-dr5
Silent
Example
alert auto call distribution: 2
A-80
41-001160-00, Rev 01 Release 2.0
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Configuration Parameters
Operational, Basic, and Advanced Parameters
Parameter –
Aastra Web UI:
Basic Settings->Preferences->
Priority Alerting Settings
aastra.cfg, <mac>.cfg
alert community 1
Configuration Files
community-1
(in Web UI)
Description
When an "alert community-1” keyword appears in the header of the
INVITE request, the configured Bellcore ring tone is applied to the IP
phone.
Format
Integer
Default Value
Range
0
Normal ringing
0
1
2
3
4
5
Normal ringing (default)
Bellcore-dr2
Bellcore-dr3
Bellcore-dr4
Bellcore-dr5
Silent
Example
alert community 1: 3
Parameter –
Aastra Web UI:
Basic Settings->Preferences->
Priority Alerting Settings
aastra.cfg, <mac>.cfg
alert community 2
Configuration Files
community-2
(in Web UI)
Description
When an "alert community-2” keyword appears in the header of the
INVITE request, the configured Bellcore ring tone is applied to the IP
phone.
Format
Integer
Default Value
Range
0
Normal ringing
0
1
2
3
4
5
Normal ringing (default)
Bellcore-dr2
Bellcore-dr3
Bellcore-dr4
Bellcore-dr5
Silent
Example
alert community 2: 4
41-001160-00, Rev 01 Release 2.0
A-81
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
IP Phone Administrator Guide
Operational, Basic, and Advanced Parameters
Parameter –
alert community 3
Aastra Web UI:
Basic Settings->Preferences->
Priority Alerting Settings
aastra.cfg, <mac>.cfg
Configuration Files
community-3
(in Web UI)
Description
When an "alert community-3” keyword appears in the header of the
INVITE request, the configured Bellcore ring tone is applied to the IP
phone.
Format
Integer
Default Value
Range
0
Normal ringing
0
1
2
3
4
5
Normal ringing (default)
Bellcore-dr2
Bellcore-dr3
Bellcore-dr4
Bellcore-dr5
Silent
Example
alert community 3: 1
Parameter –
Aastra Web UI:
Basic Settings->Preferences->
Priority Alerting Settings
aastra.cfg, <mac>.cfg
alert community 4
Configuration Files
community-4
(in Web UI)
Description
When an "alert community-4” keyword appears in the header of the
INVITE request, the configured Bellcore ring tone is applied to the IP
phone.
Format
Integer
Default Value
Range
0
Normal ringing
0
1
2
3
4
5
Normal ringing (default)
Bellcore-dr2
Bellcore-dr3
Bellcore-dr4
Bellcore-dr5
Silent
Example
alert community 4: 2
A-82
41-001160-00, Rev 01 Release 2.0
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Configuration Parameters
Operational, Basic, and Advanced Parameters
Parameter –
Aastra Web UI:
Basic Settings->Preferences->
Priority Alerting Settings
aastra.cfg, <mac>.cfg
alert external
Configuration Files
alert external
(in Web UI)
Description
When an "alert external" keyword appears in the header of the INVITE
request, the configured Bellcore ring tone is applied to the IP phone.
Format
Integer
Default Value
Range
0
Normal ringing
0
1
2
3
4
5
Normal ringing (default)
Bellcore-dr2
Bellcore-dr3
Bellcore-dr4
Bellcore-dr5
Silent
Example
alert external: 4
Parameter –
Aastra Web UI:
Basic Settings->Preferences->
Priority Alerting Settings
aastra.cfg, <mac>.cfg
alert emergency
Configuration Files
alert emergency
(in Web UI)
Description
When an "alert emergency" keyword appears in the header of the INVITE
request, the configured Bellcore ring tone is applied to the IP phone.
Format
Integer
Default Value
Range
0
Normal ringing
0
1
2
3
4
5
Normal ringing (default)
Bellcore-dr2
Bellcore-dr3
Bellcore-dr4
Bellcore-dr5
Silent
Example
alert emergency: 4
41-001160-00, Rev 01 Release 2.0
A-83
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
IP Phone Administrator Guide
Operational, Basic, and Advanced Parameters
Parameter –
Aastra Web UI:
Basic Settings->Preferences->
Priority Alerting Settings
aastra.cfg, <mac>.cfg
alert group
Configuration Files
alert group
(in Web UI)
Description
When an "alert group" keyword appears in the header of the INVITE
request, the configured Bellcore ring tone is applied to the IP phone.
Format
Integer
Default Value
Range
0
Normal ringing
0
1
2
3
4
5
Normal ringing (default)
Bellcore-dr2
Bellcore-dr3
Bellcore-dr4
Bellcore-dr5
Silent
Example
alert group: 4
Parameter –
Aastra Web UI:
Basic Settings->Preferences->
Priority Alerting Settings
aastra.cfg, <mac>.cfg
alert internal
Configuration Files
alert internal
(in Web UI)
Description
When an "alert-internal" keyword appears in the header of the INVITE
request, the configured Bellcore ring tone is applied to the IP phone.
Format
Integer
Default Value
Range
0
Normal ringing
0
1
2
3
4
5
Normal ringing (default)
Bellcore-dr2
Bellcore-dr3
Bellcore-dr4
Bellcore-dr5
Silent
Example
alert internal: 4
A-84
41-001160-00, Rev 01 Release 2.0
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Configuration Parameters
Operational, Basic, and Advanced Parameters
Parameter –
Aastra Web UI:
Basic Settings->Preferences->
Priority Alerting Settings
aastra.cfg, <mac>.cfg
alert priority
Configuration Files
alert priority
(in Web UI)
Description
When an "alert priority" keyword appears in the header of the INVITE
request, the configured Bellcore ring tone is applied to the IP phone.
Format
Integer
Default Value
Range
0
Normal ringing
0
1
2
3
4
5
Normal ringing (default)
Bellcore-dr2
Bellcore-dr3
Bellcore-dr4
Bellcore-dr5
Silent
Example
alert priority: 4
41-001160-00, Rev 01 Release 2.0
A-85
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
IP Phone Administrator Guide
Operational, Basic, and Advanced Parameters
Language Settings
Parameter –
IP Phone UI
Options->Language
language
Aastra Web UI
Basic Settings->Preferences->
Language Settings->Webpage Language
aastra.cfg, <mac>.cfg
Webpage Language
Configuration File
(in Web UI)
Description
The language you want to display in the IP Phone UI and the Aastra Web
UI.
Valid values for 53i, 55i, 57i are:
0 (English)
1 (French)
2 (Spanish)
3 (German)
4 (Italian)
Valid values for 57i CT are:
0 (English)
1 (French)
2 (Spanish)
Note: All languages may not be available for selection. The available
languages are dependant on the language packs currently loaded to the
IP phone. For more information about loading language packs, see
“Loading Language Packs” on page 5-164.
Format
Integer
0
Default Value
Range
0 to 4 (for 53i, 55i, 57i)
0 to 2 (for 57i CT)
Example
language: 2
language: 3
language: 4
A-86
41-001160-00, Rev 01 Release 2.0
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Configuration Parameters
Operational, Basic, and Advanced Parameters
Language Pack Settings
Parameter –
language N
Aastra Web UI
Basic Settings->Preferences->
Language Settings
<mac>.cfg
Configuration File
Language N
(in Web UI)
Where “N” can be 1, 2, 3, or
4
Description
The language pack you want to load to the IP phone.
Valid values are:
lang_fr-ca.txt
lang_es.txt
lang_de.txt
lang_it.txt
Notes:
1. The languages packs you load are dependant on available language
packs from the configuration server. For more information about loading
language packs, see “Loading Language Packs” on page 5-164.
Format
lang_<ISO 639>-<ISO 3166>.txt
or
lang_<ISO 639>.txt
Note: For valid values for <ISO 639> and <ISO 3166>, see “Language
Codes (from Standard ISO 639)” on page A-88 and “Country Codes
(from Standard ISO 3166)” on page A-88.
Default Value
Range
N/A
N/A
Example
language 1: lang_fr-ca.txt
language 2: lang_es.txt
language 3: lang_de.txt
language 4: lang_it.txt
41-001160-00, Rev 01 Release 2.0
A-87
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
IP Phone Administrator Guide
Operational, Basic, and Advanced Parameters
The following table identifies the language code to use for the IP phone language
packs.
Language Codes (from Standard ISO 639)
Language
Language Code
English
French
Spanish
German
Italian
en
fr-ca
es
de
it
The following table identifies the country codes to use for the IP phone language
packs.
Country Codes (from Standard ISO 3166)
Country
Country Code
AFGHANISTAN
ÅLAND ISLANDS
ALBANIA
AF
AX
AL
DZ
ALGERIA
AMERICAN SAMOA
ANDORRA
ANGOLA
AS
AD
AO
AI
ANGUILLA
ANTARCTICA
ANTIGUA AND BARBUDA
ARGENTINA
ARMENIA
ARUBA
AUSTRALIA
AUSTRIA
AQ
AG
AR
AM
AW
AU
AT
AZERBAIJAN
AZ
A-88
41-001160-00, Rev 01 Release 2.0
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Configuration Parameters
Operational, Basic, and Advanced Parameters
Country
Country Code
BAHAMAS
BAHRAIN
BANGLADESH
BARBADOS
BELARUS
BELGIUM
BELIZE
BENIN
BS
BH
BD
BB
BY
BE
BZ
BJ
BERMUDA
BHUTAN
BOLIVIA
BOSNIA AND HERZEGOVINA
BOTSWANA
BOUVET ISLAND
BRAZIL
BRITISH INDIAN OCEAN TERRITORY
BRUNEI DARUSSALAM
BULGARIA
BM
BT
BO
BA
BW
BV
BR
IO
BN
BG
BF
BI
BURKINA FASO
BURUNDI
CAMBODIA
CAMEROON
CANADA
CAPE VERDE
CAYMAN ISLANDS
CENTRAL AFRICAN REPUBLIC
CHAD
CHILE
CHINA
CHRISTMAS ISLAND
COCOS (KEELING) ISLANDS
COLOMBIA
COMOROS
CONGO
KH
CM
CA
CV
KY
CF
TD
CL
CN
CX
CC
CO
KM
CG
CD
CK
CR
CI
CONGO, THE DEMOCRATIC REPUBLIC OF THE
COOK ISLANDS
COSTA RICA
CÔTE D'IVOIRE
CROATIA
CUBA
CYPRUS
HR
CU
CY
CZ
CZECH REPUBLIC
41-001160-00, Rev 01 Release 2.0
A-89
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
IP Phone Administrator Guide
Operational, Basic, and Advanced Parameters
Country
Country Code
DENMARK
DJIBOUTI
DK
DJ
DOMINICA
DOMINICAN REPUBLIC
DM
DO
ECUADOR
EGYPT
EL SALVADOR
EQUATORIAL GUINEA
ERITREA
EC
EG
SV
GQ
ER
EE
ET
ESTONIA
ETHIOPIA
FALKLAND ISLANDS (MALVINAS)
FAROE ISLANDS
FIJI
FK
FO
FJ
FINLAND
FI
FRANCE
FR
GF
PF
TF
FRENCH GUIANA
FRENCH POLYNESIA
FRENCH SOUTHERN TERRITORIES
GABON
GAMBIA
GA
GM
GE
DE
GH
GI
GR
GL
GD
GP
GU
GT
GEORGIA
GERMANY
GHANA
GIBRALTAR
GREECE
GREENLAND
GRENADA
GUADELOUPE
GUAM
GUATEMALA
GUERNSEY
GUINEA
GG
GN
GW
GY
GUINEA-BISSAU
GUYANA
HAITI
HT
HM
VA
HN
HK
HU
HEARD ISLAND AND MCDONALD ISLANDS
HOLY SEE (VATICAN CITY STATE)
HONDURAS
HONG KONG
HUNGARY
A-90
41-001160-00, Rev 01 Release 2.0
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Configuration Parameters
Operational, Basic, and Advanced Parameters
Country
Country Code
ICELAND
INDIA
INDONESIA
IRAN, ISLAMIC REPUBLIC OF
IS
IN
ID
IR
IQ
IE
IM
IL
IRAQ
IRELAND
ISLE OF MAN
ISRAEL
ITALY
IT
JAMAICA
JAPAN
JERSEY
JORDAN
JM
JP
JE
JO
KAZAKHSTAN
KENYA
KIRIBATI
KZ
KE
KI
KOREA, DEMOCRATIC PEOPLE'S REPUBLIC OF
KOREA, REPUBLIC OF
KUWAIT
KP
KR
KW
KG
KYRGYZSTAN
LAO PEOPLE'S DEMOCRATIC REPUBLIC
LATVIA
LEBANON
LESOTHO
LIBERIA
LIBYAN ARAB JAMAHIRIYA
LIECHTENSTEIN
LITHUANIA
LA
LV
LB
LS
LR
LY
LI
LT
LU
LUXEMBOURG
41-001160-00, Rev 01 Release 2.0
A-91
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
IP Phone Administrator Guide
Operational, Basic, and Advanced Parameters
Country
Country Code
MACAO
MO
MK
MG
MW
MY
MV
ML
MT
MH
MQ
MR
MU
YT
MACEDONIA, THE FORMER YUGOSLAV REPUBLIC OF
MADAGASCAR
MALAWI
MALAYSIA
MALDIVES
MALI
MALTA
MARSHALL ISLANDS
MARTINIQUE
MAURITANIA
MAURITIUS
MAYOTTE
MEXICO
MX
FM
MD
MC
MN
ME
MS
MA
MZ
MM
MICRONESIA, FEDERATED STATES OF
MOLDOVA, REPUBLIC OF
MONACO
MONGOLIA
MONTENEGRO
MONTSERRAT
MOROCCO
MOZAMBIQUE
MYANMAR
NAMIBIA
NAURU
NEPAL
NETHERLANDS
NETHERLANDS ANTILLES
NEW CALEDONIA
NEW ZEALAND
NICARAGUA
NIGER
NIGERIA
NIUE
NORFOLK ISLAND
NORTHERN MARIANA ISLANDS
NORWAY
NA
NR
NP
NL
AN
NC
NZ
NI
NE
NG
NU
NF
MP
NO
OMAN
OM
A-92
41-001160-00, Rev 01 Release 2.0
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Configuration Parameters
Operational, Basic, and Advanced Parameters
Country
Country Code
PAKISTAN
PALAU
PALESTINIAN TERRITORY, OCCUPIED
PANAMA
PAPUA NEW GUINEA
PARAGUAY
PERU
PHILIPPINES
PITCAIRN
PK
PW
PS
PA
PG
PY
PE
PH
PN
PL
POLAND
PORTUGAL
PUERTO RICO
PT
PR
QATAR
QA
RÉUNION
ROMANIA
RUSSIAN FEDERATION
RWANDA
RE
RO
RU
RW
41-001160-00, Rev 01 Release 2.0
A-93
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
IP Phone Administrator Guide
Operational, Basic, and Advanced Parameters
Country
Country Code
SAINT HELENA
SAINT KITTS AND NEVIS
SAINT LUCIA
SAINT PIERRE AND MIQUELON
SAINT VINCENT AND THE GRENADINES
SAMOA
SAN MARINO
SAO TOME AND PRINCIPE
SAUDI ARABIA
SENEGAL
SERBIA
SEYCHELLES
SIERRA LEONE
SINGAPORE
SLOVAKIA
SLOVENIA
SH
KN
LC
PM
VC
WS
SM
ST
SA
SN
RS
SC
SL
SG
SK
SI
SOLOMON ISLANDS
SOMALIA
SOUTH AFRICA
SOUTH GEORGIA AND THE SOUTH SANDWICH ISLANDS
SPAIN
SB
SO
ZA
GS
ES
LK
SRI LANKA
SUDAN
SURINAME
SVALBARD AND JAN MAYEN
SWAZILAND
SWEDEN
SD
SR
SJ
SZ
SE
CH
SY
SWITZERLAND
SYRIAN ARAB REPUBLIC
TAIWAN, PROVINCE OF CHINA
TAJIKISTAN
TW
TJ
TANZANIA, UNITED REPUBLIC OF
THAILAND
TIMOR-LESTE
TZ
TH
TL
TOGO
TOKELAU
TONGA
TRINIDAD AND TOBAGO
TUNISIA
TG
TK
TO
TT
TN
TR
TM
TC
TV
TURKEY
TURKMENISTAN
TURKS AND CAICOS ISLANDS
TUVALU
A-94
41-001160-00, Rev 01 Release 2.0
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Configuration Parameters
Operational, Basic, and Advanced Parameters
Country
Country Code
UGANDA
UKRAINE
UG
TA
UNITED ARAB EMIRATES
UNITED KINGDOM
UNITED STATES
UNITED STATES MINOR OUTLYING ISLANDS
URUGUAY
AE
GB
US
TM
UY
UZ
UZBEKISTAN
VANUATU
VU
Vatican City State
VENEZUELA
VIET NAM
VIRGIN ISLANDS, BRITISH
VIRGIN ISLANDS, U.S.
see HOLY SEE
VE
VN
VG
VI
WALLIS AND FUTUNA
WESTERN SAHARA
WF
EH
YEMEN
Zaire
YE
see CONGO, THE DEMOCRATIC
REPUBLIC OF THE
ZAMBIA
ZIMBABWE
ZM
ZW
41-001160-00, Rev 01 Release 2.0
A-95
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
IP Phone Administrator Guide
Operational, Basic, and Advanced Parameters
Suppress DTMF Playback Setting
Parameter –
suppress dtmf playback
Aastra Web UI
Configuration Files
Basic Settings->Preferences
aastra.cfg, <mac>.cfg
Suppress DTMF Playback
(in Web UI)
Description
Enables and disables suppression of DTMF playback when a number is
dialed from the softkeys or programmable keys.
When you disable the suppression of DTMF playback and you press a
softkey or programmable key, the IP phone dials the stored number and
displays each digit as dialed in the LCD window. When you enable the
suppression of DTMF playback, the IP phone dials the stored number and
displays the entire number immediately in the LCD window, allowing the
call to be dialed faster.
Format
Boolean
Default Value
Range
0 (disabled)
0 (disabled)
1 (enabled)
Example
suppress dtmf playback: 1
A-96
41-001160-00, Rev 01 Release 2.0
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Configuration Parameters
Operational, Basic, and Advanced Parameters
Display DTMF Digits Setting
Parameter –
display dtmf digits
Aastra Web UI
Configuration Files
Basic Settings->Preferences->General
aastra.cfg, <mac>.cfg
Display DTMF Digits
(in Web UI)
Description
Enables and disables the display of DTMF digits when dialing on the IP
phone.
DTMF is the signal sent from the phone to the network that you generate
when you press the phone’s touch keys. This is also known as “touchtone”
dialing. Each key you press on your phone generates two tones of specific
frequencies. One tone is generated from a high-frequency group of tones
and the other from a low frequency group.
If enabled, this parameter displays the digits on the IP phone display if you
are dialing from the keypad, or from a softkey or programmable key. This
parameter is disabled by default (no digits display when dialing).
Format
Boolean
Default Value
Range
0 (disabled)
0 (disabled)
1 (enabled)
Example
display dtmf digits: 1
41-001160-00, Rev 01 Release 2.0
A-97
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
IP Phone Administrator Guide
Operational, Basic, and Advanced Parameters
Intercom and Auto-Answer Settings
Outgoing Intercom Settings
Parameter –
sip intercom type
Aastra Web UI
Basic Settings->Preferences->
Outgoing Intercom Settings
aastra.cfg, <mac>.cfg
Configuration Files
Type
(in Web UI)
Description
Determines whether the IP phone or the server is responsible for notifying
the recipient that an Intercom call is being placed.
Format
Integer
Default Value
For Aastra Web UI:
Off
For Configuration Files:
3 - Off
Range
For Aastra Web UI:
Phone-Side
Server-Side
Off
For Configuration Files:
1 - Phone-Side
2 - Server-Side
3 - Off
Example
sip intercom type: 1
A-98
41-001160-00, Rev 01 Release 2.0
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Configuration Parameters
Operational, Basic, and Advanced Parameters
Parameter –
sip intercom prefix code
Aastra Web UI
Basic Settings->Preferences->
Outgoing Intercom Settings
aastra.cfg, <mac>.cfg
Configuration Files
Prefix Code
(in Web UI)
Description
The prefix to add to the phone number for server-side outgoing Intercom
calls. This parameter is required for all server-side Intercom calls.
Note: The example below shows *96 for the prefix code which is used for
Sylantro servers.
Format
String
Default Value
Range
N/A
N/A
Example
sip intercom prefix code: *96
Parameter –
sip intercom line
Aastra Web UI
Basic Settings->Preferences->
Outgoing Intercom Settings
aastra.cfg, <mac>.cfg
Configuration Files
Line
(in Web UI)
Description
Specifies the line for which the IP phone uses the configuration from,
when making the Intercom call. The IP phone uses the first available line
for physically making the call but uses the configuration from the line you
set for this parameter.
Note: The "sip intercom type" parameter must be set with the Server-Side
option to enable the "sip intercom line" parameter.
Format
Integer
Default Value
Range
1
Line 1 through 9
sip intercom line: 1
Example
41-001160-00, Rev 01 Release 2.0
A-99
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
IP Phone Administrator Guide
Operational, Basic, and Advanced Parameters
Incoming Intercom Setting
Parameter –
sip intercom mute mic
Aastra Web UI
Basic Settings->Preferences->
Incoming Intercom Settings
aastra.cfg, <mac>.cfg
Configuration Files
Microphone Mute
(in Web UI)
Description
Enables or disables the microphone on the IP phone for Intercom calls
made by the originating caller.
Format
Integer
1
Default Value
Range
0 (false - microphone is not muted)
1 (true - microphone is muted)
Example
sip intercom mute mic: 1
Auto-Answer Setting
Parameter –
sip allow auto answer
Aastra Web UI
Basic Settings->Preferences->
Incoming Intercom Settings
aastra.cfg, <mac>.cfg
Configuration Files
Auto-Answer
(in Web UI)
Description
Enables or disables the IP phone to allow automatic answering for an
Intercom call. If auto-answer is enabled on the IP phone, the phone plays
a tone to alert the user before answering the intercom call. If auto-answer
is disabled, the phone rejects the incoming intercom call and sends a busy
signal to the caller.
Format
Boolean
1 (true)
Default Value
Range
0 (false - do not allow auto-answer)
1 (true - allow auto-answer)
Example
sip allow auto answer: 0
A-100
41-001160-00, Rev 01 Release 2.0
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Configuration Parameters
Operational, Basic, and Advanced Parameters
Audio Transmit and Receive Gain Adjustment Settings
Parameter –
Configuration Files
aastra.cfg, <mac>.cfg
headset tx gain
Description
This is the increased (+db) or decreased (-db) amount of signal
transmitted from the headset microphone to t he far-end party. The amount
of Tx gain in the IP phone firmware has been reduced to avoid side-tone
and echo on the local and far-end equipment. This parameter allows you
to adjust the Tx gain settings to best suit your comfort level and
deployment environment.
Format
Integer
Default Value
Range
0
-10 db to +10 db
headset tx gain: -5
Example
Parameter –
Configuration Files
aastra.cfg, <mac>.cfg
headset sidetone gain
Description
This is the is the increased (+db) or decreased (-db) amount of sidetone
signal from the headset microphone to the headset speaker. The amount
of sidetone gain in the IP phone firmware has been reduced to avoid
side-tone and echo on the local and far-end equipment. This parameter
allows you to adjust the sidetone gain settings to best suit your comfort
level and deployment environment.
Format
Integer
Default Value
Range
0
-10 db to +10 db
Example
headset sidetone gain: -1
41-001160-00, Rev 01 Release 2.0
A-101
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
IP Phone Administrator Guide
Operational, Basic, and Advanced Parameters
Parameter –
Configuration Files
aastra.cfg, <mac>.cfg
handset tx gain
Description
This is the increased (+db) or decreased (-db) amount of signal
transmitted from the handset microphone to the far-end party. The amount
of Tx gain in the IP phone firmware has been reduced to avoid side-tone
and echo on the local and far-end equipment. This parameter allows you
to adjust the Tx gain settings to best suit your comfort level and
deployment environment.
Format
Integer
Default Value
Range
0
-10 db to +10 db
handset tx gain: -5
Example
Parameter –
Configuration Files
aastra.cfg, <mac>.cfg
handset sidetone gain
Description
This is the increased (+db) or decreased (-db) amount of sidetone signal
from the handset microphone to the handset speaker. The amount of
sidetone gain in the IP phone firmware has been reduced to avoid
side-tone and echo on the local and far-end equipment. This parameter
allows you to adjust the sidetone gain settings to best suit your comfort
level and deployment environment.
Format
Integer
Default Value
Range
0
-10 db to +10 db
Example
handset sidetone gain: -1
A-102
41-001160-00, Rev 01 Release 2.0
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Configuration Parameters
Operational, Basic, and Advanced Parameters
Parameter –
Configuration Files
aastra.cfg, <mac>.cfg
handsfree tx gain
Description
This is the increased (+db) or decreased (-db) amount of signal
transmitted from the base microphone to the far-end party. The amount of
Tx gain in the IP phone firmware has been reduced to avoid side-tone and
echo on the local and far-end equipment. This parameter allows you to
adjust the Tx gain settings to best suit your comfort level and deployment
environment.
Note: The example below increases the speakerphone mic transmit gain
by 10 db.
Format
Integer
Default Value
Range
0
-10 db to +10 db
Example
handsfree tx gain: 10
Parameter –
IP Phone UI
Options->Set Audio
audio mode
Configuration Files
aastra.cfg, <mac>.cfg
Description
Format
Allows you to configure how the "handsfree" key on the IP phone operates.
Integer
0
Default Value
Range
0
Speaker - Calls can be made or received using the handset or
handsfree speakerphone and can be switched between the two
modes by pressing the d /fkey. When on speaker, you can return to
using the handset by placing the handset on the cradle and
picking it up again.
1
2
3
Headset - Calls can be made or received using the headset. Calls
can be switched between the headset and handset by pressing the d
/fkey.
Speaker/headset - Incoming calls are sent to the speakerphone . By
pressing the d /f key, you can switch between the handsfree
speakerphone, the headset, and the handset.
Headset/speaker - Incoming calls are sent to the headset. By
pressing the d /fkey, you can switch between the headset, the
handsfree speakerphone, and the handset.
Example
audio mode: 2
41-001160-00, Rev 01 Release 2.0
A-103
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Directed Call Pickup (BLF or XML Call Interception) Settings
Parameter –
directed call pickup
Aastra Web UI
Basic Settings->Preferences
->Directed Call Pickup Settings
aastra.cfg, <mac>.cfg
Configuration Files
Directed Call Pickup
(in Web UI)
Description
Format
Enables or disables the use of "directed call pickup" feature.
Boolean
Default Value
Range
0 (disabled)
0 (disabled)
1 (enabled)
Example
directed call pickup: 1
Parameter –
play a ring splash
Aastra Web UI
Basic Settings->Preferences
->Directed Call Pickup Settings
aastra.cfg, <mac>.cfg
Configuration Files
Play a Ring Splash
(in Web UI)
Description
Enables or disables the playing of a short "call waiting tone" when there is
an incoming call on the BLF monitored extension. If the host tone is idle,
the tone plays a "ring splash".
Format
Boolean
Default Value
Range
0 (disabled)
0 (disabled)
1 (enabled)
Example
play a ring splash: 1
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Configuration Parameters
Operational, Basic, and Advanced Parameters
BLF Subscription Period Settings
Parameter –
sip blf subscription period
Aastra Web UI
Advanced Settings->Global SIP
->Advanced SIP Settings
aastra.cfg, <mac>.cfg
Configuration Files
BLF Subscription Period
(in Web UI)
Description
Specifies the time period, in seconds, that the IP phone resubscribes the
BLF subscription service after a software/firmware upgrade or after a
reboot of the IP phone.
Format
Integer
Default Value
Range
3600
120 (2 minutes minimum value)
sip blf subscription period: 180
Example
41-001160-00, Rev 01 Release 2.0
A-105
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
IP Phone Administrator Guide
Hard Key Parameters
Hard Key Parameters
This section provides the hard key settings you can use to enable and disable the
Redial, Conf, and Xfer keys on the IP phone.
Parameter –
Configuration Files
aastra.cfg, <mac>.cfg
redial disabled
Description
Enables or disables the Redial key on the IP phone. If this parameter is set
to 0, the key is active and can be pressed by the user. If this parameter is
set to 1, pressing the Redial key is ignored, and the dialed number is not
saved to the "Redial List".
Format
Boolean
Default Value
Range
0 (false)
0 (false), 1 (true)
redial disabled: 1
Example
Parameter –
Configuration Files
aastra.cfg, <mac>.cfg
conference disabled
Description
Enables or disables the Conf key on the IP phone. If this parameter is set
to 0, the key is active and can be pressed by the user. If this parameter is
set to 1, pressing the Conf key is ignored.
Format
Boolean
Default Value
Range
0 (false)
0 (false), 1 (true)
conference disabled: 1
Example
A-106
41-001160-00, Rev 01 Release 2.0
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Configuration Parameters
Hard Key Parameters
Parameter –
Configuration Files
aastra.cfg, <mac>.cfg
call transfer disabled
Description
Enables or disables the Xfer key on the IP phone. If this parameter is set
to 0, the key is active and can be pressed by the user. If this parameter is
set to 1, pressing the Xfer key is ignored.
Format
Boolean
Default Value
Range
0 (false)
0 (false), 1 (true)
call transfer disabled: 1
Example
Parameter –
map redial key to
Aastra Web UI
Configuration Files
Basic Settings->Preferences->Key Mapping
aastra.cfg, <mac>.cfg
Map Redial Key To
(in Web UI)
Description
Sets the Redial key as a speedial key if a value is entered for this
parameter. If you leave this parameter blank, the Redial key returns to its
original functionality.
Note: If you configure the Redial key for speeddialing on the 57i CT Base
Station, the Redial key on the 57i CT handset retains its original
functionality. The Redial key on the handset is not configured for
speeddial.
Format
Integer
Default Value
Range
N/A
N/A
Example
map redial key to: 5551234
41-001160-00, Rev 01 Release 2.0
A-107
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
IP Phone Administrator Guide
Hard Key Parameters
Parameter –
map conf key to
Aastra Web UI
Configuration Files
Basic Settings->Preferences->Key Mapping
aastra.cfg, <mac>.cfg
Map Conf Key To
(in Web UI)
Description
Sets the Conf key as a speedial key if a value is entered for this
parameter. If you leave this parameter blank, the Conf key returns to its
original functionality.
Note: If you configure the Conf key for speeddialing on the 57i CT Base
Station, the Conf key on the 57i CT handset retains its original
functionality. The Conf key on the handset is not configured for speeddial.
Format
Integer
Default Value
Range
N/A
N/A
Example
map conf key to: 5551267
— Softkey/Programmable Key/Feature Key Parameters
This section provides the softkey and programmable key parameters you can
configure on the IP phones. The following table provides the number of softkeys
and programmable keys you can configure, and the number of lines available for
each type of phone.
Additional Softkeys
with Expansion
Modules
Handset
Keys
IP
Programmable
Keys
Lines
Phone
Model
Softkeys
-
Available
Available
53i
55i
57i
-
6 Top Keys
(Up to 6
9
9
9
-
-
-
functions)
6 Bottom Keys
(Up to 20
36 to 108*
6 Top Keys
(Up to 6
(Model 536EM)
functions)
functions)
12 Top and
36 to 108*
-
Bottom Softkeys
(Model 536EM)
(Up to 10
functions on top
keys; Up to 20
functions on
bottom keys)
60 to 180**
(Model 560EM)
A-108
41-001160-00, Rev 01 Release 2.0
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Configuration Parameters
Hard Key Parameters
57i CT
12 Top and
36 to 108* on Base
Station
-
9
15
Bottom Softkeys
(Up to 10
functions on top
keys; Up to 20
functions on
bottom keys)
60 to 180** on Base
Station
(Model 560EM)
*The 536EM expansion module consists of 36 softkeys. You can have up to 3 expansion modules on an IP
phone totaling 108 softkeys. Valid for 55i, 57i, and 57i CT phones.
**The 560EM expansion module consists of 60 softkeys. You can have up to 3 expansion modules on an IP
phone totaling 180 softkeys. Valid for 57i and 57i CT phones only.
Note: When entering definitions for softkeys, the “#” sign must be
enclosed in quotes.
41-001160-00, Rev 01 Release 2.0
A-109
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
IP Phone Administrator Guide
Hard Key Parameters
Softkey Settings for 55i, 57i, 57i CT
The value of "N" for the following parameters is dependent on the number of
softkeys available on the55i, 57i, and 57i CT models. See the table above for
applicable values.
Parameter –
softkeyN type
Aastra Web UI
Configuration Files
Operation->Softkeys and XML
aastra.cfg, <mac>.cfg
Type
(in Web UI)
Description
The type of softkey to configure. Valid types are:
•
none - Indicates softkey and/or programmable key is disabled.
line - Indicates softkey and/or programmable key is configured for
line use.
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
speeddial - Indicates softkey and/or programmable key is configured
for speeddial use. Speeddial is applicable to the 536EM and 560EM
also.
do not disturb (dnd)- Indicates softkey and/or programmable key is
configured for do not disturb on the phone. This option is "Do Not
Disturb" in the Aastra Web UI).
blf - Indicates softkey and/or programmable key is configured for
Busy Lamp Field (BLF) use. User can dial out on a BLF configured
key. BLF is applicable to the 536EM and 560EM also.
list - Indicates softkey and/or programmable key is configured for
BLF list use. (This option is BLF/List in the Aastra Web UI). User can
dial out on a BLF List configured key.
xml - Indicates the softkey and/or programmable key is configured to
accept an XML application for accessing customized XML services.
You can also specify an XML softkey URL for this option.
flash - Indicates the softkey and/or programmable key is set to
generate a flash event when it is pressed on the 57i and 57i CT, or a
feature key is pressed on the 57i CT handset. The IP phone
generates flash events only when a call is connected and there is an
active RTP stream (for example, when the call is not on hold).
sprecode - Indicates the softkey and/or programmable key is
configured to automatically activate specific services offered by the
server. For example, if the sprecode value of *82 is configured, then
by pressing the softkey, *82 automatically activates a service
provided by the server.
•
•
•
•
park - Indicates the softkey and/or programmable key is configured to
park incoming calls when pressed.
pickup - Indicates the softkey and/or programmable key is configured
to pick up parked calls when pressed.
lcr - Indicates the softkey and/or programmable key is configured for
“last call return” when pressed.
A-110
41-001160-00, Rev 01 Release 2.0
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Configuration Parameters
Hard Key Parameters
callers list - Indicates the softkey and/or programmable key is set for
accessing the Callers List.
directory - Indicates the softkey and/or programmable key is set for
accessing the Directory List.
intercom - Indicates the softkey and/or programmable key is set to be
used as the Intercom key.
services - Indicates the softkey and/or programmable key is set to be
used as the Services key.
empty - Indicates the softkey and/or programmable key is configured to
force a blank entry on the IP phone display for a specific softkey. The
soft keys are added in order (from softkey1 to softkey20) after any
hard-coded keys have been added. If a particular soft key is not defined,
it is ignored.
Format
Text
Default Value
Range
none
none
line
speeddial
dnd
blf
list ("BLF\List" in the Aastra Web UI)
xml
flash
sprecode
park
pickup
lcr
callers list
directory
intercom
services
empty
Example
softkey1 type: line
softkey2 type: speeddial
softkey3 type: lcr
softkey 4 type: xml
41-001160-00, Rev 01 Release 2.0
A-111
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
IP Phone Administrator Guide
Hard Key Parameters
Parameter –
softkeyN label
Aastra Web UI
Configuration Files
Operation->Softkeys and XML
aastra.cfg, <mac>.cfg
Label
(in Web UI)
Description
The text label that displays on the IP phone for the softkey.
The “softkeyN label” parameter can be set for the following softkey types
only:
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
speeddial
BLF
XML
Flash
sprecode
Park
Pickup
Directory
Callers List
Intercom
Services
Notes:
1. For the 57i and 57i CT phones, an icon appears beside the soft key
label that indicates the status of the line.
2. If the softkeyN type parameter is set to "flash", and no label value is
entered for the softkeyN label parameter, the label of "Flash" is used.
Format
Text
Default Value
Range
Not Applicable
For line, blf types - Up to 9 characters.
For speeddial type - Up to 11 characters.
Example
softkey1 label: “Line 9”
softkey2 label: “info”
softkey4 label: “johnsmith”
A-112
41-001160-00, Rev 01 Release 2.0
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Configuration Parameters
Hard Key Parameters
Parameter –
softkeyN value
Aastra Web UI
Configuration Files
Operation->Softkeys and XML
aastra.cfg, <mac>.cfg
Value
(In WEb UI)
Description
This is the value you assign to the softkey.
The “softkeyN value” parameter can be set for the following softkey types
only:
•
•
•
•
•
•
speeddial
BLF
sprecode
Park
Pickup
XML
Notes:
1. For speedial - Value is the phone number or extension to enter for
the softkey.
2. For blf - Value is the extension you want to monitor.
3. For sprecode - Value is dependent on services offered by server.
4. For Park, Pickup - For valid values, see Chapter 5, the section,
“Park/Pickup Call Server Configuration Values” on page 5-74. For
Park/Pickup examples, see Chapter 5, the section, “Model 57i/480
CT Examples” on page 5-78.
5. For xml - You can specify a URI to use for this XML softkey. The
variables you can use with the XML softkey URI are:
•
•
•
•
•
•
$$SIPUSERNAME$$
$$SIPAUTHNAME$$
$$PROXYURL$$
$$REMOTENUMBER$$
$$DISPLAYNAME$$
$$INCOMINGNAME$$
Format
Integer
Default Value
Range
Not Applicable
N/A
Example
softkey1 value: 9
softkey2 value: 411
softkey4 value: http://10.50.10.140 script.pl?name=$$SIPUSERNAME$$
41-001160-00, Rev 01 Release 2.0
A-113
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
IP Phone Administrator Guide
Hard Key Parameters
Parameter –
softkeyN line
Aastra Web UI
Configuration Files
Operation->Softkeys and XML
aastra.cfg, <mac>.cfg
Line
(in Web UI)
Description
This is the line associated with the softkey you are configuring. The
number of applicable lines available is dependent on the specific IP
phone model.
The “softkeyN line” parameter can be set for the following softkey types
only:
•
•
•
•
•
•
speeddial
BLF
BLF/List
Park
Pickup
lcr
Format
Integer
1
Default Value
Range
1 through 9
Example
softkey1 line: 1
softkey2 line: 5
A-114
41-001160-00, Rev 01 Release 2.0
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Configuration Parameters
Hard Key Parameters
Parameter –
softkeyN states
Aastra Web UI
Configuration Files
Operation->Softkeys and XML
aastra.cfg, <mac>.cfg
Idle, Connected, Incoming,
Outgoing, Busy
(in Web UI)
Description
Displays the status of the phone when a softkey is pressed. You can
enter multiple values (idle, connected, incoming, outgoing, busy) for
the "softkeyN state" parameter.
You must associate the softkeyN state parameter with a specific softkey.
In the following example, the softkeyN states parameter is associated
with softkey 12:
softkey12 type: speeddial
softkey12 label: voicemail
softkey12 value *89
softkey12 states: outgoing
Note: The IP phone idle screen condenses the softkeys. So in the
previous example, softkey 12 will appear in position 1 if no other softkeys
are set. A softkey type of "empty" does not display on the idle screen at
all.
Format
Text
Default Value
For softkey type - None:
All states disabled
For softkey types - Line, DND, speeddial, BLF, BLF List, XML, lcr,
Directory, Callers List, Intercom, Services, empty:
idle, connected, incoming, outgoing
For softkey type - Flash:
All states disabled
For softkey type - Sprecode, Park:
connected
For softkey type - Pickup:
idle, outgoing
41-001160-00, Rev 01 Release 2.0
A-115
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
IP Phone Administrator Guide
Hard Key Parameters
Range
Valid values are:
idle
The phone is not being used.
connected
The line currently being displayed is
in an active call (or the call is on hold)
The phone is ringing.
The user is dialing a number, or the
far-end is ringing.
incoming
outgoing
busy
The current line is busy because the line is in use or
the line is set as “Do Not Disturb”
Note: For softkey type, Pickup, values can be: just idle, just outgoing, or
idle outgoing.
Example
softkey1 states: idle incoming outgoing
softkey2 states: connected
A-116
41-001160-00, Rev 01 Release 2.0
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Configuration Parameters
Hard Key Parameters
Programmable Key Settings for 53i and 55i
•
The value of "N" for the following parameters is dependent on the number of
programmable keys available on the 53i models. See the table on page 108 for
the applicable values.
Parameter –
prgkeyN type
Aastra Web UI
Configuration Files aastra.cfg, <mac>.cfg
Operation->Programmable Keys
Type
(in Web UI)
Description
The type of programmable key to configure. Valid types are:
•
•
•
none - Indicates no setting for programmable key.
line - Indicates programmable key is configured for line use.
speeddial - Indicates programmable key is configured for speeddial
use
•
•
•
•
dnd - Indicates programmable key is configured for do not disturb
on the phone. This option is "do not disturb" in the Aastra Web UI).
blf - Indicates programmable key is configured for Busy Lamp Field
(BLF) use. User can dial out on a BLF configured key.
list - Indicates programmable key is configured for BLF list use.
User can dial out on a BLF List configured key.
xml - Indicates programmable key is configured to accept an XML
application for accessing customized XML services. You can also
specify an XML softkey URL for this option.
•
•
flash - Indicates programmable key is set to generate a flash event
when it is pressed on the 53i. The IP phone generates flash events
only when a call is connected and there is an active RTP stream (for
example, when the call is not on hold).
sprecode - Indicates programmable key is configured to
automatically activate specific services offered by the server. For
example, if the sprecode value of *82 is configured, then by
pressing the softkey, *82 automatically activates a service provided
by the server.
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
park - Indicates programmable key is configured to park incoming
calls when pressed.
pickup - Indicates programmable key is configured to pick up
parked calls when pressed.
lcr - Indicates programmable key is configured for “last call return”
when pressed.
directory - Indicates programmable key is configured to access the
Directory List.
callers list - Indicates programmable key is configured to access
the Callers List.
conference - Indicates programmable key is configured as a
conference key. Enter as “conf” in configuration files.
transfer - Indicates programmable key is configured as a Transfer
key for transferring calls. Enter as “xfer” in configuration files.
Format
Text
41-001160-00, Rev 01 Release 2.0
A-117
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
IP Phone Administrator Guide
Hard Key Parameters
Default Value
Range
Not Applicable
none
line
speeddial
dnd ("do not disturb" in the Aastra Web UI)
blf
list
xml
flash
sprecode
park
pickup
lcr
directory
callers list
conf
xfer
Example
prgkey1 type: speeddial
A-118
41-001160-00, Rev 01 Release 2.0
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Configuration Parameters
Hard Key Parameters
Parameter –
prgkeyN value
Aastra Web UI
Configuration Files aastra.cfg, <mac>.cfg
Operation->Programmable Keys
Value
(in Web UI)
Description
This is the value you assign to the programmable key.
The “prgkeyN value” parameter can be set for the following softkey types
only:
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
speeddial
line
BLF
sprecode
XML
Park
Pickup
Notes:
the programmable key.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
For blf - Value is the extension you want to monitor.
For sprecode - Value is dependent on services offered by server.
For xml - Value is IP address of the XML application.
For Park, Pickup - For valid values, see Chapter 5, the section,
“Park/Pickup Call Server Configuration Values” on page 5-74. For
Park/Pickup examples, see Chapter 5, the section “Model 53i
Examples” on page 5-79.
Format
Integer
Default Value
Range
N/A
N/A
Example
prgkey1 value: 411
41-001160-00, Rev 01 Release 2.0
A-119
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
IP Phone Administrator Guide
Hard Key Parameters
Parameter–
Aastra Web UI
Operation->Programmable Keys
prgkeyN line
Configuration Files aastra.cfg, <mac>.cfg
Line
(in Web UI)
Description
This is the line associated with the programmable key you are
configuring.
The “prgkeyN line” parameter can be set for the following softkey types
only:
•
•
•
•
•
•
speeddial
BLF
BLF/List
Park
Pickup
lcr
Format
Integer
1
Default Value
Range
1 through 9
Example
prgkey1 line: 1
prgkey2 line: 5
A-120
41-001160-00, Rev 01 Release 2.0
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Configuration Parameters
Hard Key Parameters
Top Softkey Settings for 57i and 57i CT
Parameter –
topsoftkeyN type
Aastra Web UI
Configuration Files
Operation->Softkeys and XML
aastra.cfg, <mac>.cfg
Top Softkeys->Type
(in Web UI)
Description
The type of softkey to configure. Valid types are:
•
•
•
•
none - Indicates softkey is disabled.
line - Indicates softkey is configured for line use.
speeddial - Indicates softkey is configured for speeddial use.
do not disturb (dnd)- Indicates softkey is configured for do not
disturb on the phone. This option is "Do Not Disturb" in the Aastra
Web UI).
•
•
blf - Indicates softkey is configured for Busy Lamp Field (BLF) use.
User can dial out on a BLF configured key.
list - Indicates softkey is configured for BLF list use. (This option is
BLF/List in the Aastra Web UI). User can dial out on a BLF List
configured key.
•
•
xml - Indicates the softkey is configured to accept an XML application
for accessing customized XML services. You can also specify an XML
softkey URL for this option.
flash - Indicates the softkey is set to generate a flash event when it is
pressed on the 57i and 57i CT, or a feature key is pressed on the 57i
CT handset. The IP phone generates flash events only when a call is
connected and there is an active RTP stream (for example, when the
call is not on hold).
•
sprecode - Indicates the softkey is configured to automatically
activate specific services offered by the server. For example, if the
sprecode value of *82 is configured, then by pressing the softkey, *82
automatically activates a service provided by the server.
park - Indicates the softkey is configured to park incoming calls when
pressed.
pickup - Indicates the softkey is configured to pick up parked calls
when pressed.
lcr - Indicates the softkey is configured for “last call return” when
pressed.
•
•
•
41-001160-00, Rev 01 Release 2.0
A-121
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
IP Phone Administrator Guide
Hard Key Parameters
•
•
callers list - Indicates the softkey is set for accessing the Callers List.
directory - Indicates the softkey is set for accessing the Directory
List.
•
intercom - Indicates the softkey is set to be used as the Intercom
key.
•
•
services - Indicates the softkey is set to be used as the Services key.
empty - Indicates the softkey is configured to force a blank entry on
the IP phone display for a specific softkey. The soft keys are added in
order (from softkey1 to softkey20) after any hard-coded keys have
been added. If a particular soft key is not defined, it is ignored.
Format
Text
Default Value
Range
none
none
line
speeddial
dnd
blf
list ("BLF\List" in the Aastra Web UI)
xml
flash
sprecode
park
pickup
lcr
callers list
directory
intercom
services
empty
Example
topsoftkey1 type: line
topsoftkey2 type: speeddial
topsoftkey3 type: lcr
topsoftkey 4 type: xml
A-122
41-001160-00, Rev 01 Release 2.0
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Configuration Parameters
Hard Key Parameters
Parameter –
topsoftkeyN label
Aastra Web UI
Configuration Files
Operation->Softkeys and XML
aastra.cfg, <mac>.cfg
Top Softkeys->Label
(in Web UI)
Description
The text label that displays on the IP phone for the softkey.
The “topsoftkeyN label” parameter can be set for the following softkey
types only:
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
speeddial
BLF
XML
Flash
sprecode
Park
Pickup
Directory
Callers List
Intercom
Services
Notes:
1. For the 57i and 57i CT phones, an icon appears beside the soft key
label that indicates the status of the line.
2. If the topsoftkeyN type parameter is set to "flash", and no label value
is entered for the topsoftkeyN label parameter, the label of "Flash" is
used.
Format
Text
Default Value
Range
Not Applicable
For line, blf types - Up to 9 characters.
For speeddial type - Up to 11 characters.
Example
topsoftkey1 label: “Line 9”
topsoftkey2 label: “info”
topsoftkey4 label: “johnsmith”
41-001160-00, Rev 01 Release 2.0
A-123
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
IP Phone Administrator Guide
Hard Key Parameters
Parameter –
topsoftkeyN value
Aastra Web UI
Configuration Files
Operation->Softkeys and XML
aastra.cfg, <mac>.cfg
Top Softkeys->Value
(In WEb UI)
Description
This is the value you assign to the softkey.
The “topsoftkeyN value” parameter can be set for the following softkey
types only:
•
•
•
•
•
•
speeddial
BLF
sprecode
Park
Pickup
XML
Notes:
1. For speedial - Value is the phone number or extension to enter for
the softkey.
2. For blf - Value is the extension you want to monitor.
3. For sprecode - Value is dependent on services offered by server.
4. For Park, Pickup - For valid values, see Chapter 5, the section,
“Park/Pickup Call Server Configuration Values” on page 5-74. For
Park/Pickup examples, see Chapter 5, the section, “Model 57i/480
CT Examples” on page 5-78.
5. For xml - You can specify a URI to use for this XML softkey. The
variables you can use with the XML softkey URI are:
•
•
•
•
•
•
$$SIPUSERNAME$$
$$SIPAUTHNAME$$
$$PROXYURL$$
$$REMOTENUMBER$$
$$DISPLAYNAME$$
$$INCOMINGNAME$$
Format
Integer
Default Value
Range
Not Applicable
N/A
Example
topsoftkey1 value: 9
topsoftkey2 value: 411
topsoftkey4 value: http://10.50.10.140 script.pl?name=$$SIPUSERNAME$$
A-124
41-001160-00, Rev 01 Release 2.0
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Configuration Parameters
Hard Key Parameters
Parameter –
topsoftkeyN line
Aastra Web UI
Configuration Files
Operation->Softkeys and XML
aastra.cfg, <mac>.cfg
Top Softkeys->Line
(in Web UI)
Description
This is the line associated with the softkey you are configuring. The
number of applicable lines available is dependent on the specific IP
phone model.
The “topsoftkeyN line” parameter can be set for the following softkey
types only:
•
•
•
•
•
•
speeddial
BLF
BLF/List
Park
Pickup
lcr
Format
Integer
1
Default Value
Range
1 through 9
Example
topsoftkey1 line: 1
topsoftkey2 line: 5
41-001160-00, Rev 01 Release 2.0
A-125
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
IP Phone Administrator Guide
Hard Key Parameters
Handset Feature Key Settings for the 57i CT
Parameter –
featurekeyN type
Aastra Web UI
Configuration Files
Operation->Handset Keys
aastra.cfg, <mac>.cfg
Type
(in Web UI)
Description
The type of feature key to configure. Valid types are:
•
•
•
•
none - Indicates feature key is disabled.
line - Indicates the feature key is configured for line use.
transfer- Indicates feature key is configured for transferring a call.
conference - Indicates feature key is configured for conference
calling.
•
public - Indicates feature key is configured to toggle from public to
private mode. A public and private softkey can be used when at a line
item in the Directory List. The Private key toggles a number in the
Directory List to private. The Public key allows a number in the
Directory List to be sent to the handsets. A 57i CT accepts a
maximum of 50 entries with the public attribute.
intercom - Indicates the feature key is set to be used to make an
intercom call.
directory - Indicates the feature key is set for accessing the Directory
List.
callers list - Indicates the feature key is set for accessing the Callers
List.
park- Indicates the feature key is configured to park incoming calls
when pressed.
pickup- Indicates the feature key is configured to pick up parked calls
when pressed.
flash - Indicates the feature key is set to generate a flash event when
it is pressed on the 57i CT handset. The IP phone generates flash
events only when a call is connected and there is an active RTP
stream (for example, when the call is not on hold).
•
•
•
•
•
•
Format
Text
Default Value
None
A-126
41-001160-00, Rev 01 Release 2.0
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Configuration Parameters
Hard Key Parameters
Range
none
line
transfer
conference
public
intercom
directory
callers list
park
pickup
flash
Example
featurekey1 type: line
featurekey2 type: public
featurekey3 type: park
featurekey4 type: pickup
Parameter –
featurekeyN label
Aastra Web UI
Configuration Files
Operation->Handset Keys
aastra.cfg, <mac>.cfg
Label
(in Web UI)
Description
The text label that displays on the IP phone for the feature key.
Notes:
1. For the 57i CT phones, an icon appears beside the feature key label
that indicates the status of the line.
2. If a feature key is configured but no label is set, the IP phone sets the
label to the English, French, or Spanish translation of the chosen
action. The language used is based on the current language of the
cordless handset.
Format
Text
Default Value
Range
Not Applicable
Not Applicable
Example
featurekey1 label: Line 9
featurekey2 label: Public
featurekey4 label: John Smith
41-001160-00, Rev 01 Release 2.0
A-127
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
IP Phone Administrator Guide
Hard Key Parameters
Expansion Module Key Settings for 536M (53i/55i)
and 560M (57i/57i CT)
Parameter –
expmodX keyN type
Aastra Web UI
Configuration Files
Operation->Expansion Module N
aastra.cfg, <mac>.cfg
Type
(in Web UI)
Description
The type of softkey to configure. Valid types are:
•
•
•
none - Indicates softkey and/or programmable key is disabled.
line - Indicates the feature key is configured for line use.
speeddial - Indicates softkey and/or programmable key is configured
for speeddial use.
•
•
•
blf - Indicates softkey and/or programmable key is configured for
Busy Lamp Field (BLF) use. User can dial out on a BLF configured
key.
list - Indicates softkey and/or programmable key is configured for
BLF list use. (This option is BLF/List in the Aastra Web UI). User can
dial out on a BLF List configured key.
empty - Indicates the softkey and/or programmable key is configured
to force a blank entry on the IP phone display for a specific softkey.
The soft keys are added in order (from softkey1 to softkey20) after
any hard-coded keys have been added. If a particular soft key is not
defined, it is ignored.
Note: Each Model 536EM has 36 softkeys for configuration. Each Model
560EM has 60 softkeys for configuration.
Format
Text
Default Value
Range
none
none
line
speeddial
blf
list ("BLF\List" in the Aastra Web UI)
Example
expmod1 key1 type: line
expmod1 key2 type: speeddial
expmod1 key3 type: blf
expmod1 key4 type: list
A-128
41-001160-00, Rev 01 Release 2.0
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Configuration Parameters
Hard Key Parameters
Parameter –
expmodX keyN value
Aastra Web UI
Configuration Files
Operation->Expansion Module N
aastra.cfg, <mac>.cfg
Value
(In WEb UI)
Description
This is the value you assign to the softkey.
The “expmodX keyN value” parameter can be set for the following
softkey types only:
•
•
•
•
speeddial
line
blf
list
Note: For blf - Value is the extension you want to monitor.
Format
Integer
Default Value
Range
Not Applicable
N/A
Example
expmod1 key1 value: 9
expmod1 key2 value: 411
41-001160-00, Rev 01 Release 2.0
A-129
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
IP Phone Administrator Guide
Hard Key Parameters
Parameter –
expmodX keyN line
Aastra Web UI
Configuration Files
Operation->Expansion Module N
aastra.cfg, <mac>.cfg
Line
(in Web UI)
Description
This is the line associated with the softkey you are configuring. The
number of applicable lines available is dependent on the specific IP
phone model.
The “expmodX keyN line” parameter can be set for the following softkey
types only:
•
•
•
•
speeddial
blf
list
line
Format
Integer
1
Default Value
Range
1 through 9
Example
expmod1 key1 line: 1
expmod1 key2 line: 5
A-130
41-001160-00, Rev 01 Release 2.0
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Configuration Parameters
Hard Key Parameters
Locking Softkeys and Programmable Keys
Parameter–
Configuration Files aastra.cfg, <mac>.cfg
softkeyN locked
Description
Locks the specified sotkey on the 55i, 57i, or 57i CT IP phone. Locking
the key prevents a user from changing or configuring the softkey. When a
key is locked, the phone uses the server settings and ignores any
previous local configuraiton.
Affects the following parameters:
•
•
•
•
•
softkeyN type
softkeyN label
softkeyN value
softkeyN line
softkeyN states
Format
Boolean
Default Value
Range
0 (disable)
0 (disable)
1 (enable)
Example
softkey1 locked 1
Parameter–
Configuration Files aastra.cfg, <mac>.cfg
topsoftkeyN locked
Description
Locks the specified top sotkey on the 57i or 57i CT IP phone. Locking the
key prevents a user from changing or configuring the softkey. When a key
is locked, the phone uses the server settings and ignores any previous
local configuraiton.
Affects the following parameters:
•
•
•
•
topsoftkeyN type
topsoftkeyN label
topsoftkeyN value
topsoftkeyN line
Format
Boolean
Default Value
Range
0 (disable)
0 (disable)
1 (enable)
Example
topsoftkey1 locked 1
41-001160-00, Rev 01 Release 2.0
A-131
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
IP Phone Administrator Guide
Hard Key Parameters
Parameter–
Configuration Files aastra.cfg, <mac>.cfg
prgkeyN locked
Description
Locks the specified top sotkey on the 53i or 55i IP phone. Locking the key
prevents a user from changing or configuring the programmable key.
When a key is locked, the phone uses the server settings and ignores any
previous local configuraiton.
Affects the following parameters:
•
•
•
prgkeyN type
prgkeyN value
prgkeyN line
Format
Boolean
Default Value
Range
0 (disable)
0 (disable)
1 (enable)
Example
prgkey1 locked 1
Parameter–
Configuration Files aastra.cfg, <mac>.cfg
featurekeyN locked
Description
Locks the specified top sotkey on the 57i CT IP phone. Locking the key
prevents a user from changing or configuring the feature key. When a key
is locked, the phone uses the server settings and ignores any previous
local configuraiton.
Affects the following parameters:
•
•
featurekeyN type
featurekeyN label
Format
Boolean
Default Value
Range
0 (disable)
0 (disable)
1 (enable)
Example
featurekey1 locked 1
A-132
41-001160-00, Rev 01 Release 2.0
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Configuration Parameters
Hard Key Parameters
Parameter–
Configuration Files aastra.cfg, <mac>.cfg
expmodX key N locked
Description
Locks the specified top sotkey on the 5-Series Expansion Module
attached to the IP phone. Locking the key prevents a user from changing
or configuring the softkey on the expansion module. When a key is
locked, the phone uses the server settings and ignores any previous local
configuraiton.
Affects the following parameters:
•
•
•
expmodX keyN type
expmodX keyN value
expmodX keyN line
Format
Boolean
Default Value
Range
0 (disable)
0 (disable)
1 (enable)
Example
expmod1 locked 1
41-001160-00, Rev 01 Release 2.0
A-133
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
IP Phone Administrator Guide
Advanced Operational Parameters
Advanced Operational Parameters
The following parameters in this section allow the system admininstrator to set
advanced operational features on the IP phones.
MAC Address/Line Number
This section provides the parameters you can set to enable or disable the sending
of the MAC address and line number in REGISTER messages to the call server.
Parameter –
sip send mac
Aastra Web UI:
Advanced Settings->Global SIP->
Advanced SIP Settings
Configuration Files
aastra.cfg, <mac>.cfg
Send MAC Address in
REGISTER Message
(in Web UI)
Description
Adds an "Aastra-Mac:" header to the SIP REGISTER messages sent
from the phone to the call server, where the value is the MAC address of
the phone.
Format
Boolean
Default Value
Range
0 (disabled)
0 (disabled)
1 (enabled)
Example
sip send mac: 1
A-134
41-001160-00, Rev 01 Release 2.0
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Configuration Parameters
Advanced Operational Parameters
Parameter –
sip send line
Aastra Web UI:
Configuration Files
Advanced Settings->Global SIP->
Advanced SIP Settings
aastra.cfg, <mac>.cfg
Send Line Number in
REGISTER Message
(in Web UI)
Description
Adds an "Aastra-Line:" header to the SIP REGISTER messages sent
from the phone to the call server, where the value is the MAC address of
the phone.
Format
Boolean
Default Value
Range
0 (disabled)
0 (disabled)
1 (enabled)
Example
sip send line: 1
Blind Transfer Setting.
Parameter –
Configuration Files
aastra.cfg, <mac>.cfg
sip cancel after blind transfer
Description
Forces the phone to use the Blind Transfer method available in software
prior to release 1.4. This method sends the CANCEL message after the
REFER message when blind transferring a call.
Format
Boolean
Default Value
Range
0 (disabled)
0 (disabled)
1 (enabled)
Example
sip cancel after blind transfer: 1
41-001160-00, Rev 01 Release 2.0
A-135
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
IP Phone Administrator Guide
Advanced Operational Parameters
Update Caller ID Setting.
Parameter –
Configuration Files
aastra.cfg, <mac>.cfg
sip update callerid
Description
Enables or disables the updating of the Caller ID information during a
call.
Format
Boolean
Default Value
Range
0 (disabled)
0 (disabled)
1 (enabled)
Example
sip update callerid: 1
Boot Sequence Recovery Mode.
Parameter –
Configuration Files
aastra.cfg, <mac>.cfg
force web recovery mode
disabled
Description
Enables or disables the forcing web recovery mode feature. If this
parameter is set to "1", you cannot force web recovery. If this parameter
is set to "0", press 1 and # keys during boot up when the logo displays to
force the web recovery mode.
Format
Boolean
0 (false)
Default Value
Range
0 (false)
1 (true)
Example
force web recovery mode disabled: 1
Parameter –
Configuration Files
aastra.cfg, <mac>.cfg
max boot count
Description
Specifies the number of faulty boots that occur before the phone is forced
into Web recovery mode.
Format
Integer
10
Default Value
Range
0 to 32767
Zero (0) disables the max boot count feature.
max boot count: 0
Example
A-136
41-001160-00, Rev 01 Release 2.0
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Configuration Parameters
Advanced Operational Parameters
Single Call Restriction
Parameter –
two call support
Aastra Web UI
Configuration Files
Advanced Settings->Global SIP->RTP Settings
aastra.cfg, <mac>.cfg
Two Call Support
(in Web UI)
Description
Enables or disables the single media path restriction between the
57i CT base unit and the handset.
When this feature is enabled (set to 1), you can make separate active
calls from the 57i CT base unit and from the cordless handset. If this
feature is disabled (set to 0), only one call can be active at a time either
from the base unit or from the handset.
When this feature is disabled, and you make an active call on either the
base unit or the handset, any other attempt to make an active call is put
on hold. Also, when this feature is disabled, more than one call can
negotiate complex audio codecs since only a single call is decoding
audio at a time.
Format
Boolean
1
Default Value
Range
0 - Disable
1 - Enable
Example
two call support: 0
41-001160-00, Rev 01 Release 2.0
A-137
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
IP Phone Administrator Guide
Troubleshooting Parameters
Troubleshooting Parameters
The following parameters in this section allow the system admininstrator to set
logging and support settings for troubleshooting purposes.
Log Settings
Parameter –
log ip
Aastra Web UI
Advanced Settings->Troubleshooting->
Log Settings
Configuration Files
aastra.cfg, <mac>.cfg
Description
Specifies the IP address for which to save log files for troubleshooting
purposes.
Format
IP address
Default Value
Range
0.0.0.0
Not Applicable
log ip: 192.168.3.2
Example
Parameter –
log port
Aastra Web UI
Advanced Settings->Troubleshooting->
Log Settings
Configuration Files
aastra.cfg, <mac>.cfg
Description
Specifies the IP port to use to save log files for troubleshooting purposes.
This is the IP port that transmits information from the IP phone to the IP
address location.
Format
Integer
Default Value
Range
0
Any valid IP port
log port: 2
Example
A-138
41-001160-00, Rev 01 Release 2.0
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Configuration Parameters
Troubleshooting Parameters
Parameter –
log level
Aastra Web UI
Configuration Files
Advanced Settings->Troubleshooting->Module
aastra.cfg, <mac>.cfg
Module
Description
Specifies the severity level of the logs to be reported to a log file. When
this parameter is set to a specific value, only the logs with characteristics
of this value and higher are reported to the log file.
For example, if this parameter was set to “Info”, all logs with a severity of
Info and higher are reported to the log file (debug entries are dropped).
Changes to this parameter require a reboot of the IP Phone.
Log levels are:
Debug - All logs are reported to the log file.
Info - Informational logs and higher are reported to the log file (debug
logs are dropped).
Warn - Warning logs and higher are reported to the log file (info and
debug logs are dropped).
Error - Error logs and higher are reported to the log file (warning, info,
and debug logs are dropped).
Fatal - Fatal errors only are reported to the log file.
Note: Values set in the Aastra Web UI must be converted to decimal (for
example, 65535).
Format
Not Applicable
0 (Debug)
Default Value
Range
Aastra Web UI:
Debug
Info
Warn
Error
Fatal
Configuration files:
0 (Debug)
1 (Info)
2 (Warn)
3 (Error)
4 (Fatal)
Example
log level: 3
41-001160-00, Rev 01 Release 2.0
A-139
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
IP Phone Administrator Guide
Troubleshooting Parameters
A-140
41-001160-00, Rev 01 Release 2.0
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Appendix B
Configuration Server Setup
About this appendix
Introduction
This appendix describes how to setup the TFTP protocol configuration server in
your network.
Topics
Topic
Page
Configuration Server Protocol Setup
TFTP Server Set-up
page B-2
page B-2
41-001160-00, Rev 01 Release 2.0
B-1
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
IP Phone Administrator Guide
Configuration Server Protocol Setup
Configuration Server Protocol Setup
TFTP Server Set-up
There are a number of TFTP servers available. PumpKIN is one of such
TFTP servers. Use the keywords “pumpkin TFTP server” on Google and
you should get the web site where you can download the software
from. Installing PumpKIN is straightforward. To configure the directory
from where you would be serving the files, click on the Options button
on PumpKIN’s main window as shown in the following figure.
It is important to select the “Give all files” radio button under the “Read Request
Behavior” category. This makes the files to be served without any manual
intervention when requested.
B-2
41-001160-00, Rev 01 Release 2.0
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Configuration Server Setup
Configuration Server Protocol Setup
If you want to prevent users from writing files to the directory select
the “Deny all requests” in the “Write Request Behavior” category. Click
the OK button after you have entered all the required information. All the
firmware files should be in the file system root directory. Currently we
do not support downloads from files present in sub-directories. Consult
PumpKIN’s documentation if you need more information on how to set-up the
TFTP server.
41-001160-00, Rev 01 Release 2.0
B-3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Appendix C
Configuring the IP Phone
at the Asterisk IP PBX
About this appendix
Introduction
This appendix describes how to setup a user’s phone with an extension to make
and receive calls using the Asterisk as the PBX.
Topics
This appendix covers the following topics:
Topic
Page
IP Phone at the Asterisk IP PBX
page C-2
41-001160-00, Rev 01 Release 2.0
C-1
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
IP Phone Administrator Guide
IP Phone at the Asterisk IP PBX
IP Phone at the Asterisk IP PBX
The following configuration illustrates how to create a user with an extension to
make and receive calls using the Asterisk as the PBX. This configuration is
defined in the sip.conf file present along with the other configuration files that are
created when Asterisk is installed. Usually, the configuration files can be found at
the /etc/asterisk directory.
;This is used in the “extensions.conf” file to identify this
;physical phone when issuing Dial commands.
[phone1]
;The type to use for the 57i is “friend”.
;”Peer” is used when the Asterisk is contacting a proxy,
;”user” is used for phones that can only make calls
;and “friend” acts as both a peer and a user.
type=friend
;If your host has an entry in your DNS then you just enter the
;machines name in the host= field.
host=dynamic
defaultip=192.168.1.1 ;default IP address that the phone is
;configured to
;The password that phone1 will use to register with this PBX
secret=1234
dtmfmode=rfc2833;Choices are inband, rfc2833, or info
mailbox=1000 ;Mailbox for message waiting indicator
;If a phone is not in a valid context you will not be
C-2
41-001160-00, Rev 01 Release 2.0
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Configuring the IP Phone at the Asterisk IP PBX
IP Phone at the Asterisk IP PBX
;able to use it. In this example' sip' is used. You can use
;whatever you like, but make sure they are the same, you will
;need to make an entry in your extensions.conf file (which we
;will get to later)
context=sip
callerid="Phone 1" <1234>
After this is defined in the “sip.conf” file, some information has to be entered in
the “extensions.conf” file present in the same directory as the “sip.conf” file. The
following definition in the file under the [sip]section/context completes defining
the extension for the 57i phone.
exten -> 1234,1,Dial(SIP/phone1,20)
This definition completes configuring the 57i phone at the IP PBX system.
To verify whether the extension has been successfully registered at the IP PBX
system, enter the Asterisk console and reload Asterisk. Use the command “sip
show peers” at the console. This will display the extensions that are registered at
the IP PBX system.
Name/username Host
Mask
Port
Status
phone1/phone1192.168.1.1(D) 255.255.255.255 5060
Unmonitored
This completes the basic set-up for the 57i phone with 1234 extension at
the Asterisk IP PBX system. Refer to Asterisk documentation for set-up on
extended or advanced features such as voice mail and call forwarding, etc.
41-001160-00, Rev 01 Release 2.0
C-3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Appendix D
Sample Configuration Files
About this appendix
Introduction
This appendix provides sample configuration files for the 57i, 57i CT, and 53i.
This appendix covers the following topics:
Topics
Topic
Page
Sample Configuration Files
page D-2
page D-2
page D-12
page D-29
page D-29
57i Sample Configuration File
57i CT Sample Configuration File
53i Sample Configuration File
53i Sample Configuration File
41-001160-00, Rev 01 Release 2.0
D-1
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
IP Phone Administrator Guide
Sample Configuration Files
Sample Configuration Files
This section consists of the sample configuration files necessary to configure the
IP phones. The general format is similar to configuration files used by several
Unix-based programs. Any text following a number sign (#) on a line is
considered to be a comment, unless the # is contained within
double-quotes. Currently, Boolean fields use 0 for false and 1 for true.
57i Sample Configuration File
# Sample Configuration File
# ===========================
# Date: October 20th, 2005
# Phone Model: 57i
# Notes:
#
# The general format used here is similar to configuration files
# used by several UNIX-based programs. Any text following a number
# sign (#) is considered to be a comment, unless the number sign is
# contained within double-quotes ("#") where it is considered to be
# a pound. For Boolean fields, 0 = false, 1 = true.
# Comments:
#
# This file contains sample configurations for the "aastra.cfg" or
# "<mac>.cfg" file. The settings included here are examples only.
# You should change/comment the values to suit your requirements.
#
# Not all possible paramters are shown, refer to the admin guide for
# the full list of supported parameters, their defaults and valid
# ranges.
#
D-2
41-001160-00, Rev 01 Release 2.0
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Sample Configuration Files
Sample Configuration Files
# The Aastra 57i, 57iCT, and 53i phones will download 2
# configuration files from the TFTP server while restarting, the
# "aastra.cfg" file and the "<mac>.cfg" file. These two configuration
# files can be used to configure all of the settings of the phone with
# the exception of assigning a static IP address to a phone and line
# settings, which should only be set in the "<mac>.cfg" file.
#
# The "aastra.cfg" file configures the settings server wide, while
# the "<mac>.cfg" file configures only the phone with the MAC address
# for which the file is named (for example, "00085d0304f4.cfg"). The
# settings in the "aastra.cfg" file will be overridden by settings
# which also appear in the "<mac>.cfg" file.
#------------------------------------------------------------------
# DHCP Setting
# ==============
#dhcp: 1 # DHCP enabled.
# DHCP:
# 0 = false, means DHCP is disabled.
# 1 = true, means DHCP is enabled.
#
# Notes:
#
# DHCP is normally set from the Options list on the phone or
# the web interface
#
# If DHCP is disabled, the following network settings will
# have to be configured manually either through the configuration
# files, the Options List in the phone, or the Web Client: IP
# Address (of the phone), Subnet Mask, Gateway, DNS, and TFTP
# Server.
#-------------------------------------------------------------------
41-001160-00, Rev 01 Release 2.0
D-3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
IP Phone Administrator Guide
Sample Configuration Files
# Network Settings
## = = = = = = = =
# Notes: If DHCP is enabled, you do not need to set these network
# settings. Although depending on you DHCP server configuration you
# may still have to set the dns address.
#ip:
# This value is unique to each phone on a server
# and should be set in the "<mac>.cfg" file if
# setting this manually.
#subnet mask:
#default gateway:
#dns1:
#dns2:
# Time Server Settings
## =====================
#time server disabled: 1 # Time server disabled.
#time server1:
#time server2:
#time server3:
# Enable time server and enter at
# least one time server IP address or
# qualified domain name
# Time Server Disabled:
# 0 = false, means the time server is not disabled.
# 1 = true, means the time server is disabled.
# NAT Settings
# ===============
# Option 1:
#
# If you are connecting to a Nortel MCS call server and there is a
D-4
41-001160-00, Rev 01 Release 2.0
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Sample Configuration Files
Sample Configuration Files
# NAT device between the server and the phone, then you must set the
# following two parameters for the phone to function correctly.
#sip nortel nat support: 1
#sip nortel nat timer: 60
# 1 = enabled
# seconds between keep alive messages
# Option 2:
#
# If you are using a session border controller, you should set the
# outbound proxy to the session border controller address
#sip outbound proxy: sbc.aastra.com
#sip outbound proxy port: 0
# a value of 0 enables SRV
# lookups for the address of
# the proxy.
# Option 3:
#
# If you know the public IP address of your NAT device and and have
# opened up a port for the SIP messages then you can statically
# assign this information.
#sip nat ip: 67.123.122.90
#sip nat port: 5890
# Additional Network Settings
# =============================
#sip rtp port: 3000
# Eg. RTP packets are sent to port 3000.
#-------------------------------------------------------------------
# Configuration Server Settings
41-001160-00, Rev 01 Release 2.0
D-5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
IP Phone Administrator Guide
Sample Configuration Files
## = = = = = = = = = = = = = = =
# Notes: This section defines which server the phone retrieves new
# firmware images and configuration files from. Three protocols are
# supported TFTP, FTP and HTTP
download protocol: TFTP # valid values are TFTP, FTP and HTTP
## TFTP server settings
tftp server: 192.168.0.130
#alternate tftp server:
#use alternate tftp server: 1
# If your DHCP server assigns
# a TFTP server address which
# you do not use, you can use
# the alternate tftp server.
## FTP server settings
#ftp server: 192.168.0.131 # can be IP or FQDN
#ftp username: aastra
#ftp password: 57iaastra
## HTTP server settings (for http://bogus.aastra.com/firmware/)
#http server: bogus.aastra.com # can be IP or FQDN
#http path: firmware
#-------------------------------------------------------------------
# Dial Plan Settings
# =====================
#
# Notes:
#
# As you dial a number on the phone, the phone will initiate a call
# when one of the following conditions are meet:
D-6
41-001160-00, Rev 01 Release 2.0
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Sample Configuration Files
Sample Configuration Files
#
# (1) The entered number is an exact match in the dial plan
# (2) The "#" symbol has been pressed
# (3) A timeout occurs
#
# The dial plan is a regular expression that supports the following
# syntax:
#
#
#
#
#
#
#
#
#
#
#
#
0,1,2,3,4,5,6,7,8,9,*,# : matches the keypad symbols
x
+
: matches any digit (0...9)
: matches 0 or more repetitions of the
: previous expression
[]
: matches any number inside the brackets
: can be used with a "-" to represent a
: range
()
|
: expression grouping
: either or
# If the dialled number doesn't match the dial plan then the call
# is rejected.
sip digit timeout: 3
# set the inter-digit timeout in seconds
# Example dial plans
sip dial plan: "x+#|xx+*" # this is the default dial string, note
# that is must be quoted since it contains
# a '#' character
#sip dial plan: [01]xxx|[2-8]xxxx|91xxxxxxxxxx
# accecpt any 4 digit number beginning
# with a 0 or 1, any 5 digit number
# beginning with a number between 2 and 8
# (inclusive) or a 12 digit number
# beginning with 91
41-001160-00, Rev 01 Release 2.0
D-7
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
IP Phone Administrator Guide
Sample Configuration Files
#sip dial plan terminator: 1 # enable sending of the "#" symbol to
# to the proxy in the dial string
#------------------------------------------------------------------
# General SIP Settings
# = = = = = = = = = = =
#sip session timer: 30
# enable support of RFC4028, the default
# value of 0 disables this functionality
#sip transport protocol: 0 # use UDP (1), TCP (2) or both (0) for sip
# messaging
#sip use basic codecs: 1
#sip out-of-band dtmf: 0
# limit codecs to G711 and G729
# turn off support for RFC2833 (on by
# default)
# Global SIP User Settings
# ==========================
#
# Notes:
# These settings are used as the default configuration for the hard
# key lines on the phone. That is:
#
#
#
#
L1 to L4 on the 57i and 57iCT
L1 to L3 on the 53i
# These can be over-ridden on a per-line basis using the per-line
# settings.
#
# See the Admin Guide for a detailed explaination of how this works
D-8
41-001160-00, Rev 01 Release 2.0
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Sample Configuration Files
Sample Configuration Files
sip screen name: Joe Smith
sip user name: 4256
# the name display on the phone's screen
# the phone number
sip display name: Joseph Smith # the caller name sent out when making
# a call.
sip vmail: *78
# the number to reach voicemail on
sip auth name: jsmith
sip password: 12345
# account used to authenticate user
# password for authentication account
sip mode: 0
# line type:
# 0 - generic,
# 1 - BroadSoft SCA line
# 2 - Nortel line
sip proxy ip: proxy.aastra.com # IP address or FQDN of proxy
sip proxy port: 5060
# port used for SIP messages on the
# proxy. Set to 0 to enable SRV
# lookups
sip registrar ip: aastra.com # IP address or FQDN of registrar
sip registrar port: 0 # as proxy port, but for the registrar
sip registration period: 3600 # registration period in seconds
# Per-line SIP Settings
# ======================
# configure line 3 as the support Broadsoft SCA line
# - the proxy and registrar settings are taken from the global
#
settings above
sip line3 screen name: Support
sip line3 user name: 4000
sip line3 display name: Aastra Support
sip line3 auth name: support
sip line3 password: 54321
sip line3 mode: 1
41-001160-00, Rev 01 Release 2.0
D-9
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
IP Phone Administrator Guide
Sample Configuration Files
sip line3 vmail: *78
# configure line 5 (a soft key line) as an ordinary line
# of a test server
sip line5 screen name: Test 1
sip line5 user name: 5551001
sip line5 display name: Test 1
sip line5 auth name: 5551001
sip line5 password: 5551001
sip line5 mode: 0
sip line5 proxy ip: 10.50.10.102
sip line5 proxy port: 5060
sip line5 registrar ip: 10.50.10.102
sip line5 registrar port: 5060
sip line5 registration period: 60
#-------------------------------------------------------------------
# Softkey Settings
#
# Softkeys can be set either server wide or unique to each phone.
# Setting softkeys as line/call appearances should be done in the
# "<mac>.cfg" file, since these are unique to each phone.
# Notes:
#
# There are a maximum of 18 softkeys that can be configured on the
# 57i or 57iCT phone. These can be set up through either of the 2
# configuration files, depending on whether this is to be server wide
# ("aastra.cfg") or phone specific ("<mac>.cfg"). Each softkey needs
# to be numbered from 1 - 18, for example "softkey12 type:
# speeddial". Softkeys can be set up as speeddials or as additional
# call/line appearances and have a type, label and value associated
D-10
41-001160-00, Rev 01 Release 2.0
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Sample Configuration Files
Sample Configuration Files
# with it as seen here in the default softkey settings.
# SOFTKEY TYPES: "line", "speeddial", "blf", "list", "dnd"
# SOFTKEY LABEL: Alpha numeric name for the softkey. The maximum
#
#
number of characters for this value is 10 for
speeddials and dnd, 9 chars for lines, blf
# SOFTKEY VALUE: If softkey type is a speeddial, any DTMFs (from
#
#
#
#
0 - 9, *, "#") or a comma (,) for 500ms pause and
'E' for On-hook can be set for the value.
If softkey type is blf it is the extension you want
to monitor.
# SOFTKEY LINE: This is line associated with the softkey. For line
#
#
#
softkeys the value must be between 5 and 9 (1 - 4
are already hardcoded as the L1, L2, L3 and L4 hard
key line/call appearances)
# Speed Dials
softkey1 type: speeddial
softkey1 label: "Ext Pickup"
softkey1 value: *8
softkey2 type: speeddial
softkey2 label: "Call Return"
softkey2 value: *69
# DND Key
softkey4 type: dnd
softkey4 label: DND
# Line appearance
softkey6 type: line
softkey6 label: Test 1
softkey6 line: 5
# blf
softkey8 type: blf
softkey8 label: Jane Doe
softkey8 value: 4559
41-001160-00, Rev 01 Release 2.0
D-11
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
IP Phone Administrator Guide
Sample Configuration Files
softkey8 line: 1
# list
softkey11 type: list
softkey12 type: list
57i CT Sample Configuration File
# Sample Configuration File
# =========================
# Date: October 26th, 2005
# Phone Model: 57iCT
# Notes:
#
# The general format used here is similar to configuration files
# used by several UNIX-based programs. Any text following a number
# sign (#) is considered to be a comment, unless the number sign is
# contained within double-quotes ("#") where it is considered to be
# a pound. For Boolean fields, 0 = false, 1 = true.
# Comments:
#
# This file contains sample configurations for the "aastra.cfg" or
# "<mac>.cfg" file. The settings included here are examples only.
# You should change/comment the values to suit your requirements.
#
# Not all possible paramters are shown, refer to the admin guide for
# the full list of supported parameters, their defaults and valid
# ranges.
#
# The Aastra 57i, 57iCT, and 53i phones will download 2
# configuration files from the TFTP server while restarting, the
D-12
41-001160-00, Rev 01 Release 2.0
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Sample Configuration Files
Sample Configuration Files
# "aastra.cfg" file and the "<mac>.cfg" file. These two configuration
# files can be used to configure all of the settings of the phone with
# the exception of assigning a static IP address to a phone and line
# settings, which should only be set in the "<mac>.cfg" file.
#
# The "aastra.cfg" file configures the settings server wide, while the
# "<mac>.cfg" file configures only the phone with the MAC address for
# which the file is named (for example, "00085d0304f4.cfg"). The
# settings in the "aastra.cfg" file will be overridden by settings
# which also appear in the "<mac>.cfg" file.
#-------------------------------------------------------------------
# DHCP Setting
# ============
#dhcp: 1 # DHCP enabled.
# DHCP:
# 0 = false, means DHCP is disabled.
# 1 = true, means DHCP is enabled.
#
# Notes:
#
# DHCP is normally set from the Options list on the phone or
# the web interface
#
# If DHCP is disabled, the following network settings will
# have to be configured manually either through the configuration
# files, the Options List in the phone, or the Web Client: IP
# Address (of the phone), Subnet Mask, Gateway, DNS, and TFTP
# Server.
#-------------------------------------------------------------------
41-001160-00, Rev 01 Release 2.0
D-13
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
IP Phone Administrator Guide
Sample Configuration Files
# Network Settings
# ================
# Notes: If DHCP is enabled, you do not need to set these network
# settings. Although depending on you DHCP server configuration you
# may still have to set the dns address.
D-14
41-001160-00, Rev 01 Release 2.0
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Sample Configuration Files
Sample Configuration Files
#ip:
# This value is unique to each phone on a server
# and should be set in the "<mac>.cfg" file if
# setting this manually.
#subnet mask:
#default gateway:
#dns1:
#dns2:
# Time Server Settings
# ====================
#time server disabled: 1 # Time server disabled.
#time server1:
#time server2:
#time server3:
# Enable time server and enter at
# least one time server IP address or
# qualified domain name
# Time Server Disabled:
# 0 = false, means the time server is not disabled.
# 1 = true, means the time server is disabled.
# NAT Settings
#=============
# Option 1:
#
# If you are connecting to a Nortel MCS call server and there is a
# NAT device between the server and the phone, then you must set the
# following two parameters for the phone to function correctly.
#sip nortel nat support: 1
# 1 = enabled
41-001160-00, Rev 01 Release 2.0
D-15
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
IP Phone Administrator Guide
Sample Configuration Files
#sip nortel nat timer: 60
# seconds between keep alive messages
# Option 2:
#
# If you are using a session border controller, you should set the
# outbound proxy to the session border controller address
#sip outbound proxy: sbc.aastra.com
#sip outbound proxy port: 0
# a value of 0 enables SRV
# lookups for the address of
# the proxy.
# Option 3:
#
# If you know the public IP address of your NAT device and and have
# opened up a port for the SIP messages then you can statically
# assign this information.
#sip nat ip: 67.123.122.90
#sip nat port: 5890
# Additional Network Settings
#============================
#sip rtp port: 3000
# Eg. RTP packets are sent to port 3000.
#------------------------------------------------------------------
# Configuration Server Settings
# =============================
D-16
41-001160-00, Rev 01 Release 2.0
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Sample Configuration Files
Sample Configuration Files
# Notes: This section defines which server the phone retrieves new
# firmware images and configuration files from. Three protocols are
# supported TFTP, FTP and HTTP
download protocol: TFTP # valid values are TFTP, FTP and HTTP
## TFTP server settings
tftp server: 192.168.0.130
#alternate tftp server:
#use alternate tftp server: 1
# If your DHCP server assigns
# a TFTP server address which
# you do not use, you can use
# the alternate tftp server.
## FTP server settings
#ftp server: 192.168.0.131 # can be IP or FQDN
#ftp username: aastra
#ftp password: 57iaastra
## HTTP server settings (for http://bogus.aastra.com/firmware/)
#http server: bogus.aastra.com # can be IP or FQDN
#http path: firmware
#------------------------------------------------------------------
# Dial Plan Settings
# ==================
#
# Notes:
#
41-001160-00, Rev 01 Release 2.0
D-17
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
IP Phone Administrator Guide
Sample Configuration Files
# As you dial a number on the phone, the phone will initiate a call
# when one of the following conditions are meet:
#
# (1) The entered number is an exact match in the dial plan
# (2) The "#" symbol has been pressed
# (3) A timeout occurs
#
# The dial plan is a regular expression that supports the following
# syntax:
#
#
#
#
#
#
#
#
#
#
#
#
0,1,2,3,4,5,6,7,8,9,*,# : matches the keypad symbols
x
+
: matches any digit (0...9)
: matches 0 or more repetitions of the
: previous expression
[]
: matches any number inside the brackets
: can be used with a "-" to represent a
: range
()
|
: expression grouping
: either or
# If the dialled number doesn't match the dial plan then the call
# is rejected.
sip digit timeout: 3
# Example dial plans
# set the inter-digit timeout in seconds
sip dial plan: "x+#|xx+*" # this is the default dial string, note
# that is must be quoted since it contains
# a '#' character
#sip dial plan: [01]xxx|[2-8]xxxx|91xxxxxxxxxx
# accecpt any 4 digit number beginning
D-18
41-001160-00, Rev 01 Release 2.0
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Sample Configuration Files
Sample Configuration Files
# with a 0 or 1, any 5 digit number
# beginning with a number between 2 and 8
# (inclusive) or a 12 digit number
# beginning with 91
#sip dial plan terminator: 1 # enable sending of the "#" symbol to
# to the proxy in the dial string
#-------------------------------------------------------------------
# General SIP Settings
# ====================
#sip session timer: 30
# enable support of RFC4028, the default
# value of 0 disables this functionality
#sip transport protocol: 0 # use UDP (1), TCP (2) or both (0) for sip
# messaging
#sip use basic codecs: 1
#sip out-of-band dtmf: 0
# limit codecs to G711 and G729
# turn off support for RFC2833 (on by
# default)
# Global SIP User Settings
# ========================
#
# Notes:
# These settings are used as the default configuration for the hard
# key lines on the phone. That is:
#
41-001160-00, Rev 01 Release 2.0
D-19
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
IP Phone Administrator Guide
Sample Configuration Files
#
#
#
L1 to L4 on the 57i and 57iCT
L1 to L3 on the 53i
# These can be over-ridden on a per-line basis using the per-line
# settings.
#
# See the Admin Guide for a detailed explaination of how this works
sip screen name: Joe Smith
sip user name: 4256
# the name display on the phone's screen
# the phone number
sip display name: Joseph Smith # the caller name sent out when making
# a call.
sip vmail: *78
# the number to reach voicemail on
sip auth name: jsmith
sip password: 12345
# account used to authenticate user
# password for authentication account
sip mode: 0
# line type:
# 0 - generic,
# 1 - BroadSoft SCA line
# 2 - Nortel line
sip proxy ip: proxy.aastra.com # IP address or FQDN of proxy
sip proxy port: 5060
# port used for SIP messages on the
# proxy. Set to 0 to enable SRV
# lookups
sip registrar ip: aastra.com # IP address or FQDN of registrar
sip registrar port: 0 # as proxy port, but for the registrar
sip registration period: 3600 # registration period in seconds
# Per-line SIP Settings
# =====================
D-20
41-001160-00, Rev 01 Release 2.0
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Sample Configuration Files
Sample Configuration Files
# configure line 3 as the support Broadsoft SCA line
# - the proxy and registrar settings are taken from the global
#
settings above
sip line3 screen name: Support
sip line3 user name: 4000
sip line3 display name: Aastra Support
sip line3 auth name: support
sip line3 password: 54321
sip line3 mode: 1
sip line3 vmail: *78
# configure line 5 (a soft key line) as an ordinary line
# of a test server
sip line5 screen name: Test 1
sip line5 user name: 5551001
sip line5 display name: Test 1
sip line5 auth name: 5551001
sip line5 password: 5551001
sip line5 mode: 0
sip line5 proxy ip: 10.50.10.102
sip line5 proxy port: 5060
sip line5 registrar ip: 10.50.10.102
sip line5 registrar port: 5060
sip line5 registration period: 60
#-------------------------------------------------------------------
# Softkey Settings
# ================
41-001160-00, Rev 01 Release 2.0
D-21
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
IP Phone Administrator Guide
Sample Configuration Files
# Softkeys can be set either server wide or unique to each phone.
# Setting softkeys as line/call appearances should be done in the
# "<mac>.cfg" file, since these are unique to each phone.
# Notes:
#
# There are a maximum of 18 softkeys that can be configured on the
# 57i or 57iCT phone. These can be set up through either of the 2
# configuration files, depending on whether this is to be server wide
# ("aastra.cfg") or phone specific ("<mac>.cfg"). Each softkey needs
# to be numbered from 1 - 18, for example "softkey12 type:
# speeddial". Softkeys can be set up as speeddials or as additional
# call/line appearances and have a type, label and value associated
# with it as seen here in the default softkey settings.
# SOFTKEY TYPES: "line", "speeddial", "blf", "list", "dnd"
# SOFTKEY LABEL: Alpha numeric name for the softkey. The maximum
#
#
number of characters for this value is 10 for
speeddials and dnd, 9 chars for lines, blf
# SOFTKEY VALUE: If softkey type is a speeddial, any DTMFs (from
#
#
#
#
0 - 9, *, "#") or a comma (,) for 500ms pause and
'E' for On-hook can be set for the value.
If softkey type is blf it is the extension you want
to monitor.
# SOFTKEY LINE: This is line associated with the softkey. For line
#
#
#
softkeys the value must be between 5 and 9 (1 - 4
are already hardcoded as the L1, L2, L3 and L4 hard
key line/call appearances)
# Speed Dials
softkey1 type: speeddial
softkey1 label: "Ext Pickup"
softkey1 value: *8
D-22
41-001160-00, Rev 01 Release 2.0
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Sample Configuration Files
Sample Configuration Files
softkey2 type: speeddial
softkey2 label: "Call Return"
softkey2 value: *69
# DND Key
softkey4 type: dnd
softkey4 label: DND
# Line appearance
softkey6 type: line
softkey6 label: Test 1
softkey6 line: 5
# blf
softkey8 type: blf
softkey8 label: Jane Doe
softkey8 value: 4559
softkey8 line: 1
# list
softkey11 type: list
softkey12 type: list
#-------------------------------------------------------------------
# Cordless Handset Feature Keys
# =============================
# Notes:
#
# In addition to the configuration parameters that exist on the 57i
# phone, following are the parameters specific to the 57i Cordless
# phones' handset. These parameters can be defined either int the
41-001160-00, Rev 01 Release 2.0
D-23
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
IP Phone Administrator Guide
Sample Configuration Files
# aastra.cfg or the <mac>.cfg files.
#
# The feature keys are displayed when the user presses the F button
# on the cordless phone's hand set. If any changes to the features
# keys are made using these parameters the feature keys that exist on
# the hand set have to be refreshed. To refresh the feature keys
# simply open a new line or press one of the feature keys that are
# available from the hand set. After a couple of seconds the cordless
# should get the new list from the base set. There are 15 feature
# keys that can be configured for the cordless hand set. Each feature
# key has the following settings. N corresponds to the feature key
# that is being configured for and ranges from 0-14. Feature key N
# En label: "String" Feature key N Fr label: "Fr-String" Feature key
# N Sp label: "Sp-String" Feature key N control: 1
#Takes an
# integer value Feature key N hs event: 1 #Takes an integer value
# Feature key N base event: 1 #Takes an integer value
#key list version: 1
# The parameter value has to be incremented by one whenever the
# parameters that carry the feature keys change. The range is from
# 1-254. After reaching 254 start over from 1.
#Feature key 0 En label: "Line 1"
# English label for the key. Displayed when the phone's language is
# set to use English
#Feature key 0 Fr label: "Fr-Line 1"
# French label for the key. Displayed when the phone's language
# is set to use French
#Feature key 0 Sp label: "Sp-Line 1"
# Spanish label for the key. Displayed when the phone's language
# is set to use Spanish
D-24
41-001160-00, Rev 01 Release 2.0
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Sample Configuration Files
Sample Configuration Files
Feature key 0 Gr label: "Gr-Line 1"
# German label for the key. Displayed when the phone's language
# is set to use German
Feature key 0 It label: "It-Line 1"
# Italian label for the key. Displayed when the phone's language
# is set to use Italian
#Feature key 0 control: 1
# 1 - Make the key configurable by the user through the phone and
#
the phone's web client
# 2 - Locks the key from user modifications. User cannot modify
this key from the handset or the phone's web client.
# 4 - Hide this key. Do not show it in the Feature keys list in the
cordless handset
# 6 - Lock and hide this key. Do not show it in the Feature keys
#
#
#
#
list in the cordless handset and do not let the user modify
this key using the phone or the web client.
#Feature key 0 hs event: 7
# These events are for handset specific events. Events can be local
# to the handset like directory/caller's list, intercom etc. or may
# be an event that is sent to the base set for fruther processing.
# When this key is configured as a base event then the base set
# will process the value of this key in conjunction with the value
# configured for the "Feature key N base event". Where N is the
# feature key is being configured for.
# In addition to the values listed below the valid values are
# [7-23]. The values [7-23] indicate generic handset events. If
# you are using values within this range make sure to use the value
# only once.
# The events local to the handset are as follows:
#
41-001160-00, Rev 01 Release 2.0
D-25
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
IP Phone Administrator Guide
Sample Configuration Files
#
#
#
#
#
#
#
58 - Menu (Options)
59 - Feature Key
60 - Redial
61 - Directory
62 - Callers' list
63 - Services
86 - Icom
#Feature key 0 base event: 1
# Indicates a corresponding action to perform on the base set when
# the "Feature key N hs event" is set to any value between 7-23.
#
# 1 - Seize base set's line1
# 2 - Seize base set's line2
# 3 - Seize base set's line3
# 4 - Seize base set's line4
# 5 - Seize base set's line5
# 6 - Seize base set's line6
# 7 - Seize base set's line7
# 8 - Seize base set's line8
# 9 - Seize base set's line9
# 10 - Seize base set's line0
# 11 - Send the base set's transfer event
# 12 - Send the base set's conference event
# 13 - Make feature list public
# Example configuration
key list version: 1
Feature key 0 En label: "Line 1"
Feature key 0 Fr label: "Fr-Line 1"
Feature key 0 Sp label: "Sp-Line 1"
Feature key 0 control: 0
D-26
41-001160-00, Rev 01 Release 2.0
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Sample Configuration Files
Sample Configuration Files
Feature key 0 hs event: 7
Feature key 0 base event: 1
Feature key 1 En label: "Conf."
Feature key 1 Fr label: "Fr-Conf."
Feature key 1 Sp label: "Sp-Conf."
Feature key 1 control: 1
Feature key 1 hs event: 8
Feature key 1 base event: 12
Feature key 2 En label: "Xfer"
Feature key 2 Fr label: "Fr-Xfer."
Feature key 2 Sp label: "Sp-Xfer."
Feature key 2 control: 2
Feature key 2 hs event: 9
Feature key 2 base event: 11
Feature key 3 En label: "Icom"
Feature key 3 Fr label: "Fr-Icom"
Feature key 3 Sp label: "Sp-Icom"
Feature key 3 control: 1
Feature key 3 hs event: 86
Feature key 3 base event: 13
Feature key 4 En label: "Opt"
Feature key 4 Fr label: "Fr-Opt"
Feature key 4 Sp label: "Sp-Opt"
Feature key 4 hs event: 58
Feature key 4 control: 1
Feature key 4 base event: 13
Feature key 5 En label: "Callers"
Feature key 5 Fr label: "Fr-Callers"
Feature key 5 Sp label: "Sp-Callers"
41-001160-00, Rev 01 Release 2.0
D-27
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
IP Phone Administrator Guide
Sample Configuration Files
Feature key 5 hs event: 62
Feature key 5 control: 1
Feature key 5 base event: 13
Feature key 6 En label: "Top"
Feature key 6 Fr label: "Fr-Top"
Feature key 6 Sp label: "Sp-Top"
Feature key 6 hs event: 17
Feature key 6 control: 1
Feature key 6 base event: 13
Feature key 7 En label: "Redial"
Feature key 7 Fr label: "Fr-Redial"
Feature key 7 Sp label: "Sp-Redial"
Feature key 7 hs event: 60
Feature key 7 control: 4
Feature key 7 base event: 13
Feature key 8 En label: "Dir."
Feature key 8 Fr label: "Fr-Dir."
Feature key 8 Sp label: "Sp-Dir."
Feature key 8 hs event: 61
Feature key 8 control: 2
Feature key 8 base event: 13
Feature key 9 En label: "Services"
Feature key 9 Fr label: "Fr-Services"
Feature key 9 Sp label: "Sp-Services"
Feature key 9 hs event: 63
Feature key 9 control: 1
Feature key 9 base event: 13
D-28
41-001160-00, Rev 01 Release 2.0
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Sample Configuration Files
Sample Configuration Files
53i Sample Configuration File
# Sample Configuration File
#= = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = =
# Date: October 26th, 2005
# Phone Model: 53i
# Notes:
#
# The general format used here is similar to configuration files
# used by several UNIX-based programs. Any text following a number
# sign (#) is considered to be a comment, unless the number sign is
# contained within double-quotes ("#") where it is considered to be
# a pound. For Boolean fields, 0 = false, 1 = true.
# Comments:
#
# This file contains sample configurations for the "aastra.cfg" or
# "<mac>.cfg" file. The settings included here are examples only.
# You should change/comment the values to suit your requirements.
#
# Not all possible paramters are shown, refer to the admin guide
# for the full list of supported parameters, their defaults and
# valid ranges.
#
# The Aastra 57i, 57iCT, and 53i phones will download 2
# configuration files from the TFTP server while restarting, the
# "aastra.cfg" file and the "<mac>.cfg" file. These two
# configuration files can be used to configure all of the settings
# of the phone with the exception of assigning a static IP address
# to a phone and line settings, which should only be set in the "<mac>.cfg" file.
#
41-001160-00, Rev 01 Release 2.0
D-29
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
IP Phone Administrator Guide
Sample Configuration Files
# The "aastra.cfg" file configures the settings server wide, while
# the "<mac>.cfg" file configures only the phone with the MAC
# address for which the file is named (for example,
# "00085d0304f4.cfg"). The settings in the "aastra.cfg" file will
# be overridden by settings which also appear in the "<mac>.cfg" file.
#-----------------------------------------------------------------
# DHCP Setting
# =============
#dhcp: 1 # DHCP enabled.
# DHCP:
# 0 = false, means DHCP is disabled.
#1 = true, means DHCP is enabled.
#
# Notes:
#
# DHCP is normally set from the Options list on the phone or
# the web interface
#
# If DHCP is disabled, the following network settings will
# have to be configured manually either through the configuration
# files, the Options List in the phone, or the Web Client: IP
# Address (of the phone), Subnet Mask, Gateway, DNS, and TFTP
# Server.
#-----------------------------------------------------------------
# Network Settings
# = = = = = = = = =
# Notes: If DHCP is enabled, you do not need to set these network
# settings. Although depending on you DHCP server configuration
# you may still have to set the dns address.
D-30
41-001160-00, Rev 01 Release 2.0
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Sample Configuration Files
Sample Configuration Files
#ip:
# This value is unique to each phone on a server
# and should be set in the "<mac>.cfg" file if
# setting this manually.
#subnet mask:
#default gateway:
#dns1:
#dns2:
# Time Server Settings
# =====================
#time server disabled: 1 # Time server disabled.
#time server1:
#time server2:
#time server3:
# Enable time server and enter at
# least one time server IP address or
# qualified domain name.
# Time Server Disabled:
# 0 = false, means the time server is not disabled.
# 1 = true, means the time server is disabled.
# NAT Settings
# = = = = = = =
# Option 1:
#
# If you are connecting to a Nortel MCS call server and there is a
# NAT device between the server and the phone, then you must set
# the following two parameters for the phone to function
# correctly.
#sip nortel nat support: 1
# 1 = enabled
41-001160-00, Rev 01 Release 2.0
D-31
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
IP Phone Administrator Guide
Sample Configuration Files
#sip nortel nat timer: 60
# seconds between keep alive messages
D-32
41-001160-00, Rev 01 Release 2.0
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Sample Configuration Files
Sample Configuration Files
# Option 2:
#
# If you are using a session border controller, you should set the
# outbound proxy to the session border controller address
#sip outbound proxy: sbc.aastra.com
#sip outbound proxy port: 0
# a value of 0 enables SRV
# lookups for the address of
# the proxy.
# Option 3:
#
# If you know the public IP address of your NAT device and and have
# opened up a port for the SIP messages then you can statically
# assign this information.
#sip nat ip: 67.123.122.90
#sip nat port: 5890
# Additional Network Settings
# ============================
#sip rtp port: 3000
# Eg. RTP packets are sent to port 3000.
#-----------------------------------------------------------------
# Configuration Server Settings
# = = = = = = = = = = = = = =
# Notes: This section defines which server the phone retrieves new
# firmware images and configuration files from. Three protocols
# are supported TFTP, FTP and HTTP
download protocol: TFTP # valid values are TFTP, FTP and HTTP
41-001160-00, Rev 01 Release 2.0
D-33
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
IP Phone Administrator Guide
Sample Configuration Files
D-34
41-001160-00, Rev 01 Release 2.0
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Sample Configuration Files
Sample Configuration Files
## TFTP server settings
tftp server: 192.168.0.130
#alternate tftp server:
#use alternate tftp server: 1 # If your DHCP server assigns
# a TFTP server address which
# you do not use, you can use
# the alternate tftp server.
## FTP server settings
#ftp server: 192.168.0.131 # can be IP or FQDN
#ftp username: aastra
#ftp password: 57iaastra
## HTTP server settings (for http://bogus.aastra.com/firmware/)
#http server: bogus.aastra.com # can be IP or FQDN
#http path: firmware
#----------------------------------------------------------------
# Dial Plan Settings
# ====================
#
# Notes:
#
# As you dial a number on the phone, the phone will initiate a call
# when one of the following conditions are meet:
#
# (1) The entered number is an exact match in the dial plan
# (2) The "#" symbol has been pressed
# (3) A timeout occurs
#
# The dial plan is a regular expression that supports the
# following:
# syntax:
41-001160-00, Rev 01 Release 2.0
D-35
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
IP Phone Administrator Guide
Sample Configuration Files
#
D-36
41-001160-00, Rev 01 Release 2.0
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Sample Configuration Files
Sample Configuration Files
#
#
#
#
#
#
#
#
#
#
#
0,1,2,3,4,5,6,7,8,9,*,# : matches the keypad symbols
x
+
: matches any digit (0...9)
: matches 0 or more repetitions of the
: previous expression
[]
: matches any number inside the brackets
: can be used with a "-" to represent a
: range
()
|
: expression grouping
: either or
# If the dialled number doesn't match the dial plan then the call
# is rejected.
sip digit timeout: 3
# Example dial plans
# set the inter-digit timeout in seconds
sip dial plan: "x+#|xx+*" # this is the default dial string, note
# that is must be quoted since it contains
# a '#' character
#sip dial plan: [01]xxx|[2-8]xxxx|91xxxxxxxxxx
# accecpt any 4 digit number beginning
# with a 0 or 1, any 5 digit number
# beginning with a number between 2 and 8
# (inclusive) or a 12 digit number
# beginning with 91
#sip dial plan terminator: 1 # enable sending of the "#" symbol to
# to the proxy in the dial string
#-----------------------------------------------------------------
41-001160-00, Rev 01 Release 2.0
D-37
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
IP Phone Administrator Guide
Sample Configuration Files
# General SIP Settings
# ======================
#sip session timer: 30
# enable support of RFC4028, the default
# value of 0 disables this functionality
#sip transport protocol: 0 # use UDP (1), TCP (2) or both (0) for
# sip messaging
#sip use basic codecs: 1
#sip out-of-band dtmf: 0
# limit codecs to G711 and G729
# turn off support for RFC2833 (on by
# default)
# Global SIP User Settings
# ==========================
#
# Notes:
# These settings are used as the default configuration for the
# hard key lines on the phone. That is:
#
#
#
#
L1 to L4 on the 57i and 57iCT
L1 to L3 on the 53i
# These can be over-ridden on a per-line basis using the per-line
# settings.
#
# See the Admin Guide for a detailed explaination of how this
# works
sip screen name: Joe Smith # the name display on the phone's screen
sip user name: 4256
# the phone number
sip display name: Joseph Smith # the caller name sent out when making
# a call.
sip vmail: *78
# the number to reach voicemail on
D-38
41-001160-00, Rev 01 Release 2.0
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Sample Configuration Files
Sample Configuration Files
sip auth name: jsmith
sip password: 12345
# account used to authenticate user
# password for authentication account
sip mode: 0
# line type:
# 0 - generic,
# 1 - BroadSoft SCA line
# 2 - Nortel line
sip proxy ip: proxy.aastra.com # IP address or FQDN of proxy
sip proxy port: 5060
# port used for SIP messages on the
# proxy. Set to 0 to enable SRV
# lookups
sip registrar ip: aastra.com # IP address or FQDN of registrar
sip registrar port: 0 # as proxy port, but for the registrar
sip registration period: 3600 # registration period in seconds
# Per-line SIP Settings
# =======================
# configure line 3 as the support Broadsoft SCA line
# - the proxy and registrar settings are taken from the global
#
settings above
sip line3 screen name: Support
sip line3 user name: 4000
sip line3 display name: Aastra Support
sip line3 auth name: support
sip line3 password: 54321
sip line3 mode: 1
sip line3 vmail: *78
# configure line 5 (a soft key line) as an ordinary line
# of a test server
41-001160-00, Rev 01 Release 2.0
D-39
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
IP Phone Administrator Guide
Sample Configuration Files
sip line5 screen name: Test 1
sip line5 user name: 5551001
sip line5 display name: Test 1
sip line5 auth name: 5551001
sip line5 password: 5551001
sip line5 mode: 0
sip line5 proxy ip: 10.50.10.102
sip line5 proxy port: 5060
sip line5 registrar ip: 10.50.10.102
sip line5 registrar port: 5060
sip line5 registration period: 60
#-----------------------------------------------------------------
# Programmable Key Settings
# ===========================
# Programmable keys can be set either server wide or unique to each
# phone.
# Setting programmable keys as line/call appearances should be done
# in the "<mac>.cfg" file, since these are unique to each phone.
# Notes:
#
# There are a maximum of 7 programmable keys that can be configured
# on the 53i phone, and only 2 on the phone. These can be
# set up through either of the 2 configuration files, depending on
# whether this is to be server wide ("aastra.cfg") or phone
# specific ("<mac>.cfg"). Each prgkey needs to be numbered from
# 1 - 7, for example "prgkey2 type:
# speeddial". Programmable keys can be set up as speeddials or as
# additional call/line appearances or as feature keys and have a
# type, value and line associated with it as seen here in the
# default programmable settings.
# PRGKEY TYPES: "line", "speeddial", "blf", "list", "dnd"
D-40
41-001160-00, Rev 01 Release 2.0
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Sample Configuration Files
Sample Configuration Files
# PRGKEY VALUE: If prgkey type is a speeddial, any DTMFs (from
#
#
#
#
0 - 9, *, "#") or a comma (,) for 500ms pause and
'E' for On-hook can be set for the value.
If prgkey type is blf it is the extension you want
to monitor.
# PRGKEY LINE: This is line associated with the prgkey. For line
#
#
#
prgkeys the value must be between 4 and 9 (1 - 3
are already hardcoded as the L1, L2 and L3 hard
key line/call appearances).
# Speed Dials
prgkey1 type: speeddial
prgkey1 value: *8
prgkey2 type: speeddial
prgkey2 value: *69
# DND Key
prgkey3 type: dnd
# Line appearance
prgkey4 type: line
prgkey4 line: 5
# blf
prgkey5 type: blf
prgkey5 value: 4559
prgkey5 line: 1
# list
prgkey6 type: list
prgkey7 type: list
41-001160-00, Rev 01 Release 2.0
D-41
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Appendix E
Sample BLF Softkey Settings
About this appendix
Introduction
This appendix provides sample BLF softkey settings for both the Asterisk server
and the BroadSoft BroadWorks server.
Topics
Topic
Page
Sample BLF Softkey Settings
Asterisk BLF
page E-2
page E-2
page E-3
BroadSoft BroadWorks BLF
41-001160-00, Rev 01 Release 2.0
E-1
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
IP Phone Administrator Guide
Sample BLF Softkey Settings
Sample BLF Softkey Settings
Asterisk BLF
The following are sample softkey and programmable key configurations to enable
Asterisk BLF support on Aastra IP phones.
57i and 57i CT Configuration Parameters for Asterisk BLF
softkey1 type: blf
softkey1 value: 9995551212
softkey1 label: John
softkey1 line: 1
53i Configuration Parameters for Asterisk BLF
prgkey1 type: blf
prgkey1 value: 9995551212
prgkey1 label: John
prgkey1 line: 1
prgkey7 type: blf
prgkey7 value: 9995551313
prgkey7 label: Jane
prgkey7 line: 1
E-2
41-001160-00, Rev 01 Release 2.0
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Sample BLF Softkey Settings
Sample BLF Softkey Settings
BroadSoft BroadWorks BLF
The following are sample softkey and programmable key configurations to enable
Broadsoft BroadWorks Busy Lamp Field support on Aastra IP phones.
57i and 57i CT Configuration Parameters for Broadsoft BroadWorks BLF
Note: One softkey must be defined of type “list” for EACH monitored
user. So if there are 2 users being monitored, 2 softkeys must be defined
of type list.
softkey1 type: list
softkey1 label:
softkey1 value:
softkey1 line: 1
softkey2 type: list
softkey2 label:
softkey2 value:
softkey2 line: 1
list uri: sip:[email protected]
53i Configuration Parameters for Broadsoft BroadWorks BLF
Note: One prgkey must be defined of type “list” for each monitored user.
So if there are 2 users being monitored, 2 prgkeys must be defined of type
list.
prgkey6 type: list
prgkey6 label:
prgkey6 value: 1
prgkey7 type: list
prgkey7 label:
prgkey7 value: 1
list uri: sip:[email protected]
41-001160-00, Rev 01 Release 2.0
E-3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Appendix F
Sample Multiple Proxy Server
Configuration
About this appendix
Introduction
This appendix provides a sample multiple proxy server configuration.
This appendix covers the following topics:
Topics
Topic
Page
Multiple Proxy Server Configuration
page F-2
41-001160-00, Rev 01 Release 2.0
F-1
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
IP Phone Administrator Guide
Multiple Proxy Server Configuration
Multiple Proxy Server Configuration
Multiple proxy servers can be configured in the aastra.cfg file or the <mac>.cfg
file. In the example below, the default proxy setting is used if no specific setting is
specified in the line configuration. Line2 and line3 are used for the global proxy
configurations, while line1 and line4 use their own specific settings.
#sip settings
sip proxy ip: #.#.#.#
sip proxy port: 5060
sip registrar ip: #.#.#.#
sip registrar port: 5060
sip registration period:3600
sip nortel nat support:0
sip nortel nat timer:0
sip broadsoft talk:0
sip broadsoft hold:0
sip broadsoft conference:0
sip dial plan: "x+#""
#line info
# Fill in all necessary information below carefully. Populate all
lines even if there is only
# one account
#line 1
sip line1 auth name:
sip line1 password:
sip line1 mode: 0
sip line1 user name:
sip line1 display name:
sip line1 screen name:
sip line1 proxy ip: &.&.&.&
sip line1 proxy port: 5060
sip line1 registrar ip: #.#.#.#
sip line1 registrar port: 5060
sip registration period:600
sip nortel nat support:1
sip nortel nat timer:120
sip broadsoft talk:0
sip broadsoft hold:0
sip broadsoft conference:0
F-2
41-001160-00, Rev 01 Release 2.0
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Sample Multiple Proxy Server Configuration
Multiple Proxy Server Configuration
Continued.....
#line 2
sip line2 auth name:
sip line2 password:
sip line2 mode: 0
sip line2 user name:
sip line2 display name:
sip line2 screen name:
#line 3
sip line3 auth name:
sip line3 password:
sip line3 mode: 0
sip line3 user name:
sip line3 display name:
sip line3 screen name:
#line 4
sip line4 auth name:
sip line4 password:
sip line4 mode: 0
sip line4 user name:
sip line4 display name:
sip line4 screen name:
sip line4 proxy ip: %.%.%.%
sip line4 proxy port: 5060
sip line4 registrar ip: %.%.%.%
sip line4 registrar port: 5060
sip registration period:500
sip nortel nat support:0
sip nortel nat timer:0
sip broadsoft talk:1
sip broadsoft hold:1
sip broadsoft conference:1
41-001160-00, Rev 01 Release 2.0
F-3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Appendix G
Creating an XML Application
About this appendix
Introduction
This appendix provides information required to create an XML application for use
on the IP phones.
Topics
Topic
Page
How to Create an XML Application
XML format
page G-3
page G-3
page G-4
page G-5
page G-6
page G-8
page G-9
page G-13
Creating XML Objects
Creating Custom Softkeys
Text Menu Object (Menu Screens)
Text Screen Object (Text Screens)
Text Screen Format Object (for Text Screens)
UserInput Object (User Input Screens)
UserInput Object for Time and Date Formats (User Input Screens) page G-18
Directory Object (Directory List Screen) (57i only)
Status Message Object (Idle Screen)
page G-21
page G-23
page G-25
page G-27
Execute Commands Object (for executing XML commands)
Dynamic Configuration Object (to push a configuration to the phone)
41-001160-00, Rev 01 Release 2.0
G-1
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
IP Phone Administrator Guide
About this appendix
Topic
Page
XML Image Objects (55i, 57i/57i CT only)
page G-31
page G-25
page G-45
page G-48
Attributes/Options to Use with XML Objects
HTTP Post
XML Schema File
G-2
41-001160-00, Rev 01 Release 2.0
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Creating an XML Application
How to Create an XML Application
How to Create an XML Application
Overview
Sections in this appendix include:
•
•
•
•
•
Creating XML Objects
Creating Custom Softkeys
HTTP Post
XML Schema File
XML format
The text in the Aastra XML objects must be compliant with XML
recommendations and special characters must be escape encoded. The default
character set for the XML API is ISO-8859-1.
Character
Description
Ampersand
Escape Sequence
&
&
"
Quote
"
'
<
’
Apostrophe
Left angle bracket
<
>
Right angle bracket >
41-001160-00, Rev 01 Release 2.0
G-3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
IP Phone Administrator Guide
How to Create an XML Application
Creating XML Objects
•
•
Text Menu Object (Menu Screens)
•
•
•
•
•
Status Message Object (Idle Screen)
Dynamic Configuration Object (to push a configuration to the phone)
•
UI)
•
•
•
•
Scroll Delay Option (configurable via config files and Aastra Web UI only)
Timeout Attribute (configurable via XML objects only)
LockIn Attribute (configurable via XML objects only)
CancelAction Attribute (configurable via XML objects only)
G-4
41-001160-00, Rev 01 Release 2.0
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Creating an XML Application
How to Create an XML Application
Creating Custom Softkeys
Developers can link arbitrary URIs to softkeys in the XML screens and can
invoke softkey behavior to each XML screen type (Text Menu, Text Screen, User
Input, Directory). A developer can define up to six softkeys before the closing tag
of any object on the 57i/57i CT.
The following softkey functionality is available to the developer for the purpose
of reordering or preserving the default functionality of the XML screens. The
"Dial" function is available to screens that allow input. The dial string for the
"Dial" function is taken from the menu items URI on the Menu Screen, and from
the editor field input on the Input Screen.
Existing
Action Keys
Text
Screen
Menu
Screen
Input
Screen
Select
X
X
X
Exit
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
Dial
Submit
Backspace
Nextspace
Dot
ChangeMode
41-001160-00, Rev 01 Release 2.0
G-5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
IP Phone Administrator Guide
How to Create an XML Application
Text Menu Object (Menu Screens)
The Text Menu object allows application developers to create a numerical list of
menu items on the IP phones. The go-to line support, arrow indicator, and scroll
key support are built into these objects, along with the "Select" and "Done" soft
keys. The Text Menu object allows users to navigate the application, by linking
HTTP requests to menu items.
Implementation
The following is how you would implement the Text Menu object.
Note: For all available parameters you can use for the Text Menu object,
and for an explanation of each parameter, see Aastra Telecom’s
"XML Developer’s Guide".
Softkeys:
•
•
1=Select
6=Done
XML Description:
<AastraIPPhoneTextMenu
defaultIndex = "some integer"
destroyOnExit = "yes/no">
<Title>Menu Title</Title>
<MenuItem base ="http://base/">
<Prompt>First Choice</Prompt>
<URI>http://somepage.xml</URI>
<Selection></Selection>
</MenuItem>
<!-Additional Menu Items may be added -->
<!-Additional Softkey Items may be added -->
</AastraIPPhoneTextMenu>
G-6
41-001160-00, Rev 01 Release 2.0
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Creating an XML Application
How to Create an XML Application
XML example:
<AastraIPPhoneTextMenu>
<Title>Phone Services</Title>
<MenuItem base = "http://10.50.10.53/">
<Prompt>Traffic Reports</Prompt>
<URI> rss_to_xml.pl</URI>
</MenuItem>
<MenuItem>
<Prompt>Employee List</Prompt>
<URI>employees.xml</URI>
</MenuItem>
<MenuItem base ="">
<Prompt>Weather</Prompt>
<URI>http://10.50.10.52/weather.pl</URI>
</MenuItem>
</AastraIPPhoneTextMenu>
XML Screen Example:
Phone Services
1.Traffic Reports
2.Employee List
3.Weather
Select
Done
Note: The maximum number of items to be included in a Text Menu
object is 15.
41-001160-00, Rev 01 Release 2.0
G-7
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
IP Phone Administrator Guide
How to Create an XML Application
Text Screen Object (Text Screens)
The screen object can be used to display text. The screen word wraps
appropriately and can scroll to display a message longer then four lines.
Note: For all available parameters you can use for the Text Screen object,
and for an explanation of each parameter, see Aastra Telecom’s
"XML Developer’s Guide".
Implementation
The following is how you would implement the Text Screen object.
Softkey:
•
6=Done
XML Description:
<AastraIPPhoneTextScreen
destroyOnExit = "yes/no">
<Title>Screen Title</Title>
<Text>The screen text goes here</Text>
</AastraIPPhoneTextScreen>
XML example:
<AastraIPPhoneTextScreen>
<Title>Screen Object</Title>
<Text>The screen object can be implemented similar to the
firmware info screen. Note that white space is preserved in XML so
the display should word-wrap appropriately. Only three lines can
display at a time.</Text>
</AastraIPPhoneTextScreen>
G-8
41-001160-00, Rev 01 Release 2.0
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Creating an XML Application
How to Create an XML Application
XML Screen Example:
Screen Object
The screen object can
be implemented
similar to the
Done
Text Screen Format Object (for Text Screens)
The AastraIPPhoneFormattedTextScreen object allows you to specify a format
for the text that displays in the LCD window on the phone. Using this object, you
can specify the following for the text that displays:
•
•
alignment (using the “Align” attribute and specifying right, left, or center )*
height)*
•
display type (using the “Line” or “Scroll” attributes to specify static or
scrolling)*
*See the AastraIPPhoneFormattedTextScreen structure example on page G-10.
The phone’s LCD screen allows up to a total of 5 lines for displaying text. The
formatted text displays in three distinct blocks in the order it is written in the XML
object:
•
The first block displays text at the top of the LCD window. By default, this
text block is static. This block can contain as many lines as the XML object
specifies and can range from zero (0) up to the LCD screen size.
•
The second block displays below the first block. By default, the second text
block displays as scrolling text. This block takes up as many lines as the XML
developer specifies, up to the LCD screen size.
41-001160-00, Rev 01 Release 2.0
G-9
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
IP Phone Administrator Guide
How to Create an XML Application
•
The third block displays below the second block. By default, the third block
displays static text, and takes up whatever lines remain blank on the LCD
screen.
Note: Any of the three blocks can be set as static text or scrolling text but
the text displays on a total of 5 lines only. Any lines that display after line
5 are lost.
Using the AastraIPPhoneFormattedTextScreen object, the display truncates a line
after the last word in that line and continues to wrap the text to the next line.The
phone ignores any lines that display after the 5th line on the LCD screen.
AastraIPPhoneFormattedTextScreen Structure
The AastraIPPhoneFormattedTextScreen object describes the structure of the
XML document that you can use to format the text that displays on the phone’s
LCD screen. The default structure of the AastraIPPhoneFormattedTextScreen
object is:
<AastraIPPhoneFormattedTextScreen>
<Line Size="<normal/double>" Align="<right/left/center>">A line
of static text</Line>
<Scroll Height=n>
<Line Size="<normal/double>" Align="<right/left/center>">
Scrolling text</Line>
<Line>Another line of Scrolling Text</Line>
<Line>Yet another scrolling line</Line>
</Scroll>
<Line>Some static footer text</Line>
</AastraIPPhoneFormattedTextScreen>
Note: The text in bold in the above structure indicate the options you can
use for text size (normal, double), alignment (right, left, center), and
scrolling height (from 1 to 5 lines). Setting a scrolling height less than “1”
automatically sets the scroller height to “1”.
G-10
41-001160-00, Rev 01 Release 2.0
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Creating an XML Application
How to Create an XML Application
XML Example:
The following is an example of using the AastraIPPhoneFormattedTextScreen
object with a static line at the top and bottom blocks and 2 scrolling lines in the
middle block.
<AastraIPPhoneFormattedTextScreen>
<Line Size="double" Align="left">A line of static text</Line>
<Scroll Height=2>
<Line Size="normal" Align="right"> Scrolling text</Line>
<Line>Another line of Scrolling Text</Line>
<Line>Yet another scrolling line</Line>
</Scroll>
<Line>Some static footer text</Line>
</AastraIPPhoneFormattedTextScreen>
XML Screen Examples:
IP Phones 55i, 57i, and 57i CT
A line of static text
This block can scroll
using the down arrow
on the navigation keys.
A line of static text
Done
41-001160-00, Rev 01 Release 2.0
G-11
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
IP Phone Administrator Guide
How to Create an XML Application
IP Phone 53i
A line of static text
This block can scroll
Note: You can view all 5 lines at once on the 55i, 57i and 57i CT IP
phones. You can view only 2 lines at a time (up to 5 lines) on the 53i IP
phone.
G-12
41-001160-00, Rev 01 Release 2.0
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Creating an XML Application
How to Create an XML Application
UserInput Object (User Input Screens)
The UserInput object allows application developers create screens for which the
user can input text where applicable. (Line 1 is a title, Line 4 is an input prompt,
and Line 5 is an input field). The IP phones support three parameter types: IP
Addresses, Numbers (integers), and Strings. Each parameter has a URL tag that is
used to send information back to the HTTP server. The label in the parameter tag
is appended to the address in the URL tag and sent via HTTP GET.
Implementation (IP Addresss)
The following is how you would implement the UserInput object using an IP
Address.
Note: For all available parameters you can use for the UserInput object,
and for an explanation of each parameter, see Aastra Telecom’s
"XML Developer’s Guide".
Softkeys:
•
•
•
•
•
•
1=Backspace,
2=Dot,
3=ChangeCase,
4=Numeric/Alpha,
5=Cancel,
6=Done
41-001160-00, Rev 01 Release 2.0
G-13
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
IP Phone Administrator Guide
How to Create an XML Application
XML Description:
<AastraIPPhoneInputScreen type = "IP/string/number" password =
"yes/no" destroyOnExit = "yes/no">
<!-password attribute is optional and set to "no" by defaultà
<!-destroyOnExit is optional and "no" by default à
<Title>Title string, usually same as menu title</Title>
<Prompt>Enter IP address or host name</Prompt>
<URL>Target receiving the input</URL>
<Parameter>parameter added to URL</Parameter>
<Default />
<SoftKey index = "1">
<Label> Backspace </Label>
<URI>SoftKey:Exit</URI>
</Softkey>
<SoftKey index = "2">
<Label> Dot </Label>
<URI>SoftKey:Exit</URI>
</Softkey>
<SoftKey index = "3">
<Label> ChangeCase </Label>
<URI>SoftKey:Exit</URI>
</Softkey>
<SoftKey index = "4">
<Label> Numeric/Alpha </Label>
<URI>SoftKey:Exit</URI>
</Softkey>
<SoftKey index = "5">
<Label> Cancel </Label>
<URI>SoftKey:Exit</URI>
</Softkey>
<SoftKey index = "6">
<Label> Done </Label>
<URI>SoftKey:Exit</URI>
</Softkey>
</AastraIPPhoneInputScreen>
G-14
41-001160-00, Rev 01 Release 2.0
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Creating an XML Application
How to Create an XML Application
XML Example:
<AastraIPPhoneInputScreen type = "IP">
<Title>Proxy Server</Title>
<Prompt>Server IP:</Prompt>
<URL>http://10.50.10.53/script.pl</URL>
<Parameter>proxy</Parameter>
<Default></Default>
<AastraIPPhoneInputScreen>
XML Screen Example:
Proxy Server
Server IP:
Backspace
Dot
Cancel
Done
41-001160-00, Rev 01 Release 2.0
G-15
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
IP Phone Administrator Guide
How to Create an XML Application
Implementation (Number)
The following is how you would implement the UserInput object using Numbers.
Softkeys:
•
•
•
1=Backspace,
5=Cancel,
6=Done
XML Example:
<AastraIPPhoneInputScreen type = "number">
<Title>Proxy Port</Title>
<Prompt>Port:</Prompt>
<URL>http://10.50.10.53/script.pl</URL>
<Parameter>port</Parameter>
<Default>5060</Default>
<AastraIPPhoneInputScreen>
XML Screen Example:
Proxy Port
Port: 5060
Backspace
Cancel
Done
G-16
41-001160-00, Rev 01 Release 2.0
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Creating an XML Application
How to Create an XML Application
Implementation (String)
The following is how you would implement the UserInput object using Strings in
XML.
Softkeys:
•
•
•
•
•
•
1=Backspace,
2=Dot,
3=Tri-Mode key,
4=Nextspace,
5=Cancel,
6=Done
XML Example:
<AastraIPPhoneInputScreen type = "string" password = "yes">
<Title>SIP Settings</Title>
<Prompt>Enter something</Prompt>
<URL>http://10.50.10.53/script.pl</URL>
<Parameter>passwd</Parameter>
<Default></Default>
<AastraIPPhoneInputScreen>
XML Screen Example::
SIP Settings
Enter Password:
******
Backspace
Dot
ABC
Nextspace
Cancel
Done
Note: In the above example, if the user entered 12345, then the URL sent
back to the server is http://10.50.10.53/script.pl?passwd=12345.
41-001160-00, Rev 01 Release 2.0
G-17
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
IP Phone Administrator Guide
How to Create an XML Application
UserInput Object for Time and Date Formats (User Input Screens)
The AastraIPPhoneInputScreen object allows you to specify US ( (HH:MM:SS
am/pm and MM/DD/YYYY) or International (HH:MM:SS and DD/MM/YYYY)
time/date formats for an XML user input screen on the IP phone.
Note: You use this time/date format in an XML script that displays in an
XML window. This time/date format does NOT affect the time/date
format configured under the Options Menu on the phone.
Using this AastraIPPhoneInputScreen object, you can specify the following
attributes for date/time format to create the user input screen:
•
•
•
•
“timeUS”
“timeInt”
“US Date”
“Int Date”
You can use these XML attributes in an application that requires the user to
specify a time or a date, for example, when scheduling a meeting. The user could
press a softkey that gets the XML script asking you to enter a time/date. This time/
date is then forwarded to a script that schedules the meeting or reports a conflict.
XML Examples:
The following example illustrates the AastraIPPhoneInputScreen object using the
time/date attributes.
United StatesTime
<AastraIPPhoneInputScreen type="timeUS">
<Title>US Time</Title>
<Prompt>Enter Current Time:</Prompt>
<Parameter>Time</Parameter>
</AastraIPPhoneInputScreen>
G-18
41-001160-00, Rev 01 Release 2.0
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Creating an XML Application
How to Create an XML Application
IP Phones 55i, 57i/57i CT
IP Phone 53i
Enter Current Time:
12:00:00am
US Time
Enter Current Time:
12:00:00am
=Enter
=Cancel
Cancel
Done
International Time
<AastraIPPhoneInputScreen type="timeInt">
<Title>Int Time</Title>
<Prompt>Enter Current Time:</Prompt>
<Parameter>Time</Parameter>
<Default>14:23:22</Default>
</AastraIPPhoneInputScreen>
IP Phones 55i, 57i/57i CT
IP Phone 53i
Enter Current Time:
12:23:22
Int Time
Enter Current Time:
14:23:22
=Enter
=Cancel
Cancel
Done
Note: If you don’t specify a time, the XML script uses the following
default values:
- 12:00:00am (US)
- 00:00:00 (International)
41-001160-00, Rev 01 Release 2.0
G-19
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
IP Phone Administrator Guide
How to Create an XML Application
United States Date
<AastraIPPhoneInputScreen type="dateUS">
<Title>US Date</Title>
<Prompt>Enter Birthday:</Prompt>
<Parameter>Date</Parameter>
<Default>12/22/1980</Default>
</AastraIPPhoneInputScreen>
IP Phones 55i, 57i/57i CT
IP Phone 53i
Enter Birthday:
12/22/1980
US Date
Enter Birthday:
12/22/1980
=Enter
=Cancel
Cancel
Done
International Date
<AastraIPPhoneInputScreen type="dateInt">
<Title>Int Date</Title>
<Prompt>Enter Birthday:</Prompt>
<Parameter>Date</Parameter>
</AastraIPPhoneInputScreen>
IP Phones 55i, 57i/57i CT
IP Phone 53i
Enter Birthday:
26/5/2006
Int Date
Enter Birthday:
=Enter
=Cancel
26/5/2006
Cancel
Done
G-20
41-001160-00, Rev 01 Release 2.0
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Creating an XML Application
How to Create an XML Application
Note: If you don’t specify a date, the XML script uses the current date in
the specified format.
Directory Object (Directory List Screen) (57i only)
The Directory object allows you to browse an online directory in real time. It
displays an automatically numbered list of contacts. By selecting a contact with
the cursor, the contact can be dialed directly by pressing the "Dial" softkey or
picking up the receiver. The Directory object has the optional softkeys of
"Previous" and "Next" which can be linked to other XML objects.
Implementation
The following is how you would implement the Directory object in XML.
Note:
1. For all available parameters you can use for the Directory object, and
for an explanation of each parameter, see Aastra Telecom’s
"XML Developer’s Guide".
2. If the URI entry contains a "?" the phone appends an "&" instead.
Softkeys:
•
•
•
•
1=Dial,
6= Done,
2=Previous (optional),
5=Next (optional)
XML Description:
<AastraIPPhoneDirectory destroyOnExit="no" next="uri"
previous="uri">
<!-Attributes are optionalà
<Title>Directory Title</Title>
<Menu Item>
<Prompt>Contact Name</Prompt>
<URI>number</URI>
</Menu Item>
<!-Additional Menu Items may be added -->
</AastraIPPhoneDirectory>
41-001160-00, Rev 01 Release 2.0
G-21
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
IP Phone Administrator Guide
How to Create an XML Application
XML Example:
<AastraIPPhoneDirectory next="more.xml" previous="back.xml">
<Title>My Directory</Title>
<MenuItem>
<Prompt>57i - John Doe 1</Prompt>
<URI> 10.50.10.49</URI>
</MenuItem>
<MenuItem>
<Prompt>53i - John Doe 2</Prompt>
<URI>4326</URI>
</MenuItem>
<MenuItem>
<Prompt>57i CT - John Doe 3</Prompt>
<URI>9982691234</URI>
</MenuItem>
</AastraIPPhoneDirectory
XML Screen Example::
My Directory (1/6)
1. 480i John Doe 1
2. 9133i John Doe 2
3. 480iCT John Doe 3
Dial
Previous
Next
Cancel
Note: The maximum number of items to be included in a Directory
object is 15 per page. In this example, there are six pages.
G-22
41-001160-00, Rev 01 Release 2.0
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Creating an XML Application
How to Create an XML Application
Status Message Object (Idle Screen)
The IP phones support an XML AastraIPPhoneStatus object for displaying
status messages on a single designated line on the phone’s idle screen. The
messages display when the server pushes XML information to the phone.
The 57i/57i CT phones display messages on the second line in the phone window.
(where “No Service” would display if there was no service. If there is no service
on the phone, the “No Service” message overrides the XML object message). The
53i phone displays messages on the first line (overriding the DisplayName). The
phone truncates long messages that are wider then the phone screen.
If the phone receives multiple messages, the first message received displays first
and the remaining messages scroll consecutively one at a time. Messages remain
AastraIPPhoneStatus object feature is always enabled.
Note: You can set the amount of time, in seconds, that a message displays
to the phone before scrolling to the next message. For more information
about this feature, see “Scroll Delay Option (configurable via config files
and Aastra Web UI only)” on page G-41 and
AastraIPPhoneStatus Structure
The AastraIPPhoneStatus object describes the structure of the XML document
that you can use to send status messages to the phone. The basic structure of the
AastraIPPhoneStatus object is:
<AastraIPPhoneStatus>
<Session>My session ID</Session>
<Message index="Msg index">Message</Message>
<! -- Additional status messages may be added under new Message tags-->
<AastraIPPhoneStatus/>
The ”My Session ID” attribute must be unique to the application sending the
XML object to the phone. The application generates the session ID, which could
be a combination of letters and numbers. There is a maximum of one <Session>
tag per PhoneStatus object, so the <Session> tag is optional.
41-001160-00, Rev 01 Release 2.0
G-23
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
IP Phone Administrator Guide
How to Create an XML Application
XML Examples
Example 1: The following is an example of using the AastraIPPhoneStatus
object:
<AastraIPPhoneStatus>
<Session>abc12345</Session>
<Message index="3">Server side call forwarding disabled</Message>
<AastraIPPhoneStatus/>
In this example, the AastraIPPhoneStatus object sends the default behavior with
the status message (i.e., the status message is added to the scroll list).
Example 2: You can also use the AastraIPPhoneStatus object to remove status
messages from the display, by setting an empty tag for the <Message index> tag.
The following example removes the status message that was posted to the phone
in Example 1.
<AastraIPPhoneStatus>
<Session>abc12345</Session>
<Message index="3"/>
<AastraIPPhoneStatus/>
G-24
41-001160-00, Rev 01 Release 2.0
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Creating an XML Application
How to Create an XML Application
Execute Commands Object (for executing XML commands)
An AastraIPPhoneExecute object on the IP phones allows the phone to execute
commands using XML. The phones support the following execute object
commands:
•
Reset - This command waits until the phone is idle and then executes a reset.
You can use this command in an XML script to enable the server to force
phone firmware changes and/or for troubleshooting purposes.
•
NoOp - This command has no affect on the IP phone. It is made up of a blank
URI. You can use this feature when you need to press a key on the phone to
access a feature, and it is not necessary to display anything.
Since the server forces phone firmware changes, the AastraIPPhoneExecute
object was implemented to send the reset command to the phone.
AastraIPPhoneExecute Object Structure
The AastraIPPhoneExecute object describes the structure of the XML document
that you can use to send a command to the phone. It delivers multiple execution
requests to the phone. The basic structure of the AastraIPPhoneExecute object is:
<AastraIPPhoneExecute>
<ExecuteItem URI ="the URL or URI to be executed"/>
<! -- Additional execution items may be added under new ExecuteItem tag-->
</AastraIPPhoneExecute>
Using the Reset Command
The <ExecuteItem URI =""/> tag can be entered with the command the phone
should execute. Upon receiving an AastraIPPhoneExecute object, the phone
begins executing the URL or URI specified.
41-001160-00, Rev 01 Release 2.0
G-25
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
IP Phone Administrator Guide
How to Create an XML Application
The following example shows an AastraIPPhoneExecute object using the Reset
command:
<AastraIPPhoneExecute>
<ExecuteItem URI="Command: Reset"/>
</AastraIPPhoneExecute>
Note: If you specify a command as a URI attribute (instead of a URL),
the keyword "Command" must be prepended in the value of the URI
attribute so that the phone recognizes it as a URI attribute value. If you
enter a URI and leave out the “Command” keyword, the phone interprets
the value in the URI attribute as a URL containing network resources.
The following example shows the AastraIPPhoneExecute object using a URL:
<AastraIPPhoneExecute>
<ExecuteItem URI="http://aastraserver/message.xml"/>
</AastraIPPhoneExecute>
When the phone receives this object, it displays the specified XML URI page.
Using the NoOp Command
You can use the AastraIPPhoneExecute object as an object to create a blank
display (it has no affect on the IP phone). It is made up of a blank URI. You can
use this feature when you need to press a key on the phone to access a feature, and
it is not necessary to display anything. You can also use the
AastraIPPhoneExecute object and this command with other objects in an XML
script.
The following example shows an AastraIPPhoneExecute object using a blank
URI:
<AastraIPPhoneExecute>
<ExecuteItem URI=””/>
<AastraIPPhoneExecute>
G-26
41-001160-00, Rev 01 Release 2.0
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Creating an XML Application
How to Create an XML Application
Dynamic Configuration Object (to push a configuration to the phone)
The IP phones provide an XML feature that allows you to make configuration
changes to the phone that take affect immediately, without having to reboot the
phone. This feature involves creating XML scripts that push the changed
configuration parameter(s) from the server to the IP phones.
You can use the AastraIPPhoneConfiguration object in the XML scripts to
change configuration parameters or configure new parameters. However, since the
IP phone does not save new parameters created in XML scripts to the local.cfg
file, when the phone reboots, it does not save the new parameters on the phone. In
parameters via the user interfaces (Telephone User Interface, Web User Interface,
or configuration files), or reapply the new parameters using the XML scripts after
every boot.
Specific configuration parameters are dynamic on the phone when pushed from
XML scripts on the server. See “Dynamic Configuration Parameters” on page 29
for more information about dynamic configuration parameters.
AastraIPPhoneConfiguration Object Structure
The AastraIPPhoneConfiguration object describes the structure of the XML
document that you can use to push the configuration to the IP phone. The basic
structure of the AastraIPPhoneConfiguration object is:
<AastraIPPhoneConfiguration>
<ConfigureItem>
<Parameter>Parameter name</Parameter>
<Value>Parameter value</Value>
</ConfigureItem>
<ConfigureItem>
<Parameter>Parameter name</Parameter>
<Value>Parameter value</Value>
</ConfigureItem>
.
.
.
<AastraIPPhoneConfiguration>
41-001160-00, Rev 01 Release 2.0
G-27
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
IP Phone Administrator Guide
How to Create an XML Application
Note: You can add more configuration items as applicable. There is a
limit of 5000 bytes (less than 5k) on the size of XML configuration
objects.
XML Example:
The following is an example of an XML configuration script that creates a softkey
you can press on the IP phone to push the configuration from the server to the
phone:
<AastraIPPhoneConfiguration>
<ConfigureItem>
<Parameter>softkey1 label</Parameter>
<Value>John Doe</Value>
</ConfigureItem>
<ConfigureItem>
<Parameter>softkey1 type</Parameter>
<Value>speeddial</Value>
</ConfigureItem>
<ConfigureItem>
<Parameter>softkey1 value</Parameter>
<Value>5551234</Value>
</ConfigureItem>
</AastraIPPhoneConfiguration>
G-28
41-001160-00, Rev 01 Release 2.0
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Creating an XML Application
How to Create an XML Application
Dynamic Configuration Parameters
The following table identifies which configuration parameters change
dynamically when using XML configuration scripts to push the configuration to
the phone.
Dynamic Configuration Parameters
softkeyN type*
softkeyN label*
softkeyN value*
softkeyN line*
softkeyN states*
prgkeyN type*
prgkeyN name*
prgkeyN value*
prgkeyN line*
live dialpad
line7 ring tone
line8 ring tone
line9 ring tone
suppress dtmf playback
redial disabled**
call transfer disabled
conference disabled
directory disabled**
callers list disabled**
options password enabled
time server disabled
time reserved
tone setv
ring tone
audio mode
dst config
language
time server1
ringback timeout
headset tx gain
headset sidetone gain
handset tx gain
handset sidetone gain
handsfree tx gain
line1 ring tone
line2 ring tone
line3 ring tone
line4 ring tone
line5 ring tone
line6 ring tone
dst start hour
time server2
time server3
time format
date format
time zone name
time zone code
time zone minutes
dst minutes
dst start relative date
dst start month
dst start day
dst start week
sip intercom line
sip allow auto answer
dst end relative date
41-001160-00, Rev 01 Release 2.0
G-29
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
IP Phone Administrator Guide
How to Create an XML Application
Dynamic Configuration Parameters
dst end month
sip silence suppression
sip send mac
dst end day
dst end week
sip send line
dst end hour
xml application URI
xml application title
xml beep notification
action uri registered
action uri incoming
action uri outgoing
action uri onhook
action uri offhook
action uri startup
play a ring splash
map redial key to
map conf key to
download protocol
ftp server
tftp server
alternate tftp server
use alternate tftp server
admin password
user password
sip nat ip
sip nat port
sip dial plan
sip dial plan terminator
sip digit timeout
sip blf subscription period
sip registration retry timer
sip forward number
sip forward mode
sip ring number
ftp username
ftp password
sip vmail
http server
sip dtmf method
sip lineN forward number
sip lineN forward mode
sip lineN ring number
sip lineN vmail
http path
directory 1***
directory 2***
directory script
auto resync time
auto resync mode
sip lineN dtmf method
sip intercom type
sip intercom prefix code
sip intercom mute mic
*Changes to subscriptions (BLF or BLA) require a reboot.
**This parameter is dynamic so a user can’t access it or add to it. However, you need to
reboot the phone to clear the list.
*** You need to reboot the phone to download new directories.
G-30
41-001160-00, Rev 01 Release 2.0
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Creating an XML Application
How to Create an XML Application
XML Image Objects (55i, 57i/57i CT only)
The 55i and 57i/57i CT IP phones provide an XML feature that allows you to load
images in XML applications that display to the LCD screen. The following table
describes the three types of image objects that you can use in an XML script:
XML Image Object
Image Type
Description
AastraIPPhoneImageScreen
Standalone Bitmap
Image
Displays a single bitmap image
according to alignment, height, and
width specifications.
AastraIPPhoneImageMenu
Menu Image
Displays a bitmap image as a menu.
Menu selections are linked to keypad
keys (0-9, *, #).
This entire box is
a bitmap image.
AastraIPPhoneTextMenu (Icon Menu)
Icon Menu Image
Displays a small icon before each item
in the menu.
41-001160-00, Rev 01 Release 2.0
G-31
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
IP Phone Administrator Guide
How to Create an XML Application
You can include images with an XML object in two ways:
•
•
Using pixel data stored with specified tags
Using an internal bitmap loaded via a specified URI
Note: The actual resolution of the image on the LCD screen is dependent
on the phone model. The 55i screen has a resolution of 144 x 75 pixels.
The 57i/57i CT screens have a resolution of 144 x 128 pixels. However,
the display of the image is limited to 40 x 144 pixels high.
The following paragraphs describe each of the image objects and how you can use
them in the XML scripts.
AastraIPPhoneImageScreen Object
The AastraIPPhoneImageScreen object displays an image as a single bitmap
image on the LCD screen. You can specify the placement of the image on the
screen by setting the following attributes:
•
•
•
•
verticalAlign
horizontalAlign
height
width
The image is specified as a series of hexadecimal characters. Two hex characters
map to one byte of pixel data, where each bit represents a pixel. The image data
describes the bitmap from left to right and top to bottom. The data is padded on
an 8-bit boundary, so if the height and width do not match the pixel information,
then the image will not display correctly. The character strings map to the middle
and four corners of the screen. If desired, you can specify an integer as an absolute
pixel for customized displays.
Note: A special URI of "Image:Logo" is used to load the current logo
bitmap for the phone (Aastra or branded). In this case, the height and
width can be ignored.
G-32
41-001160-00, Rev 01 Release 2.0
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Creating an XML Application
How to Create an XML Application
XML Example:
The XML script for the AastraIPPhoneImageScreen object is as follows:
<AastraIPPhoneImageScreen>
<ImageverticalAlign ="top,middle,bottom,'pixel'",
horizontalAlign = "left,middle,right,'pixel'"
height="'integer'", width="'integer'">
FF00F800FF00FFFFFFFFFFFF00FF00FF00FFF8F200
</Image>
<!-vertical and horizontal default to "middle" ->
<!-height and width must match the image data ->
</AastraIPPhoneImageScreen>
Note: This object supports the destroyOnExit attribute.
XML Screen Example:
41-001160-00, Rev 01 Release 2.0
G-33
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
IP Phone Administrator Guide
How to Create an XML Application
AastraIPPhoneImageMenu
The AastraIPPhoneImageMenu object allows you to use a bitmap image to
display as a menu. Each menu item is linked to a keypad key (0-9, *, #). You can
use this type of image object when you want to display menu choices as a
non-ASCII character set or with pictures only. You can specify the placement of
the image on the screen by setting the following attributes:
•
•
•
•
verticalAlign
horizontalAlign
height
width
The image is specified as a series of hexadecimal characters. Two hex characters
map to one byte of pixel data, where each bit represents a pixel. The image data
describes the bitmap from left to right and top to bottom. The data is padded on
an 8-bit boundary, so if the height and width do not match the pixel information,
then the image will not display correctly. The character strings map to the middle
and four corners of the screen. If desired, you can specify an integer as an absolute
pixel for customized displays.
XML Example:
The XML script for the AastraIPPhoneImageMenu object is as follows:
<AastraIPPhoneImageMenu>
<ImageverticalAlign ="top,middle,bottom,'pixel'",
horizontalAlign = "left,middle,right,'pixel'"
height="'integer'", width="'integer'">
FF00F800FF00FFFFFFFFFFFF00FF00FF00FFF8F200
</Image>
<!-Base attribute is optional-->
<URIList base = "http://someserver/">
<URI key = "0">link1.php</URI>
<URI key = "1">link2.php</URI>
<URI key = "#">link3.php</URI>
</URIList>
</AastraIPPhoneImageMenu>
G-34
41-001160-00, Rev 01 Release 2.0
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Creating an XML Application
How to Create an XML Application
Each URI is appended to the “base” URI if one exists. The default softkey is a
“Done” key at the bottom right position. It is a parse error if two URIs specify the
same index.
Note: This object supports the destroyOnExit attribute.
XML Screen Example:
This entire box is
a bitmap image.
41-001160-00, Rev 01 Release 2.0
G-35
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
IP Phone Administrator Guide
AastraIPPhoneTextMenu (Icon Menu)
The AastraIPPhoneTextMenu (Icon Menu) object is identical to the “Text Menu
Object (Menu Screens)” described on page 6, except a small icon image appears
after the menu number and before the text item. The Text Menu object allows
application developers to create a numerical list of menu items on the IP phones.
The AastraIPPhoneTextMenu (Icon Menu) object allows users to navigate the
application, by linking HTTP requests and icons to menu items.
XML Example:
The XML script for the AastraIPPhoneTextMenu (Icon Menu) object is as
follows:
<AastraIPPhoneTextMenu>
<Title> Icon Menu </Title>
<MenuItem base = http://someserver/,
icon="1">
<Prompt> Voicemail </Prompt>
<URI>scripts/voicemail.php</URI>
</MenuItem>
<MenuItem icon="2">
<Prompt> Horoscope</Prompt>
<URI> scripts/horoscope.php </URI>
</MenuItem>
<IconList>
<Icon index = "1"> Icon:Envelope </Icon>
<Icon index = "2"> FFFF0000FFFF0000 </Icon>
</AastraIPPhoneTextScreen>
The “icon=1” attribute in the above example tells the phone to display the icon
specified in the IconList called “<Icon index = “1”> Icon:Envelope </Icon>”.
For more information about the “IconList”, see “Using the <IconList>” on
page 37.
G-36
41-001160-00, Rev 01 Release 2.0
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Creating an XML Application
How to Create an XML Application
XML Screen Example:
Using the <IconList>
You can incorporate the use of an <IconList> attribute in the XML script to
define the images you will use with the AastraIPPhoneTextMenu object. After
you define the icons in the <IconList>, you can then call those icons as you need
them throughout the script. This also allows you to assign the icons to softkeys on
the phone.
You can load images in the <IconList> in two ways:
•
By specifying the image after a special prefix called “Icon:”
For example:
<IconList>
<Icon index = “1”> Icon:Envelope </Icon>)
<IconList>
•
By specifying the image in hexidecimal format
For example:
<IconList>
<Icon index = “2”> FF00F3 </Icon>)
<IconList>
41-001160-00, Rev 01 Release 2.0
G-37
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
IP Phone Administrator Guide
How to Create an XML Application
Note: For a list of icons that are internal to the IP phone when specifying
the “Icon:<uri name>”, see the section “IP Phone Internal Icon Images”
on page 39.
You can use one or both ways to load images within the same XML script. The
softkey icons display at the edge of the screen. Any XML object that supports
softkeys can support the optional <IconList> tag.
XML Example:
The following example illustrates the use of the <IconList> attribute to create
images for softkey prompts.
<AastraIPPhoneTextScreen>
<Title> Directory List </Title>
<Text> Welcome to the Directory. </Text>
<SoftKey index = "4" icon="2">
<Label> Listing </Label>
<URI> http://server/page.php </URI>
</SoftKey>
<SoftKey index = "3" icon="1">
<Label> Exit </Label>
<URI> http://server/otherpage.php </URI>
</SoftKey>
<IconList>
<Icon index = "1"> FF00F3 </Icon>
<Icon index = "2"> Icon:ArrowRight </Icon>
</IconList>
</AastraIPPhoneTextScreen>
G-38
41-001160-00, Rev 01 Release 2.0
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Creating an XML Application
How to Create an XML Application
XML Screen Example:
ArrowRight Icon
Exit Icon
IP Phone Internal Icon Images
The IP phones have internal icon images you can use when specifying the
“Icon:<uri name>” attribute in the <IconList>. The following table lists the
internal icons you can specify.
URI Name
Displays this:
PhoneOnHook
PhoneOffHook
PhoneRinging
DND
None
ArrowRight
ArrowLeft
Speaker
41-001160-00, Rev 01 Release 2.0
G-39
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
IP Phone Administrator Guide
How to Create an XML Application
URI Name
Displays this:
ArrowUp
ArrowDown
ArrowsUpandDown
FilledCircle
EmptyCircle
Envelope
Prohibit
Square
Ellipse
TailArrowUp
TailArrowDown
G-40
41-001160-00, Rev 01 Release 2.0
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Creating an XML Application
How to Create an XML Application
Attributes/Options to Use with XML Objects
Beep Attribute
(configurable via XML objects, config files, or Aastra Web UI)
the Status Message object (AastraIPPhoneStatus), the configuration files, or the
Aastra Web UI.
Note: For enabling/disabling a status message beep using the
configuration files and the Aastra Web UI, see Chapter 5, the section,
“Enabling/Disabling a Beep for Status Message Displays” on page 5-119.
When the phone receives a status message, the BEEP notifies the user that the
message is displaying. The following attribute in the AastraIPPhoneStatus object
enables/disables the BEEP from being heard:
< AastraIPPhoneStatus Beep="yes|no">
(case sensitive)
This attribute is optional. If notification is required, the attribute must be in the
ROOT. If the BEEP attribute is set to "yes" (i.e. Beep="yes") then it is an
indication to the phone to sound a beep when it receives the object. If the Beep
attribute is set to "no" (i.e. Beep="no") or not present, then the default behavior is
no beep is heard when the object arrives to the phone.
Note: The value set in the configuration files and Aastra Web UI override
the attribute you specify for the AastraIPPhoneStatus object.
Scroll Delay Option
(configurable via config files and Aastra Web UI only)
The IP phones support a scroll delay option that allows you to set the time delay,
time is 5 seconds for each message to display before scrolling to the next message.
You can configure this option via the configuration files or the Aastra Web UI.
Changes are dynamic and apply to the phone immediately.
Note: For more information about setting the scroll delay option, see
Chapter 5, the section, “Scroll Delay Option for Status Messages” on
page 5-120.
41-001160-00, Rev 01 Release 2.0
G-41
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
IP Phone Administrator Guide
How to Create an XML Application
Timeout Attribute
(configurable via XML objects only)
The XML “Timeout” attribute allows you to specify a timeout value for the LCD
screen display. You must use the “Timeout” aattribute in the ROOT. When the
phone receives an XML object with this attribute, it overrides the default 45
second timeout specified for custom applications. Setting the “Timeout” attribute
to zero (0) disables this feature.
XML Example:
The following example illustrates the use of the “Timeout” attribute with the
AastraIPPhoneFormattedTextScreen object. The result would cause the LCD
screen to timeout in 30 seconds.
<xs:element name="AastraIPPhoneFormattedTextScreen">
<xs:attribute name="Beep" default="no">
<xs:simpleType>
<xs:restriction base="xs:string>
<xs:pattern value="yes|no"/>
</xs:restriction>
</xs:simpleType>
</xs:attribute>
<xs:attribute name="DestroyOnExit" default="no">
<xs:simpleType>
<xs:restriction base="xs:string>
<xs:pattern value="yes|no"/>
</xs:restriction>
</xs:simpleType>
</xs:attribute>
<xs:AastraIPPhoneFormattedTextScreen Timeout= “30" default = “45”>
<xs:simpleType>
<xs:restriction base="xs:number/>
</xs:simpleType>
</xs:attribute>
G-42
41-001160-00, Rev 01 Release 2.0
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Creating an XML Application
How to Create an XML Application
LockIn Attribute
(configurable via XML objects only)
The XML “LockIn” attribute allows you to specify whether or not the
information on the LCD screen stays displayed when other events occur (such as
pressing buttons on the keypad).
Note: This attribute is ignored during incoming calls. If this attribute is
set, and the phone receives an incoming call, the LCD screen exits the
XML information and displays the information about the incoming call.
You must use the “LockIn” aattribute in the ROOT. The settings for the LockIn
attribute are “Yes” for enabled, and “No” for disabled.
XML Example:
The following example illustrates the use of the “LockIn” attribute with the
AastraIPPhoneFormattedTextScreen object. The result would cause the LCD
screen to lock in the display of the XML information even if other events occur
(except for an incoming call).
<xs:element name="AastraIPPhoneFormattedTextScreen">
<xs:attribute name="Beep" default="no">
<xs:simpleType>
<xs:restriction base="xs:string>
<xs:pattern value="yes|no"/>
</xs:restriction>
</xs:simpleType>
</xs:attribute>
<xs:attribute name="DestroyOnExit" default="no">
<xs:simpleType>
<xs:restriction base="xs:string>
<xs:pattern value="yes|no"/>
</xs:restriction>
</xs:simpleType>
</xs:attribute>
<xs:AastraIPPhoneFormattedTextScreen LockIn= “yes” default="no">
<xs:simpleType>
<xs:restriction base="xs:string>
<xs:pattern value="yes|no"/>
</xs:restriction>
</xs:simpleType>
</xs:attribute>
41-001160-00, Rev 01 Release 2.0
G-43
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
IP Phone Administrator Guide
How to Create an XML Application
CancelAction Attribute
(configurable via XML objects only)
The XML “cancelAction” attribute allows you to specify a URI that a GET is
executed on when the user presses the default CANCEL key.
Note: The URI must be fully qualified.
You can add this optional feature at the end of any of the XML objects. The
format is:
<Hardkey action="Cancel">
<Label>Label to Display</Label>
<URI>URI to Get</Label>
</Hardkey>
XML Example:
The following illustrates the AastraIPPhoneTextScreen object using the “Cancel”
attribute:
<AastraIPPhoneTextScreen cancelAction=”http://10.50.10.117/
ft.xml”>
<Title>Test</Title>
<Text>This is a test of the cancel action</Text>
</AastraIPPhoneTextScreen>
When this XML script is sent to the phone, and the user presses the default
CANCEL key, the script executes a GET on http://10.50.10.117/ft.xml.
Note: If the “cancelAction” attribute was not used in the above script,
then pressing the CANCEL key would simply cancel the current screen.
G-44
41-001160-00, Rev 01 Release 2.0
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Creating an XML Application
How to Create an XML Application
HTTP Post
In addition to initiating a request to an XML application from the Services menu,
an HTTP server can push an XML object to the phone via HTTP Post. The phone
parses this object immediately upon receipt and displays the information to the
screen.
The HTTP post packet must contain an "xml=" line in the message body. The
string to parse is located after the equals sign in the message. HTML forms that
post objects to the phone must use a field named "xml" to send their data. See the
following examples (Example 1 and Example 2) for a sample HTTP post packet
and php source code.
Example 1:
POST / HTTP/1.1
Accept: image/gif, image/x-xbitmap, image/jpeg, image/pjpeg,
application/vnd.ms-powerpoint,
application/vnd.ms-excel, application/msword,
application/x-shockwave-flash, */*
Referer: http://10.50.10.53
Accept-Language: en-us..Content-Type: application/
x-www-form-urlencoded
Accept-Encoding: gzip, deflate..User-Agent: Mozilla/4.0
(compatible;MSIE 6.0;
Windows NT 5.0; .NET CLR 1.1.4322)
Host: 10.50.10.49
Content-Length: 194..Connection: Keep-Alive
Cache-Control: no-cache..Authorization: Basic YWRtaW46MjIyMjI=
xml=%3CAastraIPPhoneTextScreen%3E%
%3CTitle%3E57i+Tester%3C%2FTitle%3E
%3CText%3EMessage+to+go+on+phone.++Limit+to+512+bytes.%3C%2FText%3E
%2FAastraIPPhoneTextScreen%3E%
Note: The XML object cannot be larger than 2150 bytes. The phone
denies any posts larger than this limit.
41-001160-00, Rev 01 Release 2.0
G-45
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
IP Phone Administrator Guide
How to Create an XML Application
Example 2:
Below is a sample php source code which sends an XML object to an Aastra
phone.
<?php
#
function push2phone($server,$phone,$data)
{
# url-encode the xml object
$xml = "xml=".urlencode($data);
$post = "POST / HTTP/1.1\r\n";
$post .= "Host: $phone\r\n";
$post .= "Referer: $server\r\n";
$post .= "Connection: Keep-Alive\r\n";
$post .= "Content-Type: application/x-www-form-urlencoded\r\n";
$post .= "Content-Length: ".strlen($xml)."\r\n\r\n";
$fp = @fsockopen ( $phone, 80, $errno, $errstr, 5);
if($fp)
{
@fputs($fp, $post.$xml);
flush();
fclose($fp);
}
}
##############################
$xml = "<AastraIPPhoneTextScreen>\n";
$xml .= "<Title>Push test</Title>\n";
$xml .= "<Text>This is a test for pushing a screen to a phone </
Text>\n";
$xml .= "</AastraIPPhoneTextScreen>\n";
push2phone("172.16.96.63',"172.16.96.75",$xml);
?>
G-46
41-001160-00, Rev 01 Release 2.0
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Creating an XML Application
How to Create an XML Application
HTTP Refresh Header
You can use an HTTP refresh header with the XML screen objects on the IP
phones. This feature provides the following:
•
All current XML screen objects have the ability to be refreshed by adding a
Refresh and URL setting to the HTTP headers. (see Refresh setting format
below)
•
The Refresh setting is set by the XML application and it is up to the
application to decide which objects it wants to refresh.
Note: This HTTP refresh header feature only applies to objects that
display to the screen.
The Refresh setting must be included in the HTTP header. The XML application
decides which objects it wants to use with this setting. The phone recognizes this
setting when parsing the HTTP header. If the setting is present, then it passes
along the refresh timeout and the URL to the ParserData object, which all XML
screen objects inherit from. The ParserData class also has a timer, which must be
set to expire at the next refresh time. When the timer expires (time to refresh the
screen), the phone requests the URL again and displays the refreshed screen.
Refresh Setting Format
The following is the Refresh setting format for the HTTP header:
Refresh: <timeout>; URL=<page to load>
The following example is a Refresh setting for use in an HTTP header:
Refresh: 3; URL=http://10.50.10.140/cgi-bin/update.xml
Note: You must use the Refresh and URL parameters in order for this
feature to work in the HTTP header.
41-001160-00, Rev 01 Release 2.0
G-47
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
IP Phone Administrator Guide
How to Create an XML Application
HTTP Language Header
You can use an HTTP language header with the XML screen objects on the IP
phones. By including the language information in the HTTP header, the HTTP
GET includes the phone model, the firmware and the MAC address of the phone.
When the user selects a language on the phone, the selected language is sent to the
XML application and the application displays to the screen in that language.
Note: This HTTP language header feature only applies to objects that
display to the screen.
XML Schema File
After creating an XML application for your IP phone, you can validate the XML
objects using the Schema file provided in this section. This helps you find any
parsing errors that may exist, and verify that your XML objects conform to the
Aastra API.
can perform validation using the schema file.
XML Schema
<?xml version="1.0" encoding="ISO-8859-1" ?>
<xs:schema xmlns:xs="http://www.w3.org/2001/XMLSchema">
<xs:element name="AastraIPPhoneTextScreen">
<xs:complexType>
<xs:sequence>
<xs:element name="Title" type="xs:string" />
<xs:element name="Text">
<xs:simpleType>
<xs:restriction base="xs:string">
<xs:minLength value="1" />
<xs:maxLength value="1000" />
</xs:restriction>
</xs:simpleType>
G-48
41-001160-00, Rev 01 Release 2.0
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Creating an XML Application
How to Create an XML Application
</xs:element>
</xs:sequence>
<xs:AastraIPPhoneTextScreen LockIn="yes" default="no">
<xs:simpleType>
<xs:restriction base="xs:string>
<xs:pattern value="yes|no"/>
</xs:restriction>
</xs:simpleType>
</xs:attribute>
<xs:AastraIPPhoneTextScreen Timeout="30" default="45">
<xs:simpleType>
</xs:complexType>
</xs:element>
<xs:element name="AastraIPPhoneTextMenu">
<xs:complexType>
<xs:sequence>
<xs:element name="Title" type="xs:string" />
<xs:element name="MenuItem" minOccurs="1" maxOccurs="15">
<xs:complexType>
<xs:sequence>
<xs:element name="Prompt" type="xs:string" />
<xs:element name="URI" type="xs:string" />
</xs:sequence>
<xs:attribute name="base" type="xs:string" />
</xs:complexType>
</xs:element>
</xs:sequence>
<xs:attribute name="destroyOnExit" default="no">
<xs:simpleType>
<xs:restriction base="xs:string">
<xs:pattern value="yes|no" />
</xs:restriction>
</xs:simpleType>
</xs:attribute>
</xs:complexType>
</xs:element>
<xs:element name="AastraIPPhoneInputScreen">
<xs:complexType>
41-001160-00, Rev 01 Release 2.0
G-49
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
IP Phone Administrator Guide
How to Create an XML Application
<xs:sequence>
<xs:element name="Title" />
<xs:element name="Prompt" />
<xs:element name="URL" />
<xs:element name="Parameter" />
<xs:element name="Default" />
</xs:sequence>
<xs:attribute name="type">
<xs:simpleType>
<xs:restriction base="xs:string">
<xs:pattern value="IP|string|number" />
</xs:restriction>
</xs:simpleType>
</xs:attribute>
<xs:attribute name="password" default="no">
<xs:simpleType>
<xs:restriction base="xs:string">
<xs:pattern value="yes|no" />
</xs:restriction>
</xs:simpleType>
</xs:attribute>
<xs:attribute name="destroyOnExit" default="no">
<xs:simpleType>
<xs:restriction base="xs:string">
<xs:pattern value="yes|no" />
</xs:restriction>
</xs:simpleType>
</xs:attribute>
</xs:complexType>
</xs:element>
<xs:element name="AastraIPPhoneDirectory">
<xs:complexType>
<xs:sequence>
<xs:element name="Title" type="xs:string" />
<xs:element name="MenuItem" minOccurs="1" maxOccurs="15">
<xs:complexType>
<xs:sequence>
<xs:element name="Prompt" type="xs:string" />
<xs:element name="URI" type="xs:string" />
G-50
41-001160-00, Rev 01 Release 2.0
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Creating an XML Application
How to Create an XML Application
</xs:sequence>
</xs:complexType>
</xs:element>
</xs:sequence>
<xs:attribute name="destroyOnExit" default="no">
<xs:simpleType>
<xs:restriction base="xs:string">
<xs:pattern value="yes|no" />
</xs:restriction>
</xs:simpleType>
</xs:attribute>
<xs:attribute name="next" type="xs:string" />
<xs:attribute name="previous" type="xs:string" />
</xs:complexType>
</xs:element>
</xs:schema>
41-001160-00, Rev 01 Release 2.0
G-51
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Limited Warranty
Aastra Telecom warrants this product against defects and malfunctions during a
one (1) year period from the date of original purchase. If there is a defect or
malfunction, Aastra Telecom shall, at its option, and as the exclusive remedy,
either repair or replace the telephone set at no charge, if returned within the
warranty period.
If replacement parts are used in making repairs, these parts may be refurbished, or
may contain refurbished materials. If it is necessary to replace the telephone set, it
may be replaced with a refurbished telephone of the same design and color. If it
should become necessary to repair or replace a defective or malfunctioning
telephone set under this warranty, the provisions of this warranty shall apply to the
repaired or replaced telephone set until the expiration of ninety (90) days from the
date of pick up, or the date of shipment to you, of the repaired or replacement set,
or until the end of the original warranty period, whichever is later. Proof of the
original purchase date is to be provided with all telephone sets returned for
warranty repairs.
Exclusions
Aastra Telecom does not warrant its telephone sets to be compatible with the
equipment of any particular telephone company. This warranty does not extend to
damage to products resulting from improper installation or operation, alteration,
accident, neglect, abuse, misuse, fire or natural causes such as storms or floods,
after the telephone is in your possession.
Aastra Telecom shall not be liable for any incidental or consequential damages,
including, but not limited to, loss, damage or expense directly or indirectly arising
from the customers use of or inability to use this telephone, either separately or in
combination with other equipment. This paragraph, however, shall not apply to
consequential damages for injury to the person in the case of telephones used or
bought for use primarily for personal, family or household purposes.
This warranty sets forth the entire liability and obligations of Aastra Telecom with
respect to breach of warranty, and the warranties set forth or limited herein are the
sole warranties and are in lieu of all other warranties, expressed or implied,
including warranties or fitness for particular purpose and merchantability.
41-001160-00, Rev 01 Release 2.0
-1
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
IP Phone Administrator Guide
Warranty Repair Services
Should the set fail during the warranty period:
In North America, please call 1-800-574-1611 for further information.
Outside North America, contact your sales representative for return instructions.
You will be responsible for shipping charges, if any. When you return this
telephone for warranty service, you must present proof of purchase.
After Warranty Service
Aastra Telecom offers ongoing repair and support for this product. This service
provides repair or replacement of your Aastra Telecom product, at Aastra
Telecom's option, for a fixed charge. You are responsible for all shipping charges.
For further information and shipping instructions:
In North America, contact our service information number: 1-800-574-1611.
Outside North America, contact your sales representative.
Repairs to this product may be made only by the manufacturer and its authorized
agents, or by others who are legally authorized. This restriction applies during and
after the warranty period. Unauthorized repair will void the warranty.
-2
41-001160-00, Rev 01 Release 2.0
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Index
A
C
Aastra Web UI
advanced settings description 13
.
call forwarding 90
.
operation description 12
status description 12
administrator options 1
auto-answer 142
.
configuring 92
.
.
.
.
enabling/disabling 91
.
.
call waiting tone
.
configuring 162
.
.
call waiting tones 157
.
.
Callers List 23
callers list
.
about 142
.
auto-resync
downloading to phone 100
enabling/disabling 98
overview 96
using on phone 98
Codecs 56
.
mode 24
.
.
time 24
.
.
.
B
.
customized preference list of 58
.
BLF
configuring 44
directed call pickup 50
on Asterisk 43
on BroadSoft 43
overview 41
setting 41
subscription period 48
subscription period, configuring 48
.
conference key
enabling/disabling 18
.
.
.
.
.
configuration
.
file precedence 8
.
.
methods for performing 8
.
.
.
.
configuration files
.
installing 9
using 5
configuration server 13
auto-resync mode 24
auto-resync time 24
configuring 13
download protocol 23
FTP Server 23
HTTP Server 23
TFTP Server 23
.
blf key 22
.
.
blf list key 22
.
.
BLF List,setting 42
BLF subscription period 48
Bridged Line Appearance (BLA)
about BLA 67
configuring 68
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
41-001160-00, Rev 01 Release 2.0
Index-1
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
.
E
.
emergency dial plan, defining 12
.
empty key 23
encryption
.
D
DHCP 4
configuring 5
not using 4
using 4
dial plan
.
methods for 2
overview 2
procedure for 3
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
configuring 140
.
dial plan terminator
F
overview 139
.
dial plan, emergency 12
dial plans
.
factory default settings 7
feature keys 21
configuring 31
feature keys, configuring 33
.
.
overview 137
dial tones, stuttered
about 160
configuring 160
DiffServ QoS 32
Directed call pickup
configuring 48, 52
description of 50
.
.
.
.
.
.
firmware
.
description of 7
installation considerations 4
installation methods 4
installing 9
firmware updates 25
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
Directory List 23
directory list
.
.
download behavior 108
overview 103
using 109
DND
configuring 65
overview 65
dnd key 22
.
flash key 22
.
.
.
H
.
.
hard keys
.
enabling/disabling 18
.
HTTP and HTTPS support 7
.
.
HTTPS
.
client functions 8
client/server configuration 24
security method for 20, 21
server functions 8
using via Aastra Web UI 9
.
.
.
DSCP 14
.
, 33
.
.
.
.
DTMF
.
out-of-band 59
DTMF digits
.
configuring display of 39
displaying 39
DTMF playback, configuring suppression for 37
.
.
.
DTMF, suppressing playback 37
.
Index-2
41-001160-00, Rev 01 Release 2.0
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
network parameters 5
network settings, advanced 13
blocking XML HTTP POSTs 14
HTTPS Client Method 14
HTTPS server redirect 14
NAT IP 13
NAT RTP port 13
NAT SIP port 13
Nortel NAT timer 13
Nortel NAT traversal 13
network settings, basic 12, 4
DHCP 12
.
I
.
, 18
.
Installation Guide, for IP phone xiv
.
.
.
intercom feature
.
configuring 143
incoming calls 143
outgoing calls 142
.
.
.
.
.
.
IP phone UI 2
.
.
.
L
.
.
language
.
.
overview 164
language pack settings 87
language settings 86
last call return 23
last call return (lcr)
configuring 86
how it works 86
lcr (last call return) 23
line key 22
line settings 20
locking keys, on the IP phone 35
locking keys, procedures 36
.
.
.
Ethernet Port 0 13
Ethernet Port 1 13
.
.
.
.
Gateway 12
IP Address 12
primary DNS 13
secondary DNS 13
Subnet Mask 12
network settings, configuring 7
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
Nortel Proxy 19
.
.
.
O
.
.
operational features 3
operational features, advanced 2
configuring line number 3
configuring MAC address 3
configuring message sequence for blind transfer 5
options
via Aastra Web UI 4
via Configuration Files 4
via IP Phone UI 3
.
.
.
.
locking/unlocking the phone 9
.
.
.
M
.
missed calls indicator
.
accessing and clearing 102
enabling/disabling 101
overview 101
.
.
.
.
P
N
parameters
53i and 55i programmable key 117
55i, 57i, 57i CT softkeys 110
Aastra Web UI 10
Action URIs 74
advanced SIP 58
audio transmit and receive adjustment settings 101
auto-answer settings 98
.
NAT
configuring 20
configuring NAT address and port 22
Nortel Networks 20
overview 18
router configuration 19
network configuration 4
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
41-001160-00, Rev 01 Release 2.0
Index-3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
BLF subscription period 105
blind transfer setting 135
boot sequence recover mode 136
call forward settings 69
Callers List settings 69
configuration server 11
dial plan 37
directed call pickup 104
directory settings 68
DSCP 27
DTMF digits 97
DTMF per-line settings 65
emergency dial plan 9
global ring tone settings 77
global SIP 40
HTTPS client and server settings 20
Intercom settings 98
language 86
language pack 87
MAC Address/Line Number 134
Missed Calls Indicator settings 70
NAT 18
password 8
per-line ring tone settings 78
per-line SIP 48
priority alert settings 80
RTP, Codec, DTMF global settings 63
silence suppression settings 66
SIP registration retry timer 61
softkeys, programmable keys, feature keys 108
stuttered dial tone setting 79
Suppress DTMF Playback 96
time server 28
ToS 27
updating caller ID 136
UPnP 22
VLAN 24
voicemail 67
parameters, list of configurable 5
key settings 108
network settings 37
time server settings 28
parameters, setting in configuration files 4
.
configuring a static configuration 75
configuring programmable configuration using
config files 78
configuring programmable configuration using Web
UI 79
programmable configuration of 76
static configuration of 74
using on the IP phone 85
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
password, resetting user’s 11
passwords
.
.
.
for a user 6
.
.
for an administrator 8
.
.
Phone Status options
.
Factory Default 7
Firmware Version 7
Network Status 7
Restart Phone 7
phone status settings 6
pickup key 22
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
Preferences, general 10
.
.
priority alerting
.
about 153
configuring 158
Programmable key settings
53i, 55i 117
programmable keys 21
configuring 28
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
Q
.
.
QoS 32
.
.
.
R
.
.
redial key
.
enabling/disabling 18
.
mapping as speeddial 19
.
.
repair 2
.
.
.
requirements, IP phone 5
.
.
restarting IP phone 7
.
.
ring tone
park key 22
park/pickup
.
patterns used for 154
ring tone sets 150
configuring 151
.
.
about parked/pickup calls 73
.
.
Index-4
41-001160-00, Rev 01 Release 2.0
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
ring tones 148
configuring 151
RTP
configuring 56
silenace suppression 59
RTP port 56
RTP settings 19
Basic Codecs 19
customizing Codec preference list 19
DTMF method 19
silence suppression 19
.
SIP settings, network
.
backup proxy port 16
backup proxy server 16
.
.
backup registrar 17
backup registrar port 17
outbound proxy port 17
proxy port 16
proxy server 16
registrar 17
registrar port 17
registration period 17
Softkey settings 108
softkeys 21
configuring 28
Softkeys and Programmable Keys
locking 36, 131
softkeys, state-based 24
speeddial key 22
sprecode key 22
.
.
, 60
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
S
.
SBG and ALG proxy 19
.
.
.
scrolling, status message 120
.
, 41
.
.
silence suppression 59
.
.
SIP
.
advanced settings 53
configuring 47
overview of 43
.
.
SRV lookup, configuring 46
status message beep
.
.
parameter precedence 45
.
.
SIP Setting options
.
display name 15
user name 15
SIP settings, advanced 17
BLF subscription period 19
MWI subscription 17, 18
registration renewal timer 19
registration retry timer 18
Send Line Number 18
Send MAC Address 18
session timer 18
timer 1, 2 18
transaction timer 18
SIP settings, basic 15
authentication name 15
BLA number 16
calller ID 15
line mode 16
password 16
phone number 15
screen name 15
.
.
.
.
T
.
.
.
time servers, configuring 41
ToS 32
ToS, DSCP 14
troubleshooting 2
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
solutions to common problems 8
.
.
Tx/Rx adjustments
.
about 146
.
.
configuring 147
.
.
.
U
.
.
upgrading, firmware 2
UPnP
.
.
.
configuring 29
description of 28
User Guide, for IP phone xiv
.
, 22
.
.
.
.
.
41-001160-00, Rev 01 Release 2.0
Index-5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
V
VLAN
configuring 31
DSCP Range 33
priority mapping 33
voicemail
configuring 113
overview 113
using 115
.
.
.
.
.
.
W
warranty 1
.
warranty exclusions 1
.
X
XML
.
configuring 122
configuring on IP phone 121
customized services 116
overview 116
push requests 121
using on phone 126
xml key 22
XML push server list 24
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
Index-6
41-001160-00, Rev 01 Release 2.0
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
SIP IP Phone Administrator Guide
Models 53i, 55i, 57i, and 57i CT
© 2007 Aastra Telecom Inc.
If you’ve read this owner’s manual and consulted the Troubleshooting section and
still have problems, please visit our website at www.aastra.com or call 1-800-574-1611
for technical assistance.
41-001160-00 Rev 01
Release 2.0
January 2007
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
|